Nissan - Sentra - Workshop Manual - 1988 - 1988

Page 1113 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 3453 Inspection Procedure Page 4817 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Engine - Block Heater Precaution Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Block Heater Precaution Models: All Models Section: Engine Mechanical Classification: EM88-004 Bulletin No.: TS88-025 Date: February 22, 1988 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER APPLIED MODELS: All models SERVICE INFORMATION Engine antifreeze in more than 50% concentration has been found to adversely affect the life and performance of the engine block heater. High phosphate content in the antifreeze forms a scale around the heating element of the block heater, causing the temperature to rise, with subsequent failure of the seals. Therefore, for best results it is recommended that you use a concentration no greater than 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Page 3238 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 786 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 1111 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2635 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection (CHECK ENGINE LIGHT ITEM) Wiring Diagram The following is necessary to perform this inspection. 1. Pull out E.C.U. from under the passenger seat. 2. Warm up engine sufficiently. Page 3965 * The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. * As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. * Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. NISSAN SERVICE PROCEDURE: Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062 (BR92-004) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 3205 Fig. 6 Idle Speed Control Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 1689 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Three Stage Converter The three-way catalytic converter utilizes a catalyst to accelerate the recombustion of HC and CO and a catalyst to reduce NOx in the exhaust gas, changing them into harmless CO2, H2O, and N3. In order to maintain mixture ratios at the ``stoichiometric'' point, the point at which the converter works most efficiently, a mixture ratio feedback system is employed. In this system, an exhaust gas sensor monitors oxygen content in the exhaust gasses and signals the fuel system to alter the air/fuel mixture to maintain the ``stoichiometric'' level. Locations A/C Relay: Locations A/C Components. Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 634 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3405 Distributor Cap: Testing and Inspection Distributor Cap 1. Remove the screws securing the cap to the distributor. 2. Remove the ignition wires from the cap. 3. Inspect the cap for cracks or damage due to heat or arcing. 4. Inspect the terminals inside the cap for excessive corrosion and damage. 5. Inspect the ignition wire terminals for excessive corrosion. If the corrosion cannot be removed with reasonable measures, replace the cap. Replace the cap if it fails the above tests. Page 2670 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4818 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: Customer Interest Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 1477 Page 2614 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 5374 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Page 5331 12. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed as follows: a. Working from the trunk, feed the belt male end up through the slot in the parcel shelf support. b. Install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness into the mounting hole just above the rear wheelhouse. Make sure the tang is in its slot to keep the retractor unit from rotating on the mounting bolt. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). c. Bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear pillar where the 1" hole was drilled. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). d. Bolt floor anchor into position and torque to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65- 4.65 kg/m). 13. Reinstall rear parcel shelf. 14. Check retro-fit belts for smooth operation. 15. Reinstall rear high mount stop light and speakers, if equipped. 16. Reinstall rear seat. 200SX Hatchback 1. Remove rear seat cushion and back. 2. Remove seat hinges. 3. Remove original rear belt retractor units. 4. Loosen front seat belt access finisher, then pull back front wheelhouse trim. Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Exhaust Pipe: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Classification: EL93-028 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-161 Models: All Models Date: November 5, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Electronic control units (ECU's) control the operation of numerous electrical systems and components on Nissan vehicles. The ECU's do this by either controlling the supply voltage or ground path of an electrical component. The following is an explanation of how these systems work and what precautions should be taken while performing diagnostic procedures. Systems controlled by electronic control units have three (3) basic requirements, Inputs, Controller Logic and Outputs. Inputs Sensors and switches provide electrical signals to the control unit. These signals are provided to the ECU to inform it of various vehicle operating conditions. The electrical inputs can be either analog or digital signals. However, all of the signals are converted to digital signals before the ECU can process the information. Control Logic The ECU uses the electrical input signals to determine what the system should do. This decision may be based on a few or many inputs. After processing the information the ECU will provide a signal (output) to various electrical components. Outputs The signal that the ECU puts out to an electrical component (actuator) is called the output. These output signals are what operate and control the system. Digital Input Signals Page 2980 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3578 Page 3047 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2510 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 497 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Page 4024 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Power Rack & Pinion Steering Gear: Service and Repair Power Rack & Pinion Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheels. 2. Disconnect power steering hose clamp, then the hose at steering gear and drain fluid into a suitable container. 3. Disconnect side rod studs from steering knuckles. 4. On Pulsar and Sentra models, support transaxle with a suitable jack, then remove exhaust pipe and rear engine mounts, if necessary. 5. On all models, remove bolt securing lower joint to steering gear pinion and remove lower joint from pinion. 6. Remove steering gear attaching bolts and, on 1984-86 Stanza models, the cylinder tubes. 7. Remove steering gear and linkage assembly from vehicle. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Overhaul Fig. 28 Rack & pinion type power steering gear disassembled. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra DISASSEMBLY Refer to Fig. 28 for power steering gear disassembly, noting the following: 1. Remove center bushing and rack oil seal using a 19 mm socket and extension bar. Use caution not to damage inner surfaces of pinion housing. 2. Thoroughly clean all parts in suitable cleaning solvent and blow dry with compressed air. 3. Discard all O-rings and oil seals upon removal. INSPECTION Tie Rod Inner & Outer Sockets 1. Check ball joint swinging force. Swinging force should be 1-20 lbs. on outer ball joint or .37-28 lbs. on inner ball joint. Page 3697 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type API GL-4 Fluid Viscosity SAE 75w-90 Page 4975 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Page 3363 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2587 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Seats - Care of Leather Trim Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Care of Leather Trim Models All Models Section Body & Frame Classification BF91-014 Bulletin No. NTB91-051 Date May 23, 1991 CARE OF LEATHER TRIM APPLIED MODELS: All Models Equipped With Leather Trim SERVICE INFORMATION: Nissan currently uses Cow Hide on all vehicles equipped with Leather Interior Trim (excluding certain 1988 Maximas which were equipped with Suede Seats). This bulletin refers only to those vehicles equipped with Cow Hide Leather Interior Trim. Suede seat covers are made of Pig Skin and should be cared for according to the instructions provided in the U11 Maxima Seat Care Kit (P/N 999M1-U8000). Leather is typically used on seat surfaces, trim pieces, steering wheels, and shift knobs in Nissan Vehicles. Maintaining a high quality appearance is best achieved by using the procedures indicated below. 1. Occasionally, loose dust should be removed from the interior trim and seat surfaces using a vacuum cleaner or a soft brush. The leather surfaces should be wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 2. Some leather trim, such as the leather wrapped steering wheel, may become grayish in color with use. The original condition may be restored by rubbing the affected area with a clean soft cloth dampened in a mild soap solution, and then wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 3. Leather seat surfaces may be regularly coated with a leather conditioner such as saddle soap. Cautions: Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar product on leather trim. Never use car wax on leather trim. Never use fabric protectors on leather trim unless recommended by the manufacturer. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the leather trim. Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Models: 4WD & All-WD Models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT89-002 Bulletin No.: TS89-061 Date: April 13, 1989 4WD & ALL-WHEEL DRIVE TIRE REPLACEMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-89 Sentra (B12) 1986-88 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1980-Truck (720, D21) 1987-89 Pathfinder (WD21) 1990 Axxess (M11) SERVICE INFORMATION When customers inquire about tire replacement for Applied Model vehicles, please remind them of the recommended guidelines in their respective Owner's Manual. TIRE REPLACEMENT CAUTION: ^ Always use tires of the same size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case or differential gears. ^ If excessive tire wear is noted, Nissan recommends that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as needed. ^ If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. ^ Use only the spare tires specified for each 4WD or all-wheel drive models. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Page 1168 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 2732 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 699 Page 4078 ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J". Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the label attached to the top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5. Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester Vehicles with JIS Battery ^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on the battery. NOTE: DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery. Vehicles with CCA Battery ^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on the battery. Reference Material The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed. Page 3362 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 908 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Anti-Freeze Ethylene Glycol Base Page 5147 2. Grind the surface of the repair with 36 grit disc. Grind about 11/2" around the actual damage to obtain a taper for best adhesion. 3. Featheredge the paint around the repair with 180 grit disc. Wipe with a clean, dry rag and blow off with air. 4. Apply one wet coat of Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter over the sanded surface and allow to dry for 10 minutes. IMPORTANT: It will be necessary to reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter after any sanding step. 5. Mix Flexible Parts Repair Material according to the instructions and apply to the repair with a squeegee, building it up higher than the undamaged area. Allow it to cure for 20-30 minutes at 60-80~F. 6. After curing, sand with 180 grit disc followed by 240 grit disc. Page 2728 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1756 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 4118 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Testing Procedures/Equipment Classification: EL99-O16p Reference: NTB99-048p Date: September 13, 2007 BATTERY TESTING FOR NISSAN ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT AND GENUINE NISSAN REPLACEMENT BATTERIES This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION The new Battery Service Center (BSC) is the factory-approved battery tester. The Essential Tool number for this tester is J-48087. ^ For claim reimbursement purposes, use of the "BSC" is required when testing any Nissan Original Equipment or Genuine Nissan Replacement battery. ^ For more information, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ Print-outs from the BSC are required to accurately document the test codes for warranty claims. ^ For the complete BSC User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. When setting up the "BSC" for testing, a [battery CCA] rating is required. ^ CCA stands for Cold Cranking Amps. Page 466 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 2131 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Release Pressure 13 psi Page 3898 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Models: Various Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Classification: EF & EC94-015 Bulletin No.: NTB94-097 Date: November 4, 1994 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) IDENTIFICATION SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to assure in verifying that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and has the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All vehicles have a label (see illustration above) that has the vendor part number on the ECM Cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 3941 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3136 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 4368 large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation. 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation. 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service. NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement. 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 3115 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Adjustments Inhibitor Switch: Adjustments 1. Loosen inhibitor switch attaching screws. 2. Set selector lever manual shaft at Neutral position. 3. Insert suitable pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and switch lever as near vertical as possible, then tighten screws. 4. Check switch for continuity, replacing as necessary. Fig. 6 Adjusting inhibitor switch. 1985-88 Maxima, 1986-88 Stanza Wagon & 1987-88 Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza exc. Wagon INHIBITOR SWITCH VIEW Page 5220 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. Page 578 Page 342 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 3991 B. For best accuracy, "stabilize" (firmly support) the vehicle with a jack or jack stand as shown in Figure 1. ^ On some hoists, the vehicle may "wobble" a little while using the on-car brake lathe. Not good. CAUTION: Any rocking motion (wobble) of the vehicle during the ProCut(TM) "Automatic compensation" procedure will reduce the accuracy of the resurfacing. ^ If wobble occurs during the rotor resurfacing process/procedure, the finished rotor runout may be more than factory specification and should be checked before using the rotor. C. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS speed sensors. ^ Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS speed sensor's magnet. It is best to clean the ABS sensor with the rotor removed. D. After a rotor has been resurfaced with the ProCut(TM) brake lathe: ^ If the rotor must be removed for any reason, mark the exact location (rotor to axle hub) before removing the rotor (see Figure 2). ^ The rotor must be reinstalled back to the same location. E. Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. ^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the lug nuts to the proper torque specification. ^ Uneven or high torque applied to the lug nuts may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may increase rotor runout and cause excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Classification: EM95-01 Section: Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB95-017 Date: February 8, 1995 ENGINE OIL LEVEL AND GRADE APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION The cause of some driveability incidents is incorrect oil level or viscosity. Whenever you evaluate a vehicle for a driveability problem, check the oil level first. (It is a good practice to check oil level on every vehicle that you work on.) Overfilling may cause engine vibration or valve train clatter on vehicles with hydraulic lash adjusters due to oil aeration when the crankshaft hits the oil. Using the wrong viscosity oil can cause rough or low idle resulting from improper operation of the hydraulic lash adjusters. When you add or change the engine oil, follow the service manual recommendations regarding proper oil fill level. Do not overfill the crankcase. If you find a vehicle to be overfilled with oil, drain the excess oil and dispose of properly. Remember to wait ten (10) minutes after refilling before checking. This allows time for the oil to drain back to the pan. Always use the proper viscosity oil specified by the service manual for the temperature range in your geographic area. The viscosity specifications ensure proper engine operation and best engine efficiency. Page 1536 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 4544 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 837 Distributor Cap: Testing and Inspection Distributor Cap 1. Remove the screws securing the cap to the distributor. 2. Remove the ignition wires from the cap. 3. Inspect the cap for cracks or damage due to heat or arcing. 4. Inspect the terminals inside the cap for excessive corrosion and damage. 5. Inspect the ignition wire terminals for excessive corrosion. If the corrosion cannot be removed with reasonable measures, replace the cap. Replace the cap if it fails the above tests. Page 4313 4. Hold position of cam and torque nut to 83-98 ft. lbs. 5. Ensure toe-in is still within specifications. 1987-88 Sentra Fig. 2 Rear Toe-in Adjustment. Rear toe-in is adjusted by rotating the cam bolts which secure the rear parallel link to the crossmember. 1. Measure total toe-in and toe-in for each wheel following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Scribe matching mark between cam and parallel link, then loosen nut securing cam bolt. 3. Rotate cam bolt(s) as needed, Fig. 7, to obtain specified toe-in. On graduation on scale varies toe-in approximately .08 inch. Ensure that total toe-in is within specifications and divided equally between left and right wheels. 4. Hold position of cam bolt(s) and torque retaining nuts to 72-87 ft. lbs. 5. Ensure toe-in is still within specifications. Page 1185 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3267 Inspection Procedure Page 3666 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "FRONT SUSPENSION / COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES / AXLE BEARING AND KNUCKLE" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 1534 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2547 System description: When the switch is ON, the ECU lights up the lamp. The VOLTAGE VALUE is based on the body ground. Page 3967 large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation. 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation. 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service. NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement. 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 1497 Page 2802 Deceleration Valve: Testing and Inspection Boost Controlled Deceleration Device Vacuum Control Valve VACUUM CONTROL VALVE 1. Disconnect air regulator side of air hose connecting 3-way connector to vacuum control valve. 2. Check that vacuum control valve operates when engine speed is decreased from 3500-4000 RPM to idle, by placing fingers on end of hose. 3. If there is no vacuum at end of hose, replace vacuum control valve. BCDD Operation 1. Place gear shift lever in neutral position and connect rubber hose between vacuum gauge and intake manifold. 2. With engine at operating temperature, adjust idle to specification. 3. With engine under no load, increase engine speed to 1500-2000 RPM, then quickly close throttle valve. 4. Manifold vacuum pressure should abruptly rise to 23.62 inches Hg or above, then gradually decrease to a certain level and stay there for a while. This is the operating pressure. In most cases it will drop to idle pressure. 5. Check that bypass air control valve pressure is within specified range which should be (at sea level) 22.83-24.41 inches Hg. 6. If it is lower than specified level, turn adjusting screw counterclockwise until correct adjustment is made. If it is higher turn adjusting screw clockwise. 7. Race the engine and check for adjustment. 8. If engine speed cannot be reduced to idle when checking BCDD operating pressure, turn adjusting screw counterclockwise until BCDD operating pressure is on high vacuum side, .98 inch Hg from specified pressure, then turn adjusting screw 1/4 turn clockwise so that BCDD operating pressure drops .98 inch Hg. 9. If BCDD operating pressure is still not accurately determined, turn adjusting screw counterclockwise so that BCDD operating pressure is on high vacuum side, 1.97 inches Hg from specified pressure, then turn adjusting screw 1/2 turn clockwise. 10. Boost control unit operating pressure should be correctly set within specified range even if engine speed cannot be decreased to idle. Page 981 Page 4039 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 3111 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 116 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1013 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 2271 (Switch ON/OFF diagnosis) Page 1001 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 535 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 5307 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Diagnostic Note Air Door Cable: Service and Repair Diagnostic Note Whenever control cables are disconnected or heater case is disassembled for service, control cables and operating rods should be adjusted as outlined in adjustments. M/T - Clutch Operating Cylinder Service Information Clutch Slave Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Operating Cylinder Service Information Classification: MT95-003 Reference: NTB95-114 Date: December 6, 1995 CLUTCH OPERATING CYLINDER - DUAL CUP PISTON SEAL ARRANGEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION Figure 1 The piston cup for the clutch operating cylinder has been changed from a single cup to a dual cup. The parts are interchangeable with a piston kit (piston assembly, piston spring and dust cover), see Figure 1. Please update the CL section of your service manuals to show the dual cup piston seal arrangement. Please refer to your microfiche parts catalog for the appropriate vehicle and part number. Specifications Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications Tensioner Lock Nut 12 - 15 ft.lb Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Models: 4WD & All-WD Models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT89-002 Bulletin No.: TS89-061 Date: April 13, 1989 4WD & ALL-WHEEL DRIVE TIRE REPLACEMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-89 Sentra (B12) 1986-88 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1980-Truck (720, D21) 1987-89 Pathfinder (WD21) 1990 Axxess (M11) SERVICE INFORMATION When customers inquire about tire replacement for Applied Model vehicles, please remind them of the recommended guidelines in their respective Owner's Manual. TIRE REPLACEMENT CAUTION: ^ Always use tires of the same size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case or differential gears. ^ If excessive tire wear is noted, Nissan recommends that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as needed. ^ If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. ^ Use only the spare tires specified for each 4WD or all-wheel drive models. Page 5060 Preparation For System Checks Place console switch in the auto position move the interior lamp switch to the center position and open driver's side window. Close trunk hood (if open) and remove ignition key and close all doors. System Diagnosis Air/Fuel Mixture: Testing and Inspection PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - E.C.C.S. harness connectors - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - A.I.V. hose - Engine compression - E.G.R. valve operation - Throttle valve 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Overall Inspection Procedure Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid Type Nissan Brake Fluid or DOT 3 Page 2819 Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Heater: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 742 Page 2721 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2658 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 3182 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Air Conditioning - Installation Caution Hose/Line HVAC: Technical Service Bulletins Air Conditioning - Installation Caution 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-018 Bulletin No. TS87-147 Date October 12, 1987 AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION CAUTION APPLIED MODELS: 1987 & 1988 Sentra and Pulsar Models with E16i or E16S Engine SERVICE INFORMATION When installing an A/C kit on 1987 & 1988 Sentra and Pulsar Models with E16i or E16S engine, carefully route the A/C high pressure tube so that it is flush to the engine wall. A/C high pressure tube damage and loss of refrigerant may occur if the tube is routed incorrectly. Ensure that the A/C tube does not contact any hoses or other engine components. After A/C installation is complete: 1. Verify that the A/C high pressure tube locating clamp is installed. 2. On vehicles with E16S engine, be sure the vacuum line at the E.C.C. System vacuum sensor is securely connected. See illustration on page 2/2. Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Page 2039 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection a. Tighten the clamp so its end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from the hose end. b. Make sure that the screw of the clamp does not contact with any adjacent parts. c. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. : Fuel hose clamps 1.0 - 1.5 N.m (0.10 - 0.15 kg-m, 0.7 - 1.1 ft-lb) 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet hose at the electro injection unit. 3. Install a pressure gauge. 4. Start the engine and check the fuel line for fuel leakage. 5. Read fuel pressure gauge. At idling speed: 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2, 36.3 psi) 6. Release fuel pressure again. 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel line. 8. Reconnect the fuel inlet hose. Page 3045 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2386 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3114 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2473 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 994 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Identification Classification: HA95-017 Reference: NTB95-106 Date: October 18, 1995 AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) LUBRICANT/OIL FOR NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin supersedes HA94-001. (94-013, 02/01/94) APPLIED VEHICLES: All equipped with A/C SERVICE INFORMATION Nissan has four different A/C lubricant/oil products available. Different systems will require different types of lubricants/oils. All R134a equipped vehicles have a label under the hood that specifies the type of lubricant required for the system on that vehicle. A description of the type of compressor and lubricant/oil required is also listed in the Service Data and Specifications at the end of the HA section in the appropriate service manual. During A/C servicing, if lubricant/oil needs to be added to the system, please refer to the list of PAG (poly alkaline glycol) lubricants and refrigerant oils listed in this bulletin. NOTE: Quest vehicles produced on or after November 29, 1993 with R134a refrigerant, will require a special compressor lubricant. The recommended compressor lubricant for this vehicle only is: Type F-R134a PAG lubricant, part number KLH00-PAGQF. Page 2714 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Models: Various Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Classification: EF & EC94-015 Bulletin No.: NTB94-097 Date: November 4, 1994 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) IDENTIFICATION SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to assure in verifying that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and has the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All vehicles have a label (see illustration above) that has the vendor part number on the ECM Cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5335 12. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed as follows: b. Install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness into the mounting hole just above the rear wheelhouse. Make sure the tang is in its slot to keep the retractor unit from rotating on the mounting bolt. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). a. Working from the trunk, feed the belt male end up through the slot in the parcel shelf support. c. Bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear pillar where the 1" hole was drilled. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). d. Bolt floor anchor into position and torque to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65- 4.65 kg/m). 13. Reinstall rear parcel shelf. 14. Check retro-fit belts for smooth operation. 15. Reinstall rear high mount stop light and speakers, if equipped. 16. Reinstall rear seat. Pathfinder Page 3586 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible. Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the air cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the air cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds (Point A, Figure 8). 5. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 9). 6. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the air cooler Outlet hose. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the air cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining oil or cleaner through the air cooler and out of the air cooler Inlet hose (see Point A, Figure 9). 8. Proceed with Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles), below. Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles) You will be taking a sample of the debris to determine if the radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the Inlet and Outlet hoses for the oil cooler in the radiator of the vehicle you are working on. If you do not identify the Inlet and Outlet hoses correctly, debris may be left inside the "in radiator" cooler and transmission damage may occur. NOTE: Failure to clean the exterior of the Cooler Inlet hose properly may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission "in radiator" cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler Inlet hose. 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the Outlet hose of the oil cooler in the radiator (see Figure 4). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models); Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Regulator Valve: Testing and Inspection REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION 1. Visually inspect components for wear and damage. 2. Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve spring. 3. Coat regulator valve with engine oil and check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. If damaged, replace regulator valve set or oil pump assembly. OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE INSPECTION Inspect oil pressure relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by prying it out with a screwdriver. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. Page 4941 Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Seat Belts - Extender Availability Classification: BF93-034 Reference: NTB93-112 Date: July 22, 1993 SEAT BELT EXTENDERS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Maxima (J30) Truck (D21) Stanza (U12) Pathfinder (WD21) Sentra (4-door) (B13) 240SX (S13) Axxess (M11) NX (KB13) Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides a listing of part numbers and applications for Seat Belt Extenders. The Seat Belt Extenders are intended for use by customers who cannot fit the standard seat belts around them. Vehicles which are equipped with Front Seat Motorized Shoulder Belts require the replacement of the entire Lap Belt Assembly for Seat Belt Extender use. The new part has a slightly revised tongue to fit into the Seat Belt Extender. Both sides may be replaced to give the customer the option of using the Seat Belt Extender on either side of the vehicle. Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Vehicles with NON-motorized seat belts do not require the replacement of the Lap Belt assemblies. There will not be any Seat Belt Extender for the 300ZX (Z32) or the Sentra (B13) 2-Door vehicles because of the nature of their seat belt design. Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 1525 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2396 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 3195 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4349 Fig. 3 Rack & pinion manual steering gear. 1987-88 Sentra When assembling power steering gear, refer to Fig. 3, noting the following: 1. Install rack gear from rack side, then place rack gear in neutral position. Fig. 6 Installing pinion guide clip. 1987-88 Sentra 2. Install pinion assembly, then with pinion rack held in place, install guide clip as shown in Fig. 6. 3. Apply suitable locking compound to threaded portion of rear cover, then install rear cover using a suitable tool. 4. Apply suitable grease to sealing lips of dust seal, then wrap suitable tape around pinion gear and install dust seal. 5. Apply suitable sealing compound to threaded portion of retainer cover, then install retainer, spring and retainer cover. 6. Adjust pinion rotating torque as follows: a. Place gear in neutral position and loosen locknut, then torque adjusting screw to 43 inch lbs. b. Loosen adjusting screw, then retorque to 1.74 inch lbs. c. Move rack over its entire stroke several times, then return to neutral position. d. Measure pinion rotating torque within a range of ±180° from neutral position. Find position where rotating torque is at its maximum. e. Loosen adjusting screw at position where rotating torque is at its maximum, then hand tighten adjusting screw until its end touches retainer. f. Torque locknut to 6-8 ft. lbs. while holding adjusting screw in position. Ensure adjusting screw does not rotate. g. While rotating pinion in the ±100° range from neutral position, ensure rotating torque is 6-10 inch lbs. h. If pinion rotating torque is not as specified, readjust as required. If correct adjustment can not be obtained, replace retainer spring. 7. Apply suitable locking compound to threaded portion of tie rod inner socket, then install inner socket into rack end together with new lock plate. Ensure lock plate ratchet enters groove at end portion of rack. 8. Tighten tie rod inner socket, then bend lock plate at two cutout portions of inner socket. Remove burrs after bending lock plate to prevent damaging boot. Page 2576 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3039 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1154 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 2945 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2681 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 1785 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 803 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Page 3100 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2479 Page 5050 SYMPTOM: Doors do not lock with remote control Diagnostic Procedure # 3 SYMPTOM: Doors do not unlock with remote control Diagnostic Procedure # 4 Page 3337 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Page 5215 You can contact the paint refinish company's technical assistance number listed. Akzo/Sikkens Procedure ICI AUTOCOLOR Procedure DuPont Procedure Glasurit Procedure Martin Senour (NAPA) Procedure PPG Procedure R-M Procedure Sherwin Williams Procedure Spies Hecker Procedure Herberts Standox Procedure EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 798 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. M/T - Shift Lever Vibration or Buzzing Shift Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Shift Lever Vibration or Buzzing 1987-88 Sentra, Models 1987 Pulsar Section Manual Transmission Classification MT89-001 Bulletin No. TS89-36 Date March 23, 1989 SENTRA/PULSAR SHIFT LEVER VIBRATION APPLIED MODELS 1987 Pulsar 1987-88 Sentra (2WD) APPLIED DATES & VINS Pulsar: July, 1987 JN1PN34S HM-044813 JN1EN34S HM-018300 Sentra (Japan built): July, 1987 JN1PB21S JU-523012 JN1PB22S JU-518678 JN1PB24S JU-023334 JN1PB25S JU-014701 JN1Pb26S JU-U14756 Sentra (U.S. built) February, 1988 1N4PB22S7JC778188 SERVICE INFORMATION Some vehicles with manual transmissions manufactured before the applied dates may exhibit gear shift lever vibration (or "buzzing") while driving at highway speeds. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Technical Service Bulletin # 94-012A Date: 990617 Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Classification: BR94-002a Reference: NTB94-012a Date: June 17, 1999 This amended version of NTB94-012 adds a caution and a note to the service procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB94-012. This bulletin supersedes TS89-105/BR89-004 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY SERVICE INFORMATION Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in a thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. Page 2203 Ignition Cable: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 3314 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 326 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4199 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Testing and Inspection Bowl Vent Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vent line hose from carburetor float chamber. 2. With engine running, inhale on vent line of carbon canister and ensure that there is no leak. 3. Check that there is a leak with engine off. Page 2075 Page 103 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1515 Page 1861 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 3307 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2838 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 1010 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 2567 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 2369 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Wiring Diagram Page 4189 Ignition Relay: Locations Ignition Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3633 Page 4225 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 2362 Fig. 303b Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 4822 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Lubricant Type Lubricant Type Refrigerant Oil Type SUNISO 5GS Page 3469 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plugs for: ^ Improper gap ^ Carbon deposits ^ Cracked center electrode insulator ^ Burned or worn electrodes (may be caused by): ^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling ^ Fouled plug (may be caused by): ^ Rich fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires 2. Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded. Standard Type BCPR5ES-11 (NGK) Hot Type BCPR4ES-11 (NGK) Cold Type BCPR6ES-11 (NGK) Spark Plug Gap 3. Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. Electrode Gap: 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) Page 5226 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Locations Pulsed Secondary Air Injection: Locations Engine & Emission Control Components. Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Applicable to: 1987 Sentra w/E16i Engine Page 1532 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2464 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 1926 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1495 Page 5034 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 4016 Brake Drum: Specifications Model LT20A Brake Drum Inside Diameter 8.00 in Maximum Refinish Diameter 8.05 in Model LT23A Brake Drum Inside Diameter 9.00 in Maximum Refinish Diameter 9.06 in Page 631 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Page 3877 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 2122 Page 996 Page 762 Page 73 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 4782 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 1881 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 3972 1. Before using the rotor driving unit ensure that all lug nuts are installed on the lugs (including the lugs not used for the lug adaptor). All lug nuts should be evenly torqued, to at least 40 ft.lbs. Do not over-tighten the lug nuts as damage may occur to the lug adaptor legs. 2. To prevent chatter and ensure a smooth rotor finish, install the largest and heaviest silencer band possible around the outside diameter of the rotor. Rotor Cutting Before engaging the cutting tool, ensure the following: 1. Using the dial indicator, measure rotor/hub run-out prior to resurfacing rotor and adjust cutting depth to eliminate this run-out. Each cut may be between 0.05 mm and 0.25 mm (0.002" and 0.010"). Additional cuts may be necessary to eliminate all the run-out. 2. Using a micrometer, measure rotor thickness in at least 8 even locations around the rotor. Do not cut below the minimum rotor thickness specification. Replace rotor if the run-out cannot be eliminated without exceeding the minimum rotor thickness specification. 3. After rotor resurfacing is completed, measure the rotor/hub run-out using a dial indicator. Ensure that the run-out is below the specification for the vehicle. If runout is not within specifications, turn the rotors again. Properly machined rotors will have almost zero runout (.001" or less) with no measurable thickness variation. 4. Do not smooth the rotor surface with sand paper or other abrasive material. Page 1170 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location R12 Refrigerant - Conservation/Recycling Technical Service Bulletin # HA90006 Date: 900315 R12 Refrigerant - Conservation/Recycling Classification: Section: HA90-006 Air Conditioning Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-028 Models: All Models with A/C Date: March 15, 1990 CFC REFRIGERANT CONSERVATION AND RECYCLING APPLIED MODELS: All models equipped with air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION: Because of environmental concerns, it is extremely important that we all take every precaution to reduce or eliminate the release of CFC refrigerant (R12) into the air. Recycling Equipment In Your Dealership If your dealership has not already received one, you will receive a Kent-Moore ACR(3) J- 38100-NI Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling System within the next few days. This machine will recover the refrigerant from any vehicle you service, clean the refrigerant, remove all moisture and oil, and place the refrigerant into a 30 lb. container for re-use. To save our atmosphere, you must use the machine every time you perform A/C service that requires a purge of the refrigerant. Maintenance Is Essential If the recycling equipment is maintained properly, it can clean and purify the removed refrigerant so that it will exceed the SAE standards for content of moisture, oil, air and noncondensibles. Like any equipment, however, this machine will operate at its best efficiency only if it is maintained properly. This means you must check the moisture indicator often and replace the filter drier core whenever necessary. You must make sure the correct manifold gauge and hoses are used in all cases, and that the valves in the hoses are working properly. Make sure the unit stays clean and that the hoses are always hung up away from contamination when the unit is not in use. Destruction of the Earth's Ozone Layer Page 3624 CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only in areas with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models), before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, turn the can over and spray only propellant (gas) for a few seconds. This will avoid fluid spill back out of the cooler hose. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 5). 8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Place an oil drain pan under the banjo bolts that connect the oil cooler steel lines to the transmission. 12. Remove the "banjo" bolts at the transmission, and pull the line fittings away from the transmission. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Go to the Workflow chart for next step. Frontier (D22) Cooler Bypass Cleaning 1. Place an oil drain pan under oil cooler hoses or lines before removing them. 2. Remove the lines from the transmission and allow the oil to drain from the lines (See Figure 6). 3. Remove the lines from the bypass valve (see Figure 6). Page 1723 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 1286 STANZA: Refer to Figures 7 and 8 Mark hose in the middle of lower section of hose inclined at a 45 angle (Fig. 8). From this mark measure 3/8" toward the radiator end and toward the engine end and mark both places. Using the last two marks, cut a 3/4" section from the hose. Be sure the cut piece is on a straight section of hose and try to keep the hose in its original shape. Truck/Pathfinder: Refer to Figures 9 and 10 Mark hose in the middle of straight section of hose connected to the engine (Fig. 10). From this mark measure 3/8" to 1/2" toward the radiator end and toward the engine end and mark both places. Using the last two marks cut a 3/4" to 1" section from the hose. Be sure the cut piece is on a straight section of hose and try to keep the hose in its original shape. Page 2591 Inspection Procedure Page 1039 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 862 Timing Belt: Service and Repair TIMING BELT REMOVAL CAUTION: - After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads. - Do not bend or twist timing belt too tightly. - Ensure timing belt, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft sprocket and belt tensioner are clean and free from oil or water. - Before installing timing belt, confirm that No.1 cylinder is set at top dead center (T.D.C.) on compression stroke. - Align arrow in direction of timing belt rotation. - Adjust timing belt tension with all spark plugs removed. 1. Remove the following parts. - Front right side splash cover - Front right side under cover Page 2977 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4931 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Page 1000 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 81 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Page 2390 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Top Of Transaxle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4767 Receiver Dryer: Testing and Inspection A restriction inside the receiver-dehydrator will result in high head pressures if the restriction is on the inlet side of the unit. A restriction at the outlet side will cause low head pressures and little or no cooling. An exceedingly cold receiver-dehydrator may be restricted. If the system has been in service for a considerable amount of time, the desicant element may have lost its moisture absorbing ability. This condition is indicated by the constant presence of small bubbles in the sight glass if equipped and a wide difference in temperature between the inlet and outlet receiver-dehydrator lines. Page 3985 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 2139 Page 1468 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1989 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 484 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Page 4555 Page 4802 Page 141 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Fuel - Injector Replacement Guidelines Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Injector Replacement Guidelines Models: All models Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Classification: EF&EC92-003; Bulletin No.: NTB92-086 Date: October 13, 1992 FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT APPLIED MODELS: All multi point fuel injected engines. SERVICE INFORMATION: When fuel injector replacement is required, the following guidelines should be followed: 1. Injector body/harness connector color must always be the same. Injector body colors are beige, blue, brown, green, pink, purple, and red. Therefore red should always be replaced with red and green should always be replaced with green. 2. Paint dot or metal ring color must be the same when replacing one injector out of a set. Paint dot or ring colors are black, blue, gray, green, orange, red, white, and yellow. Therefore a red with blue paint dot should always be replaced with a red with blue paint dot and pink with black paint dot should always be replaced with pink with black paint dot. 3. When replacing a complete set of injectors any paint dot or ring color is acceptable, however the injector body/harness connector color must remain the same. Adjustments Inhibitor Switch: Adjustments 1. Loosen inhibitor switch attaching screws. 2. Set selector lever manual shaft at Neutral position. 3. Insert suitable pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and switch lever as near vertical as possible, then tighten screws. 4. Check switch for continuity, replacing as necessary. Fig. 6 Adjusting inhibitor switch. 1985-88 Maxima, 1986-88 Stanza Wagon & 1987-88 Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza exc. Wagon INHIBITOR SWITCH VIEW Page 3290 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2001 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Brake Adjustments Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Adjustments Fig. 1 Measuring brake drum inside diameter Fig. 2 Adjusting brake shoes to brake drum inside diameter 300ZX models, 1985-88 200SX models and some Maxima models are equipped with four wheel disc brakes, therefore, no adjustments are necessary on these models. Models equipped with drum brakes have self-adjusting shoe mechanisms that ensure correct lining-to-drum clearance through actuation of the parking brake. Although the brakes are self-adjusting, an initial adjustment is necessary after the brake shoes have been replaced. To perform adjustment, measure brake drum inside diameter using a suitable brake drum-to-shoe gauge, Fig. 1. Adjust brake shoes to dimension obtained on outside of gauge, Fig. 2. Specifications Valve Cover: Specifications Valve Cover Bolt 0.7 - 2.2 ft.lb Page 460 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Page 686 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3654 Wheel Bearing: Specifications ALL MODELS Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 1469 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3933 ^ while the vehicle is barely moving, with light brake pedal force ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather ^ most common on vehicles with automatic transmission This noise is common on most cars with front disc brakes. There are no repair procedures to eliminate this noise. 3. SQUEAKING/SQUEALING NOISE ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during low speed stops (5-20 mph) ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather This noise is common on vehicles with high-performance potential that must be able to stop in short distances from high speeds. Other brands of brake pads may eliminate this noise, but Nissan does not recommend them because they may have reduced pad life or inadequate performance in high speed stops. 4. HIGH-PITCHED SQUEAKING/SCRAPING NOISE ^ whenever brakes are applied ^ may come from just one wheel Nissan uses pad wear indicators on many of its disc brake pads to provide an audible warning when the brake pads need replacement. Spring steel tabs that are riveted to the brake pad scrape lightly on the rotor surface when the pad is worn down to its lowest limit. The customer should hear the noise at this time and bring the vehicle to the dealer for brake pad replacement. The pad wear indicator will not damage the rotor surface if the pad is replaced in a reasonable time. Replace worn pads with new parts. Check the rotor surface for damage and machine if necessary. Page 3112 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) 2WD Model Page 4568 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 4710 CAUTION: When installing high pressure tubes (with flange connections) to their mating parts, make sure the flange is fully seated onto the mating part before the securing bolt is installed and tightened (see Figure 4). If the securing bolt is installed and tightened before the tube flange is seated onto its mating part, 0-ring damage and leaks can result. Page 771 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Neutral/Park (NP) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1818 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3364 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3954 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the following flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Brake Rotor Service Flow Chart (*)CAUTION: To ensure a proper repair, it is absolutely essential to make these measurements. For example, if run-out remains high, brake judder and/or shimmy may not be detected while test driving the vehicle immediately after the repair, but, may return after several thousand miles of rotor wear (due to thickness variation). Prior to and, again, after resurfacing a brake rotor, ensure that the rotor thickness is above the minimum specification. General Brake Repair Guidelines To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. Page 4002 1. Before using the rotor driving unit ensure that all lug nuts are installed on the lugs (including the lugs not used for the lug adaptor). All lug nuts should be evenly torqued, to at least 40 ft.lbs. Do not over-tighten the lug nuts as damage may occur to the lug adaptor legs. 2. To prevent chatter and ensure a smooth rotor finish, install the largest and heaviest silencer band possible around the outside diameter of the rotor. Rotor Cutting Before engaging the cutting tool, ensure the following: 1. Using the dial indicator, measure rotor/hub run-out prior to resurfacing rotor and adjust cutting depth to eliminate this run-out. Each cut may be between 0.05 mm and 0.25 mm (0.002" and 0.010"). Additional cuts may be necessary to eliminate all the run-out. 2. Using a micrometer, measure rotor thickness in at least 8 even locations around the rotor. Do not cut below the minimum rotor thickness specification. Replace rotor if the run-out cannot be eliminated without exceeding the minimum rotor thickness specification. 3. After rotor resurfacing is completed, measure the rotor/hub run-out using a dial indicator. Ensure that the run-out is below the specification for the vehicle. If runout is not within specifications, turn the rotors again. Properly machined rotors will have almost zero runout (.001" or less) with no measurable thickness variation. 4. Do not smooth the rotor surface with sand paper or other abrasive material. Page 2073 Paint - 2 and 3 Coat Pearlescent Finishes Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - 2 and 3 Coat Pearlescent Finishes Models: All Section: Body & Frame Classification: BF88-004 Bulletin No.: TS88-013 Date: February 8, 1988 PEARLESCENT PAINT APPLIED MODELS: All SERVICE INFORMATION Pearlescent paints containing mica are now being used on some 1988 Nissan models. These paints differ from solid or metallic paints. Three types of pearlescent paints are currently being used by Nissan; 2-coat pearl, 2-coat pearl metallic, and 3-coat pearl (see chart). Page 1645 Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair Water Valve Refer to ``Heater Core, Replace'' procedure. Remanufactured Starter/Alternator - Program Starter Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Remanufactured Starter/Alternator - Program Reference: PI95-016 Date: September 28, 1995 GENUINE NISSAN REMANUFACTURED STARTER/ALTERNATOR PROGRAM APPLIED VEHICLES: Selected models SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning October 2, 1995, Nissan will offer remanufactured starters and alternators for selected Nissan models. Consult the Genuine Nissan Remanufactured Parts Sourcebook for part numbers and affected models. Refer to the Nissan Parts Bulletin NTB/95-023 for complete program procedures. SERVICE PROCEDURE The diagnostic procedure for troubleshooting starter and alternator incidents has not changed. Refer to the appropriate service manual for specific diagnostic procedures. Page 3616 Page 3835 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 769 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2120 Page 1085 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Rear Door Striker: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Section: Classification: BF90-003 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-036 Models: All models Date: April 12, 1990 Front door Page 1719 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VE30DE MAXIMA (A32) VQ30DE Page 4641 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 4976 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 4921 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Page 1988 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Battery - Charging/Replacement Procedure Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Charging/Replacement Procedure CLASSIFICATION: EL94-001 REFERENCE: NTB94-009 DATE: MARCH 4, 1994 BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S) All SERVICE INFORMATION As the demands on the vehicle battery increase with the complexity of electrical systems, there is a need for a usable, consistent and repeatable procedure for determining the need for charging or replacement of vehicle batteries. It is the Dealer's responsibility to determine the condition/chargeability of a battery, prior to replacement of the battery. SERVICE PROCEDURE See the following illustrations for BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. Battery Charging/Replacement Procedure Page 2304 SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 4 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 5 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) SR20DE STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Page 2755 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 335a A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 622 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 1774 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reach under instrument panel and disconnect multi-pin connector from rear of switch. 3. Depress two switch retaining clips and push switch out of panel. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 135 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 4279 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Canada Batteries Battery: Specifications Standard Battery, Canada Standard Battery, Canada BCI Group Number 24F Cranking Performance 435 A Page 3658 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 1394 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 6.5 - 8.7 ft.lb Jackshaft Sprocket Bolts 6.5 - 8.7 ft.lb Page 346 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 1544 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1169 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 787 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4023 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 2866 EGR Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Procedures Fig. 342 EGR & canister purge control solenoid valve circuit diagnosis. EGR Control Solenoid Page 785 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3132 4. There is no difference between injectors made by different manufacturers. The following table shows correct injector replacement CORRECT REPLACEMENT ORIGINAL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT INJECTOR connector color/paint dot connector color/paint dot Red/Blue Red/Blue Pink/Black Pink/Black The following table shows incorrect injector replacement INCORRECT REPLACEMENT ORIGINAL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT INJECTOR connector color/paint dot connector color/paint dot Red/Blue Red/Black Purple/Black Red/Black Beige/Blue Brown/Blue Page 298 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection (CHECK ENGINE LIGHT ITEM) Wiring Diagram The following is necessary to perform this inspection. 1. Pull out E.C.U. from under the passenger seat. 2. Warm up engine sufficiently. Page 1480 Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 2979 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 2095 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3398 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1751 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Page 732 Page 624 Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Classification: WT92-003 Section: Wheel & Tire Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-123 Models: All Date: December 22, 1992 AFTERMARKET CHROMING OF NISSAN ALLOY WHEELS SERVICE INFORMATION The Original Equipment Alloy Wheels on Nissan vehicles are specifically developed in order to achieve the Nissan design and performance standards. These Original Equipment wheels are also subject to rigorous testing procedure's to ensure they meet Nissan's standards. Nissan cannot ensure that Original Equipment Alloy Wheels which are subjected to aftermarket chroming meet these same standards, and therefore Nissan does not recommend the use of such wheels, nor does Nissan make any representations concerning their performance. Indeed, if these Original Equipment Alloy Wheels are subjected to aftermarket chroming, there are serious potential problems which may occur as a result of the chroming process: 1. The chroming process removes the original paint coating by "burning" or "chemical" methods, both of which cause the alloy surface to be changed. The application of chrome plating has to be controlled correctly, as the alloy can be harmed by a poorly controlled process. 2. Overall aftermarket chroming may degrade the durability, long term appearance, and may affect safety and performance of the wheels. Accordingly, Nissan recommends that Original Equipment Wheels NOT be chrome plated. Please consult the Nissan Warranty Policies and Procedures Manual pertaining to the Dealer's responsibility when altering or modifying vehicles. WARRANTY INFORMATION Note that damage to Nissan Alloy road wheels due to any non-factory-authorized process, such as chroming, is the responsibility of the customer, and is not covered by the Nissan Warranty, please consult the "Nissan Warranty Information Booklet" for specific details. Page 1442 Page 98 This chart indicates appropriate pin voltages for the ASCD system: Page 2414 Inspection Procedure Page 1014 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 3900 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Axle Shaft, Conventional Fixed/Floating Axle Shaft: Specifications Axle Shaft, Conventional Fixed/Floating 83-87 All MODELS TORQUE.............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................ft.lbs. (Nm) Axle shaft nut........................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................115 156 88-91 PULSAR, SENTRA Axle shaft nut.............................................................................................. ...............................................................................................145-203 196-275 88-91 MAXIMA, STANZA, STANZA WAGON, AXXESS. Axle shaft nut.............................................. ...............................................................................................................................................174-231 235-314 Tires - Rotation Requirement Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rotation Requirement Models 1987-88 Sentra Wagon & 1986-88 Stanza Wagon Section Wheel & Tire Classification WT87-005 Bulletin No. TS87-188 Date December 21, 1987 TIRE ROTATION REQUIREMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra Wagon with four-wheel-drive 1986-88 Stanza Wagon with four-wheel-drive SERVICE INFORMATION On all Sentra and Stanza Wagon four-wheel-drive models, it is very important that regular tire rotation be performed according to the maintenance schedules in the appropriate service manuals. On these vehicles, difficulty in shifting out of the four-wheel-drive mode could occur if the front tires are allowed to wear down more than the rear tires. A difference in tire circumference, front to rear, causes a strain at the driveline between front and rear axles. Page 320 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 5016 3. Insert the replacement antenna rod with the radio in the "ON" position. Insert antenna rope with gear section facing the motor assembly [Figure 2]. 4. Turn the radio "OFF" to retract the antenna rod. If the antenna motor stops before the antenna has fully retracted, turn the radio switch "ON" and immediately turn it "OFF" again. Guide the antenna rope and rod into the antenna assembly. 5. Reinstall the antenna nut and base. Check antenna operation by cycling the radio "ON" and "OFF". Power Antenna Maintenance Clean power antenna rods at every service opportunity by wiping with a damp cloth. PRECAUTIONS Please remind the customer to: 1. Always turn the radio "OFF" to prevent bending the antenna rod, whenever going through car washes or entering parking garages with low ceilings or low hanging garage doors. 2. The antenna rod should be cleaned regularly by wiping off any dirt build up which may cause the antenna to bind. Customers should verify that their car wash attendants do this regularly. CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: The following Claims Information applies to antenna rod replacement for defects in materials and workmanship. Damaged (bent) rods are not included. Claim Information Page 550 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 416 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 2537 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Page 4940 86848-01A10 1978-81 510 86848-01A11 1987 Sentra 1987 Van 1986-87 200SX (Applied Date: from 2/86) 86848-01A12 1987 Pulsar NX 1987 300ZX 1987 Stanza II. LONGER SEAT BELTS (CONTINUED) PART NUMBER APPLIED MODEL 86840-D0124 (R.H.) 1982-86 Stanza (4-Door/5-Door) 86841-D0124 (L.H.) 86840-D1024 (R.H.) 1982-84 Stanza (2-Door) 86841-D1024 (L.H.) 86840-37A24 (R.H) 1982.5-86 Sentra (2-Door) Complete Belt Set ONLY 1983-86 Pulsar NX (2-Door) 86841-37A24 (L.H.) Complete Belt Set ONLY * 1974-78 B210 - Two seat belt manufacturers were used: NSK Warner and Takata. Be sure to check the belt for the manufacturers name before ordering. **No special extenders are available for 1984-1986 720 and some 1986.5 D21 U.S.A. produced trucks. However, the extender listed for 1983-1987 trucks on page 2/3 can be used if a replacement seat belt set is ordered from the parts catalogue as noted below: 1984-86 720 Truck For U.S.A. produced 720 trucks (VIN prefix 1N6...) order the belt set for the equivalent Japanese produced 720 truck (VIN Prefix JN6...) and the extender listed on page 2/3 will fit. Do not order any replacement seat belt set with an "S" in the 6th digit of the part number. Example: For a 1984 Brown 2WD (K/Cab) order (Brown C-134) P/N 86840-10W11. Do not order (Brown C-134 USA make) P/N 86840-S3601. 1986.5 D21 Truck Check the manufacturer's identification on the female buckle in the D21 truck. If the buckle is marked "TK - ", no new belt set is needed, just order the extender listed on page 2/3 of this bulletin. If the buckle is marked with "NSK/Warner", order the correct color replacement seat belt set (male and female halves) listed in the D21 parts catalog, and the extender listed on page 2/3 will fit. All replacement seat belt sets listed in the D21 catalog are compatible with the extender. NOTE: If an extender is needed for a U.S.A. produced 720 or D21 truck, the replacement seat belt set and the installation is available at no charge to the consumer. WARRANTY INFORMATION CS PNC CT OPERATION OP CODE FLAT RATE 9Y 868EX 99 Install Longer Belt SH99AA 0.4/hr. 9Y 868EX 99 Install Extender(s) SH16AA 0.2/hr. Page 3522 Forward Clutch (Rear) Page 1327 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 1086 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 2564 Fig. 303c Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 2143 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Idle Speed Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Classification: Section: Engine Fuel EF&EC88-017; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-115 Models: 1988 Sentra & Pulsar (E16i) Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED MODEL: 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16i SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. PARTS INFORMATION Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. PART DESCRIPTION 1988 PART NUMBER 1987 PART NUMBER E16i Mixture Heater 16174-61A61 16174-69A10 (B12/N13) Page 831 Ignition Cable: Description and Operation Ignition Wire The coil wire connects the ignition coil to the distributor cap, allowing high voltage to flow from the coil to the distributor cap. The spark plug wires connect the terminals in the distributor cap to the spark plugs, allowing high voltage to flow to the spark plugs. The ignition wires have an internal resistance to suppress radio static and to eliminate static that may interfere with sensitive computer components. Page 2331 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Page 1075 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 2559 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 1999 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 604 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Classification: Section: Front Axle FA89-004 & Suspension Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-150 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra, Pulsar NX, 1989-1990 240SX Date: October 19, 1989 FRONT STRUT KIT CAMBER APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1989 Sentras (B12) 1987-1989 Pulsar NX (N13) 1989-1990 240SX (S13) SERVICE INFORMATION New Front Strut Kits supplied for the Applied Models are now manufactured with the camber already set at factory specifications. The adjustable eccentric pin contained in the previously available kit assemblies has been eliminated. Please note that the new kits will retrofit on a model by model basis, and adjustment is not required when retrofitting. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1522 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1841 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 3296 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2410 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: Customer Interest Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 5139 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Classification: BT97-014 Reference: NTB97-060 Date: August 13, 1997 BUMPER REFINISHING TECHNIQUES Applied Vehicles: All models with plastic bumper covers (fascia) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin describes proper plastic bumper cover refinishing with specific paint manufacturer procedures and materials. For information on repairing bumpers refer to the 1992 Technical Bulletin book, page BF-31 for NTB92-043/BF92-013. When refinishing replacement plastic bumper covers (i.e. service parts), it is important to follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure exactly. Failure to do so may result with paint not fully adhering to the bumper, and with time, the paint not adhering to the bumper may peel off. The bumper covers contain mold release agents which must be removed prior to painting. If the bumper cover is not properly cleaned and prepped, the paint may not adhere. Please follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure for proper bumper preparation. NOTE: You can heat the bumper at 140°F for 45 minutes to bring the mold release agent to the surface. Allow the bumper cover to cool completely before cleaning. This cleaning (degreasing) is necessary to remove the mold release agent on the surface completely. The chart indicates which cover; polyurethane (PUR) or polypropylene (PP) is used on each model. The procedures and appropriate materials for each paint vendor are attached for your reference. If you should have any difficulty: ^ Obtaining materials ^ Following the published procedure ^ Obtaining a proper finish ^ If you are in a VOC regulated area Page 2384 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1777 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Single Stage Converter Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Single Stage Converter The catalytic converter accelerates the chemical reaction of hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) in the exhaust gas, and changes them into harmless carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). The chemical reaction process requires the proper amount of air. This air, called secondary air, is supplied by the air injection system through a check valve or through an air induction valve, or is absorbed from excess air in the unburned portion of the air/fuel mixture. By means of a chemical reaction process as it passes through the catalytic converter, the excess air in the air/fuel mixture (which has not been burned during the combustion process) is utilized to minimize HC and CO emissions. The exhaust gas which is left unburned during combustion process is gradually oxidized with excess oxygen, and is converted into harmless carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). The catalytic converter, located in the exhaust line, further cleans exhaust gases through catalytic action, and changes residual hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) before the exhaust gas is discharged to the atmosphere. Page 4209 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 307 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2282 This valve, Figs. 14 and 15, monitors exhaust pressures to activate the diaphragm. The valve controls vacuum applied to the EGR control valve. This allows the operation of the EGR control valve to be controlled by engine operating conditions. Page 1527 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 4258 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 549 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 289 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 743 Page 1624 Index For Main Harness Part 1 Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery. Connector ID is 79M. Page 1985 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 644 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 2720 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 4740 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair When replacing evaporator, add 2.7 oz. of new refrigerant oil on 300ZX or 2.4 oz. on all other models. Fig. 15 Instrument panel attachment plate removal. PULSAR & SENTRA 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and discharge system refrigerant. 2. Disconnect refrigerant lines from evaporator, plugging all openings, then remove piping grommet and cover. 3. Remove passenger side instrument lower cover and glove compartment. 4. Remove attachment plate from instrument panel, Fig. 15. Fig. 16 Instrument panel cut lines. Fig. 17 Instrument panel cut lines. 5. Using hacksaw blade, cut instrument panel on cut lines, Figs. 16 and 17. Cover blower motor vent holes with tape before cutting and brush shavings away from area around blower motor and remove tape after cutting. 6. Remove blower motor unit. 7. Remove cooling unit. 8. Separate cooling unit case halves and remove evaporator. 9. Disconnect and remove expansion valve. 10. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Ensure that expansion valve is properly positioned. Page 3857 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4116 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 2307 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 396 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1048 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 108 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Page 419 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 1762 Vehicle Speed Sensor The vehicle speed sensor produces an alternating voltage signal. This alternating signal (analog) is converted to a digital signal for processing. The control unit can only process digital signals. Analog signals must be converted to a digital form before the information can be used by the control unit. Control Unit Logic The control unit processes digital signals in two forms. To the control unit the signal is either ON or OFF. In computer logic an ON or high voltage signal is a "1" and an OFF or low voltage signal is a "O". The control unit uses combinations of these signals to control its outputs. The controller uses inputs from many sensors to determine what outputs it will make and at what time it will make them. These outputs control a variety of functions from automatic speed control to engine driveability. Outputs An output is simply an action the control unit tells an electrical component to make. Based on the calculations the control unit makes of the inputs, it will signal an action. The output can tell a component to perform a function for a period of time. Power and Ground Control The ECU controls either a component's power or ground. To understand this, refer to the diagrams. If the ECU is between the electrical component (load) and the power source, the ECU controls its power. ^ If the component is between the power source and the ECU, the ECU controls the component ground. VOLTAGE DROP TEST Service and Diagnosis Precautions Before diagnosing any electronic controlled circuits the following cautions should be followed: 1. Make sure the following parts and systems are in good condition and are operating properly. ^ Battery output ^ Battery terminals ^ Grounds ^ System connectors are properly positioned and connected 2. Never use a test lamp to check an electronically controlled circuit. 3. Do not drop, jar or shake electronic components. Follow the trouble diagnosis charts in the appropriate section of the Service Manual to isolate which component may be the incident part. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage Drop Tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Part of the available voltage is used by the resistance. When there is excessive resistance, less voltage is available for other loads (lights, motors, etc.) in the circuit. Since each resistance in a circuit uses voltage, a voltmeter can be used to isolate the cause of the problem. A voltage drop across closed contacts can indicate excessive resistance. This can cause the circuit to operate incorrectly. Remember, a switch is not a load. During diagnosis, use a voltmeter to measure the voltage drop across each switch contact while the circuit is in operation. Page 2719 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2144 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1074 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2222 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plugs for: ^ Improper gap ^ Carbon deposits ^ Cracked center electrode insulator ^ Burned or worn electrodes (may be caused by): ^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling ^ Fouled plug (may be caused by): ^ Rich fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires 2. Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded. Standard Type BCPR5ES-11 (NGK) Hot Type BCPR4ES-11 (NGK) Cold Type BCPR6ES-11 (NGK) Spark Plug Gap 3. Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. Electrode Gap: 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) Page 5514 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. To remove, raise rear wiper arm off glass and remove retaining nut. 3. Remove tailgate inner trim panel, if necessary, and disconnect electrical connection at motor. 4. Remove wiper motor retaining bolts. 5. Remove wiper motor. 6. To install, reverse procedure. Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Top Of Transaxle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2352 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 2454 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 602 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 3377 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 5063 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Service and Repair Instrument Panel Circuit Board: Service and Repair Fig. 12 Exploded view of instrument panel. 1987-88 Sentra 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove steering column covers. 3. Remove screws securing cluster lid ``A,'' then remove the cluster lid, Fig. 12. 4. Disconnect electrical connectors from combination meter. 5. Disconnect speedometer cable. 6. Remove combination meter retaining screws, then the combination meter, Fig. 12. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 395 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2204 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4804 A list of Johnstone Supply outlets who stock SUNISO 5GS oil in one quart containers . There may also be other oulets in your area that carry SUNISO 5GS. This would most commmonly be a firm specializing in industrial A/C and refrigeration supplies. WARRANTY INFORMATION: When billing for "SUNISO 5GS" on warranty claims, use "local" part number: LOCALCOMPR. Audio - Aftermarket Phone/Audio Installation Precautions Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Aftermarket Phone/Audio Installation Precautions Classification: Section: GI92-001 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-003 Models: All Models Date: January 16, 1992 AFTERMARKET CELLULAR PHONE AND AUDIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION APPLIED MODELS: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Many customers request installation of aftermarket cellular phones and audio equipment at the time of new vehicle purchase. Nissan does not authorize or warrant non-Nissan approved parts or accessories installed in Nissan vehicles. If these installations are made, they should be checked routinely after sublet work has been performed to help eliminate customer complaints. The following guidelines should be followed: 1. Route wires at least 18" away from ECU and air bag controller. Use high quality shielded cables for all signal cables (98% shielded). 2. Do not tap into wires that are part of any safety or ECCS equipment, such as airbag, brake lights, turn indicators, warning lights, ABS, fuel injection, etc. Power should come from the battery or the accessory circuit. Ground leads should terminate at the battery. Always use inline fuses as close to the power source as possible. 3. Use wire ties to securely fasten new harness in vehicle. 4. Before any panels or finishers are replaced, ensure that all fasteners are in good condition and are properly located. 5. When it is necessary for additional harnesses or cables to pass under the edge of a finisher, such as a cellular phone antenna coaxial cables, notch the finisher at that point so that it will fit back into place correctly. 6. Glass-mounted cellular phone antennas are affected by defroster wires in the window. Mount the antenna as high on the glass as possible and at least 1/2" away from defroster wires. 7 Test drive all vehicles to listen for squeaks or rattles. NOTE: Please supply a copy of these guidelines to accessory installation shops that your dealership or customers use regularly. Page 4255 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 4781 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 3366 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4473 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Top Of Transaxle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 87 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Locations Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 998 Page 3470 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removing Spark Plug Boot REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition wire from the spark plug with a twisting and pulling motion. CAUTION: Pull on the boot only. Do not pull on the wire. 2. Using compressed air, blow out the area at the base of the spark plug to remove any debris USE SAFETY GLASSES. 3. Using a 5/8" (16mm) flex socket and extension, remove the spark plugs (counterclockwise rotation). INSTALLATION 1. Using a suitable tool, check and adjust the spark plug gap. ELECTRODE GAP 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) 2. Using a suitable rubber hose or designated tool, start the spark plugs by hand (clockwise rotation). 3. Tighten and torque the spark plugs. SPARK PLUG TORQUE 14 - 22 ft. lbs. (20 - 29 N-m / 2.0 - 3.0 kg-m) 4. Apply a small amount of di-electric compound to the inside of the spark plug boots. 5. Reinstall the spark plug boots. Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 3154 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation The electronic control unit adjusts fuel pump operation to engine operating conditions. The signals from various sensors and switches are used to control fuel pump operation. Fig. 39 Fuel pump control chart. Fig. 39 Engine Controls - ECM Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification Classification: EF & EC 93-013 Section: Engine Fuel Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-167 Models: Various Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED MODELS: SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 341 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Locations Fender: Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Page 3617 Page 3841 condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees Celsius (140 Fahrenheit). If the incident occurs while heating the unit you will need to replace the component or make sure it is properly insulated from the heat source. 3. Freezing If the customer indicates the incident goes away after the car warms up (wintertime) the cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car over night. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, be prepared to do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method to diagnose for a freezing component is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. If reinstalling the part into the car results in the incident reoccurring you will need to repair or replace that component. 4. Water Intrusion If the incident only occurs during high humidity or rainy/snowy periods, it could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. 5. Electrical Load If the incident appears to be electrical load sensitive, perform diagnosis while all accessories are turned on including, A/C, rear defog, radio, fog lamps, etc. 6. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may only occur when the car is started cold or when the car is restarted (hot) shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Testing Circuits Page 1516 Page 4540 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 1139 Page 3948 Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 5352 Cruise Control: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 4043 Fig. 5 AD18B type front disc brake disassembled Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1958 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Testing and Inspection Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection a. Check to see if throttle valve fully opens when accelerator pedal is fully depressed and if it returns to idle when released. b. Adjust accelerator wire according to following procedure. Tighten "Adjusting nut" until "throttle drum" starts to move. From that position turn back "Adjusting nut" 1.5 - 2 turns, and fasten it with a lock nut. c. Check accelerator control parts for improper contact with any adjacent parts. d. When connecting accelerator wire, be careful not to twist or scratch its inner wire. e. Apply a light coat of recommended multi-purpose grease to all sliding or friction surfaces. Do not apply grease to wire. f. On automatic transaxle models, adjust A/T throttle wire Page 5140 You can contact the paint refinish company's technical assistance number listed. Akzo/Sikkens Procedure ICI AUTOCOLOR Procedure DuPont Procedure Glasurit Procedure Martin Senour (NAPA) Procedure PPG Procedure R-M Procedure Sherwin Williams Procedure Spies Hecker Procedure Herberts Standox Procedure Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 335a A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 2173 Idle Speed: Specifications Base Idle Speed Controlled Idle Speed Adjusted with Throttle Sensor disconnected. Manual Transmission 750 +/- 25 rpm 800 +/- 100 rpm Automatic Transmission 670 +/- 25 rpm 700 +/- 100 rpm In "D" Position. Page 3467 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 546 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 1501 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4201 Page 4510 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 2092 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1597 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plugs for: ^ Improper gap ^ Carbon deposits ^ Cracked center electrode insulator ^ Burned or worn electrodes (may be caused by): ^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling ^ Fouled plug (may be caused by): ^ Rich fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires 2. Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded. Standard Type BCPR5ES-11 (NGK) Hot Type BCPR4ES-11 (NGK) Cold Type BCPR6ES-11 (NGK) Spark Plug Gap 3. Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. Electrode Gap: 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) Page 5511 Wiper Motor: Diagrams Rear Wiper Motor Replace 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. To remove, raise rear wiper arm off glass and remove retaining nut. 3. Remove tailgate inner trim panel, if necessary, and disconnect electrical connection at motor. 4. Remove wiper motor retaining bolts. 5. Remove wiper motor. 6. To install, reverse procedure. Page 1037 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Page 276 Inspection Procedure Page 3832 Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 299 Page 657 Fig. 18 Turning angle specifications STEERING ANGLE When a vehicle negotiates a turn, the inner wheel must turn at a sharper angle than the outer wheel, and the outer wheel must travel farther than the inner wheel. Vehicle steering geometry is calculated to allow for these variations, causing the outer wheel to to-out by a calibrated amount. This toe-out on turns is also referred to as steering angle and on these models, is generally checked at two positions. The first position is at a reference point on the inner wheel travel while the second position of measurement is at full steering lock. To check steering angles, proceed as follows: 1. Place unladen vehicle on suitable alignment rack and ensure that kingpin angle, caster, camber and toe settings are within specifications. Page 2174 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Speed Control The idle speed is controlled by the E.C.C.S. control unit, corresponding to the engine operating conditions. The E.C.C.S. control unit senses the engine condition and determines the best idle speed at each water temperature and gear position. The control unit then sends an electronic signal corresponding to the difference between the best idle speed and the actual idle speed to the A.A.C. valve. INPUT SIGNAL AND AIR FLOW The opening of the I.S.C. valve is controlled by an ON-duty signal fed to the opening solenoid. (When the opening solenoid is "ON", the closing solenoid is "OFF", and vice versa.) The longer the ON-duty signal on the opening solenoid, the greater the I.S.C. valve opening and the greater the amount of airflow. Page 3035 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 4807 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 1494 Page 5045 Diagnostic Procedure # 9 Zone continuity Diagnostic Procedure # 10 Alarm will not silence with key Diagnostic Procedure # 11 No alarm with impact Diagnostic Procedure # 12 Engine will not crank Diagnostic Procedure # 13 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Checks Impact Sensor Inspection Siren Check Console Switch Inspection System Pin Test Circuit Diagram Preparation For System Checks Service Parts Listing Control Unit The control unit is located under the instrument panel. The unit consists of a radio receiver which receives signals from the remote control transmitters and a micro processor which receives various input signals and controls the system output. Power is supplied at all times through a 10 amp in-line fuse to terminals # 2 and # 5. System ground is supplied through terminal # 1. Inputs a) The console switch (located on the center console) inputs selected operating modes. When the switch is in the AUTO mode no signal is supplied to the control unit. When in the IMPACT OFF mode a 12 volt signal is supplied through terminal # 18 and when in the ALARM OFF mode a 12 volt signal is supplied through terminal # 17. b) The impact sensor supplies a pulse to the control unit through terminals # 14 (light impact) and # 11 (heavy impact). c) The trunk room lamp switch supplies input through terminal # 9 indicating that the trunk has been opened. This will trigger an alarm when the system is armed or an error code when attempting to arm the system with the trunk open. d) The hood switch supplies input through terminal # 8 indicating that the hood is open. This will trigger an alarm if opened with the system armed or an error tone when attempting to arm the system with the hood open. e) The door switch supplies input through terminal # 10 indicating that a vehicle door has been opened. This will trigger an alarm if opened when the system is armed or an error tone when attempting to arm the system with a door open. f) The ignition switch supplies input through terminal # 19 indicating that the switch is in the ACC position. This signal will disarm the system when passively armed, silence the alarm or disallow the system to be armed. g) The door lock timer supplies input through terminal # 16 indicating that the doors have been locked with the power door lock switch (passive arming). Outputs a) Terminal # 20 supplies a pulse to the door lock timer to lock the doors when locked or armed with the remote control. b) Terminal # 12 supplies a pulse to the door lock timer to unlock the doors when unlocked or disarmed with the remote control. c) Terminal # 6 supplies a ground output to sound the siren. d) Terminal # 13 supplies a ground output to illuminate the LED on the console switch. e) Terminal # 21 supplies a ground output to turn on the interior light when the system is disarmed and flashes the light when an alarm is sounding. Start Cut The ignition switch start signal is routed to the control unit through terminal # 7 and relayed out through terminal # 4. In the event that an alarm is sounded the control unit will not relay the start signal out until the system has been disarmed. Service Procedure Single Stage Converter Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Single Stage Converter The catalytic converter accelerates the chemical reaction of hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) in the exhaust gas, and changes them into harmless carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). The chemical reaction process requires the proper amount of air. This air, called secondary air, is supplied by the air injection system through a check valve or through an air induction valve, or is absorbed from excess air in the unburned portion of the air/fuel mixture. By means of a chemical reaction process as it passes through the catalytic converter, the excess air in the air/fuel mixture (which has not been burned during the combustion process) is utilized to minimize HC and CO emissions. The exhaust gas which is left unburned during combustion process is gradually oxidized with excess oxygen, and is converted into harmless carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). The catalytic converter, located in the exhaust line, further cleans exhaust gases through catalytic action, and changes residual hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) before the exhaust gas is discharged to the atmosphere. Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Page 1934 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 3351 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Testing and Inspection Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Switch: Testing and Inspection While the engine is cool and idling, disconnect the inlet vacuum hose of the vacuum motor and make sure that intake manifold vacuum is present at the end of the vacuum hose. If vacuum is weak or is not present at all, check the vacuum hose for leakage. Replace the temperature sensor if the vacuum hoses are in good order. And after the engine warms up, make sure that no vacuum is present there. If any, replace the temperature sensor. Page 4413 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 5051 SYMPTOM: System will not passive arm when driver's door lock switch is pressed. Diagnostic Procedure # 5 SYMPTOM: Clearance lights do not flash Diagnostic Procedure # 6 SYMPTOM: No sound from siren Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Page 2170 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Torque Converter Cover: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Classification: Section: AT90-002 Automatic Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-010 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: February 8, 1990 F01A AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra XE 1987-1990 Pulsar NX XE SERVICE INFORMATION Some of the Applied Models equipped with the F01A Automatic Transaxles may exhibit transmission fluid leakage from the converter housing and/or the front cover gasket area(s). To improve the sealing performance at these locations, new bolts for the torque converter housing and the front cover are now used in production, and the tightening torque for these bolts has been changed to eliminate this condition. In addition, a new torque converter housing gasket is available as a service replacement part for these vehicles. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated areas, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the front cover and/or torque converter housing, thoroughly clean and inspect (for porosities, surface damage, etc.) all mating surfaces. Install a new converter housing gasket and new bolts, being certain to apply sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the incident area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Testing and Inspection Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Air density becomes thinner at higher altitudes. Therefore, the carburetor produces too rich an air/fuel mixture at higher altitudes. The altitude compensator automatically corrects air/fuel ratio to an optimum mixture. When vehicle is operated in a high altitude environment, the bellows in the compensator extends, causing the lever attached to the bellows to push up the needle. When the needle is pushed up the air passage becomes wider, allowing larger amounts of air to flow from the altitude compensator to the carburetor, thereby thinning the air/fuel mixture. Electronic Controlled Carburetor (ECC) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Page 2013 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1551 AB-/BC VALVE CONTROL When the idle switch is OFF, the I.S.C. valve opens in response to the amount of intake air and engine speed. When the accelerator pedal is released, additional air is led into the intake manifold, actuating as AB- or BC valve. Page 440 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Page 126 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 773 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2301 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VE30DE MAXIMA (A32) VQ30DE Page 233 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair The stop light switch is located on the brake pedal support. 1. Disconnect the switch electrical connectors. 2. Loosen switch retaining locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Page 2322 TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i VAN (C22) Z241 200SX (S100) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E Page 1072 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 5279 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Page 3365 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 829 Ignition Cable: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2996 Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1285 4. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the lower radiator hose. Observe how the hose fits and its shape as installed in the vehicle. Mark the engine end of the hose with tape or chalk. Remove the hose from the vehicle. (Stanza: remove end of hose connected to radiator only.) 5. 200SX: Refer to Figures 5 and 6 Measure 15 inches from the engine end of the hose and make a mark. From this mark measure 1-1/2" towards the radiator end and mark (Fig. 6). Using these two marks, cut a 1-1/2" section from the hose. Be sure the cut piece is on a straight section of hose and try to keep the hose in its original shape. Page 2524 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 3303 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 3758 This vibration/buzzing may be generated from the shift linkage control rod. The fit between the connecting pin and bushing in the joint at the transmission end of the control rod has been improved to eliminate this incident (see illustrations). NOTE: The control rod is available only as an assembly. SERVICE PROCEDURE If this incident exists on a vehicle manufactured before the applied dates, replace the control rod assembly as shown in the appropriate Service Manual. PARTS INFORMATION CONTROL ROD ASSY MODEL PART NUMBER B12 2WD 34103-50M00 N13 E16 34103-50M00 CA16D 34103-55M00 Page 2066 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 150 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 731 Page 1046 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Page 2974 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4261 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. R12 Refrigerant - Conservation/Recycling Technical Service Bulletin # HA90006 Date: 900315 R12 Refrigerant - Conservation/Recycling Classification: Section: HA90-006 Air Conditioning Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-028 Models: All Models with A/C Date: March 15, 1990 CFC REFRIGERANT CONSERVATION AND RECYCLING APPLIED MODELS: All models equipped with air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION: Because of environmental concerns, it is extremely important that we all take every precaution to reduce or eliminate the release of CFC refrigerant (R12) into the air. Recycling Equipment In Your Dealership If your dealership has not already received one, you will receive a Kent-Moore ACR(3) J- 38100-NI Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling System within the next few days. This machine will recover the refrigerant from any vehicle you service, clean the refrigerant, remove all moisture and oil, and place the refrigerant into a 30 lb. container for re-use. To save our atmosphere, you must use the machine every time you perform A/C service that requires a purge of the refrigerant. Maintenance Is Essential If the recycling equipment is maintained properly, it can clean and purify the removed refrigerant so that it will exceed the SAE standards for content of moisture, oil, air and noncondensibles. Like any equipment, however, this machine will operate at its best efficiency only if it is maintained properly. This means you must check the moisture indicator often and replace the filter drier core whenever necessary. You must make sure the correct manifold gauge and hoses are used in all cases, and that the valves in the hoses are working properly. Make sure the unit stays clean and that the hoses are always hung up away from contamination when the unit is not in use. Destruction of the Earth's Ozone Layer Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Top Of Transaxle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1663 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 2600 Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Switch This switch, used on some models, is attached on the left side of the instrument panel in the driver's compartment. This switch consists of a bellows and a microswitch. The switch transmits an ``On'' or ``Off'' signal to the control unit according to change in atmospheric pressure. When the atmospheric pressure drops below 26 in. Hg, an ``On'' signal is transmitted to decrease fuel by 6%. Page 791 All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Intake 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 in Page 986 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 5221 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 696 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 1328 Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Poly-Groove Belt - Tension Inspection Classification: Section: GI89-008 General Information Reference: SERVICE ADVISORY TS89-077 Models: All models Date: May 18, 1989 When installing a new poly-groove belt or replacing a used one, use the following procedure. 1. Install the belt and set the belt tension. 2. Start the engine and run it for approximately 30 seconds. Switch the engine off. 3. Check the belt tension and reset as needed. Locations Engine Compartment Component Locations Page 2604 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 2480 Inspection Procedure Page 5315 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3350 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1160 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 727 Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer A/C - White Flakes From Registers Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes From Registers Classification: HA93-014 Reference: NTB93-132 Date: September 12, 1993 WHITE FLAKES FROM VENTS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Sentra (B13) and Altima (U13) APPLIED DATE(S): Sentra built before 7/29/93 Altima built before 7/29/93 SERVICE INFORMATION Some air conditioning units may exhibit white flakes blowing from the vents for a short time when the air conditioning is first turned on. The flakes are 1 mm or less in diameter and fall on interior surfaces like a light snow. This incident can be resolved by replacing the evaporator with an improved unit according to the procedure below. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the appropriate Service Manual instructions to replace the evaporator with the countermeasure unit listed on the following page (there is no new part number -- check for the proper date stamp indicated in the Parts Information section). When installing the new evaporator into the vehicle, make sure that the evaporator case drain tube is correctly aligned to the drain hose and that there are no obstructions. NOTE: To minimize the flakes remaining in the heater and air conditioning system, vacuum or blow out with compressed air any visible flakes in the heater assembly before reinstalling the new evaporator assembly. Warm soapy water may be used to clean the inside of the evaporator case, heater case, and all ductwork. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1720 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE Page 4342 FIGURE 6 14. Remove the center exhaust tube (Figure 6). 15. Remove the plastic finisher from the steering gear access hole at the left wheel well. FIGURE 7 16. Remove the shift linkage from the transaxle. 17. Position the jack under the transaxle (Figure 7). 18. Remove the 3 body side bolts on the transfer case rear mount. Slowly lower the jack 3 inches. NOTE: Be careful not to lower unit more than 3 inches. This may over-stretch electrical harnesses and cooling hoses. 19. Remove the remaining steering gear support clamp bolts. 20. Slide the gear out through the access hole at the left wheel well. FIGURE 8 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE: 1. Adjust "L" dimension on both tie rods. Tie rod "L" length is 175.9 mm (6.9 in) (Figure 8). 2. Slide rack into place as it was removed. Be careful not to bend lines or damage boots. Place right and left steering gear clamps on rack before moving into final position. 3. Hand tighten the 2 bolts on the right steering gear clamp. Locations Power Transistor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 471 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Page 3038 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1546 All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. Testing and Inspection Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection Fig. 54 Thermal vacuum valve test 1. Drain a portion of engine coolant, then remove thermal vacuum valve from engine. 2. Inhale air from air cleaner side port, Fig. 54. Ensure valve opens at temperatures between 59°F and 140°F and is closed at all other temperatures. Do not allow water to get inside valve. Page 3839 When probing a connector it is possible to enlarge the contact spring opening. Refer to figure. If this occurs it may create an intermittent signal in the circuit. When probing a connector, use care not to enlarge the opening. If the probe of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) you are using will not fit into the connector cavity, you can back probe the connector with a "T" pin to create an extension. Most DMM's have accessory alligator clips which slide over the probe to allow clipping the "T" pin for a better contact. Refer to figure. If you have any difficulty probing a terminal, inspect the terminal to ensure you have not accidentally opened the contact spring or pulled a wire loose. Behind The Instrument Panel Page 3011 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Description and Operation Deceleration Valve: Description and Operation This system is designed to reduce oil consumption when intake manifold vacuum increases to an extremely high level during deceleration. This system consists of a boost control unit which acts as a vacuum manifold sensor and a bypass control unit which acts as an activator. The boost control unit senses manifold vacuum and when the level of manifold vacuum increases above preset value, the boost control valve opens and transmits the manifold vacuum to the air bypass control unit. The manifold vacuum then pulls the diaphragm and opens the bypass air control valve, causing the air to be bypassed to the intake manifold, lowering manifold vacuum. This results in closing of the boost control valve and then closing of the air control valve. This system operates in a tightly controlled circuit so that manifold vacuum can be kept very close to the preset value during deceleration. Page 548 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Page 698 M/T - F30A/F31A Fluid Leaks Case: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - F30A/F31A Fluid Leaks Classification: Section: MT90-001 Manual Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-024 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: March 15, 1990 F30A & F31A MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra (B12) 1987-1990 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The F30A/F31A manual transaxles used on the Applied Models listed above (check the appropriate model Service Manual for manual transaxle application) may exhibit transmission oil leakage between the clutch housing and the transaxle case due to insufficient case bolt torque. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION To improve the sealing performance at this area, a higher grade bolt is now used in production, and the housing bolt tightening torque has been increased. If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated area, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the transaxle case halves, thoroughly clean and inspect the mating surfaces for porosities, surface damage, etc. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces, then install the new bolts, being certain to apply additional sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the indicated area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Page 2063 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 978 Page 410 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1502 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1254 Tune-Up Kit Contents This kit provides three, 12 ounce plastic bottles and related fittings to replace the existing 7 ounce bottles. These bottles will accommodate the proper lubricant charge when retrofitting from R-12 to R-134a refrigerant systems. PARTS INFORMATION DESCRIPTION KENT-MOORE PART # Variable Timing Control (VTC) Sprocket Rebuild Kit J41471 A/C Leak Detector Tune-up Kit J39400-Tune up ACR4 Lubricant Injection Bottle Conversion Kit J39500-71N Page 3986 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Axle Bearing and Knuckle Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Axle Bearing and Knuckle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 1324 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Transverse Link & Radius Rod Radius Arm: Service and Repair Transverse Link & Radius Rod Fig. 25 Rear suspension. 4WD Sentra 4WD SENTRA Page 737 ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Instruments - Speedometer Noise Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Speedometer Noise Classification: EL88-008 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-094 Models: 1987-88 Sentra/Pulsar Date: July 11, 1988 SPEEDOMETER CABLE NOISE APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra, 1987-88 Pulsar except 1988 Pulsar SE APPLIED VINs: JAPAN BUILT SENTRA Before JN1PB22SXJU 028662 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB24SXJU 044462 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB22SXJU 574774 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB21SXJU 555932 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB26SXJU 016707 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25SXJU 021285 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25YXJU 005931 04/01/88 production U.S. BUILT SENTRA 1987 1988 All PULSAR Before JN1PN34SXJM 500050 05/01/88 production SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987-88 Sentra and Pulsar vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzzing noise from the center of the instrument panel at engine speeds of 2500-3500 RPM. If a customer complains of this type of noise, perform the following diagnostics to determine if the speedometer cable is the cause. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to verify speedometer cable noise: 1. Start engine with transmission in neutral (M/T) or park (A/T). Raise RPM to 3500 and hold for 5-10 seconds. 2. Listen for rattling or buzzing from the speedometer head area. 3. Return engine to idle and turn off ignition. 4. Disconnect speedometer cable from transaxle and let hang. Be sure to position the cable so that it isn't touching the engine or transaxle. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If the noise can be heard in Step 2, but is not present during Step 5, replace the speedometer cable assembly with the improved (insulated) cable assembly listed below. If the noise is still present, reinstall the speedometer cable and contact the FIXS Hotline for additional information. PARTS INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION NEW PART NUMBER FORMER PART NUMBER Speedometer 25050-01Y00 25050-60A01 Cable Assembly 25050-60A00 EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5199 DOOR MIRROR REPLACEMENT GLASS Page 4119 NOTE: ^ The BSC is equipped with a scanner that can be used to scan the VIN on most vehicles. ^ Scanning the VIN will give the tester the [CCA rating] information for original equipment batteries. ^ For replacement batteries, the [CCA rating] from the battery label must be entered into the BSC manually. For Nissan Original Equipment Batteries: ^ When using the BSC, make sure the correct vehicle [CCA rating] is entered by scanning the VIN, or entering it manually from the battery label. NOTE: If the VIN cannot be scanned, enter it manually. ^ Make sure to select "ORG EQUIPMENT" on the tester. ^ The [CCA RATING] entered during testing is recorded in the 12-character test output code required for warranty repairs. ^ Claims that are submitted with incorrect [CCA RATING] may be suspended or denied. Genuine Nissan Replacement Batteries (service part replacements for Nissan Original Equipment Batteries): ^ Scan the VIN, select "GEN REPLACEMENT", then Manually enter the CCA rating from the battery label into the BSC. NOTE: If the VIN cannot be scanned, enter it manually. IMPORTANT: When using the BSC, you will get inaccurate test results if you don't enter the correct [CCA RATING] ^ The [CCA RATING] entered during testing is recorded in the 12-character test output code required for warranty repairs. ^ Claims that are submitted with incorrect [CCA RATING] may be suspended or denied. Disclaimer Page 1998 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Page 4178 Fuse Block: Fuse and Fusible Link Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4799 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Identification Classification: HA95-017 Reference: NTB95-106 Date: October 18, 1995 AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) LUBRICANT/OIL FOR NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin supersedes HA94-001. (94-013, 02/01/94) APPLIED VEHICLES: All equipped with A/C SERVICE INFORMATION Nissan has four different A/C lubricant/oil products available. Different systems will require different types of lubricants/oils. All R134a equipped vehicles have a label under the hood that specifies the type of lubricant required for the system on that vehicle. A description of the type of compressor and lubricant/oil required is also listed in the Service Data and Specifications at the end of the HA section in the appropriate service manual. During A/C servicing, if lubricant/oil needs to be added to the system, please refer to the list of PAG (poly alkaline glycol) lubricants and refrigerant oils listed in this bulletin. NOTE: Quest vehicles produced on or after November 29, 1993 with R134a refrigerant, will require a special compressor lubricant. The recommended compressor lubricant for this vehicle only is: Type F-R134a PAG lubricant, part number KLH00-PAGQF. Page 1990 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3367 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1288 Engine Block Heater: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Block Heater Precaution Models: All Models Section: Engine Mechanical Classification: EM88-004 Bulletin No.: TS88-025 Date: February 22, 1988 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER APPLIED MODELS: All models SERVICE INFORMATION Engine antifreeze in more than 50% concentration has been found to adversely affect the life and performance of the engine block heater. High phosphate content in the antifreeze forms a scale around the heating element of the block heater, causing the temperature to rise, with subsequent failure of the seals. Therefore, for best results it is recommended that you use a concentration no greater than 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Air Injection Valve Air Induction Valve: Testing and Inspection Air Injection Valve 1. Disconnect air injection hose from injection pipe side of valve. 2. Apply vacuum to air injection control valve using a suitable hand vacuum pump and ensure air flows only on injection pipe side while control valve is operated. Page 2132 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4005 Fig. 5 AD18B type front disc brake disassembled Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Page 4226 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Harmonic Balancer Harmonic Balancer Vibration Damper Or Pulley 87 ft.lb Page 1884 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4619 Air Door Cable: Service and Repair Air Control 1. Set air control lever at DEF position. 2. Move link lever toward passenger compartment. 3. Connect air control cable to link lever and clamp the cable. 4. Move floor door lever toward passenger compartment. 5. Connect floor door control rod to floor door lever. 6. Ensure that knob moves smoothly. Page 3558 - Adjust throttle wire stroke when throttle wire/accelerator wire is installed or after carburetor has been adjusted. - Put marks on throttle wire to facilitate measuring wire stroke. If throttle wire stroke is improperly adjusted, the following problems may arise. When full-open position "P1" of throttle drum is closer to direction "T", shift schedule will be as shown by (2) in figure above, and kickdown range will greatly increase. - When full-open position "P1" of throttle drum is closer to direction "U", shift schedule will be as shown by (1) in figure above, and kickdown range will not occur. 5. After properly adjusting throttle wire, ensure the parting line is as straight as possible. Page 2526 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 4974 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Page 5262 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the Page 3907 Brake Pad: Specifications Pad Minimum Thickness 0.079 in Page 4776 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant (R12) Recycling Models: All Models Section: Heater & Air Conditioner Classification: HA90-003 Bulletin No.: NTB90-016 Date: February 15, 1990 REFRIGERANT (R12) RECYCLING APPLIED MODEL: All models equipped with air conditioning SERVICE INFORMATION: It has been established and documented that when the Chlorofluorocarbon refrigerant (R-12) most commonly used in automotive air conditioning systems is released into the air, it works its way upward and, by chemical reaction, eventually results in the destruction of the "ozone layer" in the earth's upper atmosphere. Ozone, a special form of oxygen, protects the surface of the earth by reflecting powerful ultra violet radiation from the sun back into space. Among other dangers, ultra violet radiation causes skin cancer and eye cataracts in humans and it causes damage and decreased production in food crops. In order to prevent further damage to the earth's ozone, the U.S. government joined a group of nations in signing the Montreal protocol to reduce and eventually halt all production of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) over the next few years. Nissan supports all efforts to avoid release of these hazardous materials into the environment. As part of this effort, A/C systems are being re-designed to use less refrigerant. The next step is to design systems that will use an alternate, non-damaging refrigerant. In the interim, it is imperative that the release of R-12 into the air be slowed and stopped as soon as possible. During the period February 19 to March 9, 1990, a refrigerant recycling unit will be shipped to your dealership from Kent-Moore Tool Co. as a mandatory special tool. This machine will remove the refrigerant from any vehicle whose A/C system you service or dismantle for scrap, recycle the refrigerant by removing all moisture and contaminants, and place it into a safe container for re-use. Until that recycling equipment arrives and is put to use in your dealership, here are some things you can do to decrease the amount of R-12 that you release into the environment: 1. Make sure your A/C service tools are in good working order, especially your leak detector and the vacuum pump you use for evacuating any A/C system you install or service. 2. Evacuate only once. Do not evacuate, charge, and then evacuate again before installing the final charge of refrigerant. Any extra evacuation allows excess refrigerant to spill into the atmosphere. 3. Wherever possible, do not use one-pound cans of refrigerant. Each time you change cans during a recharge, some refrigerant is lost to the atmosphere. Therefore, it is better to charge from a larger container (e.g., 30 lb.) and charge all at once instead of changing containers during the process. 4. When installing A/C kits or when repairing an in-service air conditioning system, use care and proper installation techniques to avoid introducing potential leaks into the system. This includes using a small amount of clean refrigerant oil to lubricate the tube and hose O-rings, using the correct torque wrench and backup wrench for tube and hose connections, and applying the correct torque specifications. 5. When repairing an in-service A/C system, always use new O-rings when re-assembling the connections. Your Nissan A/C Component Service Kit (p/n 999A1-A6000) contains O-rings for all popular Nissan air conditioners, as well as a detailed diagram of which O-ring to use at each connection. 6. Before charging any system with refrigerant, perform a "vacuum leak check." This procedure is described in your factory Service Manual under the heading "Checking Airtightness." Page 3585 4. Use hose clamps and temporarily connect a length of suitable hose between the bypass valve fittings that go to the oil cooler (see Figure 6). 5. Pinch/clamp the temporary hose to prevent flow through the loop (see Figure 6). 6. Cover the end of the bypass inlet line with a shop rag to catch any oil spray. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) into the outlet for 10 second intervals, three times (see Figure 6). 8. Re-connect the transmission lines and remove the temporary hose loop (see Figure 7). 9. Go to Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles). 1996-98 Pathfinder (R50) Cleaning the Optional Air Cooled Oil-Cooler (Air Cooler) 1. Place an oil drain pan under the A/T air cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 2. Disconnect the Inlet and Outlet hoses from the air cooler (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 8). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath the vapors or the spray mist. Page 4296 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Service and Repair Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove ashtray with bracket. 3. Remove radio attaching bolts, then the radio control knobs and trim panel. 4. Disconnect electrical connectors from radio, then remove radio from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Page 1579 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 400 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2440 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 775 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 5137 2. Grind the surface of the repair with 36 grit disc. Grind about 1-1/2" around the actual damage to obtain a taper for best adhesion. 3. Featheredge the paint around the repair with 180 grit disc. Wipe with a clean, dry rag and blow off with air. 4. Mix Flexible Parts Repair Material according to the instructions and apply to the repair with a squeegee, building it up higher than the undamaged area. Allow it to cure for 20-30 minutes at 60-80~F. 5. After curing, sand with 180 grit disc followed by 240 grit disc. 6. Fill sand scratches and pinholes with Flexible Parts Putty. Allow at least 15 minutes to dry then sand with 320 grit disc. Tools - Essential Tool Release, Engine, A/C Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Essential Tool Release, Engine, A/C Classification: T&E95-03; Reference: NTB95-030 Date: March 22, 1995 ESSENTIAL TOOL RELEASE SERVICE INFORMATION During the week of February 6, 1995, all Nissan dealers were sent the following special tools as part of the Essential Service Tool Program. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. J41471 Variable Timing Control (VTC) Sprocket Rebuild Kit. This kit provides the necessary tools to rebuild the VTC intake camshaft sprockets on the VE30DE engine. The initial shipment of this tool has been provided to all Nissan dealers at no charge. Additional kits can be purchased through the Tech-Mate Service Equipment and Special Tools program by calling 800-NMC-2001. Refer to Technical Bulletin NTB95-022 for proper usage of these tools. 2. J39400-A/C Leak Detector Tune-up Kit. This kit provides all the items necessary to perform preventive maintenance on the J39400 A/C Leak Detector. J 39400-TUNEUP Leak Detector Kit Page 1499 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Page 3649 Fig. 12 Rear axle replacement. 4WD Sentra 4WD SENTRA Refer to Fig. 12 for replacement, noting the following: 1. When raising and supporting vehicle, do not jack up at transverse links. 2. Disconnect brake hydraulic line and parking brake cable at equalizer. 3. Remove exhaust pipe and muffler attaching bolts. 4. Remove upper shock absorber attaching bolts. Mirrors - Installation of Glass On Door Mirror Mirrors: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Installation of Glass On Door Mirror Classification: Section: BF88-012 Body & Frame Reference TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-101 Models: All Date: August 15, 1988 INSTALLATION OF GLASS ON DOOR MIRROR APPLIED MODELS: All, except D21 SERVICE INFORMATION To improve serviceability, a glass replacement is now available when replacing broken glass on the door mirrors. Use the following installation procedure. PRECAUTIONS: ^ Take care when removing the glass. ^ Do not use excessive force. ^ Because of the difference between left and right mirrors, ensure that the proper replacement is used. ^ Prepare 700 - 1,OOOW heat gun. Removal ^ Warm up lip of glass base with heat gun. ^ Remove glass from glass base with scraper. Installation Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1685 Page 2104 Page 4671 Fan Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and remove A/C-heater control as outlined in ``Control Assembly, Replace.'' 2. Remove screws securing switch to control and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install and adjust control. Page 1465 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4247 Page 5275 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. Page 2548 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 1011 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 2270 Cranking Signal: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Wiring Diagram Page 2940 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 5326 1. Remove rear seat. 2. Remove rear shock absorber caps and wheelhouse finishers. It is recommended that the shock absorber caps are replaced with retro-fit caps listed in the parts information section. 3. Remove rear pillar finishers. 4. Locate the drilling point which is factory pre-scribed in the rear pillar finishers. 5. Using a 1" hole saw, drill the finisher at the marked location. 6. Remove original lap belts (female buckle side). 7. Install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque mounting bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 8. Remove the retracting side of the original lap belts. 9. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed in two steps. First, install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness. Then place the wheelhouse finisher and retro-fit shock absorber cap into position. Bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear side panel where the 1" hole was drilled. NOTE: Anchor/mounting bolt torque is 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 10. Fully tighten the wheelhouse panel finishers. 11. Check the retro-fit lap belts for smooth operation. 12. Reinstall rear seat. Pulsar Page 4891 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Page 468 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Page 1002 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Fig. 12 Exploded view of instrument panel. 1987-88 Sentra 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect heater hose at firewall connections of heater core. 3. Remove instrument panel, Fig. 12. Page 636 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 296 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 5138 7. Apply a double wet coat of Flexible Parts Coating. After a 10 minute flash time, apply a second double coat. Let dry 45 minutes and lightly scuff sand the coating with 320 grit disc. Apply color coats recommended for plastic body parts. Page 2538 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Page 685 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 584 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 3353 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Testing and Inspection Thermal Vacuum Valve - EVAP: Testing and Inspection Fig. 21 Thermal vacuum valve operating specifications Fig. 62 Thermal vacuum valve operating specifications. 1. Drain coolant from engine, then remove valve. 2. Apply vacuum to valve and make sure valve opens or closes in response to engine coolant temperature as specified, Fig. 21 & 62. Do not allow water to get inside thermal vacuum valve. Page 1538 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1590 Ignition Rotor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Rotor 1. Remove the screws securing the distributor cap to the distributor. 2. Confirm that the rotor does not turn on the distributor shaft. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Visually check the rotor for signs of "Burn Through" from the electrode to the distributor shaft. 5. Check the input (center) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 6. Check the output (outer) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 7. Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between the input (center) electrode and the output (outer) electrode. Replace the rotor if it fails the above tests. Page 5426 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair The stop light switch is located on the brake pedal support. 1. Disconnect the switch electrical connectors. 2. Loosen switch retaining locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Page 642 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 972 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 3372 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 5346 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Page 1519 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3309 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5049 Diagnostic Procedure # 1 SYMPTOM: No response from remote control NOTE! The remote controls that are supplied with the system are pre-programmed to the control unit. If the control unit or a remote control is replaced, the remote controls will need to be programmed to the control unit. The control unit can be programmed to receive up to four remote controls. However, when a remote control is programmed it may be necessary to program all remote controls that are to be used with the system. Refer to "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" for programming instructions. APPLICABLE BATTERIES: Eveready ECR-2032-BP Duracell DL-2032 Panasonic R-2032 Neda 5004-LC Or equivalent CR2032 Type Battery Diagnostic Procedure # 2 Page 2544 Digital signals are ON-OFF (Hi-Low) voltage pulses. This signal is a typical digital signal. Examples of common digital signals are: Battery Voltage The ignition switch in the ACC or ON position provides a battery voltage signal to several control units. This informs the control unit of the ignition position. Switch to Ground A door switch is a common example of a switch to ground. When the door is opened the door switch completes the circuit. The interior light is turned on. In addition, the time control unit is sent an OFF signal indicating the door is open. Pulse Voltage A pulse voltage is made up of alternating high and low voltage signals of varying duration. These signals are counted by the control unit within a predetermined time frame. Analog Input Signals An analog signal is a voltage that varies over a period of time. Analog signals are produced by sensors in the vehicle. Sensors change resistance to deliver variable voltage signals. The Oxygen Sensor sine wave signals shown are typical analog signals. These charts are example signals printed using CONSULT. ^ The first chart shows an Oxygen Sensor lean (low voltage) condition. ^ The second chart is a normal Oxygen Sensor voltage printout. ^ The third chart illustrates an Oxygen Sensor rich (high voltage) condition. Examples of common sensors are: Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors change resistance with a change in temperature. This temperature is converted into an analog voltage range. Page 1482 Description and Operation Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Description and Operation Fig. 20 Air regulator The air regulator, Fig. 20, bypasses the throttle valve to control the quantity of air for increasing the engine idling speed when starting the engine at an underhood temperature of below 176°F. A bi-metal and a heater are incorporated into the air regulator. When the ignition switch is turned to the ``Start'' position or when the engine is running, electric current flows through the heater, and the bi-metal, as it is heated by the heater, begins to move and closes the air passage in a few minutes. The air passage remains closed until the engine is stopped and the underhood air temperature drops below 176°F. Page 4739 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection A faulty evaporator will provide insufficient cooling to the vehicle. The core may be restricted with dirt, the case may be cracked, or a seal may be leaking sufficiently to prevent cooling. If evaporator restriction is due to icing, the expansion valve, capillary tube or suction throttling valve, if equipped, may be at fault and should be investigated. Since there is a constant condensation of atmospheric moisture on the outside of the evaporator coils, ensure that the draining system is unobstructed and clean. Page 3638 Axle Bearing: Adjustments ALL MODELS Refer to "Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Bearings" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 2148 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Engine Controls - ECM Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification Classification: EF & EC 93-013 Section: Engine Fuel Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-167 Models: Various Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED MODELS: SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 3001 Page 4003 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Model AD18V Minimum Refinish Thickness 0.630 in Lateral Runout (T.I.R.) 0.0028 in Model CL18B Minimum Refinish Thickness 0.394 in Lateral Runout (T.I.R.) 0.0028 in Page 4430 Fig. 9 Upper Spring Seat Installation Direction. 1987-90 2WD Models Fig. 10 Upper Spring Seat Installation Direction. 1987-90 4WD Models Fig. 11 Upper Spring Seat Installation Direction. 1991-92 Models Page 2519 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E, VE30DE NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Page 2474 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1935 Page 2115 Idle Speed: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Hose: Testing and Inspection 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Idle Speed Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Classification: Section: Engine Fuel EF&EC88-017; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-115 Models: 1988 Sentra & Pulsar (E16i) Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED MODEL: 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16i SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. PARTS INFORMATION Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. PART DESCRIPTION 1988 PART NUMBER 1987 PART NUMBER E16i Mixture Heater 16174-61A61 16174-69A10 (B12/N13) Page 4466 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Page 5336 1. Remove headliner finisher. 2. Measure 9-1/4" from front edge of rear pillar and chalk mark hole location for upper anchor bolt. Pull headliner about 1" away from roof to check bolt hole alignment with chalk mark. There is a seam at this point so be very careful when pulling on the headliner. Use a pick or an awl to punch a starter hole in the headliner. Using a sharp knife, cut the headliner as shown below: 3. Loosen and pull back the rear section of the lower quarter panel trim. 4. Loosen and pull back the rear portion of the opera window trim. 5. Remove rear pillar trim. 6. Remove spare tire (if interior mounted), then remove trunk finisher. 7. Place retractor unit into position and finger tighten bolt. Install locating screw to keep the retractor unit from rotating on its mount. Torque retractor mounting bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 8. Install upper anchor into roof panel and torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 9. Remove original female belt and install 3-point belt lower anchor at this point. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 10. Remove original retractor unit and install retro-fit female buckle at this location. 11. Check 3-point belt for smooth operation. 12. Install retro-fit trunk finisher (be sure to thread belt through the finisher before installation). 13. Snap belt finisher into place on trunk finisher. 14. Install rear pillar trim. 15. Install headliner trim piece. 16. Snap lower and opera window quarter panel finishers into position. 2WD Model Page 2388 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4401 When replacing transverse link and/or radius rod, refer to Fig. 25 and note the following: 1. Before removing transverse link attaching bolts, scribe alignment mark on adjusting pin. 2. After installing transverse link, adjust wheel alignment as described in ``Wheel Alignment Section.'' 3. When installing radius rod bracket, ensure arrow points forward. Page 88 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 3291 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2103 Page 4079 Testing and Inspection Air Filter Element: Testing and Inspection Viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation until it is replaced periodically. Brushing or blasting operation should never be conducted, because it causes clogging and results in enrichment of the mixture ratio. Page 2136 Page 777 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 97 Page 2690 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 368 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Page 1064 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 2007 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 5314 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 5253 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 87-145 Date: 870928 Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. Page 3004 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 5496 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 755 Page 4248 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 3335 Page 2333 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1144 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 54 SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 4 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 5 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) SR20DE STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Service Precautions Timing Belt: Service Precautions CAUTION: After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads and damage to the valves may occur. Page 4607 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch assembly, remove screws securing switch bracket to air intake housing, then remove switch assembly. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 2633 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3156 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 310 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Altitude Compensation Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Compensation Altitude compensation prevents deterioration of exhaust emissions caused by an enriched air/fuel mixture. Atmospheric pressure varies according to the altitude. The higher the altitude, the lower the atmospheric pressure. At an atmospheric pressure of approximately 26 in. Hg or below, the altitude switch transmits an ``On'' signal to the control unit, decreasing fuel to provide an appropriate air/fuel mixture ratio. Page 802 AB-/BC VALVE CONTROL When the idle switch is OFF, the I.S.C. valve opens in response to the amount of intake air and engine speed. When the accelerator pedal is released, additional air is led into the intake manifold, actuating as AB- or BC valve. Page 735 Idle Speed: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Page 4440 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 872 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 1828 Power Transistor: Description and Operation The ignition signal from the E.C.U. is amplified by the power transistor, which turns the ignition coil primary circuit on and off, inducing the proper high voltage in the secondary circuit. The ignition coil is a small, molded type. Page 3185 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1804 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 3139 - After installation, check that there is no fuel leakage and engine idling condition is stable and proper. Page 5276 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 4121 Quick Battery Charge Locations Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5225 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Engine Controls - ECM Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification Classification: EF & EC 93-013 Section: Engine Fuel Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-167 Models: Various Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED MODELS: SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 558 Page 980 Page 3576 Page 5322 1. Remove rear seat backs and lower cushion. 2. Remove front belt upper anchor bolts. 3. Loosen and pull back front portion of lower trunk finishers. 4. Remove right arid left quarter panel finishers. It is recommended that the finishers are replaced with the retro-fit finishers listed in the parts information section. However, the existing finishers can be trimmed for belt access as follows: a. Locate the drilling point which is factory pre-scribed in the back side of the quarter panel trim. b. Using a hole saw, drill a 1" hole in the trim piece at the marked location. c. Locate scribed area in side trim and cut the opening for the three point belt. Refer to the illustration below for the opening location. 5. Remove original lap belts (female buckle side). 6. Install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque mounting bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). Page 4808 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Page 2276 Inspection Procedure Page 3452 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 3430 Power Transistor: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between terminals as per the image. Replace power transistor if it fails the above tests. Page 759 Adjustments Inhibitor Switch: Adjustments 1. Loosen inhibitor switch attaching screws. 2. Set selector lever manual shaft at Neutral position. 3. Insert suitable pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and switch lever as near vertical as possible, then tighten screws. 4. Check switch for continuity, replacing as necessary. Fig. 6 Adjusting inhibitor switch. 1985-88 Maxima, 1986-88 Stanza Wagon & 1987-88 Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza exc. Wagon INHIBITOR SWITCH VIEW Page 733 Page 1012 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 3610 WITHDRAWAL LEVER ADJUSTMENT Fig. 7 Withdrawal lever adjustment. Pulsar & Sentra Type 2 2. Adjust withdrawal lever play, dimension B, Figs. 6 & 7, with the adjuster or locknuts, to specifications. 3. Measure clutch pedal freeplay as shown in Fig. 4, dimension A. Freeplay should be as shown in specification table. 4. After the above adjustments have been completed, cycle clutch pedal several times to ensure that clutch linkage operates smoothly without binding. Page 1865 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 2563 Fig. 303b Input/Output signal inspection chart. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Classification: BR94-002 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB94-012 Models: All models Date: February 3, 1993 BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY APPLIED MODELS: All Models GENERAL INFORMATION: Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. POSSIBLE CAUSE OF BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: Page 2172 The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Axle Bearing and Knuckle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Axle Bearing and Knuckle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 494 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Page 1840 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Page 4816 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 2504 PULSAR (KN13) GA16i QUEST (V40) VG30E SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) Page 1899 Inspection Procedure Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3063 Page 250 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Classification: Section: Front Axle FA89-004 & Suspension Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-150 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra, Pulsar NX, 1989-1990 240SX Date: October 19, 1989 FRONT STRUT KIT CAMBER APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1989 Sentras (B12) 1987-1989 Pulsar NX (N13) 1989-1990 240SX (S13) SERVICE INFORMATION New Front Strut Kits supplied for the Applied Models are now manufactured with the camber already set at factory specifications. The adjustable eccentric pin contained in the previously available kit assemblies has been eliminated. Please note that the new kits will retrofit on a model by model basis, and adjustment is not required when retrofitting. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2705 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Specifications Fig. 2 Compression Pressure Specifications Page 3752 This vibration/buzzing may be generated from the shift linkage control rod. The fit between the connecting pin and bushing in the joint at the transmission end of the control rod has been improved to eliminate this incident (see illustrations). NOTE: The control rod is available only as an assembly. SERVICE PROCEDURE If this incident exists on a vehicle manufactured before the applied dates, replace the control rod assembly as shown in the appropriate Service Manual. PARTS INFORMATION CONTROL ROD ASSY MODEL PART NUMBER B12 2WD 34103-50M00 N13 E16 34103-50M00 CA16D 34103-55M00 Page 700 Locations Thermal Limiting Fuse: Locations A/C Components. On Top Of Compressor Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3025 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Page 85 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Page 629 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 695 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Locations Ignition Coil Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2858 This valve, Figs. 14 and 15, monitors exhaust pressures to activate the diaphragm. The valve controls vacuum applied to the EGR control valve. This allows the operation of the EGR control valve to be controlled by engine operating conditions. Page 3016 ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 2876 EGR Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Check the solenoid valve for electric continuity, after disconnecting the harness connector. Continuity should exist. 2. Check the solenoid valve for normal operation, after disconnecting the harness connector and all the vacuum hoses. Supply the solenoid valve with battery voltage, and check whether there is continuity between ports A, B and C. Page 4947 Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Classification: BF88-005 Reference: TS88-015 Date: February 15, 1988 CAUTIONS FOR AFTERMARKET RUST PROOFING APPLICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan Models SERVICE INFORMATION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has conducted an investigation into potential failure of the front safety belt systems of certain vehicles due to the unintentional application of rust-proofing material to the belt retractors in the "B" pillar area. Their information suggests that the movement of the pendulum inside the belt retractor mechanism can be restricted if rust-proofing material is inadvertently applied in the pendulum area. Restricting the pendulum movement can result in the belts failing to protect occupants in an accident. Nissan's current models have extensive anti-corrosion treatment applied at the factories and we do not endorse "rust-proofing" at the dealer or aftermarket level. The only instance in which Nissan recommends rust-proofing be applied is in the case of body panel replacement (Please refer to Service Bulletin TS82-066, BF82-007 for instructions about rust-proofing replacement body panels). If additional rust-proofing is applied to Nissan vehicles, DO NOT apply rust-proofing to the "B" pillar area near the seat belt retractor, or any other location near the seat belt retractors of any vehicle. Of course, the usual precautions in applying rust-proofing material still apply. For example, it is important that rust-proofing material not be inadvertently applied to door lock assemblies, drain holes, the exhaust system or driveshaft. IMPROPER RETRACTOR OPERATION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION OF RUST-PROOFING MATERIAL WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING AGENCY. Page 3587 ^ before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, ^ turn the can over and spray only propellant for a few seconds to avoid fluid spilling back out of the cooler hose. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler Inlet hose (see Figure 10). 6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining cleaner or fluid into the coffee filter (see Figure 11). 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler Inlet hose. 10. Proceed with Inspection Procedure. Inspection Procedure Page 2674 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Specifications Fig. 2 Compression Pressure Specifications Page 1930 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 2733 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4541 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Description and Operation Vacuum Delay Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 16 Vacuum delay valve (typical) This valve, Fig. 16, prevents a rapid vacuum drop of the EGR control line. The valve is designed for one-way operation and consists of a one-way umbrella valve and a sintered steel fluidic restricter. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Page 1943 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 4448 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "FRONT SUSPENSION / COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES / AXLE BEARING AND KNUCKLE" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 2947 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2072 Page 4906 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Page 3428 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1951 Inspection Procedure Page 2325 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 766 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 861 1. Check belt tensioner for smooth turning. 2. Check the condition of tensioner spring. Page 973 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 4970 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. Page 1376 Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of oil pan. ^ Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. ^ Be sure liquid gasket is 3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in) wide. 3. Apply liquid gasket to inner sealing surface instead of surface where there is no groove at bolt hole. ^ Attach oil pan to cylinder block within five minutes after coating. ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil or starting engine. Page 4307 Alignment: Specifications Rear Camber Angle -1 11/12 to - 5/12 deg Camber Angle Desired - 1/5 deg Toe Per Wheel +.04 to +.12 in Total Degrees - 1/10 to + 9/30 deg Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5058 Page 5231 2. Mix a solution of water and remover into a bucket. The solution should be mixed at 1 part remover to 8 parts of water. Using a clean wash mit, gently spread the solution onto the vehicle with long sweeping strokes. The remover works chemically, so there is no need for rubbing the surface at this point. Caution: the use of any chemical other than the one supplied to remove the paint guard coating, (KATS UL 6000), may make the coating harder to remove and it could damage the paint. 3. Keep the solution wet for 3 to 5 minutes. Don't let it dry. Apply additional solution to areas which begin to dry too quickly. 4. Rinse with water. This rinses off the coating and remover. Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 323 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 999 A list of Johnstone Supply outlets who stock SUNISO 5GS oil in one quart containers . There may also be other oulets in your area that carry SUNISO 5GS. This would most commmonly be a firm specializing in industrial A/C and refrigeration supplies. WARRANTY INFORMATION: When billing for "SUNISO 5GS" on warranty claims, use "local" part number: LOCALCOMPR. Page 4773 Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCS) are chemical compounds made up of molecules that contain atoms of chlorine and fluorine bonded to carbon atoms. CFCs are used in a number of applications, the most common of which are in automotive air conditioners, in the blowing of plastic foam products, and as solvents in electronic component manufacturing. Ozone is a special form of oxygen which combines three oxygen atoms into O3. Ozone in the Earth's upper atmosphere serves as a shield from harmful ultra violet solar radiation by reflecting the rays back into space. When CFCs are released into the air, here's what happens: the molecules work their way upward in the atmosphere slowly, taking as long as ten years to reach the middle stratosphere, 20 to 40 kilometers above the surface of the earth, where the "ozone layer" resides. The CFC molecules are bombarded by ultra violet light from the sun, which tends to break the chemical bonds that hold chlorine and fluorine to the carbon. The fluorine atoms can combine with moisture to form acids. When the chlorine breaks away, it becomes a chemical "catalyst," which means that it can cause chemical reactions to occur rapidly. Thus, a chlorine atom can break the chemical bonds that hold O3 together and O3 becomes O2 and O. It is now no longer "ozone" and it no longer has its reflective quality to turn ultra violet radiation away from the earth. Given the right conditions, the chlorine from one CFC molecule could destroy up to 100,000 ozone molecules. Page 4694 Control Assembly: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove control cables by unfastening clamps at door levers. 3. Disconnect electrical connector. 4. Remove control assembly finisher and mounting bolts, then the control assembly. 5. Reverse procedure to install, then adjust control cables. Page 4288 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1512 PDI - Paint Guard Coating (PGC) Removal Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins PDI - Paint Guard Coating (PGC) Removal Classification: Section: BF88-015 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-120 Models: All Models Date: September 15, 1988 PAINT GUARD COATING REMOVAL This Bulletin supersedes the previously issued "Paint Guard Coating Removal", BF88-006/TS88-043, dated May 5, 1988. Due to duplicate numbering this Bulletin is being re-issued with new Classification/Reference numbers. There are NO changes to the contents of the Bulletin. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The following information should be used to help your wash and detail personnel in the clean-up of vehicles delivered with PGC (paint guard coating). The paint guard coating remover solution is supplied with each vehicle and can be found in the glove box. In order to make the removal process easier, the Ports have improved the application process and are careful to avoid sags and thick coats of the material. Please post these directions in your car wash area and review with clean-up personnel. A good understanding of the PGC and remover will greatly speed your clean-up and preserve the new car finish. A Material Safety Data Sheet on PGC has been distributed as part of a National Parts Bulletin. 1. Park vehicle in shade and rinse thoroughly using a spray of water. If the vehicle is extremely dirty, wash it with soap and water. This will loosen dirt and cool the sheet metal. The surface must not be allowed to dry during the cleaning process. When applying the remover solution in the next step, a pair of rubber gloves, eye protection, and boots should be worn for protection. Page 2026 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 4855 Fan Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and remove A/C-heater control as outlined in ``Control Assembly, Replace.'' 2. Remove screws securing switch to control and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install and adjust control. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1789 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 106 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 2030 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 617 The chart (Figure 5) shows the relationship between the common units of Total Toe measurement. Conversions vary with wheel size. Reference the appropriate service manual for exact specifications. NOTE: When adjusting Total Toe on a vehicle with oversized tires, use the angle values on the alignment machine. Oversized tires have a larger diameter. Page 2009 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 3910 Fig. 6 AD18V type front disc brake disassembled Brake Pad, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Remove lock pin, Figs. 4, 5 and 6, and pivot caliper body upwards. 3. Remove pad retainers, then the pads. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Install inner pad, then pull cylinder body out and install outer pad. Caliper, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube. 3. Remove caliper attaching bolts, then the caliper assembly from vehicle. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Caliper Overhaul 1. Separate cylinder body and torque member, Figs. 4, 5 and 6. 2. Remove brake hose, then press out piston with dust seal and retainer ring. 3. Remove piston seal, guide pin and lock pin from torque member. 4. Reverse procedure to assemble. Page 496 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Page 2385 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3199 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3062 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Page 3906 PARTS INFORMATION Use the following chart to find the correct part numbers for the new brake pad kits with HP12 material. Models that are not listed on this chart (i.e. Z31, certain D21 models), use brake pads from a different vendor. Use the original pads listed in the Parts Microfiche. Original pads on these models are equivalent to HP12 material. Lower, Rear Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower, Rear Fig. 25 Rear suspension. 4WD Sentra 4WD SENTRA Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Page 2621 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 637 Page 5047 Page 4426 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Overhaul Fig. 1 Rear Suspension (Part 1 Of 2). 2WD Models Page 1880 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1740 TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i VAN (C22) Z241 200SX (S100) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E Page 2817 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2955 Page 4311 Fig. 18 Turning angle specifications STEERING ANGLE When a vehicle negotiates a turn, the inner wheel must turn at a sharper angle than the outer wheel, and the outer wheel must travel farther than the inner wheel. Vehicle steering geometry is calculated to allow for these variations, causing the outer wheel to to-out by a calibrated amount. This toe-out on turns is also referred to as steering angle and on these models, is generally checked at two positions. The first position is at a reference point on the inner wheel travel while the second position of measurement is at full steering lock. To check steering angles, proceed as follows: 1. Place unladen vehicle on suitable alignment rack and ensure that kingpin angle, caster, camber and toe settings are within specifications. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4044 Fig. 6 AD18V type front disc brake disassembled Brake Pad, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Remove lock pin, Figs. 4, 5 and 6, and pivot caliper body upwards. 3. Remove pad retainers, then the pads. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Install inner pad, then pull cylinder body out and install outer pad. Caliper, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube. 3. Remove caliper attaching bolts, then the caliper assembly from vehicle. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Caliper Overhaul 1. Separate cylinder body and torque member, Figs. 4, 5 and 6. 2. Remove brake hose, then press out piston with dust seal and retainer ring. 3. Remove piston seal, guide pin and lock pin from torque member. 4. Reverse procedure to assemble. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Attachment Bolts 5.3 ft.lb Page 57 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4386 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. GENERAL BRAKE REPAIR GUIDELINES To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following. 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with Page 84 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Engine - Coding System to Match Bearings to Crankshaft Crankshaft Main Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Coding System to Match Bearings to Crankshaft Classification: Section: EM90-002 Engine Mech. Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-011 Models: All 1987-90 Models Date: February 15, 1990 IDENTIFYING CRANKSHAFT BEARINGS FOR SERVICE APPLICATIONS APPLIED MODELS: All 1987-90 Models. SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning with engines manufactured in 1987, Nissan has utilized a coding system to precisely match bearings to the crankshaft. Certain ways of marking/coding the crankshaft have varied. The purpose of this bulletin is to explain those coding variations so that the correct replacement crankshaft bearings can be selected. Some Crankshafts utilize marks on the No. 1 Counterbalance. There may be one or two rows. If there are two rows, the top one identifies the grade for the main bearings; the bottom one identifies the grade for the connecting rod bearings. If there is only one row, it will indicate the grade for the main bearings and the engine rebuilder should use the "standard" bearings for the connecting rod application. NOTE: Some Crankshafts were additionally marked on the No. 5 Counterbalance. In this application, the marks on the No. 5 Counterbalance represent the grade for the connecting rod bearings and the marks on the No. 1 Counterbalance represent the grade for the main bearings. One other variation in Crankshaft marking is the use of horizontal scribe marks on certain Crankshafts and Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, etc.) for others. ^ Those Crankshafts graded with Arabic numerals need no interpretation because their grades directly correspond to the Parts Microfiche and Service Manual for the respective vehicle. ^ Those Crankshafts graded with vertical scribe marks can be interpreted by using the following table. Crank BRG. Counterbalance "vertical slash" Grade Grade # 0 no mark 1I 2 II 3 III Refer to the "S.D.S." chart at the back of the EM section of the appropriate Service Manual for bearing color code application. Page 1539 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4663 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 4085 JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps, standard for North American produced batteries IMPORTANT: ^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries. ^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes. ^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available). ^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the Original Equipment battery. ^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data package. (1) (1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III: ^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned on. ^ Click on the ASIST icon. ^ Click on INFO. Tool Box. ^ Select Midtronics GR-8. ^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays. ^ Click on Change MUP File. ^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW. ^ Select 192-725C and click OK. ^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen. If the applicable vehicle still is not listed: 1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for descriptions of each battery. 2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more information. Determine the Battery Type Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number Page 2145 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Classification: Section: GI88-023 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-150 Models: All models 1987-1989 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home). Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES * These are maximum distances these vehicles may be towed without damage to the gear rain. In general, any Nissan vehicle should be started, warmed up, and driven at least two miles after it has been towed these distances - more frequently if possible. Page 4973 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Page 4472 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 3977 ^ while the vehicle is barely moving, with light brake pedal force ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather ^ most common on vehicles with automatic transmission This noise is common on most cars with front disc brakes. There are no repair procedures to eliminate this noise. 3. SQUEAKING/SQUEALING NOISE ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during low speed stops (5-20 mph) ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather This noise is common on vehicles with high-performance potential that must be able to stop in short distances from high speeds. Other brands of brake pads may eliminate this noise, but Nissan does not recommend them because they may have reduced pad life or inadequate performance in high speed stops. 4. HIGH-PITCHED SQUEAKING/SCRAPING NOISE ^ whenever brakes are applied ^ may come from just one wheel Nissan uses pad wear indicators on many of its disc brake pads to provide an audible warning when the brake pads need replacement. Spring steel tabs that are riveted to the brake pad scrape lightly on the rotor surface when the pad is worn down to its lowest limit. The customer should hear the noise at this time and bring the vehicle to the dealer for brake pad replacement. The pad wear indicator will not damage the rotor surface if the pad is replaced in a reasonable time. Replace worn pads with new parts. Check the rotor surface for damage and machine if necessary. Page 96 System description: When the switch is ON, the ECU lights up the lamp. The VOLTAGE VALUE is based on the body ground. Page 2281 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Description and Operation Fig. 14 Back pressure transducer valve. Fig. 15 Back pressure transducer valve. Chassis - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Chassis - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Models: All Models Section: Body & Frame Classification: BF88-005 Bulletin No.: TS88-015 Date: February 15, 1988 CAUTIONS FOR AFTERMARKET RUST PROOFING APPLICATION APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan Models SERVICE INFORMATION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has conducted an investigation into potential failure of the front safety belt systems of certain vehicles due to the unintentional application of rust-proofing material to the belt retractors in the "B" pillar area. Their information suggests that the movement of the pendulum inside the belt retractor mechanism can be restricted if rust-proofing material is inadvertently applied in the pendulum area. Restricting the pendulum movement can result in the belts failing to protect occupants in an accident. Nissan's current models have extensive anti-corrosion treatment applied at the factories and we do not endorse "rust-proofing" at the dealer or aftermarket level. The only instance in which Nissan recommends rust-proofing be applied is in the case of body panel replacement (Please refer to Service Bulletin TS82-066, BF82-007 for instructions about rust-proofing replacement body panels). If additional rust-proofing is applied to Nissan vehicles, DO NOT apply rust-proofing to the "B" pillar area near the seat belt retractor, or any other location near the seat belt retractors of any vehicle. Of course, the usual precautions in applying rust-proofing material still apply. For example, it is important that rust-proofing material not be inadvertently applied to door lock assemblies, drain holes, the exhaust system or driveshaft. IMPROPER RETRACTOR OPERATION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION OF RUST-PROOFING MATERIAL WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING AGENCY. Page 3743 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 1619 5. Fill reservoir tank with coolant up to "MAX" level. 6. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for about one minute. 7. Stop engine and cool it down, then refill radiator and reservoir tank. Description and Operation Fuel Shut-off Solenoid: Description and Operation Fig. 31a Fuel cut operation chart. Fig. 31b Fuel cut operation chart. Fuel cut is accomplished during deceleration when the engine does not require fuel. The fuel cut specifications for manual and automatic transmission equipped models are shown in Fig. 31. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 3245 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation The electronic control unit adjusts fuel pump operation to engine operating conditions. The signals from various sensors and switches are used to control fuel pump operation. Fig. 39 Fuel pump control chart. Fig. 39 Page 4220 Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 3905 Page 958 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications API Classification API SF Grade Energy Conserving Oils. Oil Viscosity Temperatures Below 32 deg F 5w-30 Temperatures Above 0 deg F 10w-30 or 10w-40 Page 142 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation The electronic control unit adjusts fuel pump operation to engine operating conditions. The signals from various sensors and switches are used to control fuel pump operation. Fig. 39 Fuel pump control chart. Fig. 39 Page 5057 IMPACT SENSOR INSPECTION, SIREN INSPECTION, CONSOLE SWITCH INSPECTION Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4343 FIGURE 9 4. Align the groove (if there is one) or mark on pinion gear cap and slit in lower joint (Figure 9), then push steering gear up into lower joint and reinstall pinch bolt. 5. Reinstall left clamp lower bolt and hand tighten. Then torque right clamp bolts and left lower clamp bolt to 54-72 ft/lbs. 6. Replace O-ring (soak with ATF before installation) on high pressure line. Reinstall high pressure and return lines. Tighten fittings finger tight first, then torque to 11-18 ft/lbs. 7. Raise transfer case with jack and reinstall the 3 body side bolts on the transfer case rear mount. Torque to 22-30 ft/lbs. 8. Align match marks on transfer case flange and propeller shaft, then reinstall propeller shaft onto transfer case flange. Torque bolts to 25-33 ft/lbs. 9. Reconnect center exhaust assembly to front exhaust assembly and the catalytic converter. Use new gaskets as required. 10. Lower vehicle to halfway point. Reconnect both tie rod ends to knuckle arms and torque to 22-29 ft/lbs. 11. Install both front wheels and torque wheel nuts to 72-87 ft/lbs. 12. Lower vehicle until wheels are just above the floor. Reinstall left steering gear clamp upper 17 mm bolt and torque to 54-72 ft/lbs. 13. Reinstall carbon canister and reconnect negative cable to battery terminal. 14. Fill reservoir with Genuine Nissan ATF and bleed system as follows: a. With engine off, turn steering wheel from right lock to left lock fifteen to twenty times or until fluid level in reservoir stops dropping and air bubbles no longer appear in fluid. Be sure to add fluid to reservoir during this process to maintain proper fluid level. b. Start engine and let it idle for one minute. Rev engine under no load two or three times. c. With engine idling, turn the steering wheel from right lock to left lock seven to eight times or until fluid level in reservoir stops dropping and there are no more air bubbles in the fluid. If necessary, fill reservoir to proper fluid level. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel against right or left lock for more than 15 seconds while bleeding. 15. Lower vehicle and remove lifting arms. Test drive the vehicle in a straight line for 500 feet to verify steering wheel angle, and at the same time mark the steering wheel position. 16. Reset front toe and steering wheel angle at tie rod ends, using an alignment rack. 17. Reset radio to preset stations noted before battery cable disconnection. Page 2796 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Three Stage Converter The three-way catalytic converter utilizes a catalyst to accelerate the recombustion of HC and CO and a catalyst to reduce NOx in the exhaust gas, changing them into harmless CO2, H2O, and N3. In order to maintain mixture ratios at the ``stoichiometric'' point, the point at which the converter works most efficiently, a mixture ratio feedback system is employed. In this system, an exhaust gas sensor monitors oxygen content in the exhaust gasses and signals the fuel system to alter the air/fuel mixture to maintain the ``stoichiometric'' level. Page 4531 Disclaimer Page 583 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 1038 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 1769 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 989 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type R-12 Page 1063 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 4468 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 2167 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3355 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1083 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 1763 Check the wire in the illustration. If an ohmmeter is used to measure resistance, the single strand of wire still making contact would give an ohmmeter reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. It will become hot and have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: -Undersized wiring (single strand) -Corrosion on switch contacts -Loose wire connections or splices If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge (lower number). Measuring Voltage Drop 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts (voltage drop) are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb, or a 4.0 v. drop between the switch and the bulb. Relationship between Open/Short circuit and the ECU pin control Page 2859 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Testing and Inspection 1. Connect vacuum pump to two uppermost ports one at a time and check them for leakage. 2. When vacuum is applied to uppermost port and port immediately below that is open to atmosphere, uppermost port should open at 2.36 inches Hg. 3. When vacuum is applied to top two ports, they should both open at 19.69 inches Hg. 4. When two uppermost ports are open to atmosphere, valve should be closed. 5. If valve does not operate as described above, it should be replaced. Page 1986 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4213 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 4905 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Page 1518 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations A/C Components. Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3031 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 4273 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Specifications Fig. 7 Fuel System Pressure Specifications Page 3879 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 5285 2. Mix a solution of water and remover into a bucket. The solution should be mixed at 1 part remover to 8 parts of water. Using a clean wash mit, gently spread the solution onto the vehicle with long sweeping strokes. The remover works chemically, so there is no need for rubbing the surface at this point. Caution: the use of any chemical other than the one supplied to remove the paint guard coating, (KATS UL 6000), may make the coating harder to remove and it could damage the paint. 3. Keep the solution wet for 3 to 5 minutes. Don't let it dry. Apply additional solution to areas which begin to dry too quickly. 4. Rinse with water. This rinses off the coating and remover. Page 3186 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2409 Fig. 6 Idle Speed Control Page 340 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Testing and Inspection Air Induction Valve (AIV): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect air induction hose at air induction pipe side. Suck or blow hose to make sure that air flow does not exist. 2. Connect a vacuum handy pump to the air induction control valve. 3. Suck or blow air induction hose to make sure that air flows only on the air induction pipe side while control valve is operated. 4. Check air induction valve and air induction control valve for binding or damage. If necessary, replace. Page 300 Inspection Procedure Page 1274 Crankshaft: Specifications Rod Journal Diameter 1.5733-1.5738 in Main Journal Diameter 1.9661-1.9671 in Main Bearing Clearance Note: Nos. 1, 3 and 5, 0.0012- 0.0022; nos. 2 and 4, 0.0012- 0.0036. Crankshaft Endplay .002-.007 in Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Page 4501 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 55 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 4606 Fig. 335b A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 4326 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Recommended Fluid DEXRON ATF Page 566 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 4558 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 4525 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 4999 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Page 2990 Page 2348 This chart indicates appropriate pin voltages for the ASCD system: Page 1009 Charging System - No Crank, Dead Battery Incidents Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Charging System - No Crank, Dead Battery Incidents Classification: Section: EL88-007 Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-085 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar XE Date: June 2, 1988 DEAD BATTERY INCIDENTS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar XE vehicles may experience repeated no restart incidents resulting from dead batteries after, low speed driving conditions with heavy accessory load. This may be due to insufficient alternator output. As a countermeasure, a higher output alternator (70 amp) is available to replace the 60 amp alternator. When installing the 70 amp alternator, a countermeasure adjusting bar and fan belt must also be installed. NOTE: Before installing a new alternator verify that the charging system is working correctly. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY INFORMATION Refer to Section EE of the Warranty Flat Rate Manual. R&R; adjust bar and fan belt is included in R&R; alternator flat rate time. Page 4513 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 3619 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 3310 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2632 Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 2096 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5246 When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transaxle Fluid Capacity 6.6 qt (US) Approximate, Make final check with dipstick. Page 2863 EGR Control Solenoid: Description and Operation Fig. 52 Vacumm switching valve. This valve is activated by current from the vacuum switch for the purpose of supplying vacuum to the EGR control valve from the vacuum reserve tank. Page 1279 Procedure 1. Remove engine undercover on right side only. 2. After the engine coolant and engine components have cooled down, drain engine coolant from radiator and remove threaded freeze plug. (For plug location refer to application chart section "Location". 3. Apply a thin layer of gasket sealant (Nissan P/N 999MP-A7007) on both sides of the gasket. Slide it over the engine block heater threads. 4. Install engine block heater to engine block being careful not to damage the threads. Torque heater to 32 +/- 4 ft.lb. (4.5 +/- 0.5 kg.m.). 5. Connect power cord to engine block heater and route cord as follows: A. From engine block heater route cord down, between drive shaft and engine block, toward front of the vehicle between exhaust pipe and engine oil pan (Figure 2). Attach cord to engine block ear on left side of compressor with a tie wrap. Continue routing cord along the left side of the compressor and attach it to the compressor high pressure hose (rubber portion) with a tie wrap. Page 3334 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4086 ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J". Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the label attached to the top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5. Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester Vehicles with JIS Battery ^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on the battery. NOTE: DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery. Vehicles with CCA Battery ^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on the battery. Reference Material The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed. Page 603 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Models All Models Section General Information Classification G191-005 Bulletin No. NTB91-049 Date May 16, 1991 A CLARIFICATION OF TOE SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHEEL ALIGNMENT APPLIED MODELS: All SERVICE INFORMATION: Toe, front or rear, is the position of the tire and wheel assembly in relation to the center line of the vehicle, as viewed from the top. This alignment measurement influences the track holding characteristics of the vehicle. Incorrect Toe alignment can cause excessive tire wear. Nissan service manuals give toe specifications as either "total toe-in" or "total too-out." Total toe-in or -out, means that one-half (1/2) of the listed dimension should be applied, equally, to each wheel. ^ Toe-In is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the front (Figure 1a). Page 1897 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 436 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 2338 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 308 Page 4746 b. Evacuate and recharge system, then check for leaks. Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Classification: BR87-005 Reference: TS87-103 Date: June 29, 1987 DISC BRAKE NOISE INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models with disc brakes (front or rear) SERVICE INFORMATION Some Nissan vehicles may exhibit brake noise under certain driving conditions. This Bulletin provides some information about normal and common noises and appropriate service procedures for each noise. Some of this information may be useful when explaining brake noises to the customer. Refer to Technical Bulletin BR87-006, "Disc Brake Noise Countermeasure", for information about abnormal brake noises on Maxima, Stanza, and Stanza Wagon. General Brake Information Nissan brake systems have been carefully designed to provide optimum braking performance under various driving conditions. One of the most important components in the brake system is the brake pad material. The following factors have been taken into consideration to select the best pad material. ^ technical and government regulations ^ stopping distance ^ vehicle control while braking ^ high operating temperatures ^ pedal force ^ pad and rotor wear rates ^ moisture resistance ^ friction coefficient stability ^ operating noise level Unfortunately, there is no one brake pad material that provides perfect performance in all of these areas. Changing the material to improve some factors often causes a performance reduction in other areas. Higher brake operating noise levels in some instances occur as a result of factors which ensure proper brake performance and safety. Common Brake Noises The following brake noises occur most frequently on Nissan vehicles. These noises do not indicate any malfunction or improper operation. 1. GROANING NOISE AT LOW MILEAGE (0-300 MILES) ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during medium speed stops (20-40 mph) ^ noise usually does not occur on the first or second stop ^ noise occurs with warm or hot brakes (not cold) ^ there may be a low frequency "judder" vibration Nissan applies protective coatings to the brake rotors and pads to reduce corrosion during shipping and storage. These coatings may cause this groaning noise until they are worn off. Under normal driving conditions, this usually takes about 300 miles. If this noise occurs during the first 300 miles, it is not necessary to attempt any repairs. Service Procedure: There is no service procedure to eliminate this noise permanently. Replacing the brake pads or machining the rotors may cause the noise to disappear temporarily, but it will return and continue until the coatings are worn off the rotor and pads. 2. GROANING NOISE (AFTER 300 MILES) Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 5278 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Page 2776 Air Induction Valve: Testing and Inspection Air Injection Valve Case 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to vacuum motor and connect a hand vacuum pump to the hose. 2. Disconnect vacuum hose between air injection valve case and box. 3. Apply vacuum to vacuum motor and attempt to blow into air injection valve case through the hose. Air should flow freely only when vacuum is applied to the vacuum motor. Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 1398 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Timing belt 1. Visually check the condition of the timing belt. Replace if any abnormality is found. Belt tensioner and return spring Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 4968 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Page 3627 ^ before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, ^ turn the can over and spray only propellant for a few seconds to avoid fluid spilling back out of the cooler hose. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler Inlet hose (see Figure 10). 6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining cleaner or fluid into the coffee filter (see Figure 11). 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler Inlet hose. 10. Proceed with Inspection Procedure. Inspection Procedure Recall 95V103002: Safety Belt Buckle Release Button Seat Belt Buckle: Recalls Recall 95V103002: Safety Belt Buckle Release Button The front safety belt buckle release buttons can break. These red plastic release buttons are marked "press." If a button breaks, pieces can fall into the buckle assembly causing the buckle to operate improperly. The safety belts would not provide adequate protection to an occupant in a vehicle crash. Owners should promptly check the condition and operation of both front safety belt buckles and carefully inspect the red release button for any breaks or cracks. They should ensure that both buckles are operating properly by inserting each latch plate into its buckle, tugging on the belt to make sure the latch is securely locked, and then pressing the release button. The latch plate should pop out of the buckle when the button is pressed. If either release button shows a sign of breaking or cracking or if either buckle fails to operate properly, owners should promptly contact their authorized dealer to schedule an appointment to have the buckle replaced or repaired free of charge. System: Interior; Seat Belts; Belt Buckles. Vehicle Description: Passenger, Multi-Purpose Vehicles and Light Duty Trucks Equipped with Safety Belts made by Takata Corporation. NOTE: If your vehicle is presented to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and the remedy is not provided free of charge within a reasonable time, please contact NISSAN at 1-800-647-7261. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. Page 4998 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Locations Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Locations A/C Components. Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2554 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Service and Repair Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair 1. Remove air cleaner duct at air cleaner on 200SX models, as required. 2. Loosen idler pulley locknut, turn adjusting nut counterclockwise, and remove power steering pump drive belt. On some air conditioned models, remove air conditioning compressor drive belt. 3. Loosen power steering hoses at pump and remove bolts securing power steering pump to brackets. 4. Raise pump and disconnect power steering hoses. Catch fluid in a suitable container, plug hose ends and ports in power steering pump, and remove pump from vehicle. 5. Reinstall power steering pump by reversing procedure and bleed system as follows: a. Raise and support front of vehicle. b. Run engine for 3-5 seconds, stop engine, check and fill power steering pump reservoir as needed. c. Quickly turn steering wheel all the way to right and left 10 times. d. Start engine and idle for 3-5 second. Stop engine, check and fill power steering pump reservoir as needed. e. With steering wheel all the way to the right, open bleeder screw, to expel air and tighten bleeder screw. f. Repeat procedure until all air has been bled from system. g. If air cannot be bled completely after repeated attempts, repeat step e with engine running. A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 4556 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Lubricant Capacity Lubricant Capacity Refrigerant Oil Capacity 6.8 oz (US) Refrigerant Oil Type SUNISO 5GS Page 3235 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 2471 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 2359 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Seat Belts - Extender Availability Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Seat Belts - Extender Availability Models All Models Section Body & Frame Classification BF87-026 Bulletin No. TS87-114 Date July 27, 1987 FRONT SEAT BELT EXTENDERS, LONGER FRONT SEAT BELTS This Technical Bulletin contains a complete list of seat belt extenders and longer seat belt sets currently available for use on all Nissan Models except 1987 Maxima vehicles with automatic seat belts. These assemblies should be used when body size or driving position do not allow for proper fit of the factory installed lap-shoulder belts. Use the information in this bulletin in place of that found in previously issued Technical Bulletin BF86-012 (TS86-082). Make note of this on page BF-30 of the 1986 Technical Bulletin Reprint Manual. When a customer requests information regarding better fitting seat belts: ^ Inspect the original lap-shoulder belt assembly to ensure proper function. Refer to Section MA of the appropriate model Service Manual. ^ Inform the customer that the extenders/longer seat belts are designed for his/her specific use only. Individuals who can use the standard seat belt may not receive full restraint system protection when using an extender/longer belt. ^ If a longer belt is installed, return the old belt to the customer for use if and when the extended length belt is no longer required. Listed below are the revised part numbers for the extenders and longer seat belts with the applied models. These belts should be provided to the customer free of charge, and should be ordered through the Parts Department system. They are available only in black. I. EXTENDERS PART NUMBER APPLIED MODEL 86848-01A00 *1974-78 B210 (NSK Warner) 1975-78 280ZX 1974-76 610 1976-78 F10 1974-77 710 1977-80 810 86848-01A01 1979-81 210 (2-Door) 1979-81 280ZX 1979-81 310 86848-01A02 1981 Maxima I. EXTENDERS (CONTINUED) PART NUMBER APPLIED MODEL 86848-01A03 1982 210 (2-Door) 1982-84 Maxima 1982 310 1982-83 280ZX 86848-01A04 1984-86 300ZX 1986-87 Stanza Wagon 1985-87 Maxima 86848-01A05 *1974-76 B210 (Takata) 1976-78 620 86848-01A06 *1977-78 B210 (Takata) 1979 Truck 1977-79 200SX 86848-01A07 1979-82 210 (4-Door) 1980-81 200SX 86848-01A08 1982.5-86 Sentra (4-Door) 1987 Pathfinder 1983-86 Pulsar (4-Door) **1983-87 Truck 1982-86 200SX (Applied date: prior to 2/86) 86848-01A09 1980-82 Truck Page 764 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3040 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: Customer Interest A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 2238 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 5313 T-Top: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 2461 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 3960 1. Before using the rotor driving unit ensure that all lug nuts are installed on the lugs (including the lugs not used for the lug adaptor). All lug nuts should be evenly torqued, to at least 40 ft/lbs. Do not over-tighten the lug nuts as damage may occur to the lug adaptor legs. 2. To prevent chatter and ensure a smooth rotor finish, install the largest and heaviest silencer band possible around the outside diameter of the rotor. ROTOR CUTTING Before engaging the cutting tool, ensure the following: 1. Using the dial indicator, measure rotor/hub run-out prior to resurfacing rotor and adjust cutting depth to eliminate this run-out. Each cut may be between 0.05 mm and 0.25 mm (0.002" and 0.010"). Additional cuts may be necessary to eliminate all the run-out. 2. Using a micrometer, measure rotor thickness in at least 8 even locations around the rotor. Do not cut below the minimum rotor thickness specification. Replace rotor if the run-out cannot be eliminated without exceeding the minimum rotor thickness specification. 3. After rotor resurfacing is completed, measure the rotor/hub run-out using a dial indicator. Ensure that the run-out is below the specification for the vehicle. If run-out is not within specifications, turn the rotors again. Properly machined rotors will have almost zero run-out (.001" or less) with no measurable thickness variation. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. 4. Do not smooth the rotor surface with sand paper or other abrasive material. Page 3588 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris (see Figure 12). A. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 inch) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the radiator/oil cooler can be re-used. B. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter (see Figure 13), the oil-cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. Final Inspection: After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 985 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Towing Information: By Symptom Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Classification: GI88-023 Reference: TS88-150 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES APPLIED VEHICLES All Models 1987-1989 SERVICE INFORMATION The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home.) Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES Page 3834 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4780 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Specifications Fig. 7 Fuel System Pressure Specifications Page 5198 Page 473 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 1524 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 4768 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Refer to ``Condenser, Replace'' procedure. Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1526 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications System Capacity System Capacity Refrigerant Capacity 1.8-2.0 lb (US) Refrigerant Type R-12 Page 5135 2. Grind the surface of the repair with 36 grit disc. Grind about 11/2" around the actual damage to obtain a taper for best adhesion. 3. Featheredge the paint around the repair with 180 grit disc. Wipe with a clean, dry rag and blow off with air. 4. Apply one wet coat of Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter over the sanded surface and allow to dry for 10 minutes. IMPORTANT: It will be necessary to reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter after any sanding step. 5. Mix Flexible Parts Repair Material according to the instructions and apply to the repair with a squeegee, building it up higher than the undamaged area. Allow it to cure for 20-30 minutes at 60-80~F. 6. After curing, sand with 180 grit disc followed by 240 grit disc. Page 536 Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Main Harness Part 1 Page 1005 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 201 Fig. 335b A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 4200 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4669 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 3621 Workflow Page 5453 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Page 1112 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 2636 Page 2364 Fig. 303d Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 2221 Spark Plug: Description and Operation Spark Plug Construction PURPOSE Ignites the combustion mixture. LOCATION Screwed into the cylinder head, at the combustion chamber. OPERATION The spark plug provides a path for the high current of the secondary circuit to flow to ground. The only paths for this current are through the ground electrode and center electrode across the spark gap. The spark produced when the current jumps the gap and ignites the air/fuel mixture in the cylinder. Spark Plug Heat Range CONSTRUCTION The temperature of the spark plug is determined by the length of the insulator and the size of the heatsink area. The longer the insulator is, the smaller the heatsink area will be and this will cause the spark plug to be hotter. Page 1207 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 925 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type API GL-4 Fluid Viscosity SAE 75w-90 Page 345 Page 344 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4902 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Page 4028 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Parking Brake Adjust 1. Pull parking brake lever with a force of 44 lbs. and ensure lever travels 6-7 notches on 1984-86 Sentra and Pulsar, 7-8 notches on 1984-86 Stanza, 7-11 notches on 1987-88 Pulsar, 11-13 notches on 1987 Stanza and 1987-88 Sentra, or 9-11 notches on 1988 Stanza. 2. Rotate adjuster until proper stroke is obtained, then tighten locknut. Fig. 6 Parking brake adjustment. 1987-88 Maxima, Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza 3. Parking Brake Adjuster View Page 2332 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 93 Digital signals are ON-OFF (Hi-Low) voltage pulses. This signal is a typical digital signal. Examples of common digital signals are: Battery Voltage The ignition switch in the ACC or ON position provides a battery voltage signal to several control units. This informs the control unit of the ignition position. Switch to Ground A door switch is a common example of a switch to ground. When the door is opened the door switch completes the circuit. The interior light is turned on. In addition, the time control unit is sent an OFF signal indicating the door is open. Pulse Voltage A pulse voltage is made up of alternating high and low voltage signals of varying duration. These signals are counted by the control unit within a predetermined time frame. Analog Input Signals An analog signal is a voltage that varies over a period of time. Analog signals are produced by sensors in the vehicle. Sensors change resistance to deliver variable voltage signals. The Oxygen Sensor sine wave signals shown are typical analog signals. These charts are example signals printed using CONSULT. ^ The first chart shows an Oxygen Sensor lean (low voltage) condition. ^ The second chart is a normal Oxygen Sensor voltage printout. ^ The third chart illustrates an Oxygen Sensor rich (high voltage) condition. Examples of common sensors are: Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors change resistance with a change in temperature. This temperature is converted into an analog voltage range. Page 218 Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 68 Testing fan switch. 1. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch and check continuity with ohmmeter. 2. Meter should indicate continuity as shown in Fig. 68. Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Classification: EM95-01 Section: Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB95-017 Date: February 8, 1995 ENGINE OIL LEVEL AND GRADE APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION The cause of some driveability incidents is incorrect oil level or viscosity. Whenever you evaluate a vehicle for a driveability problem, check the oil level first. (It is a good practice to check oil level on every vehicle that you work on.) Overfilling may cause engine vibration or valve train clatter on vehicles with hydraulic lash adjusters due to oil aeration when the crankshaft hits the oil. Using the wrong viscosity oil can cause rough or low idle resulting from improper operation of the hydraulic lash adjusters. When you add or change the engine oil, follow the service manual recommendations regarding proper oil fill level. Do not overfill the crankcase. If you find a vehicle to be overfilled with oil, drain the excess oil and dispose of properly. Remember to wait ten (10) minutes after refilling before checking. This allows time for the oil to drain back to the pan. Always use the proper viscosity oil specified by the service manual for the temperature range in your geographic area. The viscosity specifications ensure proper engine operation and best engine efficiency. Page 4775 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C Refrigerant - Warranty Claim Reimbursement Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/90-010 Date: June 25, 1990 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: REFRIGERANT REIMBURSEMENT WARRANTY POLICY As a result of the implementation of the new refrigerant recycling equipment, the National Warranty Department has adopted the following policy pertaining to warranty claim refrigerant reimbursement. 1. When requesting reimbursement for newly added refrigerant, reimbursement use the special part number LOCALFREON. 2. When requesting reimbursement for use of recycled refrigerant, use the special part number LOCALRECYC. 3. In both cases, up to $4.00 may be claimed for each quantity of one (1). Note: Quantity 1 = 1 lb. 4. A quantity of two (2) is the maximum allowed per repair ($8.00 total). This policy is effective immediately. Should you have questions pertaining to refrigerant reimbursement, please contact your District Service Manager or Regional Parts & Service Department. Page 2671 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1783 Fig. 303d Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 2206 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Visual Inspection 1. Visually inspect the ignition wires for the following: a. Insulation for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... b. Insulation for cracks or breaks. c. Insulator boots for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... d. Insulator boots for cracks or breaks. e. Terminal ends for corrosion, cracks or looseness. Ignition Wire Resistance Test 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance between the terminal ends. Resistance: Less than 30k ohms Replace the wire if it fails the above test. Page 4497 Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 2551 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Specifications Fig. 7 Fuel System Pressure Specifications Page 610 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 2164 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4224 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Description and Operation Ignition Rotor: Description and Operation Distributor Rotor The rotor makes the connection between the center terminal and the correct spark plug terminal of the cap as it is turned by the distributor. Page 919 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Recommended Fluid Nissan ATF Or DEXRON ATF Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 1280 NX: Route cord under radiator core support and out to the front of the vehicle through right side opening of front lower grille. Secure cord to grille with tie wrap (Figure 3). Sentra: Route cord up and toward the right, through the opening behind right head lamp, between the two legs securing the front grille to the radiator core support. Secure cord to vertical member of front grille with a tie wrap (Figure 4). CAUTION: Make sure that power cord is not routed close to or touching any of the vehicle's moving parts or hot surfaces. 6. Refill cooling system; pressurize to radiator cap relief pressure and check for leaks. Operate engine to check further for leaks. Refer to manufacturer's Service Manual "Engine Cooling System" section. NOTE: It is recommended that low phosphate anti-freeze be used and that a maximum anti-freeze/water mixture ratio of 50/50 be used. Refer to Nissan Owner's Manual "Engine Cooling System" section. 7. Reinstall engine undercover. 8. Use cable end protector cap when heater is not plugged into power source. PART NUMBER: 99998-10282CA APPLICATION MODEL ENGINE TYPE YEAR LOCATION ELEMENT DIRECTION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 300ZX VG30E 1986 Driver side, first 6 o'clock VG30DE & later plug from the rear VG30ET (1) Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. On Brake Lever Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3862 Fig. 6 AD18V type front disc brake disassembled Brake Pad, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Remove lock pin, Figs. 4, 5 and 6, and pivot caliper body upwards. 3. Remove pad retainers, then the pads. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Install inner pad, then pull cylinder body out and install outer pad. Caliper, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube. 3. Remove caliper attaching bolts, then the caliper assembly from vehicle. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Caliper Overhaul 1. Separate cylinder body and torque member, Figs. 4, 5 and 6. 2. Remove brake hose, then press out piston with dust seal and retainer ring. 3. Remove piston seal, guide pin and lock pin from torque member. 4. Reverse procedure to assemble. Page 1888 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection (CHECK ENGINE LIGHT ITEM) Wiring Diagram The following is necessary to perform this inspection. 1. Pull out E.C.U. from under the passenger seat. 2. Warm up engine sufficiently. Page 1909 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 3020 Page 3728 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 3083 Inspection Procedure Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 1496 Page 5373 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Page 841 Ignition Rotor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Rotor 1. Remove the screws securing the distributor cap to the distributor. 2. Confirm that the rotor does not turn on the distributor shaft. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Visually check the rotor for signs of "Burn Through" from the electrode to the distributor shaft. 5. Check the input (center) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 6. Check the output (outer) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 7. Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between the input (center) electrode and the output (outer) electrode. Replace the rotor if it fails the above tests. Page 3008 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4277 Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Top Of Transaxle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2171 All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. Page 2673 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Ignition Rotor: Description and Operation Distributor Rotor The rotor makes the connection between the center terminal and the correct spark plug terminal of the cap as it is turned by the distributor. Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Lug Nuts 72 - 87 ft.lb Page 609 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 4415 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 3109 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 3101 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5053 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE # 9 SYMPTOM: Zone continuity Page 193 Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Service and Repair THERMO SWITCH Replace On Pulsar models, thermo switch is located in radiator lower tank. On Sentra models, thermo switch is located on center left side of radiator tank. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain cooling system into suitable container. 3. Disconnect thermo switch electrical connector, then remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Fig. 1 Testing thermo switch (typical) Testing 1. Remove thermo switch as outlined above. 2. Connect suitable ohmmeter across switch terminals, then immerse lower part of switch in water, Fig. 1. Ohmmeter should indicate an open circuit. 3. Place thermometer in water and heat. When water temperature reaches approximately 185°F, switch contacts should close and the ohmmeter should indicate continuity. 4. If switch does not operate properly, replace it. Page 645 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Page 5451 License Plate Bulb: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 293 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 870 Page 1686 Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions a. After installation, check that mounting brackets and mounting insulator are free from undue stress. If any of above parts are not installed properly, excessive noises or vibrations may be transmitted to vehicle body. b. When connecting flanges, use a new gasket to eliminate gas leakage at the joint. c. Check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for unusual noises, with engine running. d. When connecting rear exhaust tube and Main Muffler, use Genuine Nissan Sealant "Exhaust Sealant Kit 20720-N2225", or an equivalent to eliminate gas leakage at the joint. Page 3312 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2077 Specifications Differential: Specifications Bearing Preload Turning Torque (New Bearing) Page 3373 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 2439 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 647 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 4297 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Fig. 12 Exploded view of instrument panel. 1987-88 Sentra 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect heater hose at firewall connections of heater core. 3. Remove instrument panel, Fig. 12. Page 3096 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2365 Engine Control Module: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 3443 Power Transistor: Description and Operation The ignition signal from the E.C.U. is amplified by the power transistor, which turns the ignition coil primary circuit on and off, inducing the proper high voltage in the secondary circuit. The ignition coil is a small, molded type. Page 4971 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 915 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Level Caution Classification: Section: AT89-008 Automatic Transmission Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-091 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra 1987-1989 Pulsar NX Date: June 30, 1989 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL SERVICE INFORMATION As with all Nissan vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (and as specified in all Nissan Owner's and Service Manuals), it is especially important that the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) for the 3-speed RL3F01A automatic transmission (used on 1987-1989 Sentra and Pulsar XE models) be maintained at the proper level. CAUTION: Both overfilling and underfilling may cause damage to the transmission. Specifications Drain Plug: Specifications Filler Plug 18-25 ft.lb Drain Plug 18-25 ft.lb Testing and Inspection Air Filter Element: Testing and Inspection Viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation until it is replaced periodically. Brushing or blasting operation should never be conducted, because it causes clogging and results in enrichment of the mixture ratio. Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 1504 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2560 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Page 5327 1. Remove rear luggage compartment floor. 2. Raise rear carpet to gain access to the four seat back hinge screws. After removing the screws, the seat back may be removed. 3. Remove lower seat cushion. 4. Remove rear seat back hinges. 5. Remove front quarter panel trim. 6. Remove rear end panel trim. 7. Remove quarter panel lower trim and discard (this will be replaced.) 8. Remove front seat belt upper anchors. 9. Remove upper quarter panel trim. 10. Locate the drilling point in the back side of the upper quarter panel trim as shown below. It is the lightly scribed circle between the coat hanger mount and hatch support notch. 11. Using a hole saw, drill a 1" hole in the trim piece at the marked location. 12. Remove original lap belts (female buckle side). 13. Install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque mounting bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). Instruments - Speedometer Noise Speedometer Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Speedometer Noise Classification: EL88-008 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-094 Models: 1987-88 Sentra/Pulsar Date: July 11, 1988 SPEEDOMETER CABLE NOISE APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra, 1987-88 Pulsar except 1988 Pulsar SE APPLIED VINs: JAPAN BUILT SENTRA Before JN1PB22SXJU 028662 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB24SXJU 044462 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB22SXJU 574774 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB21SXJU 555932 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB26SXJU 016707 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25SXJU 021285 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25YXJU 005931 04/01/88 production U.S. BUILT SENTRA 1987 1988 All PULSAR Before JN1PN34SXJM 500050 05/01/88 production SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987-88 Sentra and Pulsar vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzzing noise from the center of the instrument panel at engine speeds of 2500-3500 RPM. If a customer complains of this type of noise, perform the following diagnostics to determine if the speedometer cable is the cause. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to verify speedometer cable noise: 1. Start engine with transmission in neutral (M/T) or park (A/T). Raise RPM to 3500 and hold for 5-10 seconds. 2. Listen for rattling or buzzing from the speedometer head area. 3. Return engine to idle and turn off ignition. 4. Disconnect speedometer cable from transaxle and let hang. Be sure to position the cable so that it isn't touching the engine or transaxle. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If the noise can be heard in Step 2, but is not present during Step 5, replace the speedometer cable assembly with the improved (insulated) cable assembly listed below. If the noise is still present, reinstall the speedometer cable and contact the FIXS Hotline for additional information. PARTS INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION NEW PART NUMBER FORMER PART NUMBER Speedometer 25050-01Y00 25050-60A01 Cable Assembly 25050-60A00 Page 3655 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Note: Preload adjustment of wheel bearing is not necessary. Rear Wheel Bearing 1. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to: 137 - 188 ft lbs (186 - 255 Nm) 2. Check bearing for smooth operation. 3. Check axial end play. Should be: .002in (0.05mm) or less Page 4275 Page 1047 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 1794 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications With New Filter 3.4 qt (US) Without New Filter 3.0 qt (US) Page 805 Page 626 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 1614 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Tester - Calibration Classification: Section: EM90-009 Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB90-093 Models: All Date: October 18, 1990 COOLANT TESTERS BACKGROUND INFORMATION: Evaluations have shown that some after-market coolant testers displayed inaccurate readings which were, in some cases, off by as much as 10~F. SERVICE INFORMATION: When coolant concentrations are in question, the following advice is recommended to dealers: 1. Select a name-brand tester, preferably from a specialty tool supplier. 2. Prior to usage, calibrate the coolant tester: ^ Prepare a "known" mixture of exactly 50% fresh anti-freeze and exactly 50% fresh water. Keep this mixture in a clean, sealed container to use for calibration purposes. ^ To calibrate a coolant tester, draw from the above "known" mixture when it is at room temperature (65-75~F). Use a "Magic Marker" to place a mark on the coolant tester for the "known" 50/50 mixture. ^ Also, be sure that the coolant you wish to test is between 65-75~F. This means that you may have to wait for the temperature of the coolant to fall within this range. NOTE: During extremely hot weather, it may be impractical to wait for the coolant to fall within the 65-75~F range. However, the coolant tester can be re-calibrated for the new, "hot weather" temperature using the "known" 50/50 mixture - provided both this 50/50 mixture and the coolant are at ambient temperature. 3. Measure the vehicle's coolant concentration using the calibrated mark on the coolant tester as an indication of a proper 50/50 solution. NOTE: Technicians should be equally concerned if the coolant concentration is too high as well as too low. High coolant concentrations reduce the ability of the coolant to transfer heat, which, in some cases, may lead to over-heating. In extreme cases, the coolant can sludge and restrict flow in the radiator. 4. After use, clean the tester by flushing it with fresh water. NOTE: Testing has shown that, if not properly cleaned, a non-soluble residue remains on the bouyant devices of the tooters after drying. This residue can effect the density of the bouyant devices and, consequently, effect the tester's accuracy. If there are any further questions regarding coolant concentrations, please contact your Technical service Manager (TSM). The TSM's have access to laboratory-grade hydrometers. Page 1087 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 490 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Page 4132 Alternator: Specifications Rated Output 60 A Test Output 50 A at 2500 rpm Page 2647 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Page 2868 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Vacuum Switching Valve Fig. 22 Vacuum switching valve air flow Page 275 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 776 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2534 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 4916 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Page 3014 Service and Repair Ignition Lock: Service and Repair Fig. 3 Ignition lock replacement The ignition lock is retained by two shear type screws, Fig. 3. It is necessary to drill out these screws to remove ignition lock from steering tube. When installing, ensure that the shear type screws are used. Page 51 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VE30DE MAXIMA (A32) VQ30DE Page 2355 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Page 2147 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2277 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 2175 BASIC CHARACTERISTICS An ON-duty signal is fed to the I.S.C. valve in response to the water temperature. STARTING CORRECTION A starting correction signal is added in response to the water temperature for improved engine startability. This function continues for several seconds after the engine starts. IDLE SPEED FEEDBACK CONTROL When the following conditions are met after the starting correction has been completed, the idle speed feedback control function operates. (1) Idle switch-ON (2) Neutral switch - ON or below 8 km/h (5 MPH) (vehicle speed) *: When battery voltage of less than 12 volts continues for a few seconds, the target idle speed will be maintained higher, in order to improve charging function. (M/T only) Page 2125 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Classification: EM95-01 Section: Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB95-017 Date: February 8, 1995 ENGINE OIL LEVEL AND GRADE APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION The cause of some driveability incidents is incorrect oil level or viscosity. Whenever you evaluate a vehicle for a driveability problem, check the oil level first. (It is a good practice to check oil level on every vehicle that you work on.) Overfilling may cause engine vibration or valve train clatter on vehicles with hydraulic lash adjusters due to oil aeration when the crankshaft hits the oil. Using the wrong viscosity oil can cause rough or low idle resulting from improper operation of the hydraulic lash adjusters. When you add or change the engine oil, follow the service manual recommendations regarding proper oil fill level. Do not overfill the crankcase. If you find a vehicle to be overfilled with oil, drain the excess oil and dispose of properly. Remember to wait ten (10) minutes after refilling before checking. This allows time for the oil to drain back to the pan. Always use the proper viscosity oil specified by the service manual for the temperature range in your geographic area. The viscosity specifications ensure proper engine operation and best engine efficiency. Page 2731 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) A/T - Fluid Application Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Application Classification: AT96-001 Reference: NTB98-042 Date: May 15, 1998 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID This amended version of NTB95-055 updates information regarding the Recommendation ATF usage. Please disregard previous NTB95-055 and NTB93-065. SERVICE INFORMATION IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Matic "D" ATF must be used in performing repairs paid by Nissan, such as warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for repairs when non-genuine Nissan Matic "D" is used. For current and prior production Nissan vehicles, front wheel and/or rear wheel drive, only Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, is formulated to meet the requirements of Nissan automatic transmissions and automatic transaxles. Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, assists in ensuring transmission durability, smooth driveability, low exhaust emissions and customer satisfaction. Only an ashless type petroleum based ATF should be used to repair Nissan vehicles because other types of ATF may contain compounds which adversely affect transmission performance. Specifically, ash will impact friction response. In addition, ATF with ash is likely to have a higher Zinc (Zn) content. Zinc will adhere to clutch linings and cause slippage, resulting in transmission damage. For ordering procedures, please refer to the "Dealer Confidential Parts Price List". Testing and Inspection Expansion Valve: Testing and Inspection Fig. 8 Expansion Valve Diagnosis Chart Faulty expansion valves will be indicated by low suction and discharge pressures on the manifold gauge set. In most cases the power element fails and the valve closes. Occasionally the inlet screen becomes clogged with contamination or desicant beads loose in the system. Page 2387 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5091 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Page 2873 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 6 EGR control valve. Fig. 7 EGR control valve. Page 1628 Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Service and Repair THERMO SWITCH Replace On Pulsar models, thermo switch is located in radiator lower tank. On Sentra models, thermo switch is located on center left side of radiator tank. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain cooling system into suitable container. 3. Disconnect thermo switch electrical connector, then remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Fig. 1 Testing thermo switch (typical) Testing 1. Remove thermo switch as outlined above. 2. Connect suitable ohmmeter across switch terminals, then immerse lower part of switch in water, Fig. 1. Ohmmeter should indicate an open circuit. 3. Place thermometer in water and heat. When water temperature reaches approximately 185°F, switch contacts should close and the ohmmeter should indicate continuity. 4. If switch does not operate properly, replace it. Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire - Replacement Caution 4WD & All-Wheel Drive Models: 4WD & All-WD Models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT89-002 Bulletin No.: TS89-061 Date: April 13, 1989 4WD & ALL-WHEEL DRIVE TIRE REPLACEMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-89 Sentra (B12) 1986-88 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1980-Truck (720, D21) 1987-89 Pathfinder (WD21) 1990 Axxess (M11) SERVICE INFORMATION When customers inquire about tire replacement for Applied Model vehicles, please remind them of the recommended guidelines in their respective Owner's Manual. TIRE REPLACEMENT CAUTION: ^ Always use tires of the same size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case or differential gears. ^ If excessive tire wear is noted, Nissan recommends that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as needed. ^ If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. ^ Use only the spare tires specified for each 4WD or all-wheel drive models. A/C - White Flakes From Registers Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes From Registers Classification: HA93-014 Reference: NTB93-132 Date: September 12, 1993 WHITE FLAKES FROM VENTS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Sentra (B13) and Altima (U13) APPLIED DATE(S): Sentra built before 7/29/93 Altima built before 7/29/93 SERVICE INFORMATION Some air conditioning units may exhibit white flakes blowing from the vents for a short time when the air conditioning is first turned on. The flakes are 1 mm or less in diameter and fall on interior surfaces like a light snow. This incident can be resolved by replacing the evaporator with an improved unit according to the procedure below. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the appropriate Service Manual instructions to replace the evaporator with the countermeasure unit listed on the following page (there is no new part number -- check for the proper date stamp indicated in the Parts Information section). When installing the new evaporator into the vehicle, make sure that the evaporator case drain tube is correctly aligned to the drain hose and that there are no obstructions. NOTE: To minimize the flakes remaining in the heater and air conditioning system, vacuum or blow out with compressed air any visible flakes in the heater assembly before reinstalling the new evaporator assembly. Warm soapy water may be used to clean the inside of the evaporator case, heater case, and all ductwork. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 94 Vehicle Speed Sensor The vehicle speed sensor produces an alternating voltage signal. This alternating signal (analog) is converted to a digital signal for processing. The control unit can only process digital signals. Analog signals must be converted to a digital form before the information can be used by the control unit. Control Unit Logic The control unit processes digital signals in two forms. To the control unit the signal is either ON or OFF. In computer logic an ON or high voltage signal is a "1" and an OFF or low voltage signal is a "O". The control unit uses combinations of these signals to control its outputs. The controller uses inputs from many sensors to determine what outputs it will make and at what time it will make them. These outputs control a variety of functions from automatic speed control to engine driveability. Outputs An output is simply an action the control unit tells an electrical component to make. Based on the calculations the control unit makes of the inputs, it will signal an action. The output can tell a component to perform a function for a period of time. Power and Ground Control The ECU controls either a component's power or ground. To understand this, refer to the diagrams. If the ECU is between the electrical component (load) and the power source, the ECU controls its power. ^ If the component is between the power source and the ECU, the ECU controls the component ground. VOLTAGE DROP TEST Service and Diagnosis Precautions Before diagnosing any electronic controlled circuits the following cautions should be followed: 1. Make sure the following parts and systems are in good condition and are operating properly. ^ Battery output ^ Battery terminals ^ Grounds ^ System connectors are properly positioned and connected 2. Never use a test lamp to check an electronically controlled circuit. 3. Do not drop, jar or shake electronic components. Follow the trouble diagnosis charts in the appropriate section of the Service Manual to isolate which component may be the incident part. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage Drop Tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Part of the available voltage is used by the resistance. When there is excessive resistance, less voltage is available for other loads (lights, motors, etc.) in the circuit. Since each resistance in a circuit uses voltage, a voltmeter can be used to isolate the cause of the problem. A voltage drop across closed contacts can indicate excessive resistance. This can cause the circuit to operate incorrectly. Remember, a switch is not a load. During diagnosis, use a voltmeter to measure the voltage drop across each switch contact while the circuit is in operation. Page 3137 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications With New Filter 3.4 qt (US) Without New Filter 3.0 qt (US) Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 616 When the specification is labeled "Toe-Out" and the dimensions are positive (+) numbers (ie: 2 to 6 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 3). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-out specification = Toe-Out wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-Out specification = Toe-In wheel setting. 4. Rear Toe is adjustable on some Nissan vehicles with independent rear suspensions. Usually, the adjustment, itself, is not difficult but, it is extremely important. Nissan uses two (2) different terms to describe "Rear Toe". "Toe-In" and "Toe-Out". Contemporary wheel alignment equipment measures rear "Toe-In" and, if the wheels are actually "Toed-Out", displays the measured values as a negative (Figure 4). 5. Toe is measured as a distance or as an angle. When measuring toe as a distance, it is found by measuring the difference between the center of the front of the tire and the center of the rear of the tire at spindle height. The difference between the distances is Total Toe. When measured as an angle, the center line of the vehicle is zero degrees (0~, 0.00~, or 0~00') and the angle of a line drawn through the center of the tire and wheel, as viewed from the top, is the Toe angle for the individual wheel. 6. Nissan Total Toe specifications are given two (2) ways: Distance: Millimeters and Decimal Inches Angle: Degrees and Minutes Diagrams Oil Pump Page 1725 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 4212 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection With engine running at idle, remove ventilation hose from P.C.V. valve; if valve is working properly a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 4982 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Page 3032 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4262 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications With Heater Automatic Transmission 5.6 qt (US) Manual Transmission 5.0 qt (US) Without Heater Automatic Transmission 5.0 qt (US) Manual Transmission 4.4 qt (US) Page 2161 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 4407 When replacing transverse link and/or radius rod, refer to Fig. 25 and note the following: 1. Before removing transverse link attaching bolts, scribe alignment mark on adjusting pin. 2. After installing transverse link, adjust wheel alignment as described in ``Wheel Alignment Section.'' 3. When installing radius rod bracket, ensure arrow points forward. Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. On Brake Lever Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1036 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Classification: BR94-002 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB94-012 Models: All models Date: February 3, 1993 BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY APPLIED MODELS: All Models GENERAL INFORMATION: Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. POSSIBLE CAUSE OF BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: Page 1184 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 3293 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5384 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 1493 Locations Ignition Coil Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2133 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Page 2993 Page 659 4. Hold position of cam and torque nut to 83-98 ft. lbs. 5. Ensure toe-in is still within specifications. 1987-88 Sentra Fig. 2 Rear Toe-in Adjustment. Rear toe-in is adjusted by rotating the cam bolts which secure the rear parallel link to the crossmember. 1. Measure total toe-in and toe-in for each wheel following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Scribe matching mark between cam and parallel link, then loosen nut securing cam bolt. 3. Rotate cam bolt(s) as needed, Fig. 7, to obtain specified toe-in. On graduation on scale varies toe-in approximately .08 inch. Ensure that total toe-in is within specifications and divided equally between left and right wheels. 4. Hold position of cam bolt(s) and torque retaining nuts to 72-87 ft. lbs. 5. Ensure toe-in is still within specifications. Page 3466 Spark Plug: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 640 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 547 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Specifications Fig. 2 Ignition Coil Specifications Page 2361 Engine Control Module: Specifications Fig. 303a Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 1399 1. Check belt tensioner for smooth turning. 2. Check the condition of tensioner spring. Altitude Compensation Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Compensation Altitude compensation prevents deterioration of exhaust emissions caused by an enriched air/fuel mixture. Atmospheric pressure varies according to the altitude. The higher the altitude, the lower the atmospheric pressure. At an atmospheric pressure of approximately 26 in. Hg or below, the altitude switch transmits an ``On'' signal to the control unit, decreasing fuel to provide an appropriate air/fuel mixture ratio. Page 5011 2. The antenna sleeve should release from the antenna assembly when the rod is removed. If the antenna sleeve is bound, the rod may not release after the removal of the nut and base. In this case, use pliers to carefully remove the antenna sleeve (with the radio "OFF"). After the antenna sleeve is removed, continue with the procedure to remove and replace the antenna rod. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PFP) claim using the coding as shown. Page 114 Fig. 303d Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 4504 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. System Diagnosis Air/Fuel Mixture: Testing and Inspection PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - E.C.C.S. harness connectors - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - A.I.V. hose - Engine compression - E.G.R. valve operation - Throttle valve 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Overall Inspection Procedure Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/88-007 Date: April 18, 1988 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: TIRE ASSISTANCE CUSTOMER/DEALER HOTLINE This is a revised list of the Tire Assistance Customer/Dealer Hotline telephone numbers. Please discard warranty bulletin (WB/88-004) issued on February 3, 1988. The following general information toll-free telephone numbers may be used to assist you with your tire replacement needs: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-423-4544 (Except California) 1-800-221-8744 (Inside California) Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-800-662-0200 (Except New York) 1-800-334-4646 (Inside New York) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) For customer assistance or emergency tire orders, please use the telephone numbers listed below: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-722-9888 Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-716-879-8494 (Mr. Wagner 8:30am-5:00pm EST) 1-213-781-2001 (Mr. Yanacek 2:00pm-5:00pm PST) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) If you have further questions pertaining to tires, please contact your District Service Manager or Regional Service Department. Page 3196 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 4809 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 789 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Locations A/C Components. Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid 1.0 - 1.1 qt (US) Page 3421 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4928 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 2415 Idle Speed Control Valve: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Do not pour oil or solvent into the I.S.C. valve. - Do not disassemble I.S.C. valve. - Do not peck the valve portion of I.S.C. valve. 1. Check resistance between the terminals. (A) - (B) : 9.5-10.5 ohms (B) - (C) : 8.5 - 9.5 ohms 2. Confirm insulation between each terminal and I.S.C. valve body. 3. Apply battery voltage between (B) (+) and (C) (-) and confirm the opening of I.S.C. valve. Valve: Fully closed. 4. Apply battery voltage between (B) (+) and (A) (-) and confirm the opening of I.S.C. valve. Valve: Fully open. 5. Check opening clearance of I.S.C. valve without applying voltage to terminals. Opening clearance: 0 - 2 mm (0 - 0.08 in) Page 361 Inspection Procedure Page 2697 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1138 Page 4997 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Page 1972 Inspection Procedure Page 429 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 3318 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 3324 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 4304 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4474 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 1929 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 113 Fig. 303c Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 1503 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2549 This chart indicates appropriate pin voltages for the ASCD system: Page 3376 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 633 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 4676 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair When replacing compressor clutch, use care as not to scratch or bend pulley. Fig. 1 Exploded view of Atsugi compressor 1. Place compressor assembly, Fig. 1, in a suitable holding device. Fig. 2 Removing center bolt 2. Retain clutch disc, using tool No. KV99231010, then remove center bolt, Fig. 2. 3. Remove clutch disc using tool Nos. KV998VR001 and KV99231010, Fig. 2. Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Technical Service Bulletins Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Classification: Section: Front Axle FA89-004 & Suspension Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-150 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra, Pulsar NX, 1989-1990 240SX Date: October 19, 1989 FRONT STRUT KIT CAMBER APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1989 Sentras (B12) 1987-1989 Pulsar NX (N13) 1989-1990 240SX (S13) SERVICE INFORMATION New Front Strut Kits supplied for the Applied Models are now manufactured with the camber already set at factory specifications. The adjustable eccentric pin contained in the previously available kit assemblies has been eliminated. Please note that the new kits will retrofit on a model by model basis, and adjustment is not required when retrofitting. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4096 NOTE: ^ The BSC is equipped with a scanner that can be used to scan the VIN on most vehicles. ^ Scanning the VIN will give the tester the [CCA rating] information for original equipment batteries. ^ For replacement batteries, the [CCA rating] from the battery label must be entered into the BSC manually. For Nissan Original Equipment Batteries: ^ When using the BSC, make sure the correct vehicle [CCA rating] is entered by scanning the VIN, or entering it manually from the battery label. NOTE: If the VIN cannot be scanned, enter it manually. ^ Make sure to select "ORG EQUIPMENT" on the tester. ^ The [CCA RATING] entered during testing is recorded in the 12-character test output code required for warranty repairs. ^ Claims that are submitted with incorrect [CCA RATING] may be suspended or denied. Genuine Nissan Replacement Batteries (service part replacements for Nissan Original Equipment Batteries): ^ Scan the VIN, select "GEN REPLACEMENT", then Manually enter the CCA rating from the battery label into the BSC. NOTE: If the VIN cannot be scanned, enter it manually. IMPORTANT: When using the BSC, you will get inaccurate test results if you don't enter the correct [CCA RATING] ^ The [CCA RATING] entered during testing is recorded in the 12-character test output code required for warranty repairs. ^ Claims that are submitted with incorrect [CCA RATING] may be suspended or denied. Disclaimer Page 5197 ^ Before installing new glass, remove adhesive tape from base. ^ Warm up lip of base and back of new glass. ^ Put new glass on warmed lip of glass base. CAUTION: Put glass on lip evenly; if not done properly, it is possible to damage the glass and glass base. PARTS INFORMATION PART NAME NEW PART NO. FORMER PART NO. Replacement glass (L) See pages 3 N/A (R) and 4 N/A EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 873 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 3947 B. For best accuracy, "stabilize" (firmly support) the vehicle with a jack or jack stand as shown in Figure 1. ^ On some hoists, the vehicle may "wobble" a little while using the on-car brake lathe. Not good. CAUTION: Any rocking motion (wobble) of the vehicle during the ProCut(TM) "Automatic compensation" procedure will reduce the accuracy of the resurfacing. ^ If wobble occurs during the rotor resurfacing process/procedure, the finished rotor runout may be more than factory specification and should be checked before using the rotor. C. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS speed sensors. ^ Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS speed sensor's magnet. It is best to clean the ABS sensor with the rotor removed. D. After a rotor has been resurfaced with the ProCut(TM) brake lathe: ^ If the rotor must be removed for any reason, mark the exact location (rotor to axle hub) before removing the rotor (see Figure 2). ^ The rotor must be reinstalled back to the same location. E. Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. ^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the lug nuts to the proper torque specification. ^ Uneven or high torque applied to the lug nuts may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may increase rotor runout and cause excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Page 1771 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 2230 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Intake and Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment Adjustment must be made while engine is warm but not running. 1. Set No. 1 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (1), (2), (3) and (6). 2. Set No. 4 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (4), (5), (7) and (8). Valve clearance: Intake and exhaust 0.28 mm (0.011 in) Tighten Pivot lock nut 16 - 21 N.m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb) Page 761 Page 1542 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Classification: Section: GI88-023 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-150 Models: All models 1987-1989 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home). Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES * These are maximum distances these vehicles may be towed without damage to the gear rain. In general, any Nissan vehicle should be started, warmed up, and driven at least two miles after it has been towed these distances - more frequently if possible. Page 1971 Page 2323 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 846 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 4539 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 4542 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4708 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 3713 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 1882 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Locations Fig. 1 Timing Mark Page 1530 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 627 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 4227 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 1736 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E, VE30DE NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Page 4423 Fig. 11 Spring Installation Direction Fig. 12 Installing Coil Spring Fig. 13 Upper Spring Seat Installation Direction 10. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Install coil spring in correct direction, Fig. 11. b. Position coil spring in lower spring seat as shown, Fig. 12. c. Install upper spring seat as shown, Fig. 13. 2WD Page 757 Page 4427 Fig. 1 Rear Suspension (Part 2 Of 2). 2WD Models 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove upper and lower strut attaching nuts and/or bolts Figs. 1 through 3 then the strut assembly. Fig. 2 Rear Suspension (Part 1 Of 2). 4WD Models Page 1883 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4562 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 4554 Page 4257 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3871 ^ while the vehicle is barely moving, with light brake pedal force ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather ^ most common on vehicles with automatic transmission This noise is common on most cars with front disc brakes. There are no repair procedures to eliminate this noise. 3. SQUEAKING/SQUEALING NOISE ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during low speed stops (5-20 mph) ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather This noise is common on vehicles with high-performance potential that must be able to stop in short distances from high speeds. Other brands of brake pads may eliminate this noise, but Nissan does not recommend them because they may have reduced pad life or inadequate performance in high speed stops. 4. HIGH-PITCHED SQUEAKING/SCRAPING NOISE ^ whenever brakes are applied ^ may come from just one wheel Nissan uses pad wear indicators on many of its disc brake pads to provide an audible warning when the brake pads need replacement. Spring steel tabs that are riveted to the brake pad scrape lightly on the rotor surface when the pad is worn down to its lowest limit. The customer should hear the noise at this time and bring the vehicle to the dealer for brake pad replacement. The pad wear indicator will not damage the rotor surface if the pad is replaced in a reasonable time. Replace worn pads with new parts. Check the rotor surface for damage and machine if necessary. Page 408 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 3983 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 806 Idle Check and Set Procedure Page 4811 Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 383 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Models All Models Section General Information Classification G191-005 Bulletin No. NTB91-049 Date May 16, 1991 A CLARIFICATION OF TOE SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHEEL ALIGNMENT APPLIED MODELS: All SERVICE INFORMATION: Toe, front or rear, is the position of the tire and wheel assembly in relation to the center line of the vehicle, as viewed from the top. This alignment measurement influences the track holding characteristics of the vehicle. Incorrect Toe alignment can cause excessive tire wear. Nissan service manuals give toe specifications as either "total toe-in" or "total too-out." Total toe-in or -out, means that one-half (1/2) of the listed dimension should be applied, equally, to each wheel. ^ Toe-In is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the front (Figure 1a). Page 2702 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Description and Operation Distributor Cap: Description and Operation Distributor Cap The distributor cap is used to make the connection between the rotor and the correct spark plug wire. High tension current from the rotor is distributed to the towers of the distributor cap at a pre-set sequence and then to the spark plug wires which carry the current on to the spark plugs. Page 5316 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 3921 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 1933 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3352 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5334 5. It is recommended that the rear pillar finishers are replaced with the retro-fit finishers listed in the parts information section. However, the existing finishers can be drilled for anchor bolt access. To modify the trim, locate the drilling point in the pillar finishers. The point is marked in the back side of the finisher at the position as shown below. 6. Drill a 1" hole in each trim piece at the marked location using a hole saw. 7a. Using the dimensions shown in the illustration below, cut the opening in the parcel shelf for the 3-point seat belt. 7b. Install retro-fit finisher on parcel shelf ends as shown above. 8. Reinstall rear pillar finishers and check alignment of anchor bolt holes. 9. Remove lap belts (female buckle side) and install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque anchor bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs.(3.65-4.65 kg/m). 10. Remove the retractor side of the original lap belts. 11. Remove the trunk/wheelhouse finishers to access retro-fit retractor mounting point. The finisher must be trimmed to allow for mounting of the retractor unit. Cut finisher as shown below: Page 715 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4896 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Page 1447 Page 2105 Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Page 1446 Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Testing and Inspection Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Air density becomes thinner at higher altitudes. Therefore, the carburetor produces too rich an air/fuel mixture at higher altitudes. The altitude compensator automatically corrects air/fuel ratio to an optimum mixture. When vehicle is operated in a high altitude environment, the bellows in the compensator extends, causing the lever attached to the bellows to push up the needle. When the needle is pushed up the air passage becomes wider, allowing larger amounts of air to flow from the altitude compensator to the carburetor, thereby thinning the air/fuel mixture. Electronic Controlled Carburetor (ECC) See: Testing and Inspection Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Low and Reverse Brake Low & Reverse Brake Page 3371 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 4301 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 498 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 4183 Ignition Relay: Locations Ignition Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5232 5. Dry vehicle with a chamois. 6. After rinsing - inspect the surface for drips, sags, runs and missed areas. Page 3618 Page 159 Power Transistor: Description and Operation The ignition signal from the E.C.U. is amplified by the power transistor, which turns the ignition coil primary circuit on and off, inducing the proper high voltage in the secondary circuit. The ignition coil is a small, molded type. A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Front Wheel Alignment Alignment: Specifications Front Caster Angle + 11/12 to +2 5/12 deg Caster Angle Desired 1 2/3 deg Camber Angle -1 1/12 to + 5/12 deg Camber Angle Desired 3/4 deg Toe -.03 to +.05 in King Pin Inclination 14 2/3 in ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 639 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 1764 System description: When the switch is ON, the ECU lights up the lamp. The VOLTAGE VALUE is based on the body ground. Page 3268 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 4208 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Diagnostic Note Mode Door Motor: Adjustments Diagnostic Note Whenever control cables are disconnected or heater case is disassembled for service, control cables and operating rods should be adjusted as outlined in adjustments. Page 1172 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 217 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 4263 Page 3048 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Page 4152 Starter Motor: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect starter wiring from starter. 3. Remove starter retaining bolts and the starter. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 1749 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Page 2911 Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 5223 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Page 5252 When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Page 2146 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 3581 Workflow Page 493 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Page 160 Power Transistor: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between terminals as per the image. Replace power transistor if it fails the above tests. Page 4172 Ignition Relay: Locations Ignition Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 149 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 4933 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Anti-Backfire Valve Deceleration Valve: Testing and Inspection Anti-Backfire Valve 1. Run engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect hose from air cleaner assembly and place a finger near outlet. 3. Momentarily increase engine speed to approximately 3000 RPM, then return to idle. If no vacuum is felt at the air cleaner outlet, the valve is defective and must be replaced. Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Maximum Resistance Per Cable 30 K ohms Page 325 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1489 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Lubricant Capacity Lubricant Capacity Refrigerant Oil Capacity 6.8 oz (US) Refrigerant Oil Type SUNISO 5GS Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Classification: BR94-002 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB94-012 Models: All models Date: February 3, 1993 BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY APPLIED MODELS: All Models GENERAL INFORMATION: Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. POSSIBLE CAUSE OF BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations The Fuse Panel Is Located Under LH Side Of Instrument Panel Page 5287 7. Mix one part remover solution to one part water into a bucket. Spread solution directly onto runs, sags and thick areas of paint guard coating. Rewash those areas repeatedly with remover and light sponging. Coatings that smear but do not wash off are not PGC. They're probably engine wax overspray or anti-corrosion wax drips. Use your normal solvent to remove these. Caution: Do not let the remover dry. Be especially careful to watch for drips onto the top surface of the bumpers when using the 1 to 1 mixture. If the solution is allowed to dry on these surfaces, it may cause recoating of the PGC. Force can damage the paint and other chemicals can make the coating more resistant to removal. The mixture of 1 part remover to 1 part water is used only on thick areas. Do not use the remover without mixing it with water. 8. Thoroughly rinse and dry vehicle. Page 3623 2. Identify which hose is the Inlet and which hose is the Outlet to the oil cooler (refer to Charts A and B). 3. Disconnect the oil cooler Inlet and Outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes (see Figure 3). ^ For Frontier (D22) w/bypass valve, remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the bypass valve fittings (see Figure 6 shown) NOTE: If rubber material from a cooler hose remains on the steel tube or fitting, replace the rubber hose. 4. Allow any transmission fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. 5. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-A0006) into the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 4). Page 1432 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions Hose: Testing and Inspection 1. Check hoses and fuel tank filler cap. 2. Disconnect the vapor vent line connecting carbon canister to fuel tank. 3. Connect a 3-way connector, a manometer and a cock (or an equivalent 3-way charge cock) to the end of the vent line. 4. Supply fresh air into the vapor vent line through the cock little by little until pressure becomes 3.923 kPa (400 mmH2O, 15.75 inH2O). 5. Shut the cock completely and leave it unattended. 6. After 2.5 minutes, measure the height of the liquid in the manometer. 7. Variation in height should remain at 0.245 kPa (25 mmH20, 0.98 inH20). 8. When filler cap does not close completely, the height should drop to zero in a short time. 9. If the height does not drop to zero in a short time when filler cap is removed, the cause is a blocked hose or a clogged fuel check valve. In case the vent line is blocked, the fuel tank is not vented properly causing insufficient delivery of fuel to engine, or vapor lock. It must, therefore, be repaired. Page 568 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. A/C - White Flakes From Registers Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes From Registers Classification: HA93-014 Reference: NTB93-132 Date: September 12, 1993 WHITE FLAKES FROM VENTS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Sentra (B13) and Altima (U13) APPLIED DATE(S): Sentra built before 7/29/93 Altima built before 7/29/93 SERVICE INFORMATION Some air conditioning units may exhibit white flakes blowing from the vents for a short time when the air conditioning is first turned on. The flakes are 1 mm or less in diameter and fall on interior surfaces like a light snow. This incident can be resolved by replacing the evaporator with an improved unit according to the procedure below. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the appropriate Service Manual instructions to replace the evaporator with the countermeasure unit listed on the following page (there is no new part number -- check for the proper date stamp indicated in the Parts Information section). When installing the new evaporator into the vehicle, make sure that the evaporator case drain tube is correctly aligned to the drain hose and that there are no obstructions. NOTE: To minimize the flakes remaining in the heater and air conditioning system, vacuum or blow out with compressed air any visible flakes in the heater assembly before reinstalling the new evaporator assembly. Warm soapy water may be used to clean the inside of the evaporator case, heater case, and all ductwork. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2704 Inspection Procedure Page 3349 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Page 5274 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 565 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 1060 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 3400 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Seats - Care of Leather Trim Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Care of Leather Trim Models All Models Section Body & Frame Classification BF91-014 Bulletin No. NTB91-051 Date May 23, 1991 CARE OF LEATHER TRIM APPLIED MODELS: All Models Equipped With Leather Trim SERVICE INFORMATION: Nissan currently uses Cow Hide on all vehicles equipped with Leather Interior Trim (excluding certain 1988 Maximas which were equipped with Suede Seats). This bulletin refers only to those vehicles equipped with Cow Hide Leather Interior Trim. Suede seat covers are made of Pig Skin and should be cared for according to the instructions provided in the U11 Maxima Seat Care Kit (P/N 999M1-U8000). Leather is typically used on seat surfaces, trim pieces, steering wheels, and shift knobs in Nissan Vehicles. Maintaining a high quality appearance is best achieved by using the procedures indicated below. 1. Occasionally, loose dust should be removed from the interior trim and seat surfaces using a vacuum cleaner or a soft brush. The leather surfaces should be wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 2. Some leather trim, such as the leather wrapped steering wheel, may become grayish in color with use. The original condition may be restored by rubbing the affected area with a clean soft cloth dampened in a mild soap solution, and then wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 3. Leather seat surfaces may be regularly coated with a leather conditioner such as saddle soap. Cautions: Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar product on leather trim. Never use car wax on leather trim. Never use fabric protectors on leather trim unless recommended by the manufacturer. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the leather trim. Page 3138 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Remove injector cover and pull out injector straight upward. - Take care not to break or bend injector terminal. INSTALLATION - Always replace 0-rings with new ones. - When installing, smear a little of engine oil to 0-rings. 1. Install lower 0-ring. 2. Install fuel injector and push it using suitable tool (or a socket head of 13 mm). - Align the direction of the injector terminals. - Take care not to bend injector terminal. 3. Install upper 0-ring and push it using suitable tool (or a socket head of 19 mm). 4. Install upper plate (white one). 5. Install injector cover with rubber plug removed. - Make sure that two 0-rings (small one and big one) are installed in the injector cover. 6. Check the proper connection between injector terminal and injector cover terminal, then install rubber plug. Page 3858 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 5256 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Page 2319 PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE PULSAR (KN13) GA16i SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) Page 5332 5. Remove rear speaker assembly. 6. Remove rear end panel finisher. 7. Remove rear wheelhouse trim. 8. Locate the scribed mark in the quarter panel upper finisher as shown below. 9. Using a hole saw, drill a 1" hole in the trim piece at the marked location. 10. It is recommended that the rear wheelhouse finishers are replaced with the retro-fit finishers listed in the parts information section. However, the existing finishers can be trimmed for belt access as follows: NOTE: Be sure to cut all the way through to the rear edge. This will allow the belt to slide into the slot for installation. 11. Remove original lap belts (female buckle side). 12. Install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque anchor bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 13. Remove the retracting side of the original lap belts. 14. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed in two steps. First, install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness by installing the mounting bolt and locating screw. Then bolt the shoulder anchor into the quarter panel upper finisher where the 1" hole was drilled. Torque mounting bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 15. Reinstall wheelhouse trim. 16. Secure seat belt access finisher to wheelhouse trim. 17. Reinstall rear end panel trim. Page 2570 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Wiring Diagram Page 2060 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Tools - Essential Tool Release, Engine, A/C Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Essential Tool Release, Engine, A/C Classification: T&E95-03; Reference: NTB95-030 Date: March 22, 1995 ESSENTIAL TOOL RELEASE SERVICE INFORMATION During the week of February 6, 1995, all Nissan dealers were sent the following special tools as part of the Essential Service Tool Program. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. J41471 Variable Timing Control (VTC) Sprocket Rebuild Kit. This kit provides the necessary tools to rebuild the VTC intake camshaft sprockets on the VE30DE engine. The initial shipment of this tool has been provided to all Nissan dealers at no charge. Additional kits can be purchased through the Tech-Mate Service Equipment and Special Tools program by calling 800-NMC-2001. Refer to Technical Bulletin NTB95-022 for proper usage of these tools. 2. J39400-A/C Leak Detector Tune-up Kit. This kit provides all the items necessary to perform preventive maintenance on the J39400 A/C Leak Detector. J 39400-TUNEUP Leak Detector Kit Page 765 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4903 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 4907 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Description and Operation Ignition Rotor: Description and Operation Distributor Rotor The rotor makes the connection between the center terminal and the correct spark plug terminal of the cap as it is turned by the distributor. Page 2142 Page 1822 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2019 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 4441 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 5234 9. Give the vehicle a final inspection. Page 2117 Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 739 Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Cellular Phone: Customer Interest Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Classification: EL99-005 Reference: NTB99-017 Date: April 1, 1999 NISSAN SPEAKER NOISE DUE TO CELLULAR PHONE INTERFERENCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Cellular phone charging may cause a popping or crackling noise in the audio speakers of Nissan vehicles. If this condition exists, it is most likely to occur when the customer's cellular phone is turned off, plugged into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit, and placed within one foot of the audio head unit. The condition may occur more frequently in vehicles with audio systems with amplified speakers. Refer to the appropriate owner's manual for cautions regarding the use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for other accessories. Use the procedure below to verify that the condition exists as described above and provide instruction for the customer to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. SERVICE PROCEDURE Perform the following test procedure to verify the condition exists as described: 1. Ask the customer for the cellular phone and charging adapter. 2. Confirm the cellular phone has been turned off for at least 30 minutes before proceeding. NOTE: Do not turn the cellular phone on at any time during the procedure. If the phone has to be turned from on to off, you will have to wait 30 minutes for the phone to reset to proceed with the test. 3. Plug the phone into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit. 4. Turn the ignition to the "ON" position (do not turn the cellular phone on). 5. Turn the audio unit on. 6. Place the cellular phone close to the front of the audio head unit. 7. Listen for a popping or crackling noise from the audio speakers. 8. If the noise is heard, move the cellular phone back from the audio unit. The noise should be reduced as the cellular phone is moved further away from the audio unit. 9. If the condition is confirmed through the above procedure, advise the customer to keep the cellular phone at least one foot away from the audio head unit to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. Page 4908 13. Check the position of the ejector mechanism, the springs and rails. In case the spring rails move from the original position, grasp the middle part between the two rails and place them back to their original position with a slight force. 14. Install the new button onto the buckle assembly and depress the button, using a small screwdriver to attach the spring. Note This step does not apply to white plastic ejector buckles. See 14a. 14a. To install the button for the white plastic ejector buckle, align the button with the buckle and press into place. Note The white ejector plate button kits contain spare return springs in case one is required. 15. Check the operation of the button and that the spring is attached correctly. 16. Test the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If it does not latch, replace the buckle assembly. If it does latch, proceed to step 17. 17. Install the new outer button side, cover half onto the buckle. 18. Carefully install the switch onto the other cover half by applying pressure to the corners of the switch. Route the switch wires as shown in the photograph below step 19. Note Only apply pressure to the corners of the switch. Do not press or apply pressure in the middle of the switch. Should the switch break, it will be necessary to replace the buckle assembly. 19. Slide the switch upwards (away from the wires) to its original position. 20. Push the buckle release button and carefully assemble the two halves together by first inserting the top tabs of the switch half of the cover into the button half of the cover. 21. Firmly push the two halves together until a snap is heard and/or felt, 22. Check the operation of the buckle. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle. Repeat this step three (3) times. If the buckle fails to latch, both buckle assemblies should be replaced. 23. Check the operation of the seat belt warning light and warning buzzer. Repair as needed according to the applicable warranty. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information. Page 1578 Ignition Cable: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 4268 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 2631 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2241 Inspection Procedure Page 2121 Page 4557 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 2545 Vehicle Speed Sensor The vehicle speed sensor produces an alternating voltage signal. This alternating signal (analog) is converted to a digital signal for processing. The control unit can only process digital signals. Analog signals must be converted to a digital form before the information can be used by the control unit. Control Unit Logic The control unit processes digital signals in two forms. To the control unit the signal is either ON or OFF. In computer logic an ON or high voltage signal is a "1" and an OFF or low voltage signal is a "O". The control unit uses combinations of these signals to control its outputs. The controller uses inputs from many sensors to determine what outputs it will make and at what time it will make them. These outputs control a variety of functions from automatic speed control to engine driveability. Outputs An output is simply an action the control unit tells an electrical component to make. Based on the calculations the control unit makes of the inputs, it will signal an action. The output can tell a component to perform a function for a period of time. Power and Ground Control The ECU controls either a component's power or ground. To understand this, refer to the diagrams. If the ECU is between the electrical component (load) and the power source, the ECU controls its power. ^ If the component is between the power source and the ECU, the ECU controls the component ground. VOLTAGE DROP TEST Service and Diagnosis Precautions Before diagnosing any electronic controlled circuits the following cautions should be followed: 1. Make sure the following parts and systems are in good condition and are operating properly. ^ Battery output ^ Battery terminals ^ Grounds ^ System connectors are properly positioned and connected 2. Never use a test lamp to check an electronically controlled circuit. 3. Do not drop, jar or shake electronic components. Follow the trouble diagnosis charts in the appropriate section of the Service Manual to isolate which component may be the incident part. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage Drop Tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Part of the available voltage is used by the resistance. When there is excessive resistance, less voltage is available for other loads (lights, motors, etc.) in the circuit. Since each resistance in a circuit uses voltage, a voltmeter can be used to isolate the cause of the problem. A voltage drop across closed contacts can indicate excessive resistance. This can cause the circuit to operate incorrectly. Remember, a switch is not a load. During diagnosis, use a voltmeter to measure the voltage drop across each switch contact while the circuit is in operation. Page 5000 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Page 3275 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Brakes - Bleeding Procedure & Fast Fill Master Cylinders Brake Master Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Bleeding Procedure & Fast Fill Master Cylinders Classification: BR88-003 Section: Brakes Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-052 Models: 1986-88 Sentra & 1987-88 Pulsar Date: March 28, 1988 SENTRA/PULSAR BRAKE BLEEDING PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: 1986-88 Sentra and 1987-88 Pulsar SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1986 and later Sentras and some 1987-88 Pulsars have been equipped with "fast fill" master cylinders and some have been equipped with standard, non fast fill master cylinders. The type of master cylinder installed has a significant effect on the procedure for bleeding air out of the brake system. This bulletin provides bleeding procedures for both types of master cylinders. FIGURE 1 HOW TO IDENTIFY A "FAST FILL" MASTER CYLINDER: A "fast fill" master cylinder has two unique features: a. The rear half of the primary piston and bore are larger in diameter than the secondary bore. b. It incorporates a "fast fill" valve between the fluid reservoir and the primary bore. The "fast fill" valve allows fluid to flow quickly into the primary bore, then slowly back into the reservoir. This causes the secondary piston to return to its normal position very slowly when the brake pedal is released (Figure 1). FIGURE 2 The simplest way to identify a "fast fill" master cylinder is to check with your finger along the lower surface of the cylinder (Figure 2). If the casting is the same diameter for its entire length, then the cylinder is not "fast fill". If the casting is larger in diameter near its mounting flange where the primary Page 4166 Ignition Relay: Locations Ignition Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2416 - When installing I.S.C. valve to throttle body, observe the tightening order. Tightening order: (A) -> (B) -> (C) Tightening torque: 4 - 5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 2.9 - 3.6 ft-lb..) Page 3928 large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation. 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation. 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service. NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement. 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1912 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3458 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Page 2351 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Strut Kit - Camber Factory Set Classification: Section: Front Axle FA89-004 & Suspension Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-150 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra, Pulsar NX, 1989-1990 240SX Date: October 19, 1989 FRONT STRUT KIT CAMBER APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1989 Sentras (B12) 1987-1989 Pulsar NX (N13) 1989-1990 240SX (S13) SERVICE INFORMATION New Front Strut Kits supplied for the Applied Models are now manufactured with the camber already set at factory specifications. The adjustable eccentric pin contained in the previously available kit assemblies has been eliminated. Please note that the new kits will retrofit on a model by model basis, and adjustment is not required when retrofitting. PARTS INFORMATION Page 411 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 753 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Page 1874 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 4274 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1414 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection a. Tighten the clamp so its end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from the hose end. b. Make sure that the screw of the clamp does not contact with any adjacent parts. c. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. : Fuel hose clamps 1.0 - 1.5 N.m (0.10 - 0.15 kg-m, 0.7 - 1.1 ft-lb) 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet hose at the electro injection unit. 3. Install a pressure gauge. 4. Start the engine and check the fuel line for fuel leakage. 5. Read fuel pressure gauge. At idling speed: 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2, 36.3 psi) 6. Release fuel pressure again. 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel line. 8. Reconnect the fuel inlet hose. Page 1541 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1073 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3294 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2177 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Page 2008 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 3533 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Level Checking/Precautions Models: 1987-89 Sentra & Pulsar Section: Automatic Transmission Classification: AT89-008 Bulletin No.: TS89-091 Date: June 30, 1989 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL SERVICE INFORMATION As with all Nissan vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (and as specified in all Nissan Owner's and Service Manuals), it is especially important that the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) for the 3-speed RL3F01A automatic transmission (used on 1987-1989 Sentra and Pulsar XE models) be maintained at the proper level. CAUTION: Both overfilling and underfilling may cause damage to the transmission. Page 4812 Page 2336 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Page 3468 Spark Plug: Description and Operation Spark Plug Construction PURPOSE Ignites the combustion mixture. LOCATION Screwed into the cylinder head, at the combustion chamber. OPERATION The spark plug provides a path for the high current of the secondary circuit to flow to ground. The only paths for this current are through the ground electrode and center electrode across the spark gap. The spark produced when the current jumps the gap and ignites the air/fuel mixture in the cylinder. Spark Plug Heat Range CONSTRUCTION The temperature of the spark plug is determined by the length of the insulator and the size of the heatsink area. The longer the insulator is, the smaller the heatsink area will be and this will cause the spark plug to be hotter. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Page 5192 Rear door DOOR LOCK & STRIKER BOLTS This Bulletin gives revised torque specifications for door lock and door striker bolts (see illustration on next page). Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1062 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 402 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4774 A Dangerous Trend By the most reliable estimates, the total ozone level in the Earth's upper atmosphere decreased about 2.5% between 1978 and 1985. A 1% loss of ozone results in an estimated 2% increase in the amount of ultraviolet radiation (UV) that reaches the surface of the earth. This has dangerous implications for life as we know it. A 2% increase in UV will increase the number of human deaths from skin cancer by approximately 5%. UV also increases the number of eye cataracts, causes damage to the human immune system, damages crops and marine life. The Montreal Protocol An agreement, called the Montreal Protocol, signed in 1987 by representatives of 31 countries including the United States, limits world production of CFCs to 1986 levels and calls for further reductions of 50% by 1999. Another International Conference will be held in June, 1990, with the likelihood that the schedule for a complete phase-out of CFCs will occur even earlier. This means that the supply of R12 refrigerant will decrease dramatically over the next few years and the cost will increase. Recycling Makes Good Sense It's already established that making sure CFCs are not vented to the atmosphere is essential for the environment. With the supply of R12 decreasing and the cost increasing, recycling all of the refrigerant you remove from vehicles during repairs or before a vehicle is crushed will make more and more economic sense. Page 2539 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 2522 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON M10 CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) Page 5258 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Page 1152 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Engine Controls - ECM Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification Classification: EF & EC 93-013 Section: Engine Fuel Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-167 Models: Various Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED MODELS: SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 2998 Page 2303 PULSAR (KN13) GA16i QUEST (V40) VG30E SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) Page 322 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 71 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON M10 CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 3647 1. Assemble wheel side of driveshaft as follows: a. Install boot and new small boot band on driveshaft. b. Install joint assembly, with new circlip, on driveshaft, referring to alignment mark made during disassembly. c. Pack driveshaft with suitable grease. d. Install new large boot band. Tie band two turns around boot, then tighten it with a screwdriver and pliers and bend approximately 90°. Lock band in place with a punch, leaving length the same as its width, then bend band back over itself. e. Position boot so that it does not swell or deform when length L, Fig. 9, meets the following specifications: 1984-85 Pulsar and Sentra with Rzeppa joint, 3.94 inches; 1984 Stanza, 4.74 inches; 1984-85 Pulsar and Sentra with Birfield joint, 3.54 inches; 1985 Stanza, 4.69 inches; 1986-88 Pulsar and Sentra with Rzeppa joint, 3.60 inches; 1986 Stanza, 4.70 inches. f. Install small boot band to boot. 2. Assemble tripod type joint as follows: a. Install new O-ring, if equipped. b. On 1984 models, install new slide joint cover so that edge of cover extends over entire circumference of housing. Bend edge of cover at two positions, 180° apart and ensure that cover does not rattle. c. Apply suitable sealant to boot, then install boot and new small boot band onto driveshaft. d. Install driveshaft in suitable soft-jawed vise. e. Install spider assembly, referring to alignment mark made during disassembly. f. Install new snap ring so that rounded surface faces spider assembly. g. Pack spider assembly with suitable grease, then install new large boot band. h. Position boot so that it does not swell when length L, Fig. 9, meets the following specifications: 1984-86 Stanza, 4.45 inches; 1984 Pulsar and Sentra, 4.41 inches; 1985 Pulsar, 4.33 inches on right hand side, or 3.82 inches on left hand side; 1985 Sentra, 3.78 inches on left hand side, or 4.35 inches on right hand side; 1986-88 Pulsar and Sentra, 3.80 inches. i. Install new small boot band to boot. 3. Assemble double offset type joint in reverse order of disassembly as outlined previously. Adjust boot length L, Fig. 9, to 3.31 inches on 1984 Pulsar and Sentra, 3.35 inches on 1985 Pulsar or 3.33 inches on 1986-88 Pulsar and Sentra. 4. Install driveshaft in reverse order of removal as outlined previously. Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 2521 SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Page 295 Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 1898 Page 4038 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 1467 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) System Diagnosis Air/Fuel Mixture: Testing and Inspection PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - E.C.C.S. harness connectors - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - A.I.V. hose - Engine compression - E.G.R. valve operation - Throttle valve 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Overall Inspection Procedure Page 4414 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Steering Knuckle & Drive Axle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 781 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 1547 The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Technical Service Bulletin # 94-012A Date: 990617 Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Classification: BR94-002a Reference: NTB94-012a Date: June 17, 1999 This amended version of NTB94-012 adds a caution and a note to the service procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB94-012. This bulletin supersedes TS89-105/BR89-004 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY SERVICE INFORMATION Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in a thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. Page 847 Spark Plug: Description and Operation Spark Plug Construction PURPOSE Ignites the combustion mixture. LOCATION Screwed into the cylinder head, at the combustion chamber. OPERATION The spark plug provides a path for the high current of the secondary circuit to flow to ground. The only paths for this current are through the ground electrode and center electrode across the spark gap. The spark produced when the current jumps the gap and ignites the air/fuel mixture in the cylinder. Spark Plug Heat Range CONSTRUCTION The temperature of the spark plug is determined by the length of the insulator and the size of the heatsink area. The longer the insulator is, the smaller the heatsink area will be and this will cause the spark plug to be hotter. Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 479 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Page 2857 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Description and Operation Fig. 14 Back pressure transducer valve. Fig. 15 Back pressure transducer valve. Page 3183 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2116 Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Maintenance - Cleaning Power Antenna & Wiper Blades Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Cleaning Power Antenna & Wiper Blades Models: See below Section: Electrical Classification: EL92-011 Bulletin No.: NTB92-083 Date: October 8, 1992 MAINTENANCE OF POWER ANTENNA AND WIPER BLADES APPLIED MODELS: All with Power Antenna; All Vehicles [Wiper Blades]. SERVICE INFORMATION: 1. Maintenance of Power Antenna It is recommended that the Power Antenna rod, in its extended position, be periodically wiped with a clean, soft, dry cloth. This is the most current information from the factory concerning proper periodic maintenance of the Power Antenna. I. Maintenance of Wiper Blades 1. To clean the rubber wiper blades, it is recommended to use a clean, soft, wet cloth [the cloth should be moistened with washer liquid]. 2. Before lowering the wiper blades onto the glass, it is advised to first clean the glass area swept by the wiper blade. Use an appropriate, commercially-available glass cleaner and either paper towels or a lint-free towel. NOTE: If the vehicles you service are subject to ice and snow formation on the front or rear windshields, you may recommend to your customers that wiper blade effectiveness, during these environmental conditions, may be optimized, if both snow and ice are removed prior to operating the wiper system(s). Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1513 Page 4613 Mode Door Motor: Adjustments Intake Door Control 1. Set intake lever at RECIRC position. 2. Set intake door at recirculation position. 3. Connect control cable to link lever and securely clamp cable. 4. Ensure that knob moves smoothly. Page 3134 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 542 Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 5152 You can contact the paint refinish company's technical assistance number listed. Akzo/Sikkens Procedure ICI AUTOCOLOR Procedure DuPont Procedure Glasurit Procedure Martin Senour (NAPA) Procedure PPG Procedure R-M Procedure Sherwin Williams Procedure Spies Hecker Procedure Herberts Standox Procedure Locations Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Locations A/C Components. Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4847 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Accessory Relay Ignition Relay: Locations Accessory Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3909 Fig. 5 AD18B type front disc brake disassembled Page 3846 Circuit Inspection 1. Connect the voltmeter as described in illustration, starting at the battery and working your way around the circuit. 2. An unusually large voltage drop will indicate a component or wire that needs to be repaired. As you can see in the illustration above, the poor connection causes a 4 volt drop. The chart that follows illustrates some maximum allowable voltage drops. These values are given as a guideline, the exact value for each component may vary. COMPONENT VOLTAGE DROP Wire negligible <.001 volts Ground Connections Approx. 0.1 volts Switch Contacts Approx. 0.3 volts Starter Solenoids Approx. 0.5 volts Proper Diagnostic Procedures to Avoid Damaging Other Components In the process of diagnosing electrical incidents you may be required to remove components, disconnect connectors and inspect parts. Test equipment When working with any test equipment, be careful to follow all manufacturers directions and warnings. Improper use of test equipment can result in damage to either your test equipment or vehicle electrical components. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS When working on a vehicle's electrical system you need to use care. The following guidelines will help you prevent new problems while diagnosing an electrical incident. Removing Components When removing components (such as an engine) which have electrical connectors, disconnect all of the connectors prior to attempting to take the component out of the car. Stretching the connector harness can cause wiring to pull loose and may create a short or open circuit as well as a possible intermittent condition. Installing Components When reinstalling components, wait until the component is back in the vehicle before reattaching connectors. Once the component is back in the car, check to verify that the wires and harness are properly positioned in the vehicle. Check the male and female connectors to verify there is no water, grease, dirt, etc. in the connector. Assure that the harness will not be damaged by any brackets or finishing screws. Reconnect the connector. Make sure the connector has an appropriate amount of slack to accommodate any component motion without having unnecessary slack. Secure the harness as required to prevent possible damage to the harness itself. Disconnecting Connectors Disconnect the connectors by releasing any locking tabs and pulling on the connector housings. Never disconnect a connector by pulling on the harness or wires. Connecting Harnesses Before connecting the harness connectors, inspect the housings to make sure there is no water, grease, dirt, etc. in the housing which may interfere with the proper operation of the connector or component. Page 4254 Page 4503 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 875 Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Poly-Groove Belt - Tension Inspection Classification: Section: GI89-008 General Information Reference: SERVICE ADVISORY TS89-077 Models: All models Date: May 18, 1989 When installing a new poly-groove belt or replacing a used one, use the following procedure. 1. Install the belt and set the belt tension. 2. Start the engine and run it for approximately 30 seconds. Switch the engine off. 3. Check the belt tension and reset as needed. Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4133 Alternator: Testing and Inspection 1. Turn ignition switch to on position and note charge lamp. 2. If lamp lights proceed to step 7. If lamp does not light proceed to next step. 3. Disconnect two wire connectors labeled S and L, then using a jumper wire connect L terminal to a suitable ground. 4. If charge lamp lights proceed to next step. If lamp does not light the bulb in the instrument cluster is defective. Steps 5 and 6 do not apply to Pulsar, Stanza, 200SX and 300ZX models equipped with Mitsubishi alternator. On these models, if charge lamp lights, the internal regulator or some other internal component is defective and the alternator must be removed for bench testing. Fig. 1 Grounding field circuit to test alternator output 5. Reconnect two wire connectors, then insert a short stiff length of wire through the access hole at back of alternator until it contacts outer brush. Ground other end of wire to alternator case which will actually ground the F terminal internally, Fig. 1. On diesel models, except 1984-86 Sentra and 1984-86 Pickup, to ground F terminal, contact tip of brush with a screwdriver, then ground screwdriver to alternator case. On 1984-86 Sentra diesel and 1984-86 Pickup models, remove vacuum pump, then using a suitable length of wire, make contact with brush and ground opposite end of wire to alternator case. 6. If charge lamp remains lit, the internal regulator is defective and will require disassembly of the alternator for repair. If lamp goes out, some other internal component is defective therefore alternator must be removed for bench testing. 7. With engine idling if charge lamp is lit, a defective internal component exists in the alternator and requires removal for bench testing. If the charge lamp is not lit, proceed to next step. 8. With engine speed at 1500 RPM and headlights on, if charge lamp is not lit proceed to next step. If lamp is lit dimly, let engine idle and measure voltage across B and L terminals. If voltage is more than .5 volts a defective internal component exists in the alternator and requires removal for bench testing. If voltage is less than .5 volts, alternator if considered to be in satisfactory condition. 9. With engine at 1500 RPM measure voltage at B terminal, making sure S terminal is properly connected. 10. If voltage reading is above 15.5 volts, the internal regulator is faulty and requires removal of alternator for replacement. If voltage reading is between 13 and 15 volts proceed to next step. 11. With engine idling and headlights on, if charge lamp is lit a defective internal component exists in the alternator and requires removal for bench testing. If charge lamp is not lit, alternator is considered to be in satisfactory condition. Accessory Relay Ignition Relay: Locations Accessory Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Specifications Thermostat: Specifications 2WD Opening Temperature 180 F 4WD Opening Temperature 182 F Page 1329 Drive Belt: Specifications Belt Deflection Belt Deflection Alternator Limit 0.53 in Adjust deflection 0.33 - 0.37 in Set deflection of new belt 0.29 - 0.33 in Air conditioner compressor Limit 0.49 in Adjust deflection 0.35 - 0.39 in Set deflection of new belt 0.24 - 0.31 in Power steering oil pump Limit 0.41 in Adjust deflection 0.28 - 0.35 in Set deflection of new belt 0.25 - 0.33 in Component Locations Interior Moulding / Trim: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Page 485 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Page 3908 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Fig. 4 CL18B type front disc brake disassembled Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Classification: WT92-003 Section: Wheel & Tire Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-123 Models: All Date: December 22, 1992 AFTERMARKET CHROMING OF NISSAN ALLOY WHEELS SERVICE INFORMATION The Original Equipment Alloy Wheels on Nissan vehicles are specifically developed in order to achieve the Nissan design and performance standards. These Original Equipment wheels are also subject to rigorous testing procedure's to ensure they meet Nissan's standards. Nissan cannot ensure that Original Equipment Alloy Wheels which are subjected to aftermarket chroming meet these same standards, and therefore Nissan does not recommend the use of such wheels, nor does Nissan make any representations concerning their performance. Indeed, if these Original Equipment Alloy Wheels are subjected to aftermarket chroming, there are serious potential problems which may occur as a result of the chroming process: 1. The chroming process removes the original paint coating by "burning" or "chemical" methods, both of which cause the alloy surface to be changed. The application of chrome plating has to be controlled correctly, as the alloy can be harmed by a poorly controlled process. 2. Overall aftermarket chroming may degrade the durability, long term appearance, and may affect safety and performance of the wheels. Accordingly, Nissan recommends that Original Equipment Wheels NOT be chrome plated. Please consult the Nissan Warranty Policies and Procedures Manual pertaining to the Dealer's responsibility when altering or modifying vehicles. WARRANTY INFORMATION Note that damage to Nissan Alloy road wheels due to any non-factory-authorized process, such as chroming, is the responsibility of the customer, and is not covered by the Nissan Warranty, please consult the "Nissan Warranty Information Booklet" for specific details. Page 7 Index For Main Harness Part 1 Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery. Connector ID is 79M. Page 3356 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations A/C Components. On Top of Receiver Drier Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 324 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 579 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 333 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 5493 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 3409 Ignition Rotor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Rotor 1. Remove the screws securing the distributor cap to the distributor. 2. Confirm that the rotor does not turn on the distributor shaft. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Visually check the rotor for signs of "Burn Through" from the electrode to the distributor shaft. 5. Check the input (center) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 6. Check the output (outer) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 7. Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between the input (center) electrode and the output (outer) electrode. Replace the rotor if it fails the above tests. Page 1887 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation The exhaust gas sensor, which is placed into the exhaust manifold, monitors the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas. The sensor has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The outer surface of the tube is exposed to exhaust gas, and the inner surface to atmosphere. The zirconia of the tube compares the oxygen density of exhaust gas with that of atmosphere, and generates electricity. In order to improve generating power of the zirconia, its tube is coated with platinum. The voltage is approximately 1V in a richer condition of the mixture ratio than the ideal air fuel ratio, while approximately 0V in leaner conditions. The radical change from 1V to 0V occurs at around the ideal mixture ratio. In this way, the exhaust gas sensor detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas and sends the signal of approximately 1V or 0V to the E.C.U. Page 3847 Align the male and female halves to prevent bending or breaking terminals. Make sure the connectors are fully seated when connected. Visually verify that the connector has seated and is locked into place. Page 74 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 3886 PARTS INFORMATION Use the following chart to find the correct part numbers for the new brake pad kits with HP12 material. Models that are not listed on this chart (i.e. Z31, certain D21 models), use brake pads from a different vendor. Use the original pads listed in the Parts Microfiche. Original pads on these models are equivalent to HP12 material. Page 2152 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. Page 360 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1140 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 2875 Fig. 32 EGR control valve. Fig. 33 EGR control valve. This valve, Figs. 6 through 9, 32 and 33, controls the quantity of exhaust gas recirculated to the intake manifold. It is operated by vacuum created by the opening of the carburetor throttle valve except on vehicles with diesel engines. On Pickups equipped with diesel engines, the vacuum is created in response to a sub-venturi vacuum signal that is amplified by a vacuum amplifier. On Maximas and Sentras equipped with diesel engines, the vacuum is applied in response to the operation of the solenoid valve. EGR control valve construction and type vary according to year, model, transmission type and vehicle destination. For identification purposes, the part number is stamped on the top of the valve. Page 2756 Inspection Procedure Page 3064 Page 1959 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 492 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. Page 3370 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 5295 1. It is necessary to match the color of the refinishing base color paint and the original body paint. On all cars, an exposed portion of the color base coat will be found under the right and left hand sill plates. 2. The color tone of a pearl base coat varies with the number of overlapped spray strokes (film thickness). Use the same spraying conditions as those for color matching. 3 Areas to be sanded and coated for Zone repairs. Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 2309 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 5323 7. Remove the retracting side of the original lap belts. 8. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed in two steps. First, install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness (see illustration below for location). Then place the quarter finisher into position and bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear side panel where the 1" hole was drilled. NOTE: Torque mounting/anchor bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs.. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 9. Fully tighten the quarter panel finishers. 10. Bolt floor anchor into position (where old retractor was bolted). Torque to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 11. Check the retro-fit lap belts for smooth operation. 12. Tighten trunk finishers. 13. Reinstall rear seat. 14. Reinstall front seat belt upper anchor bolts. Torque to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). Sentra 2/4-Door Sedan Page 2006 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 100 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 2401 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2739 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4995 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. Page 1778 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Page 5321 Technical Service Bulletin # BF89004 Date: 890330 Seat Belts - 3-Point Rear Belt Installation Classification: Section: BF89-004 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-050 Models: Sentra, Stanza, Stanza Wagon, Pulsar Maxima, 200SX, 300ZX 2+2, Pathfinder Date: March 30, 1989 3-POINT REAR SEAT BELT INSTALLATION APPLIED MODELS: 1987-89 Sentra Sedan, Coupe and Wagon 1987-88 Sentra 3-Door Hatchback 1987-88 Stanza Sedan 1987-89 Pulsar 1985-87 Maxima Sedan 1984-88 200SX Hatchback 1986-89 Pathfinder SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin describes 3-point rear seat belt installation procedures for the applied models listed above. These vehicles are already equipped with threaded fittings for installation of the 3-point belts. However, in most cases, it will be necessary to modify or replace certain trim pieces to complete the installation. Trim modification requires cutting/drilling of the quarter panel or trunk trim and, in some cases, the rear parcel shelf. The following pages describe the installation procedures for each model. Please make these instructions available to customers who purchase retro-fit kits and choose to install the belts themselves. Ensure that a copy of the child seat installation instructions are provided to customers for every installation. PARTS INFORMATION The replacement parts necessary to complete the installation on each model are listed beginning on page 31 of this bulletin. Child Restraint Installation With Rear 3-Point Seat Belts Outboard shoulder/lap belt Before using the locking clip, read the instructions attached to the clip. Secure the child restraint with the lap belt as illustrated. To prevent slack in the lap belt, it will be necessary to secure the lap/shoulder belt in place with a locking clip. Use a genuine locking clip (part number 999JW-A3000, available from your NISSAN dealer), or one which is the same in dimension and strength. NOTE: When installing child restraint in a Sentra 3-dr. (Hatchback), unfasten shoulder belt at the buckle and follow owner's manual instructions for rear lap belts. Sentra Coupe Electrical - Battery Testing Procedures/Equipment Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Testing Procedures/Equipment Classification: EL99-O16p Reference: NTB99-048p Date: September 13, 2007 BATTERY TESTING FOR NISSAN ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT AND GENUINE NISSAN REPLACEMENT BATTERIES This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION The new Battery Service Center (BSC) is the factory-approved battery tester. The Essential Tool number for this tester is J-48087. ^ For claim reimbursement purposes, use of the "BSC" is required when testing any Nissan Original Equipment or Genuine Nissan Replacement battery. ^ For more information, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ Print-outs from the BSC are required to accurately document the test codes for warranty claims. ^ For the complete BSC User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. When setting up the "BSC" for testing, a [battery CCA] rating is required. ^ CCA stands for Cold Cranking Amps. Page 3880 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2330 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 3065 Idle Check and Set Procedure Page 1088 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 3942 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 3295 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1721 PULSAR (KN13) GA16i QUEST (V40) VG30E SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) Page 830 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1471 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 997 Page 3041 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 774 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 623 Page 2941 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4245 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 784 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Diagrams Fig. 12 Exploded view of steering column. 1987-88 Sentra Page 4751 Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair Water Valve Refer to ``Heater Core, Replace'' procedure. Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5136 7. Reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter and let dry. 8. Fill sand scratches and pinholes with a skin coat of Flexible Parts Repair Material. (Do not use Flexible Parts Putty.) After curing, sand with 320 grit disc. 9. Reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter and let dry. 10. Apply a double wet coat of Flexible Parts Coating. After a 10 minute flash time, apply a second double coat. Let dry 45 minutes and lightly scuff sand the coating with 320 grit disc. Apply color coats recommended for plastic body parts. Polypropylene Bumper Fascia Repair If extensive reinforcing or patching from the back is required use the following procedure. 1. Scuff the backside with grade 180 abrasives. Apply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter. 2. Cut a glass cloth patch to cover repair area. 3. Mix a quantity of Flexible Parts Repair Material. Lay glass cloth on a clean surface. Use a squeegee to force the Flexible Parts Repair Material into the glass cloth. 4. Apply glass cloth patch to backside of repair area. 5. Apply additional Flexible Parts Repair Material over surface of glass cloth patch. FASCIA REPAIR 1. Clean the repair area with soap and water. Remove grease and tar with solvent. Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 335a A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 2402 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4287 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 4500 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 5345 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 5333 18. Reinstall rear speakers. 19. Reinstall front portion of wheelhouse trim and front seat belt access trim. 20. Reinstall retro-fit belt floor anchor where original retractor mounted. Torque anchor bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 21. Check the retractor unit and buckle for smooth operation. 22. Reinstall seat back hinges. 23. Reinstall rear seat back and lower cushion. Maxima Sedan 1. Remove rear lower seat cushion, then remove seat back by: a. If vehicle has non-folding rear seat, remove the retaining screws, then pull the seat back up and out. or b. If vehicle has split/folding rear seat, remove trunk carpeting retaining finishers as shown below. This will allow access to the seat back retaining screws. After removing six retaining screws, the seat back may be removed. 2. Remove the rear high mount stop light. 3. Remove rear speakers, if equipped. (Retaining nuts are accessed by removing the speaker grilles.) 4. Remove rear parcel shelf and rear pillar finishers. Page 1492 Page 4794 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type R-12 Diagnostic Note Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair Diagnostic Note Whenever control cables are disconnected or heater case is disassembled for service, control cables and operating rods should be adjusted as outlined in adjustments. Page 4350 Fig. 7 Adjusting tie rod length. 1987-88 Maxima, Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza exc. 2WD Wagon 9. Tighten outer socket locknut so tie rod length ``L'' is 6.94 inches and screwed length ``l'' is .98 inch or more, Fig. 7. 10. Measure rack stroke. Ensure stroke is 2.894 inches on both sides. 11. Apply suitable sealing compound to contact surfaces between boot and gear housing, then install boot and boot clamps. Ensure boot clamps do not interfere with any other parts. Also, use caution not to twist boot. Recall 95V103002: Safety Belt Buckle Release Button Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 95V103002: Safety Belt Buckle Release Button The front safety belt buckle release buttons can break. These red plastic release buttons are marked "press." If a button breaks, pieces can fall into the buckle assembly causing the buckle to operate improperly. The safety belts would not provide adequate protection to an occupant in a vehicle crash. Owners should promptly check the condition and operation of both front safety belt buckles and carefully inspect the red release button for any breaks or cracks. They should ensure that both buckles are operating properly by inserting each latch plate into its buckle, tugging on the belt to make sure the latch is securely locked, and then pressing the release button. The latch plate should pop out of the buckle when the button is pressed. If either release button shows a sign of breaking or cracking or if either buckle fails to operate properly, owners should promptly contact their authorized dealer to schedule an appointment to have the buckle replaced or repaired free of charge. System: Interior; Seat Belts; Belt Buckles. Vehicle Description: Passenger, Multi-Purpose Vehicles and Light Duty Trucks Equipped with Safety Belts made by Takata Corporation. NOTE: If your vehicle is presented to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and the remedy is not provided free of charge within a reasonable time, please contact NISSAN at 1-800-647-7261. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. Page 4647 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 3927 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. GENERAL BRAKE REPAIR GUIDELINES To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following. 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with Page 1003 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 70 SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Instruments - Speedometer Noise Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Speedometer Noise Classification: EL88-008 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-094 Models: 1987-88 Sentra/Pulsar Date: July 11, 1988 SPEEDOMETER CABLE NOISE APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra, 1987-88 Pulsar except 1988 Pulsar SE APPLIED VINs: JAPAN BUILT SENTRA Before JN1PB22SXJU 028662 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB24SXJU 044462 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB22SXJU 574774 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB21SXJU 555932 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB26SXJU 016707 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25SXJU 021285 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25YXJU 005931 04/01/88 production U.S. BUILT SENTRA 1987 1988 All PULSAR Before JN1PN34SXJM 500050 05/01/88 production SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987-88 Sentra and Pulsar vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzzing noise from the center of the instrument panel at engine speeds of 2500-3500 RPM. If a customer complains of this type of noise, perform the following diagnostics to determine if the speedometer cable is the cause. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to verify speedometer cable noise: 1. Start engine with transmission in neutral (M/T) or park (A/T). Raise RPM to 3500 and hold for 5-10 seconds. 2. Listen for rattling or buzzing from the speedometer head area. 3. Return engine to idle and turn off ignition. 4. Disconnect speedometer cable from transaxle and let hang. Be sure to position the cable so that it isn't touching the engine or transaxle. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If the noise can be heard in Step 2, but is not present during Step 5, replace the speedometer cable assembly with the improved (insulated) cable assembly listed below. If the noise is still present, reinstall the speedometer cable and contact the FIXS Hotline for additional information. PARTS INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION NEW PART NUMBER FORMER PART NUMBER Speedometer 25050-01Y00 25050-60A01 Cable Assembly 25050-60A00 Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Main Harness Part 1 Page 567 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 3046 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 832 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Visual Inspection 1. Visually inspect the ignition wires for the following: a. Insulation for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... b. Insulation for cracks or breaks. c. Insulator boots for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... d. Insulator boots for cracks or breaks. e. Terminal ends for corrosion, cracks or looseness. Ignition Wire Resistance Test 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance between the terminal ends. Resistance: Less than 30k ohms Replace the wire if it fails the above test. Tires - Recommendations For Winter Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Recommendations For Winter Models: All models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT90-004 Bulletin No.: NTB90-099 Date: November 8, 1990 NISSAN WINTER TIRES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Some vehicles are equipped with performance tires from the factory to enhance dry weather vehicle performance. In order to improve vehicle traction during winter driving, all-season or radial mud & snow (M&S;) tires may be installed. Upon customer request, dealers may recommend alternative tires for improved traction in snow. When doing so, these guidelines should be followed: 1. A tire with the M&S; rating is recommended for winter driving in snow. 2. The replacement tires must have the same size and load carrying capacity as the original equipment tires. 3. All four (4) tires must be replaced, without exception. The mixed use of different types of tires (i.e., radial mixed with bias ply, M&S; mixed with non-M&S;) should be avoided because of adverse effects on vehicle handling and ride characteristics. 4. The requesting customer should be informed of the speed rating of the current tires, so that tires of the same speed rating could be purchased as replacement tires. NOTE: ^ All-season or snow tires may have lower speed ratings than factory-equipped tires. ^ When 4 mud & snow (M&S;) tires are installed on the vehicle, the tires should be inflated to the pressures recommended on the vehicle tire placard. The maximum inflation pressure shown on the side of the tire should never be exceeded. Page 4778 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 1171 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Adjustments Control Assembly: Adjustments Fig. 14 Water valve adjustments. 1. Set temperature control cable at maximum COLD position. 2. With air mix door knob moved in toward passenger compartment, connect temperature control rod to link lever. 3. Connect control cable to link lever and clamp the cable. 4. Pull water valve control rod in direction of arrow to provide clearance of approximately .08 inch between ends of rod and link lever and connect rod to door lever, Fig. 14. Page 2453 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Instruments - Speedometer Noise Speedometer Cable: Customer Interest Instruments - Speedometer Noise Classification: EL88-008 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-094 Models: 1987-88 Sentra/Pulsar Date: July 11, 1988 SPEEDOMETER CABLE NOISE APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra, 1987-88 Pulsar except 1988 Pulsar SE APPLIED VINs: JAPAN BUILT SENTRA Before JN1PB22SXJU 028662 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB24SXJU 044462 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB22SXJU 574774 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB21SXJU 555932 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB26SXJU 016707 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25SXJU 021285 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25YXJU 005931 04/01/88 production U.S. BUILT SENTRA 1987 1988 All PULSAR Before JN1PN34SXJM 500050 05/01/88 production SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987-88 Sentra and Pulsar vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzzing noise from the center of the instrument panel at engine speeds of 2500-3500 RPM. If a customer complains of this type of noise, perform the following diagnostics to determine if the speedometer cable is the cause. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to verify speedometer cable noise: 1. Start engine with transmission in neutral (M/T) or park (A/T). Raise RPM to 3500 and hold for 5-10 seconds. 2. Listen for rattling or buzzing from the speedometer head area. 3. Return engine to idle and turn off ignition. 4. Disconnect speedometer cable from transaxle and let hang. Be sure to position the cable so that it isn't touching the engine or transaxle. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If the noise can be heard in Step 2, but is not present during Step 5, replace the speedometer cable assembly with the improved (insulated) cable assembly listed below. If the noise is still present, reinstall the speedometer cable and contact the FIXS Hotline for additional information. PARTS INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION NEW PART NUMBER FORMER PART NUMBER Speedometer 25050-01Y00 25050-60A01 Cable Assembly 25050-60A00 Page 2820 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Page 2781 Pulsed Secondary Air Injection: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect air injection hose from injection pipe side and ensure air cannot flow in either direction through hose. 2. Apply vacuum to air injection control valve using a suitable hand vacuum pump and ensure air flows only on injection pipe side while control valve is operated. 3. Check air injection and air injection control valves for binding or damage and replace if necessary. Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Diagrams Final Drive Page 3311 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 2025 Inspection Procedure Page 2506 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i Axle Bearing and Knuckle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Axle Bearing and Knuckle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 3033 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 335 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 865 2. Ensure that marks on camshaft sprocket and upper front cover and marks on crankshaft sprocket and lower front cover are properly aligned. 3. Temporarily install tensioner and return spring. 4. Rotate tensioner clockwise about 70° to 80° and temporarily tighten lock nut. 5. Set timing belt. a. Ensure that timing belt and sprockets are clean and free of oil or water. Do not bend timing belt tightly. b. Install timing belt with rotating direction mark facing engine rotating direction. c. Ensure that timing belt is not loose around jack shaft and camshaft sprockets. 6. Loosen tensioner lock nut so that tensioner pushes on timing belt. 7. Turn camshaft sprocket about 20° (2 cogs) clockwise. NOTE: Ensure that all spark plugs are removed. 8. Tighten nut while preventing tensioner from turning in "free" direction. Tensioner lock nut: 16 - 21 N.m (12 - 15 ft.lbs.) 9. Install crank sprocket plate and upper and lower dust covers. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3429 Power Transistor: Description and Operation The ignition signal from the E.C.U. is amplified by the power transistor, which turns the ignition coil primary circuit on and off, inducing the proper high voltage in the secondary circuit. The ignition coil is a small, molded type. Page 2780 Pulsed Secondary Air Injection: Description and Operation Fig. 116 Air Injecton Valve (AIV) Operation The air injection valve system delivers secondary air to the exhaust manifold, utilizing a vacuum caused by exhaust pulsation in the exhaust manifold. Specific operating conditions are outlined in Fig. 116 Locations Wiper Amplifier: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Of Cowl Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2478 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection (CHECK ENGINE LIGHT ITEM) Wiring Diagram The following is necessary to perform this inspection. 1. Pull out E.C.U. from under the passenger seat. 2. Warm up engine sufficiently. Page 5185 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Page 2557 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 4760 Hose/Line HVAC: Testing and Inspection 1. A restricted suction line is indicated by low suction pressure at the compressor, low discharge pressure and little or no cooling. 2. A restricted discharge line will usually cause the pressure relief valve to open. 3. A restricted liquid line will cause low suction and discharge pressures and little or no cooling. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Page 5376 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 4141 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Page 1481 Page 4233 ^ Toe-Out is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the rear (Figure 1b). ADJUSTMENTS 1. Toe should be the last alignment specification adjusted. Refer to the Front Axle (FA) and Rear Axle (RA) sections of the appropriate Service Manual to determine the proper locations to adjust the front and rear Toe. 2. Toe should be equal, side-to-side. 3. Toe-In When the specification is labeled "Toe-In" and dimensions are negative numbers (ie: -6 to -2 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 2). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-In specification = Toe-In wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-In specification = Toe-out wheel setting. Toe-Out Page 4788 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 5102 Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Cassette - Poor Sound Quality/Loss of Channel/Jamming REFERENCE: NTB93-017 CLASSIFICATION: EL93-004 DATE: January 21, 1993 TITLE: CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES(S): All Nissan vehicles equipped with cassette tape players SERVICE INFORMATION In normal use, the playback head, capstan and rollers of any cassette tape player will attract dirt or residues from the tape material each time a cassette is played. This causes a deterioration of sound quality (i.e., distortion, reduced frequency response, and reduced clarity). If residues and dirt are not removed, loss of channel(s) or "tape eating" may occur. In order to help your customers to avoid these incidents and ensure optimum performance from their cassette tape players, please advise them of the need to perform the following maintenance procedures: SERVICE PROCEDURE Use a cassette cleaning kit to clean the cassette tape player (specifically the tape head and capstan rollers) after every 30 hours of play or once a month, whichever comes first. You may use the Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 999U2-AD010 or equivalent. Be careful to follow the kit usage instructions. CASSETTE TAPE CARE GUIDELINES: - Before turning off the radio, eject the cassette being played. Allowing the tape mechanism to stop while a tape is engaged can damage the tape, pinch roller or capstan. After turning off the radio, do not leave the tape in the cassette door pathway. - Use tapes which are 90 minutes or less in play time. - Use protective plastic cases to store cassettes when not in use. This will prevent them from unwinding and collecting dust. - Protect tapes from extreme heat, direct sunlight, extreme cold, and from foreign material such as liquids or sticky substances. Discard damaged or contaminated tapes. - Do not use tapes that are more than 5 years old. Older tapes suffer from stretch and increased tape residue. NOTE: If your customer complains of deterioration of sound quality, loss of channels(s) or "tape eating," please clean the cassette tape player using the Cassette Deck Cleaning System as described above. In most cases, this procedure will return the cassette deck to full efficiency. Page 1580 Ignition Cable: Description and Operation Ignition Wire The coil wire connects the ignition coil to the distributor cap, allowing high voltage to flow from the coil to the distributor cap. The spark plug wires connect the terminals in the distributor cap to the spark plugs, allowing high voltage to flow to the spark plugs. The ignition wires have an internal resistance to suppress radio static and to eliminate static that may interfere with sensitive computer components. Page 5166 Rear door DOOR LOCK & STRIKER BOLTS This Bulletin gives revised torque specifications for door lock and door striker bolts (see illustration on next page). Page 2588 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 3019 Altitude Compensation Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Compensation Altitude compensation prevents deterioration of exhaust emissions caused by an enriched air/fuel mixture. Atmospheric pressure varies according to the altitude. The higher the altitude, the lower the atmospheric pressure. At an atmospheric pressure of approximately 26 in. Hg or below, the altitude switch transmits an ``On'' signal to the control unit, decreasing fuel to provide an appropriate air/fuel mixture ratio. Page 2065 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 125 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3277 Inspection Procedure Page 751 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4963 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Page 2153 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2550 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Brakes - Ammco On Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Ammco On Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines Classification: BR92-004 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-062 Models: All models Date: August 18, 1992 AMMCO ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE OPERATING GUIDELINES APPLIED MODEL: All models SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure the best possible surface finish and least amount of run-out and rotor thickness variation when using the Ammco on-car brake lathe, the following guidelines should be observed. SERVICE PROCEDURE Before mounting the brake lathe on the vehicle ensure the following: 1. The V-way between the carriage and carriage jib must be clean and adjusted properly (see Operation Manual for adjustment procedure). Wipe off sliding surfaces with a soft cloth after each use. 2. The cutters and cutting bits must be tight in their mounts and positioned properly. Change cutting bits when they become dull. 3. When securing the adjustable mounting brackets to the caliper mount/knuckle the mounting surfaces must be smooth and free of burrs. 4. Make sure the adjustable mounting brackets are securely mounted to caliper mount/knuckle. There should be no movement between the cutting tool and the caliper mount/knuckle. Rotor Driving Unit Before using the drive unit ensure the following: Page 2981 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 792 The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Axle Bearing and Knuckle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Axle Bearing and Knuckle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 653 Alignment: Specifications Rear Camber Angle -1 11/12 to - 5/12 deg Camber Angle Desired - 1/5 deg Toe Per Wheel +.04 to +.12 in Total Degrees - 1/10 to + 9/30 deg Description and Operation Vacuum Amplifier: Description and Operation Fig. 55 Vacumm amplifier. The vacuum amplifier which receives a weak vacuum signal produced in sub-venturi, activates the venturi diaphragm. This controls the output vacuum admitted to the EGR control valve. Page 3084 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 3861 Fig. 5 AD18B type front disc brake disassembled Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Intake 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 in Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Page 2608 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 4006 Fig. 6 AD18V type front disc brake disassembled Brake Pad, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Remove lock pin, Figs. 4, 5 and 6, and pivot caliper body upwards. 3. Remove pad retainers, then the pads. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Install inner pad, then pull cylinder body out and install outer pad. Caliper, Replace 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube. 3. Remove caliper attaching bolts, then the caliper assembly from vehicle. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Caliper Overhaul 1. Separate cylinder body and torque member, Figs. 4, 5 and 6. 2. Remove brake hose, then press out piston with dust seal and retainer ring. 3. Remove piston seal, guide pin and lock pin from torque member. 4. Reverse procedure to assemble. Page 2237 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Page 3554 3. Move selector lever from "P" range to "1" range. Make sure that selector lever can move smoothly and without any sliding noise. 4. Place selector lever at "P" range again. 5. Make sure that selector lever locks at "P" range. 6. Loosen lock nuts. 7. Screw lock nut (X) until it touches select rod end while holding select rod horizontal, and tighten lock nut (Y). 8. Move selector lever from "P" range to "1" range again Make sure that selector lever can move smoothly and without any sliding noise. 9. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and selector rod. Page 2773 Air Induction Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 116 Air Injecton Valve (AIV) Operation The air injection valve system delivers secondary air to the exhaust manifold, utilizing a vacuum caused by exhaust pulsation in the exhaust manifold. Specific operating conditions are outlined in Fig. 116 Page 115 Engine Control Module: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 1521 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 2676 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2846 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Testing and Inspection Check carbon canister as follows. (A): Blow air and ensure that there is no leakage. (B): Blow air and ensure that there is leakage. Page 68 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E, VE30DE NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Page 968 Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCS) are chemical compounds made up of molecules that contain atoms of chlorine and fluorine bonded to carbon atoms. CFCs are used in a number of applications, the most common of which are in automotive air conditioners, in the blowing of plastic foam products, and as solvents in electronic component manufacturing. Ozone is a special form of oxygen which combines three oxygen atoms into O3. Ozone in the Earth's upper atmosphere serves as a shield from harmful ultra violet solar radiation by reflecting the rays back into space. When CFCs are released into the air, here's what happens: the molecules work their way upward in the atmosphere slowly, taking as long as ten years to reach the middle stratosphere, 20 to 40 kilometers above the surface of the earth, where the "ozone layer" resides. The CFC molecules are bombarded by ultra violet light from the sun, which tends to break the chemical bonds that hold chlorine and fluorine to the carbon. The fluorine atoms can combine with moisture to form acids. When the chlorine breaks away, it becomes a chemical "catalyst," which means that it can cause chemical reactions to occur rapidly. Thus, a chlorine atom can break the chemical bonds that hold O3 together and O3 becomes O2 and O. It is now no longer "ozone" and it no longer has its reflective quality to turn ultra violet radiation away from the earth. Given the right conditions, the chlorine from one CFC molecule could destroy up to 100,000 ozone molecules. Page 740 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2346 System description: When the switch is ON, the ECU lights up the lamp. The VOLTAGE VALUE is based on the body ground. Page 3308 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 472 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Engine - Block Heater Precaution Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Block Heater Precaution Models: All Models Section: Engine Mechanical Classification: EM88-004 Bulletin No.: TS88-025 Date: February 22, 1988 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER APPLIED MODELS: All models SERVICE INFORMATION Engine antifreeze in more than 50% concentration has been found to adversely affect the life and performance of the engine block heater. High phosphate content in the antifreeze forms a scale around the heating element of the block heater, causing the temperature to rise, with subsequent failure of the seals. Therefore, for best results it is recommended that you use a concentration no greater than 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Page 2358 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Page 5160 Rear door DOOR LOCK & STRIKER BOLTS This Bulletin gives revised torque specifications for door lock and door striker bolts (see illustration on next page). Page 1554 Page 5205 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 1829 Power Transistor: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between terminals as per the image. Replace power transistor if it fails the above tests. Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3034 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2305 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 1448 Page 1798 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 319 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 5382 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Page 1167 Page 1739 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON M10 CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) Page 1770 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1523 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Engine Compartment Component Locations Page 5286 5. Dry vehicle with a chamois. 6. After rinsing - inspect the surface for drips, sags, runs and missed areas. Page 1973 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Page 537 SPECIAL TOOLS Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3037 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2169 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3181 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2562 Engine Control Module: Specifications Fig. 303a Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 1924 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 3099 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2223 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removing Spark Plug Boot REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition wire from the spark plug with a twisting and pulling motion. CAUTION: Pull on the boot only. Do not pull on the wire. 2. Using compressed air, blow out the area at the base of the spark plug to remove any debris USE SAFETY GLASSES. 3. Using a 5/8" (16mm) flex socket and extension, remove the spark plugs (counterclockwise rotation). INSTALLATION 1. Using a suitable tool, check and adjust the spark plug gap. ELECTRODE GAP 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) 2. Using a suitable rubber hose or designated tool, start the spark plugs by hand (clockwise rotation). 3. Tighten and torque the spark plugs. SPARK PLUG TORQUE 14 - 22 ft. lbs. (20 - 29 N-m / 2.0 - 3.0 kg-m) 4. Apply a small amount of di-electric compound to the inside of the spark plug boots. 5. Reinstall the spark plug boots. Page 5048 System Operational Check Before beginning "System Operational Check", turn the ignition key on, roll down the drivers side window, turn the ignition off and remove the key. Close all doors, trunk and hood. Page 2324 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 5150 7. Apply a double wet coat of Flexible Parts Coating. After a 10 minute flash time, apply a second double coat. Let dry 45 minutes and lightly scuff sand the coating with 320 grit disc. Apply color coats recommended for plastic body parts. Page 1775 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 3179 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4122 Slow Battery Charge CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the Nissan "Assurance Products Resource Manual" for battery claim procedures. Page 3049 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 783 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 1750 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3116 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1449 Page 2703 Page 4283 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 2924 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection a. Tighten the clamp so its end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from the hose end. b. Make sure that the screw of the clamp does not contact with any adjacent parts. c. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. : Fuel hose clamps 1.0 - 1.5 N.m (0.10 - 0.15 kg-m, 0.7 - 1.1 ft-lb) 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet hose at the electro injection unit. 3. Install a pressure gauge. 4. Start the engine and check the fuel line for fuel leakage. 5. Read fuel pressure gauge. At idling speed: 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2, 36.3 psi) 6. Release fuel pressure again. 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel line. 8. Reconnect the fuel inlet hose. Page 4790 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 5383 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 876 Drive Belt: Specifications Belt Deflection Belt Deflection Alternator Limit 0.53 in Adjust deflection 0.33 - 0.37 in Set deflection of new belt 0.29 - 0.33 in Air conditioner compressor Limit 0.49 in Adjust deflection 0.35 - 0.39 in Set deflection of new belt 0.24 - 0.31 in Power steering oil pump Limit 0.41 in Adjust deflection 0.28 - 0.35 in Set deflection of new belt 0.25 - 0.33 in Locations Ignition Coil Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2986 Page 1084 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 2091 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Locations Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 782 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4117 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Classification: EL09-011 Reference: NTB09-030 Date: April 6, 2009 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY CONNECTION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to stay connected when the engine is running. ^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below. IMPORTANT: Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will not be covered under warranty. CAUTION: ^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement. ^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON. ^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first. ^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first. ^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment. ^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.). ^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of the cables. Disclaimer Page 1923 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Minimum Ring End Gap Compression Ring Top 0.0079 in Second 0.0059 in Oil Ring 0.0079 in Page 4360 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the following flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Brake Rotor Service Flow Chart (*)CAUTION: To ensure a proper repair, it is absolutely essential to make these measurements. For example, if run-out remains high, brake judder and/or shimmy may not be detected while test driving the vehicle immediately after the repair, but, may return after several thousand miles of rotor wear (due to thickness variation). Prior to and, again, after resurfacing a brake rotor, ensure that the rotor thickness is above the minimum specification. General Brake Repair Guidelines To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. Page 3080 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 4957 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Page 3622 Chart A & B Cooler Inlet And Outlet Locations Cooler Cleaning (in radiator) CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses for the vehicle your working on. If these hoses are not identified correctly, debris may be left in the cooler and transmission damage may occur. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. Page 414 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Brakes - On-Car Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - On-Car Rotor Refinishing Classification: BR04-007 Reference: NTB04-094 Date: August 20, 2004 NISSAN: ON-CAR BRAKE ROTOR RESURFACING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan If YOU CONFIRM: A vehicle needs to have the brake rotors resurfaced (front or rear), ACTION: Use the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe to perform brake rotor resurfacing and follow the tips listed in this bulletin. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. ^ ProCut(TM) technical support or service can be obtained by calling 1-800-543-6618. NOTE: Brake rotors may need to be resurfaced during routine brake repair or for brake "Judder" incidents. ^ Brake judder: A brake pedal pulsation and/or steering wheel shimmy when braking that occurs when there is too much thickness variation of the brake rotors (see NTB00-033). TIPS FOR USING THE PROCUT(TM) PFM SERIES ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE ^ Read and follow all instructions contained in the Technical Manual provided with your ProCut(TM) equipment. ^ The ProCut(TM) brake lathe also comes with an instructional video that can be used as a training aid. ^ Additional training is available from your local ProCut(TM) representative by calling 1-800-543-6618. A. Make sure the cutting tips are sharp, in good condition and installed "right-side" up. ^ Make sure to use ProCut(TM) brand tips. ^ The cutting tip "UP" side has a groove or letters. NOTE: A tip mounted upside-down will produce a surface finish that looks like an old LP record. ^ Each cutting tip has three cutting corners. Rotate or replace the tip as needed. NOTE: You should get at least 7 cuts per corner. However, tip life is affected by variables such as rust or ridges. In order to determine when to rotate tips, monitor the rotor finish. If the rotor finish begins to look inconsistent or feels rough to the touch, tips should be rotated or replaced. Tips that are chipped or cracked should never be used. Axle Bearing and Knuckle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Axle Bearing and Knuckle Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 1682 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Locations Fig. 1 Timing Mark Page 1483 Page 3024 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 420 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 284 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 1742 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 2833 Canister Purge Control Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Check for fuel vapor leakage in the distributor vacuum line at diaphragm of carbon canister purge control valve. a. Disconnect rubber hose in line between ``T'' connector and carbon canister ``T'' connector. b. Inhale air into opening of rubber hose running to vacuum hole in carbon canister and ensure that there is no leak. 2. If there is a leak, remove top cover of purge control valve and check for dislocated or cracked diaphragm. If necessary, replace diaphragm assembly which consists of a retainer, diaphragm, and spring. Page 2335 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 1498 Page 3899 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 3997 1. Before using the rotor driving unit ensure that all lug nuts are installed on the lugs (including the lugs not used for the lug adaptor). All lug nuts should be evenly torqued, to at least 40 ft/lbs. Do not over-tighten the lug nuts as damage may occur to the lug adaptor legs. 2. To prevent chatter and ensure a smooth rotor finish, install the largest and heaviest silencer band possible around the outside diameter of the rotor. ROTOR CUTTING Before engaging the cutting tool, ensure the following: 1. Using the dial indicator, measure rotor/hub run-out prior to resurfacing rotor and adjust cutting depth to eliminate this run-out. Each cut may be between 0.05 mm and 0.25 mm (0.002" and 0.010"). Additional cuts may be necessary to eliminate all the run-out. 2. Using a micrometer, measure rotor thickness in at least 8 even locations around the rotor. Do not cut below the minimum rotor thickness specification. Replace rotor if the run-out cannot be eliminated without exceeding the minimum rotor thickness specification. 3. After rotor resurfacing is completed, measure the rotor/hub run-out using a dial indicator. Ensure that the run-out is below the specification for the vehicle. If run-out is not within specifications, turn the rotors again. Properly machined rotors will have almost zero run-out (.001" or less) with no measurable thickness variation. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. 4. Do not smooth the rotor surface with sand paper or other abrasive material. Page 656 Fig. 14 Typical tie rod length measurement. Fig. 17 Tie rod length specifications Toe is adjusted by loosening the tie rod locknuts or adjusting sleeve bolts and equally altering the length of the tie rods. After toe has been adjusted to specifications, the lengths of the left and right tie rods, Fig. 14, should be nearly equal and close to the length specified in Fig. 17. If tie rod lengths are incorrect, tie rods should be disassembled and adjusted to specifications, and the toe setting should be readjusted before checking steering angles. Incorrect tie rod length will adversely affect steering angles and toe-out on turns. Page 3066 Idle Speed: Adjustments Midpoint of range given is the preferred setting speed. 1981-83 L28 Turbo, 1983 E15 Turbo: With engine at operating temperature, race several times and return to idle. Disconnect idle control valve and check speed against specified value. 1984-87 E16 2V Federal: With engine at operating temperature, disconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Race engine several times and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Restart engine, race several times, and check idle speed against specified value. 1987-90 E16 FI, GA16; 1989-90 KA24: With engine at operating temperature disconnect throttle sensor harness connector. Start engine and set idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle speed is within checking speed. Turn on AC and verify that idle increases to specified value. 1984-89 VG30 Turbo, 1987-89 CA16, CA18 DOHC: With engine at operating temperature, turn ignition off and disconnect automatic air control (AAC) valve harness. Start engine and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect harness. Restart engine and check idle speed against specified value. Turn AC on and verify that speed-up is at specified value. All engines, turn AC on and verify that speed-up speed is specified value. 1987-88 CA18 Turbo, 1987-89 CA20 Stanza: Disconnect throttle valve and automatic air control valve harness. Start engine and adjust idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1989-90 VG30 Maxima: Turn diagnostic connector on ECU fully clockwise and adjust idle to specified value. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1990 300ZX: Attach inductive clamp to loop wire on power transistor behind upper radiator hose. Set idle to specified value. Page 3317 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 694 Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 2168 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3859 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 4523 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 4653 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect wiring harness connector to resistor and check continuity with ohmmeter. 2. Meter should indicate continuity between all terminals although resistance values will vary. Page 3368 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1282 KIT CONTENTS: Item No. Qty Item 1 1 Heater assembly 2 1 Power cord 3 1 Power cord end protector cap 4 3 Tie wrap 5 1 Installation Instructions TOOLS REQUIRED Center punch Combination pliers Hammer 4 mm hex wrench Needle nose pliers Flat blade screwdriver PROCEDURE 1. Drain coolant and remove specified core plug. (Do not use a screw type freeze plug puller or similar tool to remove the plug as it may cause damage to the engine block.) Remove freeze plug by positioning a flat blade screwdriver against the plug's recessed area and hammering it repeatedly with very short strokes until the freeze plug is loosened and turns. (Do not hammer freeze plug on the edges as this could damage engine block.) Then remove plug with needle nose or combination pliers. 2. Thoroughly clean core plug hole, removing any burrs, compound, paint or rough spots. (If necessary use fine emery paper being careful not to score surface.) 3. Apply a coating of grease to the heater "O" ring and machined surface of the engine block hole to facilitate installation and prevent "O" ring damage. NOTE: DO NOT USE GASKET GLUE - it hardens, preventing proper seal and eventually causes leaks. 4. Refer to element direction shown in chart. Insert heater with element pointing in proper direction and push flush to block. 5. Tighten screw to 14-19 in.lb. 6. Install the power cord and route it to the front grille, taping it and securing it with plastic tie wraps where necessary, to insure that the cord does not touch any hot pipes, engine components or moving parts. 7. Refill cooling system, pressurize to radiator cap relief pressure and check for leaks. Operate engine to check further for leaks. Refer to manufacturer's Service Manual "Engine Cooling System" section. NOTE: It is recommended that low phosphate anti-freeze be used, and that a maximum anti-freeze/water mixture ratio of 50/50 be used. Refer to the Nissan Owner's Manual "Engine Cooling System" section. 8. Use cable end protector cap when heater is not plugged into power source. WARNING: Before connecting heater to power source, make sure that cooling system is filled with recommended coolant (see appropriate Service Manual). ENGINE INSTALLATION Engine Lower Hose Heater Installation Instructions PART NUMBER: 99998-1024701 APPLICATION: On-Vehicle Service Governor: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Service Governor Valve 1. Remove governor cap. 2. Remove governor valve assembly. 3. Disassemble, check and reassemble governor valve assembly Refer to Repair for Component Parts. See: Service and Repair/Repair For Component Parts Page 2101 Page 3648 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Axle Shaft, Conventional Fixed/Floating 1987-88 PULSAR & 2WD SENTRA Fig. 1 Rear Suspension (Part 2 Of 2). 2WD Models Refer to Fig. 9 for replacement, noting the following: 1. When raising and supporting vehicle, do not jack up at parallel links. 2. Disconnect brake hydraulic line and parking brake cable at equalizer. Fig. 10 Removing exhaust pipe & radius rod. 1987-88 Pulsar & 2WD Sentra 3. Remove exhaust pipe attaching bolts, Fig. 10, then radius rod attaching bolts and pull out radius rod, pushing exhaust pipe downward. 4. Remove shock absorber upper attaching bolts. Page 3198 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 58 240SX (S14) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 2892 Vacuum Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Orally suck in air through venturi-ported vacuum side of check valve and listen for operating sound. If no sound is heard, replace valve. Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Axle Shaft, Halfshaft U-Joint Type Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Axle Shaft, Halfshaft U-Joint Type DISASSEMBLY & INSPECTION Fig. 6 Exploded view of driveshaft assembly. 1982-84 Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza, 1985-88 similar 1. Disassemble tripod type joint as follows: a. Install driveshaft in suitable soft-jawed vise. b. Remove and discard boot bands, Fig. 6. c. Separate slide joint housing with cover, and the driveshaft with spider assembly. Scribe an alignment mark for assembly reference. d. Remove and discard snap ring, then press spider assembly off of shaft. e. On 1984 models, remove boot, the cut edge of slide joint cover and remove and discard the cover. Remove and discard O-ring. f. On 1985-88 models, remove and discard boot bands. Scribe alignment marks on joint assembly and shaft, then remove joint assembly and boot. 2. Disassemble double offset type joint as follows: a. Install driveshaft in suitable soft-jawed vise. b. Remove and discard boot bands, Fig. 6. c. Remove snap ring, then the slide joint housing. d. Clean grease off of bearing cage and drive out balls, then rotate cage approximately 180° and remove from inner race. e. Remove and discard small snap ring, then tap inner race off of shaft and remove boot. 3. Remove and discard boot bands from wheel side of shaft. 4. Scribe alignment mark on driveshaft and joint assembly, then remove the joint assembly and boot. 5. Clean all components with suitable solvent and dry with compressed air. 6. Inspect driveshaft and replace it if twisted or cracked. 7. Inspect wheel side joint assembly for wear or damage and replace as necessary. 8. On tripod type joint, check spider assembly and slide joint housing for wear or damage and replace as necessary. 9. On double offset type joint, check all components for wear, damage or excessive play and replace as necessary. ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION Fig. 9 Axle shaft boot installation Page 4601 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Tightening Sequence Lug Nut Torque Patterns IMPORTANT Check all parts, including rims, lug studs, lug nuts, and mating surfaces of hubs and tire rims for rust, damage, or dirt. Clean mating surfaces with a wire brush to remove any foreign material. Replace any damaged parts as needed. Careless installation of tire/rim assemblies in a vehicle is a major cause of tire installation problems. Proper installation, including fastener torque, is essential to economical, safe and trouble free service. Use only the proper sizes and types of fasteners for safe and proper service. Tighten the fasteners a quarter turn at a time using the tightening sequence diagram as a guide. This is very important to prevent misalignment of the wheel. Continue tightening the fasteners in sequence until the fasteners are tightened to the proper torque (See WHEEL FASTENER TORQUE). CAUTION: Improper torque or tightening sequence can cause distortion, fatigue cracks, or alignment problems. After driving the vehicle for a short distance, recheck the wheel fastener torque. Parts will usually seat naturally, reducing the torque on the fasteners. Retorque all fasteners to the proper torque. Page 1433 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 3143 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation PRESSURE REGULATOR The pressure regulator, built into the side of the throttle body, maintains the fuel pressure as follows. 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2 , 36.3 psi) Since the injected fuel amount depends on injection pulse duration, it is necessary to keep pressure constant. Description and Operation Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Description and Operation Fig. 20 Air regulator The air regulator, Fig. 20, bypasses the throttle valve to control the quantity of air for increasing the engine idling speed when starting the engine at an underhood temperature of below 176°F. A bi-metal and a heater are incorporated into the air regulator. When the ignition switch is turned to the ``Start'' position or when the engine is running, electric current flows through the heater, and the bi-metal, as it is heated by the heater, begins to move and closes the air passage in a few minutes. The air passage remains closed until the engine is stopped and the underhood air temperature drops below 176°F. Seat Trim - Non-Warrantable Examples Seats: Technical Service Bulletins Seat Trim - Non-Warrantable Examples Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/90-011 Date: June 15, 1990 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: SEAT TRIM WARRANTY CLAIMS An ongoing analysis of Seat Trim returned through the Part Return Program has shown an increasing volume of non-warrantable seat trim replacements being claimed as a warrantable repair. Non-warrantable seat trim examples are cigarette burns, cuts and punctures. Please instruct your Warranty Administration team that seat trim damage as indicated above is not covered by the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty and should not be submitted for reimbursement via the Warranty Claim Processing System. Thank you for your assistance. Engine - Block Heater Installation Instructions Technical Service Bulletin # 90086 Date: 901025 Engine - Block Heater Installation Instructions Models: All Models Section: Engine Mechanical Classification: EM90-007 Bulletin No.: NT890-086 Date: October 25, 1990 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PART NUMBER: 999M4-YA002 APPLICATION: MODEL ENGINE TYPE YEAR LOCATION Sentra SR20DE 1991 Rear side of the engine. NX 2000 & Threaded freeze plug on right later side of starter motor. (Fig.1) KIT CONTENTS: Item No. Qty. Item 1 1 Engine block heater assembly 2 1 Gasket 3 1 Power cord 4 1 Power cord end protector cap 5 3 Tie wrap 6 1 Installation Instructions TOOLS REQUIRED: Phillips tip screwdriver 24 mm combination wrench 10 mm socket and ratchet 24 mm socket 12 mm Hex bit w/universal joint Torque wrench and extension Cutting pliers Installation Precautions/Notes: ^ Be careful not to damage engine block threads when removing freeze plug or installing block heater. ^ Handle engine block heater with care to avoid damaging the threads. ^ Do not over-torque engine block heater. ^ Ensure that power cord doesn't contact exhaust pipes, sharp edges or vehicle moving parts. ^ Torque removed vehicle parts to proper specifications. Page 5103 Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Cassette Tape Player Maintenance Classification: EL90-002 Reference: NTB90-044 Date: May 24, 1990 CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLE(S) All Nissan vehicles equipped with a cassette tape player SERVICE INFORMATION The playback head, capstan, and roller will attract dirt or residues from the tape material each time a cassette is played. This causes a deterioration of sound quality (i.e. distortion, reduced frequency response, and reduced clarity/fullness). If residues and dirt are not removed, loss of channel(s) or tape continuity (also referred to as: "tape eating") may occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE To ensure the optimum performance from a cassette tape player, the following Periodic Maintenance guidelines should be observed: ^ Clean the cassette tape player (specifically, the tape head and capstan rollers) after 10 hours of play or once a month (whichever occurs first). ^ Use a cassette cleaning kit (such as: Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 999U2-A7000 or equivalent), being careful to follow the kit manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, the following Cassette Tape Care guidelines should be observed: ^ Before turning off the radio, eject the cassette being played. Leaving the tape mechanism stopped while a tape is engaged can damage the tape, pinch roller, or capstan. Use tapes which are 90 minutes or less in play time. ^ Store cassette tapes properly, when not in use; 1. Use protective plastic case to prevent tape from unwinding and accumulating dust. 2. Protect tapes from extreme heat, direct sun light, and extreme cold. After turning off the radio, do not leave the tape in the cassette door pathway. Remove it to allow the tape slot door to close and keep out airborne dirt. ^ Do not use tapes that are more than 5 years old. Older tapes suffer from stretch and increased tape head residue. The preceding information should be given to the customer at the time of vehicle purchase (Sales Department) and during vehicle servicing (Service Department). Page 5204 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Page 2242 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 2531 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 3061 AB-/BC VALVE CONTROL When the idle switch is OFF, the I.S.C. valve opens in response to the amount of intake air and engine speed. When the accelerator pedal is released, additional air is led into the intake manifold, actuating as AB- or BC valve. Page 2360 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2211 Distributor Cap: Testing and Inspection Distributor Cap 1. Remove the screws securing the cap to the distributor. 2. Remove the ignition wires from the cap. 3. Inspect the cap for cracks or damage due to heat or arcing. 4. Inspect the terminals inside the cap for excessive corrosion and damage. 5. Inspect the ignition wire terminals for excessive corrosion. If the corrosion cannot be removed with reasonable measures, replace the cap. Replace the cap if it fails the above tests. Page 297 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation The exhaust gas sensor, which is placed into the exhaust manifold, monitors the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas. The sensor has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The outer surface of the tube is exposed to exhaust gas, and the inner surface to atmosphere. The zirconia of the tube compares the oxygen density of exhaust gas with that of atmosphere, and generates electricity. In order to improve generating power of the zirconia, its tube is coated with platinum. The voltage is approximately 1V in a richer condition of the mixture ratio than the ideal air fuel ratio, while approximately 0V in leaner conditions. The radical change from 1V to 0V occurs at around the ideal mixture ratio. In this way, the exhaust gas sensor detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas and sends the signal of approximately 1V or 0V to the E.C.U. Page 4512 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): Customer Interest Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra M/T - F30A/F31A Fluid Leaks Case: Customer Interest M/T - F30A/F31A Fluid Leaks Classification: Section: MT90-001 Manual Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-024 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: March 15, 1990 F30A & F31A MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra (B12) 1987-1990 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The F30A/F31A manual transaxles used on the Applied Models listed above (check the appropriate model Service Manual for manual transaxle application) may exhibit transmission oil leakage between the clutch housing and the transaxle case due to insufficient case bolt torque. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION To improve the sealing performance at this area, a higher grade bolt is now used in production, and the housing bolt tightening torque has been increased. If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated area, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the transaxle case halves, thoroughly clean and inspect the mating surfaces for porosities, surface damage, etc. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces, then install the new bolts, being certain to apply additional sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the indicated area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Page 4677 Fig. 3 Locknut removal 4. Flatten lock washer tab, then remove pulley locknut using tool No. KV99235160, Fig. 3. 5. Reverse procedures to install, noting the following: a. When assembling clutch disc, ensure clutch surface has been thoroughly cleaned. Fig. 4 Adjusting pulley clearance b. Insert feeler gauge between drive plate and pulley as shown, Fig. 4, and ensure clearance is .012-.024 inch. If clearance is not as specified, remove clutch plate, then remove or install adjusting shims as necessary. c. Torque center bolt to 6.7-8.7 ft. lbs. d. Torque clutch locknut to 22-29 ft. lbs. e. After replacement, perform ``Break-In'' by engaging and disengaging the compressor clutch approximately thirty times. Page 1520 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. M/T - Shift Lever Vibration or Buzzing Shift Linkage: Customer Interest M/T - Shift Lever Vibration or Buzzing 1987-88 Sentra, Models 1987 Pulsar Section Manual Transmission Classification MT89-001 Bulletin No. TS89-36 Date March 23, 1989 SENTRA/PULSAR SHIFT LEVER VIBRATION APPLIED MODELS 1987 Pulsar 1987-88 Sentra (2WD) APPLIED DATES & VINS Pulsar: July, 1987 JN1PN34S HM-044813 JN1EN34S HM-018300 Sentra (Japan built): July, 1987 JN1PB21S JU-523012 JN1PB22S JU-518678 JN1PB24S JU-023334 JN1PB25S JU-014701 JN1Pb26S JU-U14756 Sentra (U.S. built) February, 1988 1N4PB22S7JC778188 SERVICE INFORMATION Some vehicles with manual transmissions manufactured before the applied dates may exhibit gear shift lever vibration (or "buzzing") while driving at highway speeds. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 119 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Wiring Diagram Page 1464 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2154 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 2509 240SX (S14) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 2958 Page 2475 Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 2612 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 4387 large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation. 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation. 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service. NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement. 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 863 2. Remove the following belts. - Power steering oil pump drive belt - Compressor drive belt - Alternator drive belt 3. Set No. 1 cylinder at top dead center (T.D.C.) on its compression stroke. 4. Remove the water pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley is accessible after removing side cover from inside R.H. wheel house. 5. Remove right side engine mounting bracket. NOTE: Support engine by placing a jack under oil pan. Do not place jack under oil pan drain plug. Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2976 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 435 Inspection Procedure Page 2737 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 4102 Slow Battery Charge CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the Nissan "Assurance Products Resource Manual" for battery claim procedures. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Type Plug Air Gap Plug Torque Standard Type BPR5ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Hot Type BPR4ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Cold Type BPR6ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Page 4801 Page 4284 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 635 Page 4302 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 4310 Fig. 14 Typical tie rod length measurement. Fig. 17 Tie rod length specifications Toe is adjusted by loosening the tie rod locknuts or adjusting sleeve bolts and equally altering the length of the tie rods. After toe has been adjusted to specifications, the lengths of the left and right tie rods, Fig. 14, should be nearly equal and close to the length specified in Fig. 17. If tie rod lengths are incorrect, tie rods should be disassembled and adjusted to specifications, and the toe setting should be readjusted before checking steering angles. Incorrect tie rod length will adversely affect steering angles and toe-out on turns. Page 592 The chart (Figure 5) shows the relationship between the common units of Total Toe measurement. Conversions vary with wheel size. Reference the appropriate service manual for exact specifications. NOTE: When adjusting Total Toe on a vehicle with oversized tires, use the angle values on the alignment machine. Oversized tires have a larger diameter. Page 3010 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2061 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 1491 Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Lug Nuts 72 - 87 ft.lb Maintenance - Cleaning Power Antenna & Wiper Blades Antenna: All Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Cleaning Power Antenna & Wiper Blades Models: See below Section: Electrical Classification: EL92-011 Bulletin No.: NTB92-083 Date: October 8, 1992 MAINTENANCE OF POWER ANTENNA AND WIPER BLADES APPLIED MODELS: All with Power Antenna; All Vehicles [Wiper Blades]. SERVICE INFORMATION: 1. Maintenance of Power Antenna It is recommended that the Power Antenna rod, in its extended position, be periodically wiped with a clean, soft, dry cloth. This is the most current information from the factory concerning proper periodic maintenance of the Power Antenna. I. Maintenance of Wiper Blades 1. To clean the rubber wiper blades, it is recommended to use a clean, soft, wet cloth [the cloth should be moistened with washer liquid]. 2. Before lowering the wiper blades onto the glass, it is advised to first clean the glass area swept by the wiper blade. Use an appropriate, commercially-available glass cleaner and either paper towels or a lint-free towel. NOTE: If the vehicles you service are subject to ice and snow formation on the front or rear windshields, you may recommend to your customers that wiper blade effectiveness, during these environmental conditions, may be optimized, if both snow and ice are removed prior to operating the wiper system(s). Page 1141 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Service and Repair Water Pump: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and drain cooling system. 2. Remove power steering drive belt and the power steering oil pump. 3. Remove alternator drive belt. 4. Loosen alternator attaching bolts and push alternator toward engine. 5. Remove water pump pulley, then the water pump and gasket. 6. Reverse procedure to install, using new gasket. Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 1281 Maxima VG30E (2) 1986 Front side, first plug 6 o'clock & later from driver side. 200SX VG30E 1987 Driver side, first 6 o'clock & later plug from the rear. Stanza CA20E 1987 Front side, second 7 o'clock Wagon & later plug from driver side. Stanza CA20E 1989 Front side, first plug 7 o'clock Sedan & later from driver side. Sentra E16 (3) 1987-1988 Rear side, first plug 8 o'clock Pulsar from passenger side. Sentra GA16i (3) 1989 Front side, first plug 10 o'clock Pulsar NX GA16DE (3) & later from passenger side. Pulsar CA16DE 1987 Front side, first plug 5 o'clock CA18DE & later from driver side. (1) Remove exhaust pipe heat shield and steering column lower joint assembly for access to indicated freeze plug. Remove section of exhaust pipe connected to turbocharger if necessary. (2) Remove front section of exhaust pipe for access to indicated freeze plug. (3) Remove alternator for access to indicated freeze plug. KIT CONTENTS: Item No. Qty Item 1 1 Heater assembly 2 1 Power cord 3 1 Power cord end protector cap 4 3 Tie wrap 5 1 Installation instructions TOOLS REQUIRED: Center punch Combination pliers Hammer 4 mm hex wrench Needle nose pliers Flat blade screwdriver INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS/NOTES: ^ Do not over torque engine block heater. ^ Ensure that power cord doesn't contact exhaust pipes, sharp edges or vehicle moving parts. ^ Torque removed vehicle parts to proper specifications (refer to appropriate Nissan Service Manual). PART NUMBER: 999M1-49000 APPLICATION MODEL ENGINE TYPE YEAR LOCATION ELEMENT DIRECTION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 240SX KA24E 1989 Driver side of the 12 o'clock & later engine, first plug from the rear. Axxess KA24E 1990 Front side of the 12 o'clock Stanza & later engine, first plug from the driver side. Truck (1) KA24E 1990 Driver side of the 12 o'clock (4 cyl/ & later engine, first plug 2WD) from the rear. (1) Remove section of exhaust pipe in front of indicated freeze plug to facilitate block heater installation. Page 3102 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4819 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 3659 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 4471 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Description and Operation Distributor Cap: Description and Operation Distributor Cap The distributor cap is used to make the connection between the rotor and the correct spark plug wire. High tension current from the rotor is distributed to the towers of the distributor cap at a pre-set sequence and then to the spark plug wires which carry the current on to the spark plugs. Page 4378 Possible Cause of Brake Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: ^ The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. ^ As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. ^ Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. Service Procedure Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062a (BR92-004a) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 4459 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1535 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2507 TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30E VAN (C22) Z24i 200SX (S110) Z20E 200SX (S110) Z22E Page 607 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Locations Fig. 28 Component location Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Control Valve Assembly Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Assembly Control Valve 1. Remove control valve assembly. Be careful not to drop manual valve out of valve body. Page 1936 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 4235 The chart (Figure 5) shows the relationship between the common units of Total Toe measurement. Conversions vary with wheel size. Reference the appropriate service manual for exact specifications. NOTE: When adjusting Total Toe on a vehicle with oversized tires, use the angle values on the alignment machine. Oversized tires have a larger diameter. Page 638 Page 3184 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4530 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 2956 Page 2034 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 334 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2837 Canister Purge Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 5151 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Classification: BT97-014 Reference: NTB97-060 Date: August 13, 1997 BUMPER REFINISHING TECHNIQUES Applied Vehicles: All models with plastic bumper covers (fascia) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin describes proper plastic bumper cover refinishing with specific paint manufacturer procedures and materials. For information on repairing bumpers refer to the 1992 Technical Bulletin book, page BF-31 for NTB92-043/BF92-013. When refinishing replacement plastic bumper covers (i.e. service parts), it is important to follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure exactly. Failure to do so may result with paint not fully adhering to the bumper, and with time, the paint not adhering to the bumper may peel off. The bumper covers contain mold release agents which must be removed prior to painting. If the bumper cover is not properly cleaned and prepped, the paint may not adhere. Please follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure for proper bumper preparation. NOTE: You can heat the bumper at 140°F for 45 minutes to bring the mold release agent to the surface. Allow the bumper cover to cool completely before cleaning. This cleaning (degreasing) is necessary to remove the mold release agent on the surface completely. The chart indicates which cover; polyurethane (PUR) or polypropylene (PP) is used on each model. The procedures and appropriate materials for each paint vendor are attached for your reference. If you should have any difficulty: ^ Obtaining materials ^ Following the published procedure ^ Obtaining a proper finish ^ If you are in a VOC regulated area Brakes - Improved Front Pad Material Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Improved Front Pad Material Classification: BR89-002 Section: Brake System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-006 Models: All models Date: January 19, 1989 IMPROVED FRONT BRAKE PAD MATERIAL APPLIED MODELS: 1982-88 Sentra (B11 & B12) 1983-88 Pulsar (N12 & N13) 1982-88 Stanza (T11 & T12) 1985-88 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 Truck (D21) 1987-88 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987-88 Van (C22) SERVICE INFORMATION Service brake pads with improved semi-metallic material are available for the applied models. These pads have been installed at the factory on some 1987 and most 1988 models. Compared to the former semi-metallic material, this new material has the following advantages: ^ Reduced brake pedal effort when brakes are cold ^ Firmer brake pedal "feel" ^ Reduced brake rotor wear ^ Reduced brake squeal ^ Reduced brake noise after vehicle has been in storage (less affected by rust on rotor surface) In addition, this new semi-metallic material has much longer pad life than the equivalent asbestos pads. Service brake pad kits with this new material are available and have new part numbers. They can also be identified by the code stamped in the pad backing plate. Original pad material (asbestos) NBK NP01 FF or (semi-metallic) Hitachi HP14 EE Improved pad material (semi-metallic) Hitachi HP12 FE The improved pads can be substituted for the original pads and are recommended for all repairs when the brake pads are replaced. Page 976 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 5255 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. Page 2561 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Page 2669 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 1784 Engine Control Module: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2389 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 110 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 2953 Testing and Inspection Air Filter Element: Testing and Inspection Viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation until it is replaced periodically. Brushing or blasting operation should never be conducted, because it causes clogging and results in enrichment of the mixture ratio. Page 3722 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 153 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3212 - When installing I.S.C. valve to throttle body, observe the tightening order. Tightening order: (A) -> (B) -> (C) Tightening torque: 4 - 5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 2.9 - 3.6 ft-lb..) Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Page 2503 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE Page 4470 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 2118 Page 3707 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 111 Engine Control Module: Specifications Fig. 303a Input/Output signal inspection chart. Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Classification: EL99-016V Reference: NTB99-048V Date: March 11, 2010 BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery *For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007. SERVICE INFORMATION The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery, starter, and alternator tester. ^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators. ^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters, and/or alternators. ^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. ^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008. Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA. Page 4425 Fig. 25 Rear suspension. 4WD Sentra 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect brake line and parking brake cable. 3. Remove upper and lower strut attaching bolts and nuts, Figs. 23 and 25. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 1950 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1553 Page 3577 A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 2134 This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2128 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 107 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Page 3021 Page 3838 Inspect the system to find the cause of the symptom. Start the diagnosis by determining the location of the electrical units involved. Inspect each component to verify that it is mechanically free to operate and that all connectors and harnesses are securely connected and properly routed. Systematically check the circuits involved, using the Harness Layouts and Power Supply Routing in the service manual. Determine which circuit is the cause of the incident and whether it is a wiring problem or a component problem. STEP 5 Repair or replace. Repair or replace the incident component or electrical circuit. STEP 6 Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component you need to operate the system in all modes and particularly under the circumstances which resulted in the customers initial complaint. Incident Simulation Tests If the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service, it may be necessary for you to simulate the conditions and environment under which the incident occurred. Proceeding with a diagnosis when the vehicle is not displaying the symptom may lead the technician to a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environments under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into one of the six following topics: 1. Vehicle Vibration 2. Heat Sensitive 3. Freezing 4. Water Intrusion 5. Electrical Load 6. Cold or Hot Start Up To properly simulate the condition under which the owner experiences the problem, it is important that you get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. 1. Vehicle Vibration If the owner indicates the problem occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or during periods when the engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on), you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. On intermittent incidents it is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system your inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Page 5061 Antitheft and Alarm Systems: Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 684 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2180 Idle Check and Set Procedure Page 4783 Page 3018 Page 2943 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 2397 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4223 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 3462 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Classification: BR87-005 Reference: TS87-103 Date: June 29, 1987 DISC BRAKE NOISE INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models with disc brakes (front or rear) SERVICE INFORMATION Some Nissan vehicles may exhibit brake noise under certain driving conditions. This Bulletin provides some information about normal and common noises and appropriate service procedures for each noise. Some of this information may be useful when explaining brake noises to the customer. Refer to Technical Bulletin BR87-006, "Disc Brake Noise Countermeasure", for information about abnormal brake noises on Maxima, Stanza, and Stanza Wagon. General Brake Information Nissan brake systems have been carefully designed to provide optimum braking performance under various driving conditions. One of the most important components in the brake system is the brake pad material. The following factors have been taken into consideration to select the best pad material. ^ technical and government regulations ^ stopping distance ^ vehicle control while braking ^ high operating temperatures ^ pedal force ^ pad and rotor wear rates ^ moisture resistance ^ friction coefficient stability ^ operating noise level Unfortunately, there is no one brake pad material that provides perfect performance in all of these areas. Changing the material to improve some factors often causes a performance reduction in other areas. Higher brake operating noise levels in some instances occur as a result of factors which ensure proper brake performance and safety. Common Brake Noises The following brake noises occur most frequently on Nissan vehicles. These noises do not indicate any malfunction or improper operation. 1. GROANING NOISE AT LOW MILEAGE (0-300 MILES) ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during medium speed stops (20-40 mph) ^ noise usually does not occur on the first or second stop ^ noise occurs with warm or hot brakes (not cold) ^ there may be a low frequency "judder" vibration Nissan applies protective coatings to the brake rotors and pads to reduce corrosion during shipping and storage. These coatings may cause this groaning noise until they are worn off. Under normal driving conditions, this usually takes about 300 miles. If this noise occurs during the first 300 miles, it is not necessary to attempt any repairs. Service Procedure: There is no service procedure to eliminate this noise permanently. Replacing the brake pads or machining the rotors may cause the noise to disappear temporarily, but it will return and continue until the coatings are worn off the rotor and pads. 2. GROANING NOISE (AFTER 300 MILES) Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2179 Service and Repair Clutch Disc: Service and Repair 1. Remove transmission. 2. Insert a dummy shaft into the clutch disc hub. 3. Loosen clutch cover attaching bolts alternately. 4. Remove clutch disc and cover assembly. 5. Remove release bearing. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4537 Page 5241 1. It is necessary to match the color of the refinishing base color paint and the original body paint. On all cars, an exposed portion of the color base coat will be found under the right and left hand sill plates. 2. The color tone of a pearl base coat varies with the number of overlapped spray strokes (film thickness). Use the same spraying conditions as those for color matching. 3 Areas to be sanded and coated for Zone repairs. Description and Operation Idle/Altitude Compensator (Non Comp. Controlled): Description and Operation Air density becomes thinner at higher altitudes. Therefore, the carburetor produces too rich an air/fuel mixture at higher altitudes. The altitude compensator automatically corrects air/fuel ratio to an optimum mixture. When vehicle is operated in a high altitude environment, the bellows in the compensator extends, causing the lever attached to the bellows to push up the needle. When the needle is pushed up the air passage becomes wider, allowing larger amounts of air to flow from the altitude compensator to the carburetor, thereby thinning the air/fuel mixture. Page 1431 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 658 2. Turn wheels from straight-ahead position until the inner wheel is at the position specified for ``Toe-Out On Turns'' shown in Fig. 18. If the outer wheel reference angle is incorrect, check for damaged or improperly adjusted tie rods. Perform check in both left and right directions. 3. On models less rack and pinion steering, proceed as follows: a. Rotate steering to full lock in each direction. b. Adjust inner wheel ``Turning Angle'' to value specified in Fig. 18, by adjusting position of steering stop. c. With inner wheel adjusted to specifications, outer wheel turning angle should be as specified in Fig. 18. If outer wheel turning angle is incorrect, repair or replace steering linkage as needed. 4. On models with rack and pinion steering, proceed as follows: a. Turn steering to full lock and measure inner and outer wheel turning angles. b. If ``Turning Angles'' at full lock are not within specifications, Fig. 18, check for damaged steering linkage or improperly adjusted tie rods. c. If steering linkage and tie rods are satisfactory, check for improper rack or rack piston stroke and repair steering gear as needed. Rear Wheels The proper alignment of the rear suspension and wheels is essential for proper handling and to providing a reference for front wheel alignment. Always ensure that rear wheel alignment is within specifications prior to checking and adjusting front wheel alignment. CAMBER On models with independent rear suspension, rear wheel camber must be within specifications for proper vehicle handling and to prevent uneven tire wear. Rear camber cannot be adjusted. If rear camber is not within specifications, check for damaged or worn suspension components and deformed sheet metal, and repair as needed. Fig. 1 Measuring Toe-in TOE-IN On models with independent rear suspension, rear toe is the measurement of the rear wheels in relation to the vehicle centerline, Fig. 1. The leading edge of each rear wheel should toe-in slightly toward the vehicle centerline to ensure proper vehicle tracking. Rear toe should be inspected using suitable alignment gauges, following manufacturer's instructions. When checking or adjusting rear toe, always ensure that the amount that the left and right wheels toe-in is as nearly equal as possible. Fig. 6 Rear toe-in adjustment. 1986-88 Stanza Wagon, 1987-88 Sentra w/4WD similar 1986-88 Stanza Wagon & 1987-88 Sentra 4WD Rear toe-in is adjusted by rotating the cam bolts which secure the transverse link to the axle carrier, Fig. 6. 1. Measure total toe-in and toe-in for each wheel following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Scribe matching mark between cam and control arm, then loosen nut securing cam bolt. 3. Rotate cam bolt as needed, Fig. 6, to bring toe-in within specifications. Ensure that total toe-in is within specifications and divided equally between left and right wheels. Page 2283 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Testing and Inspection 1. Connect vacuum pump to two uppermost ports one at a time and check them for leakage. 2. When vacuum is applied to uppermost port and port immediately below that is open to atmosphere, uppermost port should open at 2.36 inches Hg. 3. When vacuum is applied to top two ports, they should both open at 19.69 inches Hg. 4. When two uppermost ports are open to atmosphere, valve should be closed. 5. If valve does not operate as described above, it should be replaced. Locations Ignition Coil Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2899 Vacuum Delay Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove vacuum delay valve from engine. 2. Blow into port on EGR control valve side. Air should flow through valve. 3. Blow into other port. Air flow resistance should be greater than in step 2. 4. If condition of valve is questionable, dip port into water and blow air from brown or violet face side. Air bubbles should appear. Avoid entry of oil or dirt into valve. Page 605 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 778 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2151 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 856 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Intake and Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment Adjustment must be made while engine is warm but not running. 1. Set No. 1 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (1), (2), (3) and (6). 2. Set No. 4 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (4), (5), (7) and (8). Valve clearance: Intake and exhaust 0.28 mm (0.011 in) Tighten Pivot lock nut 16 - 21 N.m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb) Page 4511 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3939 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 444 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 4588 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 2079 Page 2138 Page 5040 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 3194 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3940 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4993 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Paint - 2 and 3 Coat Pearlescent Finishes Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - 2 and 3 Coat Pearlescent Finishes Models: All Section: Body & Frame Classification: BF88-004 Bulletin No.: TS88-013 Date: February 8, 1988 PEARLESCENT PAINT APPLIED MODELS: All SERVICE INFORMATION Pearlescent paints containing mica are now being used on some 1988 Nissan models. These paints differ from solid or metallic paints. Three types of pearlescent paints are currently being used by Nissan; 2-coat pearl, 2-coat pearl metallic, and 3-coat pearl (see chart). Page 3897 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 2343 Digital signals are ON-OFF (Hi-Low) voltage pulses. This signal is a typical digital signal. Examples of common digital signals are: Battery Voltage The ignition switch in the ACC or ON position provides a battery voltage signal to several control units. This informs the control unit of the ignition position. Switch to Ground A door switch is a common example of a switch to ground. When the door is opened the door switch completes the circuit. The interior light is turned on. In addition, the time control unit is sent an OFF signal indicating the door is open. Pulse Voltage A pulse voltage is made up of alternating high and low voltage signals of varying duration. These signals are counted by the control unit within a predetermined time frame. Analog Input Signals An analog signal is a voltage that varies over a period of time. Analog signals are produced by sensors in the vehicle. Sensors change resistance to deliver variable voltage signals. The Oxygen Sensor sine wave signals shown are typical analog signals. These charts are example signals printed using CONSULT. ^ The first chart shows an Oxygen Sensor lean (low voltage) condition. ^ The second chart is a normal Oxygen Sensor voltage printout. ^ The third chart illustrates an Oxygen Sensor rich (high voltage) condition. Examples of common sensors are: Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors change resistance with a change in temperature. This temperature is converted into an analog voltage range. Page 4538 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 4543 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 1928 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 251 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 4341 tubing wrench. The return line is retained by a screw clamp. FIGURE 3 8. Raise vehicle about halfway up on hoist being certain to use the appropriate lifting points (Figure 3). FIGURE 4 9. Remove both front wheels. 10. Disconnect both tie rod ends from knuckle arms, using the appropriate separating tool (Figure 4). FIGURE 5 11. Raise vehicle all the way up on hoist. 12. Remove right and left stabilizer rod rear mount clamps (Figure 5). 13. Loosen the A.I.V. tube mounting bracket. Page 1203 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Note: Preload adjustment of wheel bearing is not necessary. Rear Wheel Bearing 1. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to: 137 - 188 ft lbs (186 - 255 Nm) 2. Check bearing for smooth operation. 3. Check axial end play. Should be: .002in (0.05mm) or less Page 2628 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 3028 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1737 PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE PULSAR (KN13) GA16i SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) Page 1479 Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the E.C.U. for fuel cut, recovery and idle speed control. - Needle type speedometer models The speed sensor consists of a reed switch, which is installed in the speed meter unit and transforms vehicle speed into a pulse signal. Page 1922 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Page 3153 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1146 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 643 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 254 Inspection Procedure Page 2123 Page 5308 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 2126 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4013 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 83 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Page 321 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Intake 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 in Page 4314 Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection Prior to checking and adjusting wheel alignment angles, perform the following checks: 1. Check tire pressures and adjust as needed. 2. Ensure tires are of the proper size and that tires are properly matched. 3. Ensure wheel bearings (front and rear) are properly adjusted. 4. Check steering gear adjustment and ensure that steering gear is properly secured to frame. 5. Inspect steering linkage and suspension components for damage and wear, and repair or replace components as needed. 6. Measure vehicle ride height with vehicle unloaded, and ensure springs are not collapsed. 7. Place unladen vehicle on suitable alignment rack following manufacturer's instructions, then jounce vehicle several times to settle suspension. 8. Check and correct rear wheel camber and toe first, if applicable, then check and correct front suspension angles in in the following order: caster and kingpin inclination, camber, toe setting and turning angle (toe-out on turns). Page 2888 Vacuum Amplifier: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect hose that connects vacuum amplifier to EGR control valve and install ``T'' connector and vacuum gauge. 2. With engine idling vacuum gauge should read 5.31-6.5 inches Hg. If reading is excessively outside range, replace amplifier. 3. With engine speed at approximately 2000 RPM, vacuum gauge should read 11.18-12.76 inches Hg. If reading is outside range, replace amplifier. Page 4784 Description and Operation Ignition Rotor: Description and Operation Distributor Rotor The rotor makes the connection between the center terminal and the correct spark plug terminal of the cap as it is turned by the distributor. Page 971 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant (R12) Recycling Models: All Models Section: Heater & Air Conditioner Classification: HA90-003 Bulletin No.: NTB90-016 Date: February 15, 1990 REFRIGERANT (R12) RECYCLING APPLIED MODEL: All models equipped with air conditioning SERVICE INFORMATION: It has been established and documented that when the Chlorofluorocarbon refrigerant (R-12) most commonly used in automotive air conditioning systems is released into the air, it works its way upward and, by chemical reaction, eventually results in the destruction of the "ozone layer" in the earth's upper atmosphere. Ozone, a special form of oxygen, protects the surface of the earth by reflecting powerful ultra violet radiation from the sun back into space. Among other dangers, ultra violet radiation causes skin cancer and eye cataracts in humans and it causes damage and decreased production in food crops. In order to prevent further damage to the earth's ozone, the U.S. government joined a group of nations in signing the Montreal protocol to reduce and eventually halt all production of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) over the next few years. Nissan supports all efforts to avoid release of these hazardous materials into the environment. As part of this effort, A/C systems are being re-designed to use less refrigerant. The next step is to design systems that will use an alternate, non-damaging refrigerant. In the interim, it is imperative that the release of R-12 into the air be slowed and stopped as soon as possible. During the period February 19 to March 9, 1990, a refrigerant recycling unit will be shipped to your dealership from Kent-Moore Tool Co. as a mandatory special tool. This machine will remove the refrigerant from any vehicle whose A/C system you service or dismantle for scrap, recycle the refrigerant by removing all moisture and contaminants, and place it into a safe container for re-use. Until that recycling equipment arrives and is put to use in your dealership, here are some things you can do to decrease the amount of R-12 that you release into the environment: 1. Make sure your A/C service tools are in good working order, especially your leak detector and the vacuum pump you use for evacuating any A/C system you install or service. 2. Evacuate only once. Do not evacuate, charge, and then evacuate again before installing the final charge of refrigerant. Any extra evacuation allows excess refrigerant to spill into the atmosphere. 3. Wherever possible, do not use one-pound cans of refrigerant. Each time you change cans during a recharge, some refrigerant is lost to the atmosphere. Therefore, it is better to charge from a larger container (e.g., 30 lb.) and charge all at once instead of changing containers during the process. 4. When installing A/C kits or when repairing an in-service air conditioning system, use care and proper installation techniques to avoid introducing potential leaks into the system. This includes using a small amount of clean refrigerant oil to lubricate the tube and hose O-rings, using the correct torque wrench and backup wrench for tube and hose connections, and applying the correct torque specifications. 5. When repairing an in-service A/C system, always use new O-rings when re-assembling the connections. Your Nissan A/C Component Service Kit (p/n 999A1-A6000) contains O-rings for all popular Nissan air conditioners, as well as a detailed diagram of which O-ring to use at each connection. 6. Before charging any system with refrigerant, perform a "vacuum leak check." This procedure is described in your factory Service Manual under the heading "Checking Airtightness." Antenna - Inoperative, Rod Maintenance & Replacement Antenna: Customer Interest Antenna - Inoperative, Rod Maintenance & Replacement CLASSIFICATION: EL95-008 REFERENCE: NTB95-074 DATE: August 2, 1995 POWER ANTENNA ROD MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT This Bulletin contains revised Warranty information. Please discard NTB94-019 dated February 17, 1994. APPLIED VEHICLE: All models equipped with power antennas SERVICE INFORMATION Power antenna incidents for no operation or improper retraction are almost always caused by the following: ^ The antenna rod is broken or bent due to misuse. Common examples of this include the antenna contacts the top of a garage door opening or a tree branch. Also, a customer may forget to lower the antenna before entering an automated car wash. ^ Dirt, road grime, and other foreign matter collects on the rod interrupting proper operational movement. This occurs most frequently during winter months in areas where road salt and other chemicals are splashed onto the antenna rod. REPAIRS COMPLETED FOR THE TWO CAUSES DESCRIBED ABOVE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY. ONLY REPAIRS UNDERTAKEN DUE TO DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP WILL BE COVERED UNDER WARRANTY. In a large majority of cases, the antenna motor is fully operational and receiving proper power. Therefore, replacement of the entire power antenna assembly is not usually necessary to restore power antenna operation. Prior to removing any power antenna assembly, an attempt should be made to repair the power antenna by removing dirt, road grime, and other foreign matter, and then lubricating the antenna rod sections as appropriate. if still inoperative, replacement of the rod only should be made. A sample replacement procedure is provided on the following page. Check the EL section under Audio and Power Antenna in the Service Manual for specifics on your respective vehicle. SERVICE PROCEDURE REPLACING THE ANTENNA ROD 1. Remove antenna nut and base. (Figure 1) 2. Turn the radio to "ON" and the antenna rod will extend*. Assist the antenna rod to fully separate from the antenna base. Note the direction of the gear section on the antenna rope. [The new antenna rod must be installed in the same direction]. * If the antenna rod does not extend, always check the power supply to the power antenna before replacing the power antenna assembly. Page 2660 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Model RN4F31A 5.75 pt (US) Model RS4F31A 5.875 pt (US) Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Torque 8 ft.lb Page 3015 Audio - Cassette Player Maintenance Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Cassette Player Maintenance Classification: Section: EL90-002 Electrical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-044 Models: All with cassette Date: May 24, 1990 CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles equipped with a cassette tape player SERVICE INFORMATION: The playback head, capstan, and roller will attract dirt or residues from the tape material each time a cassette is played. This causes a deterioration of sound quality (i.e. distortion, reduced frequency response, and reduced clarity/fullness). If residues and dirt are not removed, loss of channel(s) or tape continuity (also referred to as: "tape eating") may occur. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE: To ensure the optimum performance from a cassette tape player, the following Periodic maintenance guidelines should be observed: ^ Clean the cassette tape player (specifically, the tape head and capstan rollers) after 10 hours of play or once a month (whichever occurs first). ^ Use a cassette cleaning kit (such as: Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 999U2-A7000 or equivalent), being careful to follow the kit manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, the following Cassette Tape Care guidelines should be observed: ^ Before turning off the radio, eject the cassette being played. Leaving the tape mechanism stopped while a tape is engaged can damage the tape, pinch roller, or capstan. Use tapes which are 90 minutes or less in play time. ^ Store cassette tapes properly, when not in use; 1. Use protective plastic case to prevent tape from unwinding and accumulating dust. 2. Protect tapes from extreme heat, direct sun light, and extreme cold. After turning off the radio, do not leave the tape in the cassette door pathway. Remove it to allow the tape slot door to close and keep out airborne dirt. ^ Do not use tapes that are more than 5 years old. Older tapes suffer from stretch and increased tape head residue. The preceding information should be given to the customer at the time of vehicle purchase (Sales Department) and during vehicle servicing (Service Department). Page 5059 VSS Control Unit Pin Test Page 5495 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Page 3966 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. GENERAL BRAKE REPAIR GUIDELINES To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following. 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Tools - Rivnut Installation Roof Rack Frame: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Rivnut Installation Models: All Models Section: Body & Frame Classification: BF89-026 Bulletin No.: TS89-132 Date: August 31, 1989 RIVNUT INSTALLATION SERVICE INFORMATION The Rivnuts used for installation of a roof rack and deck rack require a substantial amount of time to install by hand. A Rivnut installation tool which will reduce the installation time is available from most automotive supply stores. EXAMPLE: B.F. Goodrich C-6000 Speed Header Page 2736 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2334 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 1548 Idle Speed: Specifications Base Idle Speed Controlled Idle Speed Adjusted with Throttle Sensor disconnected. Manual Transmission 750 +/- 25 rpm 800 +/- 100 rpm Automatic Transmission 670 +/- 25 rpm 700 +/- 100 rpm In "D" Position. Page 4670 Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 68 Testing fan switch. 1. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch and check continuity with ohmmeter. 2. Meter should indicate continuity as shown in Fig. 68. Page 4789 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 2455 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 2004 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 979 Page 5454 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 2354 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 3597 2. Disassemble, inspect and assemble control valve assembly. Refer to Control Valve Body. See: Service and Repair/Repair For Component Parts - Set manual shaft at Neutral, then align manual plate with groove in manual valve of control valve assembly. - Install detent valve with its groove facing forward. - After installing control valve to transmission case, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. Page 2370 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 3009 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 434 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1911 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2130 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1174 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 3135 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fig. 105 Fuel Injector The fuel injector is a kind of small, elaborate solenoid valve. As the E.C.U. sends injection signals to the injector, high-pressure fuel, which is supplied to the coil built in the injector, pulls the ball valve back, and then fuel is injected onto the throttle valve through the nozzle. The amount of injected fuel is controlled by the E.C.U. in terms of injection pulse duration. Page 112 Fig. 303b Input/Output signal inspection chart. Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 687 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 544 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 905 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Tester - Calibration Classification: Section: EM90-009 Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB90-093 Models: All Date: October 18, 1990 COOLANT TESTERS BACKGROUND INFORMATION: Evaluations have shown that some after-market coolant testers displayed inaccurate readings which were, in some cases, off by as much as 10~F. SERVICE INFORMATION: When coolant concentrations are in question, the following advice is recommended to dealers: 1. Select a name-brand tester, preferably from a specialty tool supplier. 2. Prior to usage, calibrate the coolant tester: ^ Prepare a "known" mixture of exactly 50% fresh anti-freeze and exactly 50% fresh water. Keep this mixture in a clean, sealed container to use for calibration purposes. ^ To calibrate a coolant tester, draw from the above "known" mixture when it is at room temperature (65-75~F). Use a "Magic Marker" to place a mark on the coolant tester for the "known" 50/50 mixture. ^ Also, be sure that the coolant you wish to test is between 65-75~F. This means that you may have to wait for the temperature of the coolant to fall within this range. NOTE: During extremely hot weather, it may be impractical to wait for the coolant to fall within the 65-75~F range. However, the coolant tester can be re-calibrated for the new, "hot weather" temperature using the "known" 50/50 mixture - provided both this 50/50 mixture and the coolant are at ambient temperature. 3. Measure the vehicle's coolant concentration using the calibrated mark on the coolant tester as an indication of a proper 50/50 solution. NOTE: Technicians should be equally concerned if the coolant concentration is too high as well as too low. High coolant concentrations reduce the ability of the coolant to transfer heat, which, in some cases, may lead to over-heating. In extreme cases, the coolant can sludge and restrict flow in the radiator. 4. After use, clean the tester by flushing it with fresh water. NOTE: Testing has shown that, if not properly cleaned, a non-soluble residue remains on the bouyant devices of the tooters after drying. This residue can effect the density of the bouyant devices and, consequently, effect the tester's accuracy. If there are any further questions regarding coolant concentrations, please contact your Technical service Manager (TSM). The TSM's have access to laboratory-grade hydrometers. Component Locations Sunroof / Moonroof: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Page 3383 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 1699 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 572 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 1155 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Idle Speed Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Classification: Section: Engine Fuel EF&EC88-017; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-115 Models: 1988 Sentra & Pulsar (E16i) Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED MODEL: 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16i SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. PARTS INFORMATION Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. PART DESCRIPTION 1988 PART NUMBER 1987 PART NUMBER E16i Mixture Heater 16174-61A61 16174-69A10 (B12/N13) Page 4442 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 4469 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 2155 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4654 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and remove lower dash panel. 2. Disconnect wiring harness connector to resistor. 3. Remove screws securing resistor to blower housing, then remove resistor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4962 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Page 1866 Inspection Procedure A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Torque Converter Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Classification: Section: AT90-002 Automatic Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-010 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: February 8, 1990 F01A AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra XE 1987-1990 Pulsar NX XE SERVICE INFORMATION Some of the Applied Models equipped with the F01A Automatic Transaxles may exhibit transmission fluid leakage from the converter housing and/or the front cover gasket area(s). To improve the sealing performance at these locations, new bolts for the torque converter housing and the front cover are now used in production, and the tightening torque for these bolts has been changed to eliminate this condition. In addition, a new torque converter housing gasket is available as a service replacement part for these vehicles. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated areas, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the front cover and/or torque converter housing, thoroughly clean and inspect (for porosities, surface damage, etc.) all mating surfaces. Install a new converter housing gasket and new bolts, being certain to apply sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the incident area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Page 2264 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 3211 Idle Speed Control Valve: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Do not pour oil or solvent into the I.S.C. valve. - Do not disassemble I.S.C. valve. - Do not peck the valve portion of I.S.C. valve. 1. Check resistance between the terminals. (A) - (B) : 9.5-10.5 ohms (B) - (C) : 8.5 - 9.5 ohms 2. Confirm insulation between each terminal and I.S.C. valve body. 3. Apply battery voltage between (B) (+) and (C) (-) and confirm the opening of I.S.C. valve. Valve: Fully closed. 4. Apply battery voltage between (B) (+) and (A) (-) and confirm the opening of I.S.C. valve. Valve: Fully open. 5. Check opening clearance of I.S.C. valve without applying voltage to terminals. Opening clearance: 0 - 2 mm (0 - 0.08 in) Page 804 Page 2734 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Tires - Rotation Requirement Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rotation Requirement Models 1987-88 Sentra Wagon & 1986-88 Stanza Wagon Section Wheel & Tire Classification WT87-005 Bulletin No. TS87-188 Date December 21, 1987 TIRE ROTATION REQUIREMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra Wagon with four-wheel-drive 1986-88 Stanza Wagon with four-wheel-drive SERVICE INFORMATION On all Sentra and Stanza Wagon four-wheel-drive models, it is very important that regular tire rotation be performed according to the maintenance schedules in the appropriate service manuals. On these vehicles, difficulty in shifting out of the four-wheel-drive mode could occur if the front tires are allowed to wear down more than the rear tires. A difference in tire circumference, front to rear, causes a strain at the driveline between front and rear axles. Locations Power Transistor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 4210 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 641 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 4259 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 3103 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 4571 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 569 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 2345 Check the wire in the illustration. If an ohmmeter is used to measure resistance, the single strand of wire still making contact would give an ohmmeter reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. It will become hot and have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: -Undersized wiring (single strand) -Corrosion on switch contacts -Loose wire connections or splices If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge (lower number). Measuring Voltage Drop 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts (voltage drop) are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb, or a 4.0 v. drop between the switch and the bulb. Relationship between Open/Short circuit and the ECU pin control Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Synchronizer Ring: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Lights - Plastic Lens Isopropyl Alcohol Caution Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins Lights - Plastic Lens Isopropyl Alcohol Caution Classification: BF87-013 Reference: TS87-064 Date: April 20, 1987 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL CAUTION ALL MODELS APPLIED VEHICLES(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Isopropyl alcohol solution used for general cleaning and for preparing the vehicle surface for graphics installation will cause the plastic lenses on turn signal lights, side marker lights, corning lights, tail lights, etc., to crack. Extreme care must be used to avoid all contact of isopropyl alcohol with any plastic lens (surface). ^ The isopropyl alcohol solution must not drip onto any plastic lens. ^ During cleaning of the vehicle, a wiping cloth soaked with alcohol solution must not contact any plastic lens. ^ During application of the urethane XE/SE Truck graphics, alcohol solution spray mist (used as the wetting solution) must not contact any plastic lens. Page 3521 High Reverse Clutch (Front) Page 1550 BASIC CHARACTERISTICS An ON-duty signal is fed to the I.S.C. valve in response to the water temperature. STARTING CORRECTION A starting correction signal is added in response to the water temperature for improved engine startability. This function continues for several seconds after the engine starts. IDLE SPEED FEEDBACK CONTROL When the following conditions are met after the starting correction has been completed, the idle speed feedback control function operates. (1) Idle switch-ON (2) Neutral switch - ON or below 8 km/h (5 MPH) (vehicle speed) *: When battery voltage of less than 12 volts continues for a few seconds, the target idle speed will be maintained higher, in order to improve charging function. (M/T only) Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Specifications Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications Drain Plug 22 - 29 ft.lb Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 2959 Page 5328 14. Remove the retracting side of the original lap belts. 15. The retracting side of the retro-fit seat belt is installed as follows: a. Feed belt through lower quarter panel finisher frame (see illustration). a. Install the retractor unit end of the shoulder harness by installing the mounting bolt and locating screw. Refer to illustration on previous page. b. Place the modified upper quarter finisher into position and bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear side panel where the 1" hole was drilled. NOTE: Mounting/anchor bolt torque is 26-32 ft.lbs (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 16. Reinstall front seat belt upper anchors and finisher caps. (26-32 ft.lbs.) Locations Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Component Locations T-Top: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3336 Inspection Procedure Page 970 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C Refrigerant - Warranty Claim Reimbursement Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/90-010 Date: June 25, 1990 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: REFRIGERANT REIMBURSEMENT WARRANTY POLICY As a result of the implementation of the new refrigerant recycling equipment, the National Warranty Department has adopted the following policy pertaining to warranty claim refrigerant reimbursement. 1. When requesting reimbursement for newly added refrigerant, reimbursement use the special part number LOCALFREON. 2. When requesting reimbursement for use of recycled refrigerant, use the special part number LOCALRECYC. 3. In both cases, up to $4.00 may be claimed for each quantity of one (1). Note: Quantity 1 = 1 lb. 4. A quantity of two (2) is the maximum allowed per repair ($8.00 total). This policy is effective immediately. Should you have questions pertaining to refrigerant reimbursement, please contact your District Service Manager or Regional Parts & Service Department. Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 754 This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 105 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Page 3582 Chart A & B Cooler Inlet And Outlet Locations Cooler Cleaning (in radiator) CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses for the vehicle your working on. If these hoses are not identified correctly, debris may be left in the cooler and transmission damage may occur. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. Page 2256 Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Switch This switch, used on some models, is attached on the left side of the instrument panel in the driver's compartment. This switch consists of a bellows and a microswitch. The switch transmits an ``On'' or ``Off'' signal to the control unit according to change in atmospheric pressure. When the atmospheric pressure drops below 26 in. Hg, an ``On'' signal is transmitted to decrease fuel by 6%. Page 1555 Idle Check and Set Procedure Page 3197 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3414 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 646 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 211 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Page 2741 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 845 Spark Plug: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 5183 Interior Moulding / Trim: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 2629 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 2946 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 570 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 4379 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the following flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Brake Rotor Service Flow Chart (*)CAUTION: To ensure a proper repair, it is absolutely essential to make these measurements. For example, if run-out remains high, brake judder and/or shimmy may not be detected while test driving the vehicle immediately after the repair, but, may return after several thousand miles of rotor wear (due to thickness variation). Prior to and, again, after resurfacing a brake rotor, ensure that the rotor thickness is above the minimum specification. General Brake Repair Guidelines To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. Page 5090 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Diagrams Page 309 Inspection Procedure Page 3532 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Level Caution Classification: Section: AT89-008 Automatic Transmission Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-091 Models: 1987-1989 Sentra 1987-1989 Pulsar NX Date: June 30, 1989 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL SERVICE INFORMATION As with all Nissan vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (and as specified in all Nissan Owner's and Service Manuals), it is especially important that the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) for the 3-speed RL3F01A automatic transmission (used on 1987-1989 Sentra and Pulsar XE models) be maintained at the proper level. CAUTION: Both overfilling and underfilling may cause damage to the transmission. Page 263 Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Switch This switch, used on some models, is attached on the left side of the instrument panel in the driver's compartment. This switch consists of a bellows and a microswitch. The switch transmits an ``On'' or ``Off'' signal to the control unit according to change in atmospheric pressure. When the atmospheric pressure drops below 26 in. Hg, an ``On'' signal is transmitted to decrease fuel by 6%. Page 2159 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 144 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 372 Inspection Procedure Page 2127 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Classification: EL93-028 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-161 Models: All Models Date: November 5, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Electronic control units (ECU's) control the operation of numerous electrical systems and components on Nissan vehicles. The ECU's do this by either controlling the supply voltage or ground path of an electrical component. The following is an explanation of how these systems work and what precautions should be taken while performing diagnostic procedures. Systems controlled by electronic control units have three (3) basic requirements, Inputs, Controller Logic and Outputs. Inputs Sensors and switches provide electrical signals to the control unit. These signals are provided to the ECU to inform it of various vehicle operating conditions. The electrical inputs can be either analog or digital signals. However, all of the signals are converted to digital signals before the ECU can process the information. Control Logic The ECU uses the electrical input signals to determine what the system should do. This decision may be based on a few or many inputs. After processing the information the ECU will provide a signal (output) to various electrical components. Outputs The signal that the ECU puts out to an electrical component (actuator) is called the output. These output signals are what operate and control the system. Digital Input Signals Page 3264 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 1008 Page 2005 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 470 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Page 557 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1927 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4838 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch assembly, remove screws securing switch bracket to air intake housing, then remove switch assembly. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3628 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris (see Figure 12). A. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 inch) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the radiator/oil cooler can be re-used. B. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter (see Figure 13), the oil-cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. Final Inspection: After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 738 Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Classification: EL99-016V Reference: NTB99-048V Date: March 11, 2010 BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery *For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007. SERVICE INFORMATION The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery, starter, and alternator tester. ^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators. ^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters, and/or alternators. ^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. ^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008. Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA. Page 1879 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 3133 The table shows the injector colors for various models. This is intended as a quick reference guide to verify that the correct injectors are reinstalled. Please refer to the parts catalog for correct part numbers. Page 1402 6. Remove upper and lower dust covers. Use a torx wrench. 7. Loosen timing belt tension lock nut and rotate tension clock- wise. Then tighten tensioner lock nut. 8. Mark rotating direction mark on timing belt and Remove timing belt. CAUTION: After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads. 9. Remove belt tensioner and return spring. 10. Inspect the condition of belt tensioner and tensioner spring. INSTALLATION 1. Confirm that No.1 cylinder is set at T.D.C. on its compression stroke. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2430 Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): Adjustments 1. Start and operate engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. With A/C system OFF, ensure engine idle speed is correct. 3. With A/C system ON and fan control lever set at 4, ensure compressor, F.I.C.D. actuator and solenoid valve are operating properly. 4. On all models except Federal with gasoline engine, set idle speed at the specified values: a. On gasoline engine with manual transmission, idle speed should be 750-850 RPM. b. On gasoline engine with automatic transmission, idle speed should be 580-660 RPM. c. On diesel engine with manual transmission, idle speed should be 800-850 RPM. d. On diesel engine with automatic transmission, idle speed should be 900-950 RPM. Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 1153 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2532 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Description and Operation Fuel Accumulator: Description and Operation Fig. 17 Fuel damper (typical) The fuel damper is provided to suppress pulsation in fuel flow discharged from the fuel pump, Fig. 17. No adjustment is allowed on this damper. Page 1724 TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30E VAN (C22) Z24i 200SX (S110) Z20E 200SX (S110) Z22E Page 1142 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 770 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 454 Button Kit Part Numbers BUCKLE PART NUMBERS Part numbers for buckles are available in the parts microfiche. Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Page 5148 7. Reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter and let dry. 8. Fill sand scratches and pinholes with a skin coat of Flexible Parts Repair Material. (Do not use Flexible Parts Putty.) After curing, sand with 320 grit disc. 9. Reapply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter and let dry. 10. Apply a double wet coat of Flexible Parts Coating. After a 10 minute flash time, apply a second double coat. Let dry 45 minutes and lightly scuff sand the coating with 320 grit disc. Apply color coats recommended for plastic body parts. Polypropylene Bumper Fascia Repair If extensive reinforcing or patching from the back is required use the following procedure. 1. Scuff the backside with grade 180 abrasives. Apply Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter. 2. Cut a glass cloth patch to cover repair area. 3. Mix a quantity of Flexible Parts Repair Material. Lay glass cloth on a clean surface. Use a squeegee to force the Flexible Parts Repair Material into the glass cloth. 4. Apply glass cloth patch to backside of repair area. 5. Apply additional Flexible Parts Repair Material over surface of glass cloth patch. FASCIA REPAIR 1. Clean the repair area with soap and water. Remove grease and tar with solvent. Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 877 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belts Inspection 1. Inspect for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with new one. The belts should not touch the bottom of the pulley groove. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys. Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit. Inspect drive belt deflections when engine is cold. If engine is hot, wait 30 minutes or more and check deflections. Page 2156 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Synchronizer Ring: Customer Interest Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Service and Repair Power Brake Assist: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove master cylinder as previously described. 2. Disconnect brake booster at brake pedal. 3. Disconnect check valve hose at power booster. 4. Disconnect vacuum hose(s), if equipped. 5. Remove booster attaching bolts and/or nuts and the booster. INSTALLATION Reverse remove procedure to install. No adjustments are necessary on these models. Locations Combination Flasher: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3057 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Instruments - Speedometer Noise Speedometer Head: Customer Interest Instruments - Speedometer Noise Classification: EL88-008 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-094 Models: 1987-88 Sentra/Pulsar Date: July 11, 1988 SPEEDOMETER CABLE NOISE APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra, 1987-88 Pulsar except 1988 Pulsar SE APPLIED VINs: JAPAN BUILT SENTRA Before JN1PB22SXJU 028662 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB24SXJU 044462 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB22SXJU 574774 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB21SXJU 555932 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB26SXJU 016707 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25SXJU 021285 04/01/88 production Before JN1PB25YXJU 005931 04/01/88 production U.S. BUILT SENTRA 1987 1988 All PULSAR Before JN1PN34SXJM 500050 05/01/88 production SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987-88 Sentra and Pulsar vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzzing noise from the center of the instrument panel at engine speeds of 2500-3500 RPM. If a customer complains of this type of noise, perform the following diagnostics to determine if the speedometer cable is the cause. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to verify speedometer cable noise: 1. Start engine with transmission in neutral (M/T) or park (A/T). Raise RPM to 3500 and hold for 5-10 seconds. 2. Listen for rattling or buzzing from the speedometer head area. 3. Return engine to idle and turn off ignition. 4. Disconnect speedometer cable from transaxle and let hang. Be sure to position the cable so that it isn't touching the engine or transaxle. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3. If the noise can be heard in Step 2, but is not present during Step 5, replace the speedometer cable assembly with the improved (insulated) cable assembly listed below. If the noise is still present, reinstall the speedometer cable and contact the FIXS Hotline for additional information. PARTS INFORMATION PART DESCRIPTION NEW PART NUMBER FORMER PART NUMBER Speedometer 25050-01Y00 25050-60A01 Cable Assembly 25050-60A00 Page 2523 TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i VAN (C22) Z241 200SX (S100) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E Page 2383 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 1255 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 6.5 - 8.7 ft.lb Jackshaft Sprocket Bolts 6.5 - 8.7 ft.lb Page 2476 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2716 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1727 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: Customer Interest Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 4276 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 3920 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the following flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Brake Rotor Service Flow Chart (*)CAUTION: To ensure a proper repair, it is absolutely essential to make these measurements. For example, if run-out remains high, brake judder and/or shimmy may not be detected while test driving the vehicle immediately after the repair, but, may return after several thousand miles of rotor wear (due to thickness variation). Prior to and, again, after resurfacing a brake rotor, ensure that the rotor thickness is above the minimum specification. General Brake Repair Guidelines To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. Page 1045 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Page 104 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Page 3042 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 4987 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Air Conditioning - Installation Caution Hose/Line HVAC: Technical Service Bulletins Air Conditioning - Installation Caution 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-018 Bulletin No. TS87-147 Date October 12, 1987 AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION CAUTION APPLIED MODELS: 1987 & 1988 Sentra and Pulsar Models with E16i or E16S Engine SERVICE INFORMATION When installing an A/C kit on 1987 & 1988 Sentra and Pulsar Models with E16i or E16S engine, carefully route the A/C high pressure tube so that it is flush to the engine wall. A/C high pressure tube damage and loss of refrigerant may occur if the tube is routed incorrectly. Ensure that the A/C tube does not contact any hoses or other engine components. After A/C installation is complete: 1. Verify that the A/C high pressure tube locating clamp is installed. 2. On vehicles with E16S engine, be sure the vacuum line at the E.C.C. System vacuum sensor is securely connected. See illustration on page 2/2. Page 750 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Fig. 28 Component location Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 2571 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. On Brake Lever Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3030 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4385 * The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. * As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. * Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. NISSAN SERVICE PROCEDURE: Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062 (BR92-004) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2730 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2555 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Page 4359 Possible Cause of Brake Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: ^ The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. ^ As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. ^ Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. Service Procedure Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062a (BR92-004a) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 1500 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 5259 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Page 3420 Ignition Coil: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 3058 Idle Speed: Specifications Base Idle Speed Controlled Idle Speed Adjusted with Throttle Sensor disconnected. Manual Transmission 750 +/- 25 rpm 800 +/- 100 rpm Automatic Transmission 670 +/- 25 rpm 700 +/- 100 rpm In "D" Position. Page 1811 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation The electronic control unit adjusts fuel pump operation to engine operating conditions. The signals from various sensors and switches are used to control fuel pump operation. Fig. 39 Fuel pump control chart. Fig. 39 Page 1326 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 736 Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4422 Fig. 10 Exploded View Of Front Suspension. 1991-95 Models 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheel. 2. Disconnect brake line from strut. 3. Place alignment marks on strut lower bracket and camber adjusting pin. 4. Remove strut to steering knuckle attaching bolts, then separate strut from knuckle, Figs. 9 and 10. 5. Remove strut to strut tower attaching nuts, then strut assembly from vehicle. 6. Install strut assembly in a vise, then loosen strut rod locknut. Loosen do not remove. 7. Compress coil spring using a suitable coil spring compression tool. 8. Remove piston rod locknut. 9. Remove spring components from strut. Page 1910 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4787 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3580 Use the "Combination" Op Codes as indicated with the appropriate Section "JA", "JC", or "JD" coding that best represents the A/T R&R; and repair/replacement performed. Service Procedure Page 129 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2729 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Technical Service Bulletin # 00-056B Date: 021127 A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Classification: AT00-001b Reference: NTB00-056b Date: November 27, 2002 1988 AND LATER NISSAN VEHICLES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER CLEANING ATTENTION: This bulletin supersedes NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, and NTB95-109B, and amends NTB00-056a. The applied models/model years and information in the Claims Information section of NTB00-056a was updated. Please discard all paper copies of NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, NTB95-109B, and earlier versions of NTB00-056. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1988 and later with automatic transmission (including the Xtronic CVT automatic transmission) SERVICE INFORMATION Whenever an automatic transmission (A/T) is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. ^ Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T oil cooler and may build up as transmission fluid enters the Cooler Inlet. ^ This debris can contaminate the newly serviced transmission. ^ In severe cases this debris can block or restrict the flow of transmission fluid/oil. In either case, failure of the newly serviced A/T may result. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the Cooler Outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. ^ The location of the cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses described in this bulletin determines direction of transmission fluid flow through the cooler. ^ The Inlet and Outlet position varies from model to model, and you must identify the location of the Cooler Inlet and Outlet to successfully perform the cleaning procedure. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE Workflow to determine the procedure for a particular vehicle. ^ Use Charts A and B in the service procedure to establish the correct Cooler Inlet and Outlet location for the vehicle you are servicing. ^ Then perform the Cleaning, Diagnosis, and Inspection as instructed. Page 1186 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 1637 Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Service and Repair THERMO SWITCH Replace On Pulsar models, thermo switch is located in radiator lower tank. On Sentra models, thermo switch is located on center left side of radiator tank. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain cooling system into suitable container. 3. Disconnect thermo switch electrical connector, then remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Fig. 1 Testing thermo switch (typical) Testing 1. Remove thermo switch as outlined above. 2. Connect suitable ohmmeter across switch terminals, then immerse lower part of switch in water, Fig. 1. Ohmmeter should indicate an open circuit. 3. Place thermometer in water and heat. When water temperature reaches approximately 185°F, switch contacts should close and the ohmmeter should indicate continuity. 4. If switch does not operate properly, replace it. Page 5055 SYMPTOM: No alarm with impact. Diagnostic Procedure # 12 SYMPTOM: Engine will not crank Set parking brake, (A/T) place transmission in drive or neutral, (M/T) do not depress clutch. Page 2659 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Windshield Wiper Motor & Linkage Replace Wiper Motor: Diagrams Windshield Wiper Motor & Linkage Replace Fig. 15 Windshield wiper system (typical) 1. Remove wiper arms by raising the arms off the glass and removing locknut. 2. Disconnect electrical connector from motor. 3. Remove top grille retaining screws and top grille, where possible, to gain access to wiper linkage. 4. Remove wiper motor mounting bolts. 5. Pull motor away from firewall if necessary to gain access. Disconnect motor shaft from linkage taking care not to bend linkage. 6. Remove wiper motor. 7. Remove flange nuts or screws holding pivot to top cowl panel and remove linkage. To install, reverse procedure. See Fig. 15 for typical installation. Page 2003 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3537 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Preliminary Checks (Prior to Road Testing) FLUID LEAKAGE If the governor cap is suspected: 1. Open hood. 2. Remove snap retainer, governor cap and seal ring, then reinstall them. Refer to ON-VEHICLE SERVICE. See: Service and Repair/On Vehicle Service 3. Clean the area around the governor cap. 4. Run the vehicle at highway speeds. 5. Check the governor cap for fresh leakage. To detect a fluid leak: 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Clean areas suspected of leaking. 3. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in drive, and wait a few minutes. 4. Stop engine. 5. Check for fresh leakage. FLUID CONDITION Examine the A.T.F. and note its color, texture, and odor. 1. Dark of Black Fluid: With a burned odor Worn friction material. 2. Milky Pink Fluid: Water Contamination - Road water entering through filler tube or breather. 3. Varnished Fluid, light to dark brown and tacky: Oxidation - Over or Underfilling. - Overheating. Page 3737 Figure 2 3. Replace the 5th input gear, needle bearing, coupling sleeve and hub set, regardless of wear (Figure 2). 4. Reassemble the transaxle assembly and road test the vehicle. 5. If the incident still exists, contact the FIXS Hotline for further assistance. Page 2353 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Page 1393 Tune-Up Kit Contents This kit provides three, 12 ounce plastic bottles and related fittings to replace the existing 7 ounce bottles. These bottles will accommodate the proper lubricant charge when retrofitting from R-12 to R-134a refrigerant systems. PARTS INFORMATION DESCRIPTION KENT-MOORE PART # Variable Timing Control (VTC) Sprocket Rebuild Kit J41471 A/C Leak Detector Tune-up Kit J39400-Tune up ACR4 Lubricant Injection Bottle Conversion Kit J39500-71N Page 4222 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 1781 Fig. 303b Input/Output signal inspection chart. Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Page 650 SPECIAL TOOLS Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Technical Service Bulletin # 00-056B Date: 021127 A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Classification: AT00-001b Reference: NTB00-056b Date: November 27, 2002 1988 AND LATER NISSAN VEHICLES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER CLEANING ATTENTION: This bulletin supersedes NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, and NTB95-109B, and amends NTB00-056a. The applied models/model years and information in the Claims Information section of NTB00-056a was updated. Please discard all paper copies of NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, NTB95-109B, and earlier versions of NTB00-056. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1988 and later with automatic transmission (including the Xtronic CVT automatic transmission) SERVICE INFORMATION Whenever an automatic transmission (A/T) is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. ^ Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T oil cooler and may build up as transmission fluid enters the Cooler Inlet. ^ This debris can contaminate the newly serviced transmission. ^ In severe cases this debris can block or restrict the flow of transmission fluid/oil. In either case, failure of the newly serviced A/T may result. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the Cooler Outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. ^ The location of the cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses described in this bulletin determines direction of transmission fluid flow through the cooler. ^ The Inlet and Outlet position varies from model to model, and you must identify the location of the Cooler Inlet and Outlet to successfully perform the cleaning procedure. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE Workflow to determine the procedure for a particular vehicle. ^ Use Charts A and B in the service procedure to establish the correct Cooler Inlet and Outlet location for the vehicle you are servicing. ^ Then perform the Cleaning, Diagnosis, and Inspection as instructed. Page 3244 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1556 Idle Speed: Adjustments Midpoint of range given is the preferred setting speed. 1981-83 L28 Turbo, 1983 E15 Turbo: With engine at operating temperature, race several times and return to idle. Disconnect idle control valve and check speed against specified value. 1984-87 E16 2V Federal: With engine at operating temperature, disconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Race engine several times and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Restart engine, race several times, and check idle speed against specified value. 1987-90 E16 FI, GA16; 1989-90 KA24: With engine at operating temperature disconnect throttle sensor harness connector. Start engine and set idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle speed is within checking speed. Turn on AC and verify that idle increases to specified value. 1984-89 VG30 Turbo, 1987-89 CA16, CA18 DOHC: With engine at operating temperature, turn ignition off and disconnect automatic air control (AAC) valve harness. Start engine and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect harness. Restart engine and check idle speed against specified value. Turn AC on and verify that speed-up is at specified value. All engines, turn AC on and verify that speed-up speed is specified value. 1987-88 CA18 Turbo, 1987-89 CA20 Stanza: Disconnect throttle valve and automatic air control valve harness. Start engine and adjust idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1989-90 VG30 Maxima: Turn diagnostic connector on ECU fully clockwise and adjust idle to specified value. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1990 300ZX: Attach inductive clamp to loop wire on power transistor behind upper radiator hose. Set idle to specified value. Page 2505 SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 4 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 5 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) SR20DE STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Page 920 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Preliminary Checks (Prior to Road Testing) FLUID LEAKAGE If the governor cap is suspected: 1. Open hood. 2. Remove snap retainer, governor cap and seal ring, then reinstall them. Refer to ON-VEHICLE SERVICE. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/On Vehicle Service 3. Clean the area around the governor cap. 4. Run the vehicle at highway speeds. 5. Check the governor cap for fresh leakage. To detect a fluid leak: 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Clean areas suspected of leaking. 3. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in drive, and wait a few minutes. 4. Stop engine. 5. Check for fresh leakage. FLUID CONDITION Examine the A.T.F. and note its color, texture, and odor. 1. Dark of Black Fluid: With a burned odor Worn friction material. 2. Milky Pink Fluid: Water Contamination - Road water entering through filler tube or breather. 3. Varnished Fluid, light to dark brown and tacky: Oxidation - Over or Underfilling. - Overheating. Page 1193 Disclaimer Page 4910 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 681 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 5324 1. Remove rear lower seat cushion. 2. Remove the four retaining screws, then pull the seat back up and out. 3. Remove high mount stop light and rear speakers, if equipped. 4. Remove rear parcel shelf. 5. Remove front seat belt upper anchor bolts. (2 dr.) 6. Remove rear quarter glass by removing mounting screws shown below. (2 dr.) This will allow access to the quarter panel finisher. 7. Pull back top half of lower quarter panel trim. 8. Remove rear pillar finishers. 9. Locate the drilling point on the back side of the rear pillar finishers. The hole location is marked in the trim as shown below. 10. Using a 1" hole saw, drill the trim piece at the marked location. 11. Cut the opening in the parcel shelf for the 3-point seat belt using the dimensions shown in the illustration below. 12. Install retro-fit finisher on each end of the parcel shelf. 13. Reinstall rear pillar finishers and check alignment of anchor bolt holes. A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: Customer Interest A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1914 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1284 1. Check the condition of the vehicle's lower radiator hose. (See Figures 5, 7, 9 and 11 for identification.) If hose is cracked or softened, replace it. If it is in good condition, proceed to Step 2. 2. Working from underneath the vehicle, remove the engine undercover and set it aside. 3. Drain coolant from the engine by opening the drain plug on the bottom of the radiator. Page 380 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 2062 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 4087 Page 5344 Seats: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 3878 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 2275 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1768 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Antenna - Sleeve Availability/Part Numbers Antenna: All Technical Service Bulletins Antenna - Sleeve Availability/Part Numbers Classification: EL96-012 Reference: NTB96-095 Date: October 2, 1996 POWER ANTENNA SLEEVE APPLIED VEHICLE: All equipped with power antenna SERVICE INFORMATION An antenna sleeve (antenna guide) is available as a separate service part to replace bent or corroded sleeves. A complete listing of available antenna sleeve part numbers is provided in this bulletin. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Follow the antenna rod removal procedure outlined in "Audio and Power Antenna" located in the EL section of the appropriate service manual. Page 1466 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1618 Coolant: Service and Repair Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never attempt to change the coolant when the engine is hot. 1. Move heater "TEMP" control lever all the way to "HOT" position. 2. Open drain cock at the bottom of radiator, and remove radiator cap. Note: Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. 3. Flush the cooling system. (1) Close drain cock. (2) Fill radiator with water, then warm up engine. (3) Stop engine and wait until it cools down. (4) Drain water. (5) Repeat step (1) through step (4) two or three times. 4. Fill radiator with coolant up to filler opening. ^ Follow instructions attached to anti-freeze container for mixing ratio of anti-freeze to water. Coolant capacity: (Without reservoir tank) 4.6L (4-7/8 US qt, 4 Imp qt) (M/T) 5.2L (5-1/2 US qt, 4-5/8 Imp qt) (A/T) Reservoir tank: 0.6L (5/8 Us qt, 1/2 Imp qt) Note: Pour coolant through coolant filler neck slowly to allow air in system to escape. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Page 3305 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3953 Possible Cause of Brake Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: ^ The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. ^ As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. ^ Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. Service Procedure Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062a (BR92-004a) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 3984 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 3374 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4424 Fig. 23 Rear suspension. 1987-88 Pulsar & 2WD Sentra 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect brake line and parking brake cable. 3. Remove upper and lower strut attaching bolts and nuts, Figs. 23 and 25. 4. Reverse procedure to install. 4WD Page 5337 Sentra 3 Door H/B 1. Remove front belt access finisher from quarter panel trim. 2. Remove front belt upper anchor. 3. Remove rear quarter glass. 4. Loosen and pull back top portion lower of quarter panel trim. 5. Remove rear speaker grille assembly. 6. Remove upper quarter panel finisher. 7. Remove rear seat lower cushion. 8. Remove existing retractor assembly. 9. Remove existing female buckle assembly. 10. Install upper quarter panel trim from retro-fit kit. 11. Reinstall rear quarter glass. 12. Reinstall speaker grilles. 13. Reinstall front belt access finisher onto lower quarter panel trim. 14. Reinstall front belt upper anchor. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 15. Install rear 3-point shoulder harness upper anchor into rear pillar. Torque bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 16. Install retro-fit retractor unit where original unit bolted in. Torque bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 17. Install female belt from retro-fit kit. Torque to specification listed above. 18. Reinstall lower seat cushion. 19. Check belts for smooth operation. 20. Make sure all finishers fit up tightly. Page 5293 Application of 2-coat pearl and 2-coat pearl metallic is similar to that of other 2-coat metallic paints. However, repairs on 3-coat pearl require special technique and experience since color matching is much more critical. Also, when spot or partial repairing is required, the full panel or "Zone" must be repainted (see drawing). If a Dealer requires assistance in 3-coat pearl paint procedure, the following paint manufacturers are willing to provide it. ^ Basf/Inmont/Glasurit ^ Dupont ^ P.P.G./Ditzler ^ Sherwin Williams ^ Sikkens Or contact your local paint jobber. ^ Two types of mica are available, white and colored. They should be used properly to fit the base color. ^ Pearl mica has complex reflection characteristics without hiding power. This produces minute changes in color tone and luster as the painted surface is viewed at different angles or under different lighting conditions. When matching color during repair, you should carefully observe the paint color under direct sunlight (at a distance of 3 to 7 feet), from every direction. Page 4932 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Page 4436 Wheel Bearing: Specifications ALL MODELS Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 1443 Page 2366 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Locations A/C Relay: Locations A/C Components. Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Bumper - Repair Polyurethane & Polypropylene Fascia Technical Service Bulletin # BF91011 Date: 910411 Bumper - Repair Polyurethane & Polypropylene Fascia Classification: BF91-011 Section: Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB91-037 Models: All Models Date: April 11, 1991 POLYURETHANE & POLYPROPYLENE BUMPER FASCIA REPAIR APPLIED MODELS: 1988-90 Pulsar XE (KN13) 1990-91 30OZX (Z32) 1988-89 Pulsar SE (KN13) 1989-91 240SX (S13) 1988-90 Sentra Sdn. (B12) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1988-90 Sentra Cpe (B12) 1988-89 Stanza (T12) 1991 Sentra Sdn (B13) 1990-91 Stanza (U12) 1991 Sentra NX (KB13) 1988-90 Van (C22) 1989-91 Maxima (J30) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides detailed instructions to repair polyurethane and polypropylene bumper fascias. A polyurethane bumper can be distinguished from a polypropylene bumper by using the following test: cut a small piece of material from the end of the bumper fascia and hold it over the flame of a match or lighter until it ignites. Polyurethane will burn with black smoke and have an odor. Polypropylene will burn with little smoke and will not have an odor. Alternate Test: Sand an area near the damage with a 36 grit disc. If the material sands cleanly, the bumper is polyurethane. If the material melts or smears when sanded, it is polypropylene. BUMPER MATERIAL INFORMATION MODEL FRONT BUMPER REAR BUMPER 1988-90 Pulsar XE Polypropylene Polypropylene 1988-89 Pulsar SE Polyurethane Polypropylene 1988-90 Sentra Sdn. Polypropylene Polypropylene 1988-90 Sentra Cpe. Polyurethane Polypropylene 1988-91 Stanza Polypropylene Polypropylene 1989-91 240SX Polyurethane Polyurethane 1990-91 300ZX Polyurethane Polyurethane 1988-91 Maxima Polyurethane Polyurethane 1990 Axxess Polyurethane Polyurethane 1988-91 Van Polyurethane Polyurethane NOTE: OEM replacement bumpers are the same material as original. Page 1065 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Page 3306 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4214 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Page 2818 Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Heater: Description and Operation The mixture heater is located between the throttle valve and the intake manifold. This is designed and operated for atomizing fuel in the cold engine start condition. The E.C.U. has control of the heater. Testing and Inspection Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection - Drive plate runout Maximum allowable runout: 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear. Testing and Inspection Fuel Check Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side. A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow be directed toward the canister. 2. Blow air through connector on the canister side. Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank. 3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not being properly functioning in steps 1 and 2 above, replace it. Page 1605 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Intake and Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment Adjustment must be made while engine is warm but not running. 1. Set No. 1 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (1), (2), (3) and (6). 2. Set No. 4 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (4), (5), (7) and (8). Valve clearance: Intake and exhaust 0.28 mm (0.011 in) Tighten Pivot lock nut 16 - 21 N.m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4559 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Adjustments Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Fig. 5 Clutch pedal height, withdrawal lever play & freeplay & specifications. Pulsar, Sentra & 1984-86 Stanza SPECIFICATION TABLE Fig. 4 Clutch pedal free travel & height adjustment. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra 1. Adjust clutch pedal height so that dimension H, Fig. 4, is within specifications. Page 983 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 1844 Inspection Procedure Page 2637 Inspection Procedure Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4289 Altitude Compensation Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Compensation Altitude compensation prevents deterioration of exhaust emissions caused by an enriched air/fuel mixture. Atmospheric pressure varies according to the altitude. The higher the altitude, the lower the atmospheric pressure. At an atmospheric pressure of approximately 26 in. Hg or below, the altitude switch transmits an ``On'' signal to the control unit, decreasing fuel to provide an appropriate air/fuel mixture ratio. Page 1006 Page 3919 Possible Cause of Brake Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: ^ The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. ^ As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. ^ Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. Service Procedure Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062a (BR92-004a) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 693 Page 1598 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removing Spark Plug Boot REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition wire from the spark plug with a twisting and pulling motion. CAUTION: Pull on the boot only. Do not pull on the wire. 2. Using compressed air, blow out the area at the base of the spark plug to remove any debris USE SAFETY GLASSES. 3. Using a 5/8" (16mm) flex socket and extension, remove the spark plugs (counterclockwise rotation). INSTALLATION 1. Using a suitable tool, check and adjust the spark plug gap. ELECTRODE GAP 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) 2. Using a suitable rubber hose or designated tool, start the spark plugs by hand (clockwise rotation). 3. Tighten and torque the spark plugs. SPARK PLUG TORQUE 14 - 22 ft. lbs. (20 - 29 N-m / 2.0 - 3.0 kg-m) 4. Apply a small amount of di-electric compound to the inside of the spark plug boots. 5. Reinstall the spark plug boots. Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 101 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 397 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 910 5. Fill reservoir tank with coolant up to "MAX" level. 6. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for about one minute. 7. Stop engine and cool it down, then refill radiator and reservoir tank. Locations A/C Relay: Locations A/C Components. Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5354 License Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 20B, At License Lamp License Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Light Switch Connector (2WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Light Switch Connector (4WD): 130M, Under LH Side Of I/P Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Coupe): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Sedan): 13B, On Deck Lid Luggage Room Lamp Connector (Wagon): 13B, On Rear Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Coupe): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Hatchback): 4D, In Rear Of Back Door Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Sedan): 22B, At Switch Luggage Room Lamp Switch Connector (Wagon): 7D, In Rear Of Back Door Mixture Heater Connector (2WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Connector (4WD): 73M, RH Side Of Engine Mixture Heater Relay Connector (2WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Mixture Heater Relay Connector (4WD): 17M, RH Fender Apron Neutral Switch Connector: 13E, At Neutral Switch Oil Pressure Switch Connector: 3E, RH Side Of Engine Parking Brake Switch Connector (Coupe): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Hatchback): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Sedan): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Parking Brake Switch Connector (Wagon): 6B, LH Side Kick Panel Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (2WD Models): 6M, At Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Connector (4WD Models): 6M, At Switch Radiator Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 39M, At Motor Radiator Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 39M, At Motor Radio Connector: 12I, Under I/P Behind Radio Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 16B, At LH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Coupe): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Sedan): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Combination Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 18B, At RH Rear Tail Lamp Rear Defogger Connector (Sedan): 24B, At Rear Defogger Rear Defogger Connector (Coupe): 4D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Hatchback): 3D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Connector (Wagon): 11D, On LH Side Of Back Door Rear Defogger Relay Connector (2WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Relay Connector (4WD): 125M, Under LH Side Of I/P Rear Defogger Switch Connector: 18I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 25B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 26B, At Rear Door Pillar Rear Door Harness LH Connector (Sedan): 29B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Door Harness RH Connector (Sedan): 30B, At Center Pillar Post Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Coupe): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Hatchback): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Sedan): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker LH Connector (Wagon): 14B, At LH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Coupe): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Hatchback): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Sedan): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Side Marker RH Connector (Wagon): 19B, At RH Rear Marker Lamp Rear Speaker LH Connector (Coupe): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Hatchback): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Sedan): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker LH Connector (Wagon): 11B, At LH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Coupe): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Hatchback): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Sedan): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Rear Speaker RH Connector (Wagon): 12B, At RH Rear Speaker Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 418 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1375 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal 1. Drain engine oil. 2. Remove the following parts. ^ Front right side splash cover ^ Front right side under cover 3. Remove center member. 4. Remove front exhaust tube. 5. Remove front buffer rod and buffer rod bracket. 6. Remove engine gussets. 7. Remove oil pan. To remove oil pan: (1) Insert seal cutter (Special Tool) between cylinder block and oil pan. Caution: Do not use screwdriver. Oil pan flange will be deformed. (2) Slide seal cutter by tapping its side with a hammer. Installation 1. Before installing oil pan, remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface using a scraper. Page 415 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Remanufactured Starter/Alternator - Program Alternator: Technical Service Bulletins Remanufactured Starter/Alternator - Program Reference: PI95-016 Date: September 28, 1995 GENUINE NISSAN REMANUFACTURED STARTER/ALTERNATOR PROGRAM APPLIED VEHICLES: Selected models SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning October 2, 1995, Nissan will offer remanufactured starters and alternators for selected Nissan models. Consult the Genuine Nissan Remanufactured Parts Sourcebook for part numbers and affected models. Refer to the Nissan Parts Bulletin NTB/95-023 for complete program procedures. SERVICE PROCEDURE The diagnostic procedure for troubleshooting starter and alternator incidents has not changed. Refer to the appropriate service manual for specific diagnostic procedures. Page 3113 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) 4WD Wagon Steering Gear - Removal & Installation Steering Gear: Technical Service Bulletins 4WD Wagon Steering Gear - Removal & Installation Classification: Section: ST88-003 Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-105 Steering Models: 1987-1988 Sentra Wagon (4WD) Date: August 15, 1988 SENTRA 4WD WAGON STEERING GEAR REMOVAL & INSTALLATION SERVICE INFORMATION This Technical Bulletin contains the steering gear removal and installation procedures for 1987-1988 4WD Sentra Wagons. REMOVAL PROCEDURE: 1. Allow vehicle to cool. 2. Write down radio presets, then disconnect negative cable from battery terminal. 3. Place ignition in Accessory ("ACC") position to allow wheels and steering rack to move freely. 4. Remove carbon canister. 5. Remove upper bolt on the driver's side steering gear clamp. Since space is limited, use a 17 mm short socket, 1" extension and ratchet. FIGURE 1 6. Disconnect the 12 mm steering shaft lower joint bolt. NOTE: On most vehicles, the pinion cap has a groove that must be aligned with the slit in the lower joint during assembly (Figure 1). If there is no groove in the cap, use paint or a grease pencil to put an alignment mark on the pinion cap and slit prior to disconnecting the 12 mm bolt. FIGURE 2 7. Place drain pan under steering gear. Remove the pressure and return lines at the pinion housing. (Figure 2). For the pressure line, use a 14 mm Page 1221 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Tightening Sequence Lug Nut Torque Patterns IMPORTANT Check all parts, including rims, lug studs, lug nuts, and mating surfaces of hubs and tire rims for rust, damage, or dirt. Clean mating surfaces with a wire brush to remove any foreign material. Replace any damaged parts as needed. Careless installation of tire/rim assemblies in a vehicle is a major cause of tire installation problems. Proper installation, including fastener torque, is essential to economical, safe and trouble free service. Use only the proper sizes and types of fasteners for safe and proper service. Tighten the fasteners a quarter turn at a time using the tightening sequence diagram as a guide. This is very important to prevent misalignment of the wheel. Continue tightening the fasteners in sequence until the fasteners are tightened to the proper torque (See WHEEL FASTENER TORQUE). CAUTION: Improper torque or tightening sequence can cause distortion, fatigue cracks, or alignment problems. After driving the vehicle for a short distance, recheck the wheel fastener torque. Parts will usually seat naturally, reducing the torque on the fasteners. Retorque all fasteners to the proper torque. Page 3454 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Rod Bearing Clearance .0004-.0017 in Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the E.C.U. for fuel cut, recovery and idle speed control. - Needle type speedometer models The speed sensor consists of a reed switch, which is installed in the speed meter unit and transforms vehicle speed into a pulse signal. Page 860 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Timing belt 1. Visually check the condition of the timing belt. Replace if any abnormality is found. Belt tensioner and return spring Page 1206 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 909 Coolant: Service and Repair Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never attempt to change the coolant when the engine is hot. 1. Move heater "TEMP" control lever all the way to "HOT" position. 2. Open drain cock at the bottom of radiator, and remove radiator cap. Note: Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. 3. Flush the cooling system. (1) Close drain cock. (2) Fill radiator with water, then warm up engine. (3) Stop engine and wait until it cools down. (4) Drain water. (5) Repeat step (1) through step (4) two or three times. 4. Fill radiator with coolant up to filler opening. ^ Follow instructions attached to anti-freeze container for mixing ratio of anti-freeze to water. Coolant capacity: (Without reservoir tank) 4.6L (4-7/8 US qt, 4 Imp qt) (M/T) 5.2L (5-1/2 US qt, 4-5/8 Imp qt) (A/T) Reservoir tank: 0.6L (5/8 Us qt, 1/2 Imp qt) Note: Pour coolant through coolant filler neck slowly to allow air in system to escape. Page 1507 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Specifications Piston: Specifications Minimum Piston Clearance .0009-.0017 in Page 2398 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations A/C Components. On Top of Receiver Drier Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Inspection & Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Inspection & Adjustment Front Wheels Correct front wheel alignment is necessary to provide proper handling and to prevent uneven tire wear. To ensure correct alignment, angles should be checked, and if necessary corrected, in the following sequence: caster and kingpin inclination, camber, toe-setting, and the turning angle and toe-out on turns. Front wheel alignment should only be checked after ensuring that the rear wheels are properly aligned in relation to the vehicle centerline, as most equipment uses the rear wheels as reference for correct front wheel alignment. Front wheel alignment should be checked with the vehicle unladen, at normal ride height, and following equipment manufacturer's instructions. CASTER & KINGPIN INCLINATION Kingpin inclination is a function of the steering knuckle design and cannot be adjusted. Caster, the alignment angle which provides the self-centering steering effect, is only adjustable on truck models which do not use strut-type front suspensions. If caster or kingpin angle are not within specifications on models with strut-type front suspension, check suspension components and sheet metal for damage, distortion and excessive wear, and repair as needed. For caster adjustment On Pathfinder, Pickup and Van, refer to camber adjustment, as the caster and camber are both adjusted by inserting shims between the upper control arm spindle and the crossmember. CAMBER Fig. 4 Camber Adjusting Pin. Camber is adjusted by rotating the eccentric strut mounting pin, Fig. 12. The pin is factory installed with the flat portion facing down. If camber is not within specifications, the pin must removed and reinstalled with the flat portion facing up. 1. Check camber following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. If camber is not within specifications, remove adjusting pin as outlined in strut replacement procedures, then install pin with flat side facing up and leave nut loose to allow adjustment. 3. Turn adjusting pin as needed to bring camber within specifications. One graduation of the adjusting pin changes camber by approximately 1/4°. 4. When camber is within specifications, hold adjusting pin and torque nut to 72-87 ft. lbs., then ensure camber is still within specifications. Fig. 1 Measuring Toe-in TOE SETTING The toe setting is the measurement of the wheels in relation to the vehicle centerline, Fig. 1. The leading edge of each wheel should toe-in or toe-out slightly in relation to the vehicle centerline to ensure proper vehicle tracking. Toe should be inspected using suitable alignment gauges, following manufacturer's instructions. When checking or adjusting toe, always ensure that the setting of the left and right wheels is as nearly equal as possible. Page 4253 Page 1596 Spark Plug: Description and Operation Spark Plug Construction PURPOSE Ignites the combustion mixture. LOCATION Screwed into the cylinder head, at the combustion chamber. OPERATION The spark plug provides a path for the high current of the secondary circuit to flow to ground. The only paths for this current are through the ground electrode and center electrode across the spark gap. The spark produced when the current jumps the gap and ignites the air/fuel mixture in the cylinder. Spark Plug Heat Range CONSTRUCTION The temperature of the spark plug is determined by the length of the insulator and the size of the heatsink area. The longer the insulator is, the smaller the heatsink area will be and this will cause the spark plug to be hotter. Page 4280 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 2010 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 2942 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1867 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 632 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 4922 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Page 3005 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 1401 2. Remove the following belts. - Power steering oil pump drive belt - Compressor drive belt - Alternator drive belt 3. Set No. 1 cylinder at top dead center (T.D.C.) on its compression stroke. 4. Remove the water pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley is accessible after removing side cover from inside R.H. wheel house. 5. Remove right side engine mounting bracket. NOTE: Support engine by placing a jack under oil pan. Do not place jack under oil pan drain plug. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 1173 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 1505 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Specifications Fill Plug: Specifications Filler Plug 18-25 ft.lb Drain Plug 18-25 ft.lb System Diagnosis Air/Fuel Mixture: Testing and Inspection PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - E.C.C.S. harness connectors - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - A.I.V. hose - Engine compression - E.G.R. valve operation - Throttle valve 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Overall Inspection Procedure Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Cap Bolts 25 ft.lb Page 1444 Page 2205 Ignition Cable: Description and Operation Ignition Wire The coil wire connects the ignition coil to the distributor cap, allowing high voltage to flow from the coil to the distributor cap. The spark plug wires connect the terminals in the distributor cap to the spark plugs, allowing high voltage to flow to the spark plugs. The ignition wires have an internal resistance to suppress radio static and to eliminate static that may interfere with sensitive computer components. Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Classification: Section: GI88-023 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-150 Models: All models 1987-1989 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home). Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES * These are maximum distances these vehicles may be towed without damage to the gear rain. In general, any Nissan vehicle should be started, warmed up, and driven at least two miles after it has been towed these distances - more frequently if possible. Page 1540 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 748 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2093 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 290 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1202 Wheel Bearing: Specifications ALL MODELS Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 722 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Shift Fork: Customer Interest Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Page 3278 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Page 2158 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3234 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3027 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4909 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 469 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Page 2137 Page 2975 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 564 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/88-007 Date: April 18, 1988 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: TIRE ASSISTANCE CUSTOMER/DEALER HOTLINE This is a revised list of the Tire Assistance Customer/Dealer Hotline telephone numbers. Please discard warranty bulletin (WB/88-004) issued on February 3, 1988. The following general information toll-free telephone numbers may be used to assist you with your tire replacement needs: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-423-4544 (Except California) 1-800-221-8744 (Inside California) Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-800-662-0200 (Except New York) 1-800-334-4646 (Inside New York) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) For customer assistance or emergency tire orders, please use the telephone numbers listed below: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-722-9888 Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-716-879-8494 (Mr. Wagner 8:30am-5:00pm EST) 1-213-781-2001 (Mr. Yanacek 2:00pm-5:00pm PST) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) If you have further questions pertaining to tires, please contact your District Service Manager or Regional Service Department. Page 3992 Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2162 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2738 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 4202 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 4042 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Fig. 4 CL18B type front disc brake disassembled Page 1529 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2107 Page 3399 Inspection Procedure Page 1812 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Classification: BR87-005 Reference: TS87-103 Date: June 29, 1987 DISC BRAKE NOISE INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models with disc brakes (front or rear) SERVICE INFORMATION Some Nissan vehicles may exhibit brake noise under certain driving conditions. This Bulletin provides some information about normal and common noises and appropriate service procedures for each noise. Some of this information may be useful when explaining brake noises to the customer. Refer to Technical Bulletin BR87-006, "Disc Brake Noise Countermeasure", for information about abnormal brake noises on Maxima, Stanza, and Stanza Wagon. General Brake Information Nissan brake systems have been carefully designed to provide optimum braking performance under various driving conditions. One of the most important components in the brake system is the brake pad material. The following factors have been taken into consideration to select the best pad material. ^ technical and government regulations ^ stopping distance ^ vehicle control while braking ^ high operating temperatures ^ pedal force ^ pad and rotor wear rates ^ moisture resistance ^ friction coefficient stability ^ operating noise level Unfortunately, there is no one brake pad material that provides perfect performance in all of these areas. Changing the material to improve some factors often causes a performance reduction in other areas. Higher brake operating noise levels in some instances occur as a result of factors which ensure proper brake performance and safety. Common Brake Noises The following brake noises occur most frequently on Nissan vehicles. These noises do not indicate any malfunction or improper operation. 1. GROANING NOISE AT LOW MILEAGE (0-300 MILES) ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during medium speed stops (20-40 mph) ^ noise usually does not occur on the first or second stop ^ noise occurs with warm or hot brakes (not cold) ^ there may be a low frequency "judder" vibration Nissan applies protective coatings to the brake rotors and pads to reduce corrosion during shipping and storage. These coatings may cause this groaning noise until they are worn off. Under normal driving conditions, this usually takes about 300 miles. If this noise occurs during the first 300 miles, it is not necessary to attempt any repairs. Service Procedure: There is no service procedure to eliminate this noise permanently. Replacing the brake pads or machining the rotors may cause the noise to disappear temporarily, but it will return and continue until the coatings are worn off the rotor and pads. 2. GROANING NOISE (AFTER 300 MILES) Page 744 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Page 2011 Page 337 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - Toe Specification Clarification Models All Models Section General Information Classification G191-005 Bulletin No. NTB91-049 Date May 16, 1991 A CLARIFICATION OF TOE SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHEEL ALIGNMENT APPLIED MODELS: All SERVICE INFORMATION: Toe, front or rear, is the position of the tire and wheel assembly in relation to the center line of the vehicle, as viewed from the top. This alignment measurement influences the track holding characteristics of the vehicle. Incorrect Toe alignment can cause excessive tire wear. Nissan service manuals give toe specifications as either "total toe-in" or "total too-out." Total toe-in or -out, means that one-half (1/2) of the listed dimension should be applied, equally, to each wheel. ^ Toe-In is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the front (Figure 1a). Page 5329 17. Install retro-fit belt floor anchor as shown below: NOTE: Torque anchor bolt to 26-32 ft.lbs (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 18. Install retro-fit lower quarter panel finishers. 19. Check the retro-fit seat belts for smooth operation. 20. Reinstall rear end panel trim. 21. Reinstall front lower quarter panel finishers. 22. Reinstall rear seat hinges. 23. Reinstall lower seat cushion. 24. Reinstall rear seat back and carpet. 25. Reinstall rear luggage compartment floor. Stanza Sedan 1. Remove rear lower seat cushion, then remove the back cushion by: a. If vehicle has non-folding rear seat, remove the retaining screws, then pull the seat back up and out. or b. If vehicle has split/folding rear seat, remove trunk carpeting retaining finishers as shown below. This will allow access to the seat back retaining screws. After removing six retaining screws, the seat back may be removed. 2. Remove the rear high mount stop light. 3. Remove rear speakers, if equipped. (Retaining nuts may be accessed by removing the speaker grilles.) 4. Remove rear parcel shelf and rear pillar finishers. Page 982 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 1987 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 80 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 4496 Page 382 Inspection Procedure Page 2166 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Locations Engine Compartment Component Locations Removal and Installation Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Front Fig. 9 Exploded View Of Front Suspension. 1987-90 Models Page 5233 7. Mix one part remover solution to one part water into a bucket. Spread solution directly onto runs, sags and thick areas of paint guard coating. Rewash those areas repeatedly with remover and light sponging. Coatings that smear but do not wash off are not PGC. They're probably engine wax overspray or anti-corrosion wax drips. Use your normal solvent to remove these. Caution: Do not let the remover dry. Be especially careful to watch for drips onto the top surface of the bumpers when using the 1 to 1 mixture. If the solution is allowed to dry on these surfaces, it may cause recoating of the PGC. Force can damage the paint and other chemicals can make the coating more resistant to removal. The mixture of 1 part remover to 1 part water is used only on thick areas. Do not use the remover without mixing it with water. 8. Thoroughly rinse and dry vehicle. Page 1470 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4467 Page 3626 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible. Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the air cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the air cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds (Point A, Figure 8). 5. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 9). 6. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the air cooler Outlet hose. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the air cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining oil or cleaner through the air cooler and out of the air cooler Inlet hose (see Point A, Figure 9). 8. Proceed with Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles), below. Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles) You will be taking a sample of the debris to determine if the radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the Inlet and Outlet hoses for the oil cooler in the radiator of the vehicle you are working on. If you do not identify the Inlet and Outlet hoses correctly, debris may be left inside the "in radiator" cooler and transmission damage may occur. NOTE: Failure to clean the exterior of the Cooler Inlet hose properly may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission "in radiator" cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler Inlet hose. 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the Outlet hose of the oil cooler in the radiator (see Figure 4). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models); Page 1455 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 4853 1. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Check the available voltage to the fan motor fuse(s). ^ If the available voltage is 1.5 volts or more below battery voltage, check the power supply circuit to the fuse box for any source of high resistance. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position. Check the fuse(s) and fuse holder for continuity and for any sign of corrosion. Clean or repair as necessary. 3. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is continuity, check for a short in the blower fan circuit. 4. Place the fan switch in the highest (# 4) position. Check for continuity between the fuse box and body ground. ^ If there is no continuity, check for an open in the blower fan circuit. TEST PROCEDURE # 2: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Visually inspect the thermal limiter (fuse) on the fan resistor assembly. If the fuse has burned open or has been overheated, replace the fan resistor assembly. 3. Remove the fan motor assembly from the intake air box and check for foreign material or water corrosion. 4. Check to make sure there is clearance between the fan cage and the motor mounting plate. 5. If the instrument connector was disconnected to remove the blower motor assembly, re-connect it. 6. Perform the following test: A. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. B. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. C. Position the fan motor so that the fan operation can be safely observed. D. While observing the fan, turn the fan switch to the low speed (# 1) position for 10 seconds, then move it back to the "OFF" position. ^ If the blower fan does not operate during the 10 second test period, replace the fan motor. ^ If the individual fan blades can be visually identified during the 10 second test period, the fan is operating too slowly. Replace the fan motor. TEST PROCEDURE # 3: 1. Place the ignition switch in the "OFF" position. 2. Place the fan switch in the "OFF" position. 3. For safety to your volt-ohmmeter, perform this test with the vehicle battery ground disconnected. Touch the positive (+) probe of an ohmmeter to the voltage supply wire at the blower fan resistor. 4. Connect the negative (-) probe to body ground. 5. Place the fan switch into the speed position in which the malfunction occurs. ^ If there is no continuity (open circuit to ground), check the circuit from the resistor to fan switch ground. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reach under instrument panel and disconnect multi-pin connector from rear of switch. 3. Depress two switch retaining clips and push switch out of panel. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Differentials - Recommended Lubricants Differential Assembly: Technical Service Bulletins Differentials - Recommended Lubricants Classification: GI94-001 Reference: NTB94-004 Date: January 13, 1994 RECOMMENDED OIL FOR DIFFERENTIALS [CONVENTIONAL OR VISCOUS LIMITED SLIP TYPES] APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Nissan Vehicles with Conventional or Viscous Limited Slip Differentials SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE: For Nissan vehicles equipped with most types of Limited Slip Differentials, refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB93-140 (GI93-011), "Oil for Limited Slip Differential." To refill the oil for RWD conventional or viscous limited slip differentials applied to Nissan vehicles, the following criteria should be applied: Lubrication Purpose: Conventional Differential Gear Oil Differential Gear Oil Capacity: Refer to the "MA" Section in the appropriate Service Manual. Type: Sulfur-Phosphorus with Extreme Pressure Additives American Petroleum Institute (API) Rating: GL-5 NOTE: Oil meeting the "GL-5" Rating is defined as a "lubricant for hypoid gears in severe service, including "shock loading" ". 80W-90 is preferable for ambient temperature below 40°C (104°F). Viscosity: Refer to the following chart for differential gear oil viscosity selection with respect to ambient temperature. Page 5202 Mirrors: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 3256 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5046 Programming additional remote controls When programming additional remote controls, it is possible to erase a previously-programmed remote control. When an additional remote control is added, it may be necessary to program all remote controls at this time. 1. Sit inside the vehicle with the hood, trunk and all doors closed. 2. Place the console switch in the ALARM OFF position. 3. Turn the ignition key from the OFF position to the ON position SIX times within 10 seconds. NOTE: OFF to ON to OFF = 1 time. 4. Move the console switch from the ALARM OFF position to the AUTO position and then to the ALARM OFF position. 5. Press the Lock / Unlock button on the remote control ONE time. 6. To program additional remote controls, repeat steps 4 & 5. 7. To conclude programming at any time, open any door. Page 3845 Check the wire in the illustration. If an ohmmeter is used to measure resistance (circuit off), the single strand of wire still making contact would give a reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. Using the voltmeter this will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted high resistance can be caused by many factors as illustrated below: Undersized Wiring (single strand example) Corrosion On Switch Contacts Loose Wire Connections Or Splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop-Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step) The Step by Step method is most useful in isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems, such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems". Circuits in the "Computer Controlled Systems" operate on very low amperage. Any variation in resistance in the system due to poor connections, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion can adversely affect the systems operation. A step by step voltage drop test can be used to identify a component or wire which is operating under too much resistance. Brakes - ABS Self Check Noise Explanation Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Self Check Noise Explanation Classification: BR10-004 Reference: NTB10-077 Date: June 10, 2010 ABS SELF CHECK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles with ABS or ABS/VDC SERVICE INFORMATION If you identify: ^ Clicking, knocking, clunking, buzzing, or thumping noise coming from the engine compartment area; and ^ The noise occurs only once during the first few seconds of driving at approximately 16 MPH; and ^ The noise occurs only once per ignition cycle (ignition OFF > ON) and does not occur again until the ignition is cycled. NOTE: The noise may be louder after the vehicle has not been operated for a prolonged period of time. The above condition is normal and does not need repair. Each time the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is driven at about 16 mph, the ABS/VDC system performs a "Self-Check" to confirm components of the ABS/VDC system are operating correctly. This "Self-Check" function creates the noise described above. If the brakes are being applied when the "Self-Check" occurs, a vibration may be felt in the brake pedal and an increased level of noise may be noticed. NOTE: ^ Refer customers to the Owners Manual, Section 5, Starting and driving, Brake system on the Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS). The "Self-test feature" section provides additional explanation. ^ The speeds described above refer specifically to Versa, Sentra, Altima, and Maxima. However, any vehicle fitted with ABS or ABS/VDC will have a "Self-Check" which is triggered in similar circumstances. Page 2163 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 559 SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Idle Speed: Customer Interest Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Page 1649 Fig. 26 Exploded view of heater system. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra 4. Refer to Fig. 26 to complete removal of heater core. Fig. 22 Exploded view of heater case. 5. Separate heater case, Fig. 22, and remove core. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Component Locations Cruise Control: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 974 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 3292 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2997 Page 2580 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1066 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 2999 Page 5146 PARTS INFORMATION The following 3M products (or their equivalent) should be obtained from your local body shop supply. 3M PART PART DESCRIPTION NUMBER APPLICATION Flexible Parts Repair Manual 05900 Both types Flexible Parts Putty 05903 Polyurethane bumpers Flexible Parts Coating 05905 Both types Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter 05907 Polypropylene bumpers solvent (general purpose) -- To remove silicones, tar or grease. Fiberglass cloth -- To repair holes up to 3" in diameter. Sanding discs for rotary -- 36 grit sander 180 grit 240 grit 320 grit Polyurethane Bumper Fascia Repair If extensive reinforcing or patching from the back is required use the following procedure. 1. Scuff the backside with grade 180 abrasives. 2. Cut a glass cloth patch to cover repair area. 3. Mix a quantity of Flexible Parts Repair Material. Lay glass cloth on a clean surface. Use a squeegee to force the Flexible Parts Repair Material into the glass cloth. 4. Apply glass cloth patch to backside of repair area. 5. Apply additional Flexible Parts Repair Material over surface of glass cloth patch. FASCIA REPAIR 1. Clean the repair area with soap and water. Remove grease and tar with solvent. Avoid solvent contact with plastic base material - temporary swelling can occur. Page 4536 Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Intake 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 in Page 5339 Page 3842 In general testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important that you have all available information related to the system you are going to test. You should also have a thorough understanding of how the system operates so that you use the appropriate test procedure and equipment. While testing electrical components, if the incident is reported as intermittent, it may be necessary to gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to simulate vehicle vibrations. DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A Digital Multimeter DMM (10 megaohm input impedance) can safely be used to diagnose and test most vehicle systems. Test lights are not recommended due to the possibility of inadvertently tapping into a computer or air bag circuit and causing damage. Before attempting to diagnose a circuit for an open or a short, it is important that you: 1. Have the proper reference material available. Power Supply Routings Applicable Service Manual sections Fix Tips 2. Understand how the system works. 3. Have a good understanding of what condition you are diagnosing Situation when the problem occurs (weather, loads, etc.) What systems interact with the one you are diagnosing Is it intermittent or a consistent problem 4. Have proper equipment to perform the diagnosis such as a digital voltmeter, alligator clips, and probe leads. TESTING FOR OPENS IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Refer to the attached drawing for sample schematics. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the attached diagram. Page 95 Check the wire in the illustration. If an ohmmeter is used to measure resistance, the single strand of wire still making contact would give an ohmmeter reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. It will become hot and have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: -Undersized wiring (single strand) -Corrosion on switch contacts -Loose wire connections or splices If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge (lower number). Measuring Voltage Drop 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts (voltage drop) are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb, or a 4.0 v. drop between the switch and the bulb. Relationship between Open/Short circuit and the ECU pin control Page 409 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Technical Service Bulletin # 94-012A Date: 990617 Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Classification: BR94-002a Reference: NTB94-012a Date: June 17, 1999 This amended version of NTB94-012 adds a caution and a note to the service procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB94-012. This bulletin supersedes TS89-105/BR89-004 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY SERVICE INFORMATION Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in a thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2321 STANZA WAGON (M10) CA20E (2WD) STANZA WAGON M10 CA20E (4WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (2WD) TRUCK (D21) Z24i (4WD) PATHFINDER (WD21) Z24i (2WD) Page 3584 CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only in areas with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models), before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, turn the can over and spray only propellant (gas) for a few seconds. This will avoid fluid spill back out of the cooler hose. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 5). 8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Place an oil drain pan under the banjo bolts that connect the oil cooler steel lines to the transmission. 12. Remove the "banjo" bolts at the transmission, and pull the line fittings away from the transmission. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Go to the Workflow chart for next step. Frontier (D22) Cooler Bypass Cleaning 1. Place an oil drain pan under oil cooler hoses or lines before removing them. 2. Remove the lines from the transmission and allow the oil to drain from the lines (See Figure 6). 3. Remove the lines from the bypass valve (see Figure 6). Diagrams Control Valve Body Page 5338 Page 2090 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 347 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 4524 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 871 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 3313 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 3416 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Visual Inspection 1. Visually inspect the ignition wires for the following: a. Insulation for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... b. Insulation for cracks or breaks. c. Insulator boots for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... d. Insulator boots for cracks or breaks. e. Terminal ends for corrosion, cracks or looseness. Ignition Wire Resistance Test 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance between the terminal ends. Resistance: Less than 30k ohms Replace the wire if it fails the above test. Page 2630 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 4282 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 1287 Truck (KA24E): Refer to Figures 11 and 12 Mark hose in the middle of lower half of the straight section (inclined portion of hose) (Fig. 12). From this mark measure 1/2" toward radiator end and toward the engine end and mark both places. Using the last two marks, cut a 1" section from the hose. Be sure the cut piece is on a straight section of hose and try to keep the hose in its original shape. 6. Insert the lower hose heater into the cut ends of the hose (see appropriate drawing). Slide a hose clamp (provided in the kit) over the hose on each end and tighten over the lower hose heater. Again try to keep the hose in its original shape. NOTE: Do not remove electrical cord from heater. 7. Reinstall the lower radiator hose (with lower hose heater) into the vehicle using the original clamps. Tighten all clamps. Make sure that the hose is installed in its original position. 8. Route cord out around the radiator. Use plastic tie wraps to hold the wire away from hot or moving parts. 9. Refill radiator with coolant fluid. Start engine and run to expel any air trapped in the system. Check coolant level and add if required. NOTE: It is recommended that low phosphate anti-freeze be used, and that a maximum anti-freeze/water mixture ratio of 50/50 be used. Refer to the Nissan Owner's Manual "Engine Cooling System" section. 10. Check all hose connections for leaks. Tighten clamps if necessary. Reinstall engine undercover. 11. Use cable end protector cap when heater is not plugged into power source. Page 2462 2. If the light is on, perform the ECU self-diagnosis procedure to determine what type of malfunction is indicated. If the malfunction code is 32 (EGR malfunction), perform the diagnostic procedure on page 3/7 of this bulletin and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5. If the malfunction code is other than 32, perform the necessary diagnosis and repair as outlined in the service manual for that code, and then install the appropriate sub-harness as listed on page 4 or 5 of this bulletin. (NOTE: Warranty information given in this bulletin does not apply to codes other than #32. Repairs for codes other than #32 should be submitted on a separate claim, if applicable.) Pulsar SE Modification Procedure FIGURE 3 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (34F) (Figure 3). FIGURE 2 FIGURE 4 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. 3. Apply the countermeasure application sticker (refer to Figure 2) to the top of the control unit (Figure 4). Page 3424 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection Secondary Tests Secondary Coil Test 1. Disconnect the ignition coil terminal. 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance between the (-) coil and secondary terminal. Resistance: 8.2 - 12.4 kohms 3. Visually check the coil for leakage and damage. Replace ignition coil if it fails the above test. Page 1761 Digital signals are ON-OFF (Hi-Low) voltage pulses. This signal is a typical digital signal. Examples of common digital signals are: Battery Voltage The ignition switch in the ACC or ON position provides a battery voltage signal to several control units. This informs the control unit of the ignition position. Switch to Ground A door switch is a common example of a switch to ground. When the door is opened the door switch completes the circuit. The interior light is turned on. In addition, the time control unit is sent an OFF signal indicating the door is open. Pulse Voltage A pulse voltage is made up of alternating high and low voltage signals of varying duration. These signals are counted by the control unit within a predetermined time frame. Analog Input Signals An analog signal is a voltage that varies over a period of time. Analog signals are produced by sensors in the vehicle. Sensors change resistance to deliver variable voltage signals. The Oxygen Sensor sine wave signals shown are typical analog signals. These charts are example signals printed using CONSULT. ^ The first chart shows an Oxygen Sensor lean (low voltage) condition. ^ The second chart is a normal Oxygen Sensor voltage printout. ^ The third chart illustrates an Oxygen Sensor rich (high voltage) condition. Examples of common sensors are: Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors change resistance with a change in temperature. This temperature is converted into an analog voltage range. Description and Operation Distributor Cap: Description and Operation Distributor Cap The distributor cap is used to make the connection between the rotor and the correct spark plug wire. High tension current from the rotor is distributed to the towers of the distributor cap at a pre-set sequence and then to the spark plug wires which carry the current on to the spark plugs. Page 189 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 4777 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 2825 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 1782 Fig. 303c Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 630 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 2845 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Description and Operation Fig. 37 Evaporative emission system. (Typical) Refer to Fig. 37 for a typical evaporative emission system. Complete system schematics are located in ``Vacuum Hose Routings.'' This system reduces hydrocarbon emissions from the fuel system by the use of activated charcoal in the carbon canister. With the engine off, fuel vapor from the fuel tank is led into the carbon for storage. The vapor is retained in the canister until it is moved by air drawn through the bottom of the canister to the intake manifold with the engine running. The purge control valve is closed when the engine is running at idle. A small portion of the stored vapor flows through the constant purge orifice into the intake manifold. As engine speed increases and throttle vacuum rises, the purge control valve opens and vapor is drawn into the manifold through both the main and constant purge orifices. Page 2727 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2735 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor Page 3026 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1970 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 4570 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 3844 no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. With sw1 closed, relay contacts jumped with jumper wire and probes at the load side of fuse terminal and ground check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and sensor (point C). no continuity; check sensor, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. swl open, relay disconnected and sensor disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position and verify battery voltage at the B+side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With swl open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and swl (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than sw1. 4. With sw1 closed, relay and sensor disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between sw1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With swl closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected sensor (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This resistance can change the way a circuit operates. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically alter an electronically controlled circuit. These circuits generally operate in the 5 volt range. The components in these circuits can be seriously affected by a voltage change as low as one tenth (0.1V) of a volt. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit by that amount. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure one or more of the ground wires does not have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Voltage Drop Tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Part of the available voltage is used by the resistance. When there is excessive resistance less voltage is available for other loads (lights, motors, etc.) in the circuit. Since each resistance in a circuit uses voltage, a voltmeter can be used to isolate problems. A voltage drop across closed contacts can indicate excessive resistance. This can cause the circuit to operate incorrectly. Remember a switch is not a load. During diagnosis, use a voltmeter to measure the voltage drop across each switch contact while the circuit is in operation. Page 2965 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 1187 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 401 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Specifications Fig. 6 Specifications Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 4431 c. Install upper spring seat as shown, Figs. 9 through 11. Page 2525 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 2740 Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 3354 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5466 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair The stop light switch is located on the brake pedal support. 1. Disconnect the switch electrical connectors. 2. Loosen switch retaining locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Page 2661 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4131 Alternator: Technical Service Bulletins Charging System - No Crank, Dead Battery Incidents Classification: Section: EL88-007 Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-085 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar XE Date: June 2, 1988 DEAD BATTERY INCIDENTS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar XE vehicles may experience repeated no restart incidents resulting from dead batteries after, low speed driving conditions with heavy accessory load. This may be due to insufficient alternator output. As a countermeasure, a higher output alternator (70 amp) is available to replace the 60 amp alternator. When installing the 70 amp alternator, a countermeasure adjusting bar and fan belt must also be installed. NOTE: Before installing a new alternator verify that the charging system is working correctly. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY INFORMATION Refer to Section EE of the Warranty Flat Rate Manual. R&R; adjust bar and fan belt is included in R&R; alternator flat rate time. Page 52 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE Page 2682 Page 72 TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30i VAN (C22) Z241 200SX (S100) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E Testing and Inspection Thermal Vacuum Valve (TVV): Testing and Inspection Fig. 21 Thermal vacuum valve operating specifications Fig. 62 Thermal vacuum valve operating specifications. 1. Drain coolant from engine, then remove valve. 2. Apply vacuum to valve and make sure valve opens or closes in response to engine coolant temperature as specified, Fig. 21 & 62. Do not allow water to get inside thermal vacuum valve. Page 3833 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Description and Operation Vacuum Check Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 54 Check valve. The check valve is located on the VVT valve bracket in the venturi ported vacuum line. This valve prevents the vacuum acting on the VVT valve from increasing excessively and activates the EGR system properly. Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Page 1885 Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Page 2074 Page 369 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Fail-Safe System Description AIR FLOW METER MALFUNCTIONING If the air flow meter output voltage is lower or higher than the specified value, E.C.U. senses an air flow meter malfunctioning. In case air flow meter malfunctions, the throttle sensor substitutes for the air flow meter. Though air flow meter is malfunctioning, it is possible to drive the vehicle and start the engine. But engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm in order to inform the driver of fail-safe system operation while driving. Operation Page 2679 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1937 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 767 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 4040 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Tires - Recommendations For Winter Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Recommendations For Winter Models: All models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT90-004 Bulletin No.: NTB90-099 Date: November 8, 1990 NISSAN WINTER TIRES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Some vehicles are equipped with performance tires from the factory to enhance dry weather vehicle performance. In order to improve vehicle traction during winter driving, all-season or radial mud & snow (M&S;) tires may be installed. Upon customer request, dealers may recommend alternative tires for improved traction in snow. When doing so, these guidelines should be followed: 1. A tire with the M&S; rating is recommended for winter driving in snow. 2. The replacement tires must have the same size and load carrying capacity as the original equipment tires. 3. All four (4) tires must be replaced, without exception. The mixed use of different types of tires (i.e., radial mixed with bias ply, M&S; mixed with non-M&S;) should be avoided because of adverse effects on vehicle handling and ride characteristics. 4. The requesting customer should be informed of the speed rating of the current tires, so that tires of the same speed rating could be purchased as replacement tires. NOTE: ^ All-season or snow tires may have lower speed ratings than factory-equipped tires. ^ When 4 mud & snow (M&S;) tires are installed on the vehicle, the tires should be inflated to the pressures recommended on the vehicle tire placard. The maximum inflation pressure shown on the side of the tire should never be exceeded. Testing and Inspection Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Air density becomes thinner at higher altitudes. Therefore, the carburetor produces too rich an air/fuel mixture at higher altitudes. The altitude compensator automatically corrects air/fuel ratio to an optimum mixture. When vehicle is operated in a high altitude environment, the bellows in the compensator extends, causing the lever attached to the bellows to push up the needle. When the needle is pushed up the air passage becomes wider, allowing larger amounts of air to flow from the altitude compensator to the carburetor, thereby thinning the air/fuel mixture. Electronic Controlled Carburetor (ECC) See: Testing and Inspection Page 399 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4994 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 4854 Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 68 Testing fan switch. 1. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch and check continuity with ohmmeter. 2. Meter should indicate continuity as shown in Fig. 68. Locations Power Transistor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 995 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Availability/Recommendation Models: All Models Section: Heater & Air Conditioner Classification: HA91-010 Bulletin No.: NTB91-052 Date: May 23, 1991 A/C COMPRESSOR OIL - NISSAN APPLIED MODELS: ALL MODELS SERVICE INFORMATION: The recommended refrigerant oil for all Nissan A/C systems is SUNISO 5GS. SUNISO 5GS is now available from SUNISO distributors in one quart containers. When ordering the oil, specify part number L315, which is the number for a single, one quart container. Dealers are encouraged to use one quart containers to prevent oil contamination. When left open to the atmosphere, compressor oil will absorb moisture that renders it unfit for use. To avoid this, order one quart containers, open only one at a time, and keep them tightly sealed when not in use. Due to the higher operating temperatures of our latest generation of A/C compressors, a 5GS oil is required to ensure optimum compressor performance. The use of lighter viscosity oil commonly found at auto parts supply stores can cause premature compressor failure. Page 277 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Adjustments TIMING PROCEDURE 1981-88 All with vacuum advance: Disconnect and plug vacuum advance hose before adjusting. Check timing against specified value. 1987-90 E16/GA16 EFI: Check timing against specified value. Disconnect throttle sensor harness before adjusting. CA16 CA18 DOHC: Remove spark plug/coil cover. Connect inductive clamp to wire between #1 coil and spark plug. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. 1990 2960cc 300ZX: Remove #1 coil from mount and connect inductive clamp to high tension wire. Rotate crank angle sensor to adjust. All Others: Set timing to specified value. Page 2715 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations The Fuse Panel Is Located Under LH Side Of Instrument Panel Primary Tests Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection Primary Tests Primary Coil Test 1. Disconnect the ignition coil terminal. 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance across the terminals. Resistance: 0.81 - 0.99 ohms 3. Visually check the coil for leakage and damage. Replace ignition coil if it fails the above test. Page 5101 Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Cassette Tape Player Diagnosis & Maintenance Classification: Section: EL88-021 Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-148 Models: All Date: November 10, 1988 CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER DIAGNOSIS & MAINTENANCE SERVICE INFORMATION A recent survey has shown that a majority of customer complaints about cassette tape player performance can be resolved by cleaning the tape head. Some of the symptoms of a dirty tape head are: ^ One channel out ^ Low sound ^ Distortion ^ The cassette deck "eats" tapes ^ No high frequency If a customer's cassette player exhibits any of these symptoms, please perform the following before removing the unit: 1. Clean the tape head using Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 99902-A7000. 2. Test the unit to see if the problem is resolved. 3. If the problem is not resolved, conduct further diagnosis. In addition, please coordinate with your Sales Department to provide the customer with the following recommendations for optimum sound quality and system performance: To prevent heavy accumulation of dirt, clean the tape head at least once every month or after 10 hours of play. ^ Use brand name quality cassette tapes that are 90 minutes or less in play time (120 minute cassette should not be used). ^ Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight and heat. Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed, and a deformed cassette may jam in the player. ^ Do not use extremely old tapes. The presence of a brownish powdery substance, or small pieces of magnetic tape on the front of the cassette tape indicates that the cassette tape is too old to use. ^ Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information on proper maintenance and operation of the sound system. Page 4803 Page 1754 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Page 381 Battery - Charging Precautions Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Charging Precautions Models All Models Section Electrical System Classification EL87-020 Bulletin No. TS87-158 Date October 26, 1987 CHARGING NISSAN BATTERIES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models built after February, 1985 SERVICE INFORMATION: A "hybrid" type battery, with calcium and antimony plates, has been installed in all Nissan models starting with 1986 production. This type of battery has improved recharging capabilities and may be recharged with a standard shop battery charger, even after deep discharge. Follow the procedures given in the current Nissan service manuals. These batteries also have a slightly higher self discharge rate. To eliminate the effects of vehicle storage and to improve customer satisfaction, each battery should be checked before the new vehicle is delivered to a customer. This will insure that the battery is fully charged and provide the customer with the proper battery service life. BATTERY CHARGING CAUTIONS: 1. Do not attempt to recharge batteries that have low electrolyte (water) levels. Add only distilled water to bring the levels to between the lines on the battery. 2. Use of any substance other than distilled water will damage the battery and cause reduced service life. 3. Hybrid batteries do require periodic water level inspection. Water usage varies with driving conditions and weather. (Also, see the CAUTIONS listed in the service manual.) Page 69 PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE PULSAR (KN13) GA16i SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) Page 543 Page 5330 5. Locate the drilling point in the pillar finishers. The point is marked in the back side of the finisher at the position shown below. 6. Drill a 1" hole in each trim piece at the marked location using a hole saw. 7a. Using the dimensions shown in the illustration below, cut the opening in the parcel shelf for the 3-point seat belt. 7b. Install retro-fit finisher on parcel shelf ends as shown above. 8. Reinstall rear pillar finishers and check alignment of anchor bolt holes. 9. Remove lap belts (female buckle side) and install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. Torque mounting bolts to 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 10. Remove the retractor side of the original lap belts. 11. Remove the trunk/wheelhouse finishers to access retro-fit retractor mounting point. The finisher must be trimmed to allow for mounting of the retractor unit. Cut finisher as shown below: Page 984 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Locations Neutral/Park (NP) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 4502 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 336 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Testing and Inspection Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove filler cap, wipe clean valve housing, and place cap in mouth. 2. Inhale air. A slight resistance should be felt at first but should disappear when valve can be heard clicking. 3. If valve is clogged or no resistance is felt, replace cap. Page 5261 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Technical Service Bulletin # 87-145 Date: 870928 Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Page 1143 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 202 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to switch assembly, remove screws securing switch bracket to air intake housing, then remove switch assembly. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Vacuum Control Modulator Exhaust Pressure Regulator Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation Vacuum Control Modulator Fig. 49 Vacuum control modulator. The vacuum control modulator is composed of a pressure regulator and solenoid valve. Intake manifold vacuum is used as the vacuum source for the pressure regulator. The passage leading to the atmosphere is controlled by solenoid valves. The vacuum control modulator provides vacuum to the EGR valve and AAC valve following the electrical signal from the control unit. Page 2912 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Brakes - Improved Front Pad Material Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Improved Front Pad Material Classification: BR89-002 Section: Brake System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-006 Models: All models Date: January 19, 1989 IMPROVED FRONT BRAKE PAD MATERIAL APPLIED MODELS: 1982-88 Sentra (B11 & B12) 1983-88 Pulsar (N12 & N13) 1982-88 Stanza (T11 & T12) 1985-88 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 Truck (D21) 1987-88 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987-88 Van (C22) SERVICE INFORMATION Service brake pads with improved semi-metallic material are available for the applied models. These pads have been installed at the factory on some 1987 and most 1988 models. Compared to the former semi-metallic material, this new material has the following advantages: ^ Reduced brake pedal effort when brakes are cold ^ Firmer brake pedal "feel" ^ Reduced brake rotor wear ^ Reduced brake squeal ^ Reduced brake noise after vehicle has been in storage (less affected by rust on rotor surface) In addition, this new semi-metallic material has much longer pad life than the equivalent asbestos pads. Service brake pad kits with this new material are available and have new part numbers. They can also be identified by the code stamped in the pad backing plate. Original pad material (asbestos) NBK NP01 FF or (semi-metallic) Hitachi HP14 EE Improved pad material (semi-metallic) Hitachi HP12 FE The improved pads can be substituted for the original pads and are recommended for all repairs when the brake pads are replaced. Page 2663 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Antenna - Inoperative, Rod Maintenance & Replacement Antenna: All Technical Service Bulletins Antenna - Inoperative, Rod Maintenance & Replacement CLASSIFICATION: EL95-008 REFERENCE: NTB95-074 DATE: August 2, 1995 POWER ANTENNA ROD MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT This Bulletin contains revised Warranty information. Please discard NTB94-019 dated February 17, 1994. APPLIED VEHICLE: All models equipped with power antennas SERVICE INFORMATION Power antenna incidents for no operation or improper retraction are almost always caused by the following: ^ The antenna rod is broken or bent due to misuse. Common examples of this include the antenna contacts the top of a garage door opening or a tree branch. Also, a customer may forget to lower the antenna before entering an automated car wash. ^ Dirt, road grime, and other foreign matter collects on the rod interrupting proper operational movement. This occurs most frequently during winter months in areas where road salt and other chemicals are splashed onto the antenna rod. REPAIRS COMPLETED FOR THE TWO CAUSES DESCRIBED ABOVE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY. ONLY REPAIRS UNDERTAKEN DUE TO DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP WILL BE COVERED UNDER WARRANTY. In a large majority of cases, the antenna motor is fully operational and receiving proper power. Therefore, replacement of the entire power antenna assembly is not usually necessary to restore power antenna operation. Prior to removing any power antenna assembly, an attempt should be made to repair the power antenna by removing dirt, road grime, and other foreign matter, and then lubricating the antenna rod sections as appropriate. if still inoperative, replacement of the rod only should be made. A sample replacement procedure is provided on the following page. Check the EL section under Audio and Power Antenna in the Service Manual for specifics on your respective vehicle. SERVICE PROCEDURE REPLACING THE ANTENNA ROD 1. Remove antenna nut and base. (Figure 1) 2. Turn the radio to "ON" and the antenna rod will extend*. Assist the antenna rod to fully separate from the antenna base. Note the direction of the gear section on the antenna rope. [The new antenna rod must be installed in the same direction]. * If the antenna rod does not extend, always check the power supply to the power antenna before replacing the power antenna assembly. Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Maximum Resistance Per Cable 30 K ohms Page 2991 Page 3891 ^ while the vehicle is barely moving, with light brake pedal force ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather ^ most common on vehicles with automatic transmission This noise is common on most cars with front disc brakes. There are no repair procedures to eliminate this noise. 3. SQUEAKING/SQUEALING NOISE ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during low speed stops (5-20 mph) ^ more noticeable during warm, dry weather This noise is common on vehicles with high-performance potential that must be able to stop in short distances from high speeds. Other brands of brake pads may eliminate this noise, but Nissan does not recommend them because they may have reduced pad life or inadequate performance in high speed stops. 4. HIGH-PITCHED SQUEAKING/SCRAPING NOISE ^ whenever brakes are applied ^ may come from just one wheel Nissan uses pad wear indicators on many of its disc brake pads to provide an audible warning when the brake pads need replacement. Spring steel tabs that are riveted to the brake pad scrape lightly on the rotor surface when the pad is worn down to its lowest limit. The customer should hear the noise at this time and bring the vehicle to the dealer for brake pad replacement. The pad wear indicator will not damage the rotor surface if the pad is replaced in a reasonable time. Replace worn pads with new parts. Check the rotor surface for damage and machine if necessary. Page 2357 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Page 3210 Inspection Procedure Page 1657 Index For Main Harness Part 1 Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery. Connector ID is 79M. Page 2160 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1511 Page 1400 Timing Belt: Service and Repair TIMING BELT REMOVAL CAUTION: - After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads. - Do not bend or twist timing belt too tightly. - Ensure timing belt, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft sprocket and belt tensioner are clean and free from oil or water. - Before installing timing belt, confirm that No.1 cylinder is set at top dead center (T.D.C.) on compression stroke. - Align arrow in direction of timing belt rotation. - Adjust timing belt tension with all spark plugs removed. 1. Remove the following parts. - Front right side splash cover - Front right side under cover Accessory Relay Ignition Relay: Locations Accessory Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 591 When the specification is labeled "Toe-Out" and the dimensions are positive (+) numbers (ie: 2 to 6 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 3). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-out specification = Toe-Out wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-Out specification = Toe-In wheel setting. 4. Rear Toe is adjustable on some Nissan vehicles with independent rear suspensions. Usually, the adjustment, itself, is not difficult but, it is extremely important. Nissan uses two (2) different terms to describe "Rear Toe". "Toe-In" and "Toe-Out". Contemporary wheel alignment equipment measures rear "Toe-In" and, if the wheels are actually "Toed-Out", displays the measured values as a negative (Figure 4). 5. Toe is measured as a distance or as an angle. When measuring toe as a distance, it is found by measuring the difference between the center of the front of the tire and the center of the rear of the tire at spindle height. The difference between the distances is Total Toe. When measured as an angle, the center line of the vehicle is zero degrees (0~, 0.00~, or 0~00') and the angle of a line drawn through the center of the tire and wheel, as viewed from the top, is the Toe angle for the individual wheel. 6. Nissan Total Toe specifications are given two (2) ways: Distance: Millimeters and Decimal Inches Angle: Degrees and Minutes Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Page 1283 MODEL ENGINE YEAR LOCATION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------200SX CA18ET 1984-1988 Lower radiator hose CA20E Stanza Sedan CA20E 1987-1988 Lower radiator hose Truck VG30i 1986.5 & later Lower radiator hose Pathfinder VG30i 1987 & later Lower radiator hose Truck (4Cyl 4WD) KA24E 1990 & later Lower radiator hose KIT CONTENTS: Item No. Qty Item 1 1 Lower radiator hose heater (with power cord and plug cap) 2 2 Hose clamp TOOLS REQUIRED Phillips screwdriver Masking tape or chalk Flat blade screwdriver Electrical tape or wire tie Heavy duty utility knife (plastic or wire) Measuring tape or ruler PROCEDURE: Page 760 Page 1595 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 1667 Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Service and Repair THERMO SWITCH Replace On Pulsar models, thermo switch is located in radiator lower tank. On Sentra models, thermo switch is located on center left side of radiator tank. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain cooling system into suitable container. 3. Disconnect thermo switch electrical connector, then remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Fig. 1 Testing thermo switch (typical) Testing 1. Remove thermo switch as outlined above. 2. Connect suitable ohmmeter across switch terminals, then immerse lower part of switch in water, Fig. 1. Ohmmeter should indicate an open circuit. 3. Place thermometer in water and heat. When water temperature reaches approximately 185°F, switch contacts should close and the ohmmeter should indicate continuity. 4. If switch does not operate properly, replace it. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 4805 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 4125 Battery: Specifications Standard Battery, Except Canada Standard Battery, Except Canada BCI Group Number 35 Cranking Performance 380 A Page 3206 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3620 Use the "Combination" Op Codes as indicated with the appropriate Section "JA", "JC", or "JD" coding that best represents the A/T R&R; and repair/replacement performed. Service Procedure Page 4810 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 1007 Page 975 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Testing and Inspection Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Motor: Testing and Inspection Disconnect the inlet vacuum hose of the vacuum motor, and connect another hose to the inlet to apply vacuum to the vacuum motor. Then, confirm that the air control valve moves. Air control valve operating vacuum: kPa (mmHg, inHg) Opening starts -6.7 (-50, -1.97) Full opening Over -13.3 (-100-3.94) Page 2411 Idle Speed Control Valve: Description and Operation Idle speed control valve is a rotary solenoid valve. It receives a pulse signal from E.C.U. which determines the position of slider, thereby varying bypass air quantity. Idle speed control valve has additional functions below. 1. Idle-up after cold start (Air regulator) 2. Idle speed feedback control (A.A.C. valve) 3. Idle-up for air conditioner and power steering (F.I.C.D.) 4. Deceleration vacuum control (Dash pot, A.B. valve & Boost control valve) Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Page 1082 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 2952 Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations A/C Components. On Top of Receiver Drier Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Testing and Inspection Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection The condenser may malfunction either due to leakage or restriction. If restricted, compressor discharge pressure will be excessive. Icy or frosty spots on the condenser will indicate a partial restriction within the condenser. Ensure all foreign matter is removed from the front of the condenser. Similarly, bent cooling fins will block air flow through the condenser and result in high discharge pressure. Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Classification: GI88-023 Reference: TS88-150 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES APPLIED VEHICLES All Models 1987-1989 SERVICE INFORMATION The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home.) Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES Page 5240 REFINISHING GUIDE CAUTION: Air line respirator with full hood or half mask, or vapor/particulate type respirator that is recommended as effective for isocyanate vapor and mist, must be worn during the entire painting process. CAUTION: When painting with pearlescent paint, be sure to keep the panel surface clean and free from dirt and dust as it will be very conspicuous and difficult to remove. 2-Coat Pearlescent Paint 1. In general, use the same painting method which is used for metallic painting. 2. Use the same mica base which was originally used on the vehicle, and match the color by referring to the data and instructions given by the paint manufacturer. 3. Apply paints to the vehicle body under the same conditions and using the same painting methods as those used to make the color comparison board. 3-Coat Pearlescent Paint Page 745 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2683 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 1925 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Control Cable Adjustment Move selector lever from the "P" range to "1" range. You should be able to feel the detents in each range. If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the range is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever at "P" range. 2. Connect control cable end to manual lever in transaxle unit, and tighten control cable securing bolts. Page 2552 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 2399 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Page 5494 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Page 2150 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1857 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 2869 1. Remove both hoses and harness, solenoid attaching screws and remove valve. 2. Operate solenoid valve with battery voltage to determine if air flows through valve properly, Fig. 22. Vacuum Cut or Control Solenoid Valve 1. Disconnect electrical connector from valve and ensure resistance across valve terminals measures approximately 30-40 ohms. 2. Disconnect vacuum hoses from valve. 3. Check valve port openings. With battery voltage applied to the valve, air should flow freely between two upper ports. Without battery voltage applied, air should flow freely between center and lower ports. Page 4745 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair When replacing evaporator, add 2.7 oz. of new refrigerant oil on 300ZX or 2.4 oz. on all other models. Fig. 15 Instrument panel attachment plate removal. PULSAR & SENTRA 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and discharge system refrigerant. 2. Disconnect refrigerant lines from evaporator, plugging all openings, then remove piping grommet and cover. 3. Remove passenger side instrument lower cover and glove compartment. 4. Remove attachment plate from instrument panel, Fig. 15. Fig. 16 Instrument panel cut lines. Fig. 17 Instrument panel cut lines. 5. Using hacksaw blade, cut instrument panel on cut lines, Figs. 16 and 17. Cover blower motor vent holes with tape before cutting and brush shavings away from area around blower motor and remove tape after cutting. 6. Remove blower motor unit. 7. Remove cooling unit. 8. Separate cooling unit case halves and remove evaporator. 9. Disconnect and remove expansion valve. 10. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Ensure that expansion valve is properly positioned. Page 3002 Page 5269 You can contact the paint refinish company's technical assistance number listed. Akzo/Sikkens Procedure ICI AUTOCOLOR Procedure DuPont Procedure Glasurit Procedure Martin Senour (NAPA) Procedure PPG Procedure R-M Procedure Sherwin Williams Procedure Spies Hecker Procedure Herberts Standox Procedure Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2994 Idle Speed: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Specifications Fig. 2 Compression Pressure Specifications Page 1323 Page 4348 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Manual Rack & Pinion Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support front of vehicle and remove wheels. 2. Disconnect tie rod from steering knuckle. 3. Loosen steering gear attaching bolts, then remove bolt securing lower joint to steering gear pinion and remove lower joint from pinion. 4. Remove steering gear housing-to-body attaching bolts, then the steering gear and linkage assembly from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Overhaul DISASSEMBLY Fig. 3 Rack & pinion manual steering gear. 1987-88 Sentra When disassembling power steering gear, refer to Fig. 3 ASSEMBLY Page 2546 Check the wire in the illustration. If an ohmmeter is used to measure resistance, the single strand of wire still making contact would give an ohmmeter reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. It will become hot and have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: -Undersized wiring (single strand) -Corrosion on switch contacts -Loose wire connections or splices If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge (lower number). Measuring Voltage Drop 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts (voltage drop) are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb, or a 4.0 v. drop between the switch and the bulb. Relationship between Open/Short circuit and the ECU pin control Page 4101 Quick Battery Charge Page 2344 Vehicle Speed Sensor The vehicle speed sensor produces an alternating voltage signal. This alternating signal (analog) is converted to a digital signal for processing. The control unit can only process digital signals. Analog signals must be converted to a digital form before the information can be used by the control unit. Control Unit Logic The control unit processes digital signals in two forms. To the control unit the signal is either ON or OFF. In computer logic an ON or high voltage signal is a "1" and an OFF or low voltage signal is a "O". The control unit uses combinations of these signals to control its outputs. The controller uses inputs from many sensors to determine what outputs it will make and at what time it will make them. These outputs control a variety of functions from automatic speed control to engine driveability. Outputs An output is simply an action the control unit tells an electrical component to make. Based on the calculations the control unit makes of the inputs, it will signal an action. The output can tell a component to perform a function for a period of time. Power and Ground Control The ECU controls either a component's power or ground. To understand this, refer to the diagrams. If the ECU is between the electrical component (load) and the power source, the ECU controls its power. ^ If the component is between the power source and the ECU, the ECU controls the component ground. VOLTAGE DROP TEST Service and Diagnosis Precautions Before diagnosing any electronic controlled circuits the following cautions should be followed: 1. Make sure the following parts and systems are in good condition and are operating properly. ^ Battery output ^ Battery terminals ^ Grounds ^ System connectors are properly positioned and connected 2. Never use a test lamp to check an electronically controlled circuit. 3. Do not drop, jar or shake electronic components. Follow the trouble diagnosis charts in the appropriate section of the Service Manual to isolate which component may be the incident part. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage Drop Tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Part of the available voltage is used by the resistance. When there is excessive resistance, less voltage is available for other loads (lights, motors, etc.) in the circuit. Since each resistance in a circuit uses voltage, a voltmeter can be used to isolate the cause of the problem. A voltage drop across closed contacts can indicate excessive resistance. This can cause the circuit to operate incorrectly. Remember, a switch is not a load. During diagnosis, use a voltmeter to measure the voltage drop across each switch contact while the circuit is in operation. Page 4988 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Page 109 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Page 5353 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 582 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 3051 The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4270 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Specifications Fig. 7 Fuel System Pressure Specifications Page 5325 14. Reinstall quarter glass. (2 dr.) 15. Reinstall front shoulder anchor bolt and finisher cap. 16. Remove lap belts (female buckle side) and install female buckle lap belts from retro-fit kit. 17. Remove the retractor side of the original lap belts. 18. The retracting side of the retro-fit lap belt is installed as follows: a. Install retractor unit end of the shoulder harness. (See illustration.) b. Feed the belt through the access hole in the inner panel at the base of quarter pillar, then bolt the shoulder anchor into the rear pillar where the 1" hole was drilled. NOTE: Mounting/anchor bolt torque is 26-32 ft.lbs. (3.65-4.65 kg/m). 19. Bolt in floor anchor at original retractor location. 20. Secure top half of quarter panel finisher that was pulled back. 21. Reinstall rear parcel shelf. 22. Check retro-fit belts for smooth operation. 23. Reinstall high mount stop light and speakers, if equipped. 24. Reinstall rear seat back and retaining screws. 25. Reinstall lower seat cushion. Sentra Wagon Page 963 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Recommended Fluid DEXRON ATF Page 2119 Component Locations License Plate Bulb: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Locations Control Module: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3660 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 5263 following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Page 5027 3. Insert the replacement antenna rod with the radio in the "ON" position. Insert antenna rope with gear section facing the motor assembly [Figure 2]. 4. Turn the radio "OFF" to retract the antenna rod. If the antenna motor stops before the antenna has fully retracted, turn the radio switch "ON" and immediately turn it "OFF" again. Guide the antenna rope and rod into the antenna assembly. 5. Reinstall the antenna nut and base. Check antenna operation by cycling the radio "ON" and "OFF". Power Antenna Maintenance Clean power antenna rods at every service opportunity by wiping with a damp cloth. PRECAUTIONS Please remind the customer to: 1. Always turn the radio "OFF" to prevent bending the antenna rod, whenever going through car washes or entering parking garages with low ceilings or low hanging garage doors. 2. The antenna rod should be cleaned regularly by wiping off any dirt build up which may cause the antenna to bind. Customers should verify that their car wash attendants do this regularly. CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: The following Claims Information applies to antenna rod replacement for defects in materials and workmanship. Damaged (bent) rods are not included. Claim Information Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 2992 Page 4800 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Availability/Recommendation Models: All Models Section: Heater & Air Conditioner Classification: HA91-010 Bulletin No.: NTB91-052 Date: May 23, 1991 A/C COMPRESSOR OIL - NISSAN APPLIED MODELS: ALL MODELS SERVICE INFORMATION: The recommended refrigerant oil for all Nissan A/C systems is SUNISO 5GS. SUNISO 5GS is now available from SUNISO distributors in one quart containers. When ordering the oil, specify part number L315, which is the number for a single, one quart container. Dealers are encouraged to use one quart containers to prevent oil contamination. When left open to the atmosphere, compressor oil will absorb moisture that renders it unfit for use. To avoid this, order one quart containers, open only one at a time, and keep them tightly sealed when not in use. Due to the higher operating temperatures of our latest generation of A/C compressors, a 5GS oil is required to ensure optimum compressor performance. The use of lighter viscosity oil commonly found at auto parts supply stores can cause premature compressor failure. Locations Fig. 1 Timing Mark Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 2067 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 718 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4266 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 2463 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 2662 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2535 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 1766 This chart indicates appropriate pin voltages for the ASCD system: Accessory Relay Ignition Relay: Locations Accessory Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 779 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Specifications Fig. 7 Fuel System Pressure Specifications Page 4228 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 2064 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1767 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1166 Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications With Heater Automatic Transmission 5.6 qt (US) Manual Transmission 5.0 qt (US) Without Heater Automatic Transmission 5.0 qt (US) Manual Transmission 4.4 qt (US) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 4972 function properly or the webbing is damaged as described above, the entire retractor and webbing assembly should be replaced under the lifetime limited seat belt warranty. The passive belt on 2 point passive models should also be inspected. Button Replacement Procedure BUTTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the operation of the seat belt warning lamp on the dash and the warning buzzer. Repair as necessary. 2. Insert the seat belt "tongue" into the buckle and check to see that it latches properly by tugging on the seat belt tongue while firmly holding the buckle (this step applies to both front seat buckles). Repeat this step three (3) times. If either buckle does not latch or unlatch, replace both front buckle assemblies. If the buckle latches and unlatches properly in both front seats, proceed to step 3. 3. Prepare the vehicle for button replacement by placing a clean shop cloth on the seat and center console. Position the seat as necessary to easily work on the buckle. Note The 1991 Sentra requires seat removal for button replacement. Please see the Vehicle Specific Information section in this bulletin for details regarding buckle removal and proper reinstallation. The button replacement procedure is the same for all vehicles except as noted. Please review the vehicle-specific information that contains torque specifications and other important notes on buckle replacement. Note Some 1986.5 and 1987 vehicles have a white plastic ejector buckle and have a slightly different procedure - see steps 9a and 14a. 4. Using a small pair of wire cutters (such as Snap-On E710SCG), carefully cut the plastic outer cover along the separation line between the two covers as shown in the photograph. 5. Using a medium sized, flat blade screwdriver, carefully separate the two halves of the outer cover by placing the screwdriver into the slot between the edges of the two covers. Do not pry in the middle of the buckle, as this may damage the switch (if so equipped). 6. Using the wire cutters, cut the three plastic pins retaining the switch to the cover. Cut the bottom pin first, slide the switch down, then cut the top two retaining pins. Note Some buckles are not equipped with switches (e.g. passenger side). 7. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to separate the switch from the cover. Carefully place the screwdriver between the switch plate and buckle cover at the closest points to the three retaining pins beginning with the bottom pin, then the two top pins. This will prevent damage to the switch. 8. Remove the cover halves. Note Steps 9a and 14a should be utilized on buckles with white ejector plates. Page 5239 Application of 2-coat pearl and 2-coat pearl metallic is similar to that of other 2-coat metallic paints. However, repairs on 3-coat pearl require special technique and experience since color matching is much more critical. Also, when spot or partial repairing is required, the full panel or "Zone" must be repainted (see drawing). If a Dealer requires assistance in 3-coat pearl paint procedure, the following paint manufacturers are willing to provide it. ^ Basf/Inmont/Glasurit ^ Dupont ^ P.P.G./Ditzler ^ Sherwin Williams ^ Sikkens Or contact your local paint jobber. ^ Two types of mica are available, white and colored. They should be used properly to fit the base color. ^ Pearl mica has complex reflection characteristics without hiding power. This produces minute changes in color tone and luster as the painted surface is viewed at different angles or under different lighting conditions. When matching color during repair, you should carefully observe the paint color under direct sunlight (at a distance of 3 to 7 feet), from every direction. Page 4577 Disclaimer Page 417 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 5062 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 4498 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 1533 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5134 PARTS INFORMATION The following 3M products (or their equivalent) should be obtained from your local body shop supply. 3M PART PART DESCRIPTION NUMBER APPLICATION Flexible Parts Repair Manual 05900 Both types Flexible Parts Putty 05903 Polyurethane bumpers Flexible Parts Coating 05905 Both types Polyolefin Adhesion Promoter 05907 Polypropylene bumpers solvent (general purpose) -- To remove silicones, tar or grease. Fiberglass cloth -- To repair holes up to 3" in diameter. Sanding discs for rotary -- 36 grit sander 180 grit 240 grit 320 grit Polyurethane Bumper Fascia Repair If extensive reinforcing or patching from the back is required use the following procedure. 1. Scuff the backside with grade 180 abrasives. 2. Cut a glass cloth patch to cover repair area. 3. Mix a quantity of Flexible Parts Repair Material. Lay glass cloth on a clean surface. Use a squeegee to force the Flexible Parts Repair Material into the glass cloth. 4. Apply glass cloth patch to backside of repair area. 5. Apply additional Flexible Parts Repair Material over surface of glass cloth patch. FASCIA REPAIR 1. Clean the repair area with soap and water. Remove grease and tar with solvent. Avoid solvent contact with plastic base material - temporary swelling can occur. Page 4587 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Fig. 5 Exploded view of wheel hub & steering knuckle assembly. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra Removal 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove wheel bearing locknut while depressing brake pedal, Fig. 5. 4. Remove caliper. 5. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove tie rod ball joint. 6. Separate driveshaft from knuckle. 7. Support arm assembly, then remove adjusting pin bolts. 8. Using tool HT72520000 or equivalent, remove lower ball joint attaching nut. 9. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud, using a suitable tool. 10. Remove steering knuckle. Disassembly 1. Remove outer hub inner race from knuckle. 2. Remove outside inner race from wheel hub. 3. Remove inner race from wheel bearing. 4. Remove snap ring. 5. Install inner race (inside) of removed wheel bearing, then remove wheel bearing assembly from knuckle. Inspection Inspect removed components for excessive wear and/or damage. Replace worn or damaged components as required. Assembly 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle working from outside of knuckle. 2. Install snap ring. 3. Coat seal lip with suitable grease. 4. Press hub into knuckle. Do not exceed 3.3 tons. Page 1886 Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2308 240SX (S14) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 665 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection a. Tighten the clamp so its end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from the hose end. b. Make sure that the screw of the clamp does not contact with any adjacent parts. c. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. : Fuel hose clamps 1.0 - 1.5 N.m (0.10 - 0.15 kg-m, 0.7 - 1.1 ft-lb) 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet hose at the electro injection unit. 3. Install a pressure gauge. 4. Start the engine and check the fuel line for fuel leakage. 5. Read fuel pressure gauge. At idling speed: 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2, 36.3 psi) 6. Release fuel pressure again. 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel line. 8. Reconnect the fuel inlet hose. Page 697 Page 4522 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1753 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Page 581 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Page 1931 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 4897 Sentra 764000 1987-1989 Vehicle Torque Specifications Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Sentra (1987-89, except 1989 Coupe) Seat belt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) PARTS INFORMATION Color Mix by Model The chart indicates the mix of interior colors by year/model for the vehicles in this campaign. This is provided to assist dealers in ordering button kits for this campaign. Please note that for most models there is a dominant color code, with the other colors in smaller quantities to as little as 1%. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Customer Assistance/Dealer Hotline Revision Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/88-007 Date: April 18, 1988 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: TIRE ASSISTANCE CUSTOMER/DEALER HOTLINE This is a revised list of the Tire Assistance Customer/Dealer Hotline telephone numbers. Please discard warranty bulletin (WB/88-004) issued on February 3, 1988. The following general information toll-free telephone numbers may be used to assist you with your tire replacement needs: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-423-4544 (Except California) 1-800-221-8744 (Inside California) Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-800-662-0200 (Except New York) 1-800-334-4646 (Inside New York) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) For customer assistance or emergency tire orders, please use the telephone numbers listed below: Bridgestone 1-800-TIRE-BSA Yokohama 1-800-722-9888 Toyo 1-800-442-TOYO (Except California) 1-800-238-TOYO (Inside California) Dunlop 1-716-879-8494 (Mr. Wagner 8:30am-5:00pm EST) 1-213-781-2001 (Mr. Yanacek 2:00pm-5:00pm PST) General 1-800-847-3349 (Except Ohio) 1-800-426-4889 (Inside Ohio) If you have further questions pertaining to tires, please contact your District Service Manager or Regional Service Department. Page 1514 Page 1161 Disclaimer Page 465 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Page 3226 Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): Adjustments 1. Start and operate engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. With A/C system OFF, ensure engine idle speed is correct. 3. With A/C system ON and fan control lever set at 4, ensure compressor, F.I.C.D. actuator and solenoid valve are operating properly. 4. On all models except Federal with gasoline engine, set idle speed at the specified values: a. On gasoline engine with manual transmission, idle speed should be 750-850 RPM. b. On gasoline engine with automatic transmission, idle speed should be 580-660 RPM. c. On diesel engine with manual transmission, idle speed should be 800-850 RPM. d. On diesel engine with automatic transmission, idle speed should be 900-950 RPM. Page 3017 Page 4648 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Fig. 12 Exploded view of instrument panel. 1987-88 Sentra 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect heater hose at firewall connections of heater core. 3. Remove instrument panel, Fig. 12. ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 763 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Page 4755 Fig. 26 Exploded view of heater system. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra 4. Refer to Fig. 26 to complete removal of heater core. Fig. 22 Exploded view of heater case. 5. Separate heater case, Fig. 22, and remove core. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2824 Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 3860 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Fig. 4 CL18B type front disc brake disassembled A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Case: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Classification: Section: AT90-002 Automatic Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-010 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: February 8, 1990 F01A AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra XE 1987-1990 Pulsar NX XE SERVICE INFORMATION Some of the Applied Models equipped with the F01A Automatic Transaxles may exhibit transmission fluid leakage from the converter housing and/or the front cover gasket area(s). To improve the sealing performance at these locations, new bolts for the torque converter housing and the front cover are now used in production, and the tightening torque for these bolts has been changed to eliminate this condition. In addition, a new torque converter housing gasket is available as a service replacement part for these vehicles. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated areas, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the front cover and/or torque converter housing, thoroughly clean and inspect (for porosities, surface damage, etc.) all mating surfaces. Install a new converter housing gasket and new bolts, being certain to apply sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the incident area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Testing and Inspection Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Air density becomes thinner at higher altitudes. Therefore, the carburetor produces too rich an air/fuel mixture at higher altitudes. The altitude compensator automatically corrects air/fuel ratio to an optimum mixture. When vehicle is operated in a high altitude environment, the bellows in the compensator extends, causing the lever attached to the bellows to push up the needle. When the needle is pushed up the air passage becomes wider, allowing larger amounts of air to flow from the altitude compensator to the carburetor, thereby thinning the air/fuel mixture. Electronic Controlled Carburetor (ECC) See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Page 2645 Page 2400 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) A/C - New Connections & O-Rings A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New Connections & O-Rings Classification: HA97-O12 Reference: NTB98-005 Date: February 1, 1998 NEW A/C CONNECTION 0-RINGS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan (except Quest) SERVICE INFORMATION This service bulletin identifies differences in A/C 0-rings as they apply to the NEW and FORMER type A/C connections. The NEW type connection has a groove in the tube end in which the 0-ring is seated. The FORMER type connection does not have a groove but instead has an inflated portion on the tube end to support the 0-ring. Refer to Figure 1 for illustrations identifying each connection type. A/T - Fluid Application Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Application Classification: AT96-001 Reference: NTB98-042 Date: May 15, 1998 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID This amended version of NTB95-055 updates information regarding the Recommendation ATF usage. Please disregard previous NTB95-055 and NTB93-065. SERVICE INFORMATION IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Matic "D" ATF must be used in performing repairs paid by Nissan, such as warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for repairs when non-genuine Nissan Matic "D" is used. For current and prior production Nissan vehicles, front wheel and/or rear wheel drive, only Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, is formulated to meet the requirements of Nissan automatic transmissions and automatic transaxles. Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, assists in ensuring transmission durability, smooth driveability, low exhaust emissions and customer satisfaction. Only an ashless type petroleum based ATF should be used to repair Nissan vehicles because other types of ATF may contain compounds which adversely affect transmission performance. Specifically, ash will impact friction response. In addition, ATF with ash is likely to have a higher Zinc (Zn) content. Zinc will adhere to clutch linings and cause slippage, resulting in transmission damage. For ordering procedures, please refer to the "Dealer Confidential Parts Price List". Service Precautions Timing Belt: Service Precautions CAUTION: After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads and damage to the valves may occur. Page 4269 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 2520 PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE PULSAR (KN13) GA16i SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) Page 4300 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1435 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 271 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 5288 9. Give the vehicle a final inspection. Page 790 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: Page 2508 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Paint: Customer Interest Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1845 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 59 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 1017 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Lubricant Type Lubricant Type Refrigerant Oil Type SUNISO 5GS On-Vehicle Service Differential: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Service Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement 1. Remove drive shaft assembly. 2. Remove oil seal. 3. Apply coat of A.T.F. to oil seal surface, then drive new oil seal into place. 4. Install drive shaft assembly. Be extremely careful not to scratch oil seal when inserting drive shaft. Page 4460 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 749 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3012 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Locations Wiper Motor: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Of Cowl Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 1594 Spark Plug: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 4004 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Fig. 4 CL18B type front disc brake disassembled Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Type Plug Air Gap Plug Torque Standard Type BPR5ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Hot Type BPR4ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Cold Type BPR6ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Page 1367 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications API Classification API SF Grade Energy Conserving Oils. Oil Viscosity Temperatures Below 32 deg F 5w-30 Temperatures Above 0 deg F 10w-30 or 10w-40 Page 2165 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Idle Speed Control Valve: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 1738 SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Page 5294 REFINISHING GUIDE CAUTION: Air line respirator with full hood or half mask, or vapor/particulate type respirator that is recommended as effective for isocyanate vapor and mist, must be worn during the entire painting process. CAUTION: When painting with pearlescent paint, be sure to keep the panel surface clean and free from dirt and dust as it will be very conspicuous and difficult to remove. 2-Coat Pearlescent Paint 1. In general, use the same painting method which is used for metallic painting. 2. Use the same mica base which was originally used on the vehicle, and match the color by referring to the data and instructions given by the paint manufacturer. 3. Apply paints to the vehicle body under the same conditions and using the same painting methods as those used to make the color comparison board. 3-Coat Pearlescent Paint Page 3843 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect 1 probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of swl. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between swl and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the sensor. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous diagram. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With swl open, probe at swl to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than sw1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and swl (point A). 4. Close sw1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between sw1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the sensor. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the sensor. no voltage; open is between relay and sensor (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR SHORTS IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (sw1 open, relay disconnected and sensor disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal and the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With sw1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and sw1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than sw1. 5. With swl closed, relay disconnected and probes at the load side of fuse terminal and ground check for continuity. continuity; short is between sw1 and the relay (point B). Locations Fig. 1 Timing Mark Page 3315 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4278 Page 82 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations The Fuse Panel Is Located Under LH Side Of Instrument Panel Page 2613 Inspection Procedure Page 1026 Fuse Block: Fuse and Fusible Link Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 5092 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 2149 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1913 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3043 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Page 849 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removing Spark Plug Boot REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition wire from the spark plug with a twisting and pulling motion. CAUTION: Pull on the boot only. Do not pull on the wire. 2. Using compressed air, blow out the area at the base of the spark plug to remove any debris USE SAFETY GLASSES. 3. Using a 5/8" (16mm) flex socket and extension, remove the spark plugs (counterclockwise rotation). INSTALLATION 1. Using a suitable tool, check and adjust the spark plug gap. ELECTRODE GAP 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) 2. Using a suitable rubber hose or designated tool, start the spark plugs by hand (clockwise rotation). 3. Tighten and torque the spark plugs. SPARK PLUG TORQUE 14 - 22 ft. lbs. (20 - 29 N-m / 2.0 - 3.0 kg-m) 4. Apply a small amount of di-electric compound to the inside of the spark plug boots. 5. Reinstall the spark plug boots. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the E.C.U. for fuel cut, recovery and idle speed control. - Needle type speedometer models The speed sensor consists of a reed switch, which is installed in the speed meter unit and transforms vehicle speed into a pulse signal. Page 4290 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 741 Page 5305 Sunroof / Moonroof: Connector Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 4211 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 3059 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Speed Control The idle speed is controlled by the E.C.C.S. control unit, corresponding to the engine operating conditions. The E.C.C.S. control unit senses the engine condition and determines the best idle speed at each water temperature and gear position. The control unit then sends an electronic signal corresponding to the difference between the best idle speed and the actual idle speed to the A.A.C. valve. INPUT SIGNAL AND AIR FLOW The opening of the I.S.C. valve is controlled by an ON-duty signal fed to the opening solenoid. (When the opening solenoid is "ON", the closing solenoid is "OFF", and vice versa.) The longer the ON-duty signal on the opening solenoid, the greater the I.S.C. valve opening and the greater the amount of airflow. Page 2102 Page 721 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5254 When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid 1.0 - 1.1 qt (US) Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Page 4969 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 2178 Bumper - Repair Polyurethane & Polypropylene Fascia Technical Service Bulletin # BF91011 Date: 910411 Bumper - Repair Polyurethane & Polypropylene Fascia Classification: BF91-011 Section: Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB91-037 Models: All Models Date: April 11, 1991 POLYURETHANE & POLYPROPYLENE BUMPER FASCIA REPAIR APPLIED MODELS: 1988-90 Pulsar XE (KN13) 1990-91 30OZX (Z32) 1988-89 Pulsar SE (KN13) 1989-91 240SX (S13) 1988-90 Sentra Sdn. (B12) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1988-90 Sentra Cpe (B12) 1988-89 Stanza (T12) 1991 Sentra Sdn (B13) 1990-91 Stanza (U12) 1991 Sentra NX (KB13) 1988-90 Van (C22) 1989-91 Maxima (J30) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides detailed instructions to repair polyurethane and polypropylene bumper fascias. A polyurethane bumper can be distinguished from a polypropylene bumper by using the following test: cut a small piece of material from the end of the bumper fascia and hold it over the flame of a match or lighter until it ignites. Polyurethane will burn with black smoke and have an odor. Polypropylene will burn with little smoke and will not have an odor. Alternate Test: Sand an area near the damage with a 36 grit disc. If the material sands cleanly, the bumper is polyurethane. If the material melts or smears when sanded, it is polypropylene. BUMPER MATERIAL INFORMATION MODEL FRONT BUMPER REAR BUMPER 1988-90 Pulsar XE Polypropylene Polypropylene 1988-89 Pulsar SE Polyurethane Polypropylene 1988-90 Sentra Sdn. Polypropylene Polypropylene 1988-90 Sentra Cpe. Polyurethane Polypropylene 1988-91 Stanza Polypropylene Polypropylene 1989-91 240SX Polyurethane Polyurethane 1990-91 300ZX Polyurethane Polyurethane 1988-91 Maxima Polyurethane Polyurethane 1990 Axxess Polyurethane Polyurethane 1988-91 Van Polyurethane Polyurethane NOTE: OEM replacement bumpers are the same material as original. Page 1110 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 2472 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 3442 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 4265 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Page 353 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 2558 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Page 756 Page 3253 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 3013 This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4458 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1478 Page 5260 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Specifications Fig. 2 Compression Pressure Specifications Locations Power Transistor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Specifications Valve: Specifications Valve Stem Clearance Intake .0008-.0020 in Exhaust .0018-.0030 in Valve Stem Diameter Intake .2744-.2750 in Exhaust .2734-.2740 in Valve Face Angle 45.5 deg Page 1779 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Classification: EL93-028 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-161 Models: All Models Date: November 5, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Electronic control units (ECU's) control the operation of numerous electrical systems and components on Nissan vehicles. The ECU's do this by either controlling the supply voltage or ground path of an electrical component. The following is an explanation of how these systems work and what precautions should be taken while performing diagnostic procedures. Systems controlled by electronic control units have three (3) basic requirements, Inputs, Controller Logic and Outputs. Inputs Sensors and switches provide electrical signals to the control unit. These signals are provided to the ECU to inform it of various vehicle operating conditions. The electrical inputs can be either analog or digital signals. However, all of the signals are converted to digital signals before the ECU can process the information. Control Logic The ECU uses the electrical input signals to determine what the system should do. This decision may be based on a few or many inputs. After processing the information the ECU will provide a signal (output) to various electrical components. Outputs The signal that the ECU puts out to an electrical component (actuator) is called the output. These output signals are what operate and control the system. Digital Input Signals Page 4346 2. Check outer ball joint rotating force. Rotating force should be 1-26 inch lbs. 3. Check ball joint axial endplay. Endplay should be .051 inch or less on outer ball joint or zero for inner ball joint. Boot 1. If boot is excessively cracked, replace it. Cylinder Tubes & Breather Hoses 1. Check cylinder tubes and breather hoses for scratches or other damage, replacing as necessary. Steering Gear Component Parts 1. Check component parts for cracking, wear or other damage, replacing steering gear assembly as necessary. ASSEMBLY Refer to Fig. 28 for power steering gear assembly, noting the following: 1. Install center bushing and rack oil seal with rack assembly. 2. Tighten cylinder end cover assembly, using a suitable tool, then install cylinder end cover assembly to gear housing by staking into position. 3. Apply suitable grease to seal lip of pinion oil seal, then install pinion oil seal into pinion housing, using a suitable tool. 4. Install rear oil seal using a suitable tool. 5. Wrap suitable tape around pinion splines to prevent damaging oil seal, then install rear housing cover assembly to pinion. 6. Install pinion assembly into pinion housing. Use caution not to damage pinion oil seal. 7. Install pinion assembly and snap ring using suitable tools, then tighten self locking nut. 8. Install retainer, retainer spring, gasket and retainer cover. 9. Apply suitable locking compound to threaded portion of inner socket, then install inner socket on rack end together with new lock plate. Ensure lock plate tabs enter grooves at end portion of rack. 10. Tighten tie rod inner socket, then bend lock plate at two cutout portions of inner socket. Remove burrs after bending lock plate to prevent damaging boot. Fig. 7 Adjusting tie rod length. 1987-88 Maxima, Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza exc. 2WD Wagon 11. Tighten outer socket locknut so tie rod length ``L'' is 6.94 inches and screwed length ``l'' is .98 inch or more, Fig. 7. Fig. 26 Measuring rack stroke. 1987-88 Maxima, Pulsar, Sentra & Stanza Exc. 2WD Wagon 12. Measure rack stroke, refer to Fig. 26. Note that dimension l1 is 2.24 inches on models less CA16DE engines or 2.07 inches on models with CA16DE engines and dimension l2 is 2.76 inches on models less CA16DE engines or 2.58 inches on models with CA16DE engines. Page 4569 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1506 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the E.C.U. for fuel cut, recovery and idle speed control. - Needle type speedometer models The speed sensor consists of a reed switch, which is installed in the speed meter unit and transforms vehicle speed into a pulse signal. Diagrams Brake Band And Band Serve Page 1004 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 3926 * The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. * As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. * Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. NISSAN SERVICE PROCEDURE: Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062 (BR92-004) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Page 3252 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 1741 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE Page 398 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Brakes - On-Car Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - On-Car Rotor Refinishing Classification: BR04-007 Reference: NTB04-094 Date: August 20, 2004 NISSAN: ON-CAR BRAKE ROTOR RESURFACING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan If YOU CONFIRM: A vehicle needs to have the brake rotors resurfaced (front or rear), ACTION: Use the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe to perform brake rotor resurfacing and follow the tips listed in this bulletin. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. ^ ProCut(TM) technical support or service can be obtained by calling 1-800-543-6618. NOTE: Brake rotors may need to be resurfaced during routine brake repair or for brake "Judder" incidents. ^ Brake judder: A brake pedal pulsation and/or steering wheel shimmy when braking that occurs when there is too much thickness variation of the brake rotors (see NTB00-033). TIPS FOR USING THE PROCUT(TM) PFM SERIES ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE ^ Read and follow all instructions contained in the Technical Manual provided with your ProCut(TM) equipment. ^ The ProCut(TM) brake lathe also comes with an instructional video that can be used as a training aid. ^ Additional training is available from your local ProCut(TM) representative by calling 1-800-543-6618. A. Make sure the cutting tips are sharp, in good condition and installed "right-side" up. ^ Make sure to use ProCut(TM) brand tips. ^ The cutting tip "UP" side has a groove or letters. NOTE: A tip mounted upside-down will produce a surface finish that looks like an old LP record. ^ Each cutting tip has three cutting corners. Rotate or replace the tip as needed. NOTE: You should get at least 7 cuts per corner. However, tip life is affected by variables such as rust or ridges. In order to determine when to rotate tips, monitor the rotor finish. If the rotor finish begins to look inconsistent or feels rough to the touch, tips should be rotated or replaced. Tips that are chipped or cracked should never be used. Page 3276 Page 5340 Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications Installed Height 1.54 in Valve Spring Pressure --- Page 1531 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Exhaust Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 807 Idle Speed: Adjustments Midpoint of range given is the preferred setting speed. 1981-83 L28 Turbo, 1983 E15 Turbo: With engine at operating temperature, race several times and return to idle. Disconnect idle control valve and check speed against specified value. 1984-87 E16 2V Federal: With engine at operating temperature, disconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Race engine several times and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Restart engine, race several times, and check idle speed against specified value. 1987-90 E16 FI, GA16; 1989-90 KA24: With engine at operating temperature disconnect throttle sensor harness connector. Start engine and set idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle speed is within checking speed. Turn on AC and verify that idle increases to specified value. 1984-89 VG30 Turbo, 1987-89 CA16, CA18 DOHC: With engine at operating temperature, turn ignition off and disconnect automatic air control (AAC) valve harness. Start engine and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect harness. Restart engine and check idle speed against specified value. Turn AC on and verify that speed-up is at specified value. All engines, turn AC on and verify that speed-up speed is specified value. 1987-88 CA18 Turbo, 1987-89 CA20 Stanza: Disconnect throttle valve and automatic air control valve harness. Start engine and adjust idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1989-90 VG30 Maxima: Turn diagnostic connector on ECU fully clockwise and adjust idle to specified value. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1990 300ZX: Attach inductive clamp to loop wire on power transistor behind upper radiator hose. Set idle to specified value. Page 3837 Technical Service Bulletin # 93148 Date: 931015 Electrical - General System Diagnosis Classification: EL93-027 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-148 Models: All Models Date: October 15, 1993 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS General Inspection Procedure In general, electrical systems are considered to be complex systems requiring a high level of technical knowledge. However, if you have a basic understanding of electrical systems and you understand their operation, you can approach a proper diagnosis and repair. This is the first in a series of technical bulletins geared toward the diagnosis and repair of vehicle electrical systems. How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair Trouble Diagnosis Steps The following chart shows the steps required to properly identify an electrical incident. It is important to follow each step thoroughly. STEP 1 Listening To The Customer. Listening to the customer and documenting the conditions which exist when the problem occurs is critical to properly diagnosing an electrical incident. You will need to understand the symptoms which caused the incident, to properly diagnose and/or to try to simulate the condition in the dealership. It may also be important to determine if the car has had any accessories recently installed or if any service work (collision repair, etc.) has been recently performed. STEP 2 Verify the parameters of the incident. Whenever possible, you should operate the complete system to verify the customers comments. Try to confirm the symptom(s) and under what conditions the incident occurs. STEP 3 Get the proper diagnosis materials together. Before beginning the diagnosis, make sure you have all of the necessary information. Along with these Fix Tips you should have the Power Supply Routing information in the EL section of the appropriate service manual. You should make sure you have a thorough understanding of how the system operates. Based upon the customers comments and your knowledge of the circuit operation, you should be able to identify which component(s) could cause the incident. STEP 4 Inspect the system. Page 1581 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Visual Inspection 1. Visually inspect the ignition wires for the following: a. Insulation for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... b. Insulation for cracks or breaks. c. Insulator boots for swelling or breakdown due to fuel, oil, grease or etc... d. Insulator boots for cracks or breaks. e. Terminal ends for corrosion, cracks or looseness. Ignition Wire Resistance Test 2. Using an ohm meter, check the resistance between the terminal ends. Resistance: Less than 30k ohms Replace the wire if it fails the above test. Page 2469 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 729 Page 1819 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Seat Trim - Non-Warrantable Examples Interior Moulding / Trim: Technical Service Bulletins Seat Trim - Non-Warrantable Examples Reference: WARRANTY BULLETIN WB/90-011 Date: June 15, 1990 TO: ALL NISSAN DEALERS SUBJECT: SEAT TRIM WARRANTY CLAIMS An ongoing analysis of Seat Trim returned through the Part Return Program has shown an increasing volume of non-warrantable seat trim replacements being claimed as a warrantable repair. Non-warrantable seat trim examples are cigarette burns, cuts and punctures. Please instruct your Warranty Administration team that seat trim damage as indicated above is not covered by the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty and should not be submitted for reimbursement via the Warranty Claim Processing System. Thank you for your assistance. A/C - Refrigerant Oil Recommendations Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Recommendations Classification: HA91-002 Section: Heater And Air Conditioner Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB91-014 Models: ALL MODELS Date: FEBRUARY 14, 1991 A/C SYSTEM REFRIGERANT OIL APPLIED MODEL: All Models equipped with A/C System SERVICE INFORMATION: When service repairs on a Nissan A/C system require that lubricant be added to the system, please be advised that the recommended refrigerant oil for all Nissan A/C systems is SUNISO 5GS. This oil applies to all rotary, lateral piston, and variable displacement Nissan A/C compressors. SUNISO 5GS is available throughout the continental U.S. The name and location of the nearest SUNISO 5GS distributor may be obtained by contacting the Virginia KMP Corporation at 1-800-527-7960. Audio - Aftermarket Phone/Audio Installation Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 746 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2452 be present during future servicing of the emissions system. A supply of labels has been included with this Technical Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional office. PARTS INFORMATION A new sub-harness will be supplied to the owner, along with the notification letter. The owner should bring the part to the dealership along with the vehicle to be corrected. A small quantity of parts will be held in reserve by the Technical Compliance Department of NMC in U.S.A. for unusual circumstances. Dealerships should contact their Regional Service Department if extra parts are needed for this campaign. Service Procedure 1. Observe the "check engine" light while the engine is running. If the light is off, stop the engine and install the appropriate sub-harness (supplied by the customer), using the modification procedure on page 4/7 (Pulsar SE) or 5/7 (Stanza) of this Technical Bulletin. Page 1517 Page 3644 Axle Shaft: Specifications Axle Shaft, Halfshaft U-Joint Type ALL MODELS Refer to "Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Bearings" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 3060 BASIC CHARACTERISTICS An ON-duty signal is fed to the I.S.C. valve in response to the water temperature. STARTING CORRECTION A starting correction signal is added in response to the water temperature for improved engine startability. This function continues for several seconds after the engine starts. IDLE SPEED FEEDBACK CONTROL When the following conditions are met after the starting correction has been completed, the idle speed feedback control function operates. (1) Idle switch-ON (2) Neutral switch - ON or below 8 km/h (5 MPH) (vehicle speed) *: When battery voltage of less than 12 volts continues for a few seconds, the target idle speed will be maintained higher, in order to improve charging function. (M/T only) Page 2076 Page 2269 Inspection Procedure Page 1434 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4272 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3180 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4234 When the specification is labeled "Toe-Out" and the dimensions are positive (+) numbers (ie: 2 to 6 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 3). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-out specification = Toe-Out wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-Out specification = Toe-In wheel setting. 4. Rear Toe is adjustable on some Nissan vehicles with independent rear suspensions. Usually, the adjustment, itself, is not difficult but, it is extremely important. Nissan uses two (2) different terms to describe "Rear Toe". "Toe-In" and "Toe-Out". Contemporary wheel alignment equipment measures rear "Toe-In" and, if the wheels are actually "Toed-Out", displays the measured values as a negative (Figure 4). 5. Toe is measured as a distance or as an angle. When measuring toe as a distance, it is found by measuring the difference between the center of the front of the tire and the center of the rear of the tire at spindle height. The difference between the distances is Total Toe. When measured as an angle, the center line of the vehicle is zero degrees (0~, 0.00~, or 0~00') and the angle of a line drawn through the center of the tire and wheel, as viewed from the top, is the Toe angle for the individual wheel. 6. Nissan Total Toe specifications are given two (2) ways: Distance: Millimeters and Decimal Inches Angle: Degrees and Minutes ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 571 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 2995 Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 4806 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Locations Fig. 28 Component location Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Component Locations Seats: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl PDI - Paint Guard Coating (PGC) Removal Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins PDI - Paint Guard Coating (PGC) Removal Classification: Section: BF88-015 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-120 Models: All Models Date: September 15, 1988 PAINT GUARD COATING REMOVAL This Bulletin supersedes the previously issued "Paint Guard Coating Removal", BF88-006/TS88-043, dated May 5, 1988. Due to duplicate numbering this Bulletin is being re-issued with new Classification/Reference numbers. There are NO changes to the contents of the Bulletin. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The following information should be used to help your wash and detail personnel in the clean-up of vehicles delivered with PGC (paint guard coating). The paint guard coating remover solution is supplied with each vehicle and can be found in the glove box. In order to make the removal process easier, the Ports have improved the application process and are careful to avoid sags and thick coats of the material. Please post these directions in your car wash area and review with clean-up personnel. A good understanding of the PGC and remover will greatly speed your clean-up and preserve the new car finish. A Material Safety Data Sheet on PGC has been distributed as part of a National Parts Bulletin. 1. Park vehicle in shade and rinse thoroughly using a spray of water. If the vehicle is extremely dirty, wash it with soap and water. This will loosen dirt and cool the sheet metal. The surface must not be allowed to dry during the cleaning process. When applying the remover solution in the next step, a pair of rubber gloves, eye protection, and boots should be worn for protection. Page 3625 4. Use hose clamps and temporarily connect a length of suitable hose between the bypass valve fittings that go to the oil cooler (see Figure 6). 5. Pinch/clamp the temporary hose to prevent flow through the loop (see Figure 6). 6. Cover the end of the bypass inlet line with a shop rag to catch any oil spray. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) into the outlet for 10 second intervals, three times (see Figure 6). 8. Re-connect the transmission lines and remove the temporary hose loop (see Figure 7). 9. Go to Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles). 1996-98 Pathfinder (R50) Cleaning the Optional Air Cooled Oil-Cooler (Air Cooler) 1. Place an oil drain pan under the A/T air cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 2. Disconnect the Inlet and Outlet hoses from the air cooler (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 8). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath the vapors or the spray mist. Page 2684 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 1490 Idle Speed: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Page 2078 Page 4221 Page 3415 Ignition Cable: Description and Operation Ignition Wire The coil wire connects the ignition coil to the distributor cap, allowing high voltage to flow from the coil to the distributor cap. The spark plug wires connect the terminals in the distributor cap to the spark plugs, allowing high voltage to flow to the spark plugs. The ignition wires have an internal resistance to suppress radio static and to eliminate static that may interfere with sensitive computer components. Page 4785 Page 102 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 1992 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 5306 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 649 Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2108 Service and Repair Ball Joint: Service and Repair 1. Remove wheel bearing locknut. 2. Remove tie rod ball joint. 2. Remove strut lower bracket attaching nuts and bolts. 3. Separate driveshaft from knuckle by tapping driveshaft end with a suitable hammer. Use caution not to damage driveshaft boots. 4. Separate lower ball joint stud from knuckle using a suitable tool. 5. Remove stabilizer bar attaching bolt from transverse link and ball joint assembly. 6. Remove transverse link bracket attaching bolts, then the transverse link bracket. 7. Remove remaining transverse link assembly attaching bolt, then the transverse link and ball joint assembly. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Page 874 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Testing and Inspection Air Filter Element: Testing and Inspection Viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation until it is replaced periodically. Brushing or blasting operation should never be conducted, because it causes clogging and results in enrichment of the mixture ratio. Page 1208 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 2443 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Main Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Explanation of Common Noises Classification: BR87-005 Reference: TS87-103 Date: June 29, 1987 DISC BRAKE NOISE INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models with disc brakes (front or rear) SERVICE INFORMATION Some Nissan vehicles may exhibit brake noise under certain driving conditions. This Bulletin provides some information about normal and common noises and appropriate service procedures for each noise. Some of this information may be useful when explaining brake noises to the customer. Refer to Technical Bulletin BR87-006, "Disc Brake Noise Countermeasure", for information about abnormal brake noises on Maxima, Stanza, and Stanza Wagon. General Brake Information Nissan brake systems have been carefully designed to provide optimum braking performance under various driving conditions. One of the most important components in the brake system is the brake pad material. The following factors have been taken into consideration to select the best pad material. ^ technical and government regulations ^ stopping distance ^ vehicle control while braking ^ high operating temperatures ^ pedal force ^ pad and rotor wear rates ^ moisture resistance ^ friction coefficient stability ^ operating noise level Unfortunately, there is no one brake pad material that provides perfect performance in all of these areas. Changing the material to improve some factors often causes a performance reduction in other areas. Higher brake operating noise levels in some instances occur as a result of factors which ensure proper brake performance and safety. Common Brake Noises The following brake noises occur most frequently on Nissan vehicles. These noises do not indicate any malfunction or improper operation. 1. GROANING NOISE AT LOW MILEAGE (0-300 MILES) ^ noise occurs with light to medium pedal force ^ noise occurs during medium speed stops (20-40 mph) ^ noise usually does not occur on the first or second stop ^ noise occurs with warm or hot brakes (not cold) ^ there may be a low frequency "judder" vibration Nissan applies protective coatings to the brake rotors and pads to reduce corrosion during shipping and storage. These coatings may cause this groaning noise until they are worn off. Under normal driving conditions, this usually takes about 300 miles. If this noise occurs during the first 300 miles, it is not necessary to attempt any repairs. Service Procedure: There is no service procedure to eliminate this noise permanently. Replacing the brake pads or machining the rotors may cause the noise to disappear temporarily, but it will return and continue until the coatings are worn off the rotor and pads. 2. GROANING NOISE (AFTER 300 MILES) Page 801 BASIC CHARACTERISTICS An ON-duty signal is fed to the I.S.C. valve in response to the water temperature. STARTING CORRECTION A starting correction signal is added in response to the water temperature for improved engine startability. This function continues for several seconds after the engine starts. IDLE SPEED FEEDBACK CONTROL When the following conditions are met after the starting correction has been completed, the idle speed feedback control function operates. (1) Idle switch-ON (2) Neutral switch - ON or below 8 km/h (5 MPH) (vehicle speed) *: When battery voltage of less than 12 volts continues for a few seconds, the target idle speed will be maintained higher, in order to improve charging function. (M/T only) Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 3885 Page 459 For this reason, dealers must follow the campaign procedure as described in NTB95-085a, and replace only the button on all vehicles unless replacement of the buckles is necessary. SERVICE-COMM INFORMATION Vehicles are being flagged in SERVICE-COMM as owner notifications are mailed. This enables both dealer and NMC personnel to quickly determine which owners have been mailed a notification. Please refer to the "applied vehicles" section of this bulletin to determine the complete affected vehicle population. SERVICE PROCEDURE Button Replacement Tips The buckle assembly should be replaced only when one of the following conditions is observed: ^ Improper latching or unlatching ^ Buckle mechanism is contaminated with sticky material such as soft drink or juice ^ Foreign material is stuck in the buckle mechanism ^ The seat belt warning system switch is damaged. Switch Removal and Installation Reference Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a Removal: step 5. On buckles with the white plastic ejector mechanism, care should be taken when removing the buckle housing from the mechanism. The plastic spring locator and/or the springs can easily disengage and become loose causing the mechanism to bind when reassembled. Removal; steps 6 & 7. Use the recommended cutters and cut the three locating pins flush with the switch. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, gently pry up on the switch at the lower portion near the locating pin. Repeat this at the upper pins. If the pins are cut correctly, the switch will come out with very little effort. Installation; steps 18-20. Follow the procedure in Step 18 exactly. Apply pressure with your thumb or a very small screwdriver only to the upper corners of the switch. Proper installation does not require that you hear a "click". The switch needs only to be over the locating pins and flush with the buckle cover. Before installing the lower buckle cover (Step 19), the switch must be in the upward position. Failure to place the switch in this position will damage it. You must also depress the release button (Step 20) when snapping the cover in place. All of the above is clearly illustrated in the video tape shipped with Campaign Bulletin NTB95-085a. VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION VIN Information for 1986.5 models Model Serial Number Range 200SX vehicles between 010051-121424 VIN Information for 1991 Models Not all 1991 vehicles are affected by this campaign. The following are the ending serial numbers for the 1991 model vehicles affected by this campaign: Model Ending Serial Number 240SX - Coupe 006837 240SX - Hatchback 023837 Pathfinder 032716 Truck - Japan production 412972 Truck - U.S. production 365000 Page 1694 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Models: Various Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Classification: EF & EC94-015 Bulletin No.: NTB94-097 Date: November 4, 1994 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) IDENTIFICATION SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to assure in verifying that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and has the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All vehicles have a label (see illustration above) that has the vendor part number on the ECM Cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 1058 Page 4594 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "FRONT SUSPENSION / COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES / AXLE BEARING AND KNUCKLE" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 4461 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair" before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 1795 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Page 4709 When servicing the A/C refrigeration loop, refer to the charts (Figure 2 and 3) to identify the correct 0-ring type. The charts list both NEW and FORMER 0-ring types and illustrates the 0-rings in full-scale size. IMPORTANT POINTS ^ There is NO interchangeability between NEW and FORMER connection type 0-rings. Improper use will cause refrigerant leaks. Therefore, the correct type 0-ring must be used with each application. ^ Nissan vehicles requiring A/C 0-ring replacement should be checked for proper 0-ring part numbers through the applicable parts microfiche. ^ Insure correct 0-ring installation onto tube (see Figure 1). Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3836 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 1081 Mass Air Flow Sensor Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Mass Air Flow Sensor The air flow meter measures the intake air flow rate by taking a part of the entire flow. Measurements are made in such a manner that the E.C.U. receives electrical output signals varied by the amount of heat emitting from the hot wire placed in the stream of the intake air. When intake air flows into the intake manifold through a route around the hot wire, the heat generated from the hot wire is taken away by the air. The amount of heat depends on the air flow. On the other hand, the temperature of the hot wire is automatically controlled to a certain number of degrees. Therefore, it is necessary to supply the hot wire with more electric current in order to maintain the temperature of the hot wire. The E.C.U. knows the air flow by means of the electric change. Page 1510 Page 706 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 1080 Locations Receiver Dryer: Locations A/C Components. LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 491 CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Al vehicles must have either the release buttons or buckle assemblies replaced. Use this decision tree to determine when buckle replacement is required. Rental Car Policy RENTAL CAR POLICY Nissan authorizes dealers to provide customers a free rental vehicle under the following conditions: 1. The customer's vehicle has one or more seat belts that will not latch or function as designed, and; 2. The necessary replacement buckle/belt assembly is not available in the dealer's parts inventory, and has been ordered "vehicle off road" (VOR) and; 3. The rental period does not exceed 48 hours. Rental cars provided for more than 48 hours must be approved by Nissan regional personnel. Failure to comply with these conditions may result in the chargeback of up to the entire rental car amount paid. Dealers are instructed to follow the procedure below to minimize the need for rental cars. 1. When the customer calls for an appointment, verify the year and model of his/her Nissan and the color of the seat belts. 2. Ask the customer if he/she has had any problems with the seat belts latching. a. If the customer has had no latching problems, ensure that the correct button kits are available at the time of the appointment. b. If the customer indicates there has been a latching problem, order a pair of the correct buckle assemblies so they will be available on the Page 556 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 56 TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30E VAN (C22) Z24i 200SX (S110) Z20E 200SX (S110) Z22E Page 2129 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 800 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Speed Control The idle speed is controlled by the E.C.C.S. control unit, corresponding to the engine operating conditions. The E.C.C.S. control unit senses the engine condition and determines the best idle speed at each water temperature and gear position. The control unit then sends an electronic signal corresponding to the difference between the best idle speed and the actual idle speed to the A.A.C. valve. INPUT SIGNAL AND AIR FLOW The opening of the I.S.C. valve is controlled by an ON-duty signal fed to the opening solenoid. (When the opening solenoid is "ON", the closing solenoid is "OFF", and vice versa.) The longer the ON-duty signal on the opening solenoid, the greater the I.S.C. valve opening and the greater the amount of airflow. Page 2680 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 2318 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E, VE30DE NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 2988 Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 5054 Diagnostic Procedure # 10 SYMPTOM: Alarm will not silence with key. Diagnostic Procedure # 11 ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 5149 2. Grind the surface of the repair with 36 grit disc. Grind about 1-1/2" around the actual damage to obtain a taper for best adhesion. 3. Featheredge the paint around the repair with 180 grit disc. Wipe with a clean, dry rag and blow off with air. 4. Mix Flexible Parts Repair Material according to the instructions and apply to the repair with a squeegee, building it up higher than the undamaged area. Allow it to cure for 20-30 minutes at 60-80~F. 5. After curing, sand with 180 grit disc followed by 240 grit disc. 6. Fill sand scratches and pinholes with Flexible Parts Putty. Allow at least 15 minutes to dry then sand with 320 grit disc. Brakes - AMMCO On Car Lathe Operating Guidlines Technical Service Bulletin # 92-062A Date: 990617 Brakes - AMMCO On Car Lathe Operating Guidlines REFERENCE: NTB92-062A CLASSIFICATION: BR92-004A DATE: June 17,1999 TITLE: AMMCO ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE OPERATING GUIDELINES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models This amended version of NTB92-062 adds a CAUTION and a NOTE to the Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB92-062. SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure the best possible surface finish and least amount of run-out and rotor thickness variation when using the Ammco on-car brake lathe, the following guidelines should be observed. Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE Before mounting the brake lathe on the vehicle ensure the following: 1. The V-way between the carriage and carriage gib must be clean and adjusted properly (see Operation Manual for adjustment procedure). Wipe off sliding surfaces with a soft cloth after each use. 2. The cutters and cutting bits must be tight in their mounts and positioned properly. Change cutting bits when they become dull. 3. When securing the adjustable mounting brackets to the caliper mount/knuckle the mounting surfaces must be smooth and free of burrs. 4. Make sure the adjustable mounting brackets are securely mounted to caliper mount/knuckle. There should be no movement between the cutting tool and the caliper mount/knuckle. ROTOR DRIVING UNIT Before using the drive unit ensure the following: Page 503 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Towing Information: By Symptom Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Classification: GI88-023 Reference: TS88-150 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES APPLIED VEHICLES All Models 1987-1989 SERVICE INFORMATION The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home.) Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES Specifications Fig. 277 Start signal switch ON/OFF diagnosis procedure. Page 2347 Page 4366 * The brake rotor run-out exceeds specification limits. * As the brake pad rubs against the rotor while driving, the high spots on the brake rotor wear slightly. * Rotor thickness variation may develop as the high spots on the brake rotor wear. If this thickness variation becomes large enough, brake judder/shimmy may occur. NISSAN SERVICE PROCEDURE: Resurfacing the brake rotor using the Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe is the preferred method of correcting excessive rotor run-out and thickness variation. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB92-062 (BR92-004) "Ammco On-Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines." Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 1853 Altitude Switch: Description and Operation Altitude Switch This switch, used on some models, is attached on the left side of the instrument panel in the driver's compartment. This switch consists of a bellows and a microswitch. The switch transmits an ``On'' or ``Off'' signal to the control unit according to change in atmospheric pressure. When the atmospheric pressure drops below 26 in. Hg, an ``On'' signal is transmitted to decrease fuel by 6%. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 3097 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2302 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE PULSAR (KN12) E15ET PULSAR (KN13) E16i PULSAR (KN13) CA16DE PULSAR (KN13) CA18DE Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Main Harness Part 1 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission Vehicles - Towing Information Classification: Section: GI88-023 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-150 Models: All models 1987-1989 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home). Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES * These are maximum distances these vehicles may be towed without damage to the gear rain. In general, any Nissan vehicle should be started, warmed up, and driven at least two miles after it has been towed these distances - more frequently if possible. Page 2646 Inspection Procedure Page 2565 Fig. 303d Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 717 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1509 This bulletin supplements Technical Bulletin EF&EC88-001; (TS88-001) dated January 18, 1988, and provides information on critical adjustments that, if not made properly, can cause customer complaints of intermittent stalling when coming to a stop. Please update bulletin EF&QC88-001; by hand with these specifications. In order for the electronic idle speed control system to perform properly, it is essential that the following adjustments be checked and set to the specifications listed on any vehicle with complaints of improper idle. The Base Idle Speed and the Throttle Switch Adjustment specifications have been modified for vehicles with less than 3000 miles. BASE IDLE SPEED Vehicle Mileage Specifications* Less than 3000 miles M/T 680 RPM A/T 600 RPM (in "D" position) Above 3000 miles M/T 750 RPM A/T 670 RPM (in "D" position) *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 4 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Base Idle Speed must NOT be set ABOVE thses specifications. THROTTLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Specifications* (For all mileages) M/T Base Idle Speed + 300-450 RPM A/T Idle Speed in Neutral + 300-450 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; Page 5 for adjustment procedure. IMPORTANT: The Throttle Switch must not be set above 1200 RPM. DASH POT ADJUSTMENT Dash Pot Touch Speed* 2600-3000 RPM *Refer to bulletin EF&EC88-001; page 6 for adjustment procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 864 6. Remove upper and lower dust covers. Use a torx wrench. 7. Loosen timing belt tension lock nut and rotate tension clock- wise. Then tighten tensioner lock nut. 8. Mark rotating direction mark on timing belt and Remove timing belt. CAUTION: After removing timing belt, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately because valves will hit piston heads. 9. Remove belt tensioner and return spring. 10. Inspect the condition of belt tensioner and tensioner spring. INSTALLATION 1. Confirm that No.1 cylinder is set at T.D.C. on its compression stroke. Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 2553 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Page 4062 Ignition Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Ignition switch replacement 1. Remove the four upper and lower shell cover retaining screws, then the shell covers. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screw from steering lock, Fig. 2. 4. Remove switch. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Locations Air Induction Valve Solenoid: Locations Engine & Emission Control Components. Top Of Engine, Right Front Applicable to: 1987 Sentra w/E16i Engine Page 1752 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Page 421 Page 2656 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 534 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 660 Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection Prior to checking and adjusting wheel alignment angles, perform the following checks: 1. Check tire pressures and adjust as needed. 2. Ensure tires are of the proper size and that tires are properly matched. 3. Ensure wheel bearings (front and rear) are properly adjusted. 4. Check steering gear adjustment and ensure that steering gear is properly secured to frame. 5. Inspect steering linkage and suspension components for damage and wear, and repair or replace components as needed. 6. Measure vehicle ride height with vehicle unloaded, and ensure springs are not collapsed. 7. Place unladen vehicle on suitable alignment rack following manufacturer's instructions, then jounce vehicle several times to settle suspension. 8. Check and correct rear wheel camber and toe first, if applicable, then check and correct front suspension angles in in the following order: caster and kingpin inclination, camber, toe setting and turning angle (toe-out on turns). Page 1192 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Idle Speed Control Valve: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4271 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Page 2867 Wiring Diagram Page 86 240SX (S13) KA24E 240SX (S13) KA24DE 240SX Convertible (S13) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E Page 1889 Page 2114 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 2215 Ignition Rotor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Rotor 1. Remove the screws securing the distributor cap to the distributor. 2. Confirm that the rotor does not turn on the distributor shaft. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Visually check the rotor for signs of "Burn Through" from the electrode to the distributor shaft. 5. Check the input (center) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 6. Check the output (outer) contact for excessive carbon build-up and corrosion. 7. Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between the input (center) electrode and the output (outer) electrode. Replace the rotor if it fails the above tests. Page 292 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 2106 Page 1633 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation The water temperature sensor, located on the front side of the intake manifold, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the E.C.U. This part employs a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a temperature rise. Page 5001 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 5179 Interior Moulding / Trim: Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Care of Leather Trim Models All Models Section Body & Frame Classification BF91-014 Bulletin No. NTB91-051 Date May 23, 1991 CARE OF LEATHER TRIM APPLIED MODELS: All Models Equipped With Leather Trim SERVICE INFORMATION: Nissan currently uses Cow Hide on all vehicles equipped with Leather Interior Trim (excluding certain 1988 Maximas which were equipped with Suede Seats). This bulletin refers only to those vehicles equipped with Cow Hide Leather Interior Trim. Suede seat covers are made of Pig Skin and should be cared for according to the instructions provided in the U11 Maxima Seat Care Kit (P/N 999M1-U8000). Leather is typically used on seat surfaces, trim pieces, steering wheels, and shift knobs in Nissan Vehicles. Maintaining a high quality appearance is best achieved by using the procedures indicated below. 1. Occasionally, loose dust should be removed from the interior trim and seat surfaces using a vacuum cleaner or a soft brush. The leather surfaces should be wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 2. Some leather trim, such as the leather wrapped steering wheel, may become grayish in color with use. The original condition may be restored by rubbing the affected area with a clean soft cloth dampened in a mild soap solution, and then wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 3. Leather seat surfaces may be regularly coated with a leather conditioner such as saddle soap. Cautions: Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar product on leather trim. Never use car wax on leather trim. Never use fabric protectors on leather trim unless recommended by the manufacturer. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the leather trim. Front Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Front Fig. 15 Windshield wiper system (typical) 1. Remove wiper arms by raising the arms off the glass and removing locknut. 2. Disconnect electrical connector from motor. 3. Remove top grille retaining screws and top grille, where possible, to gain access to wiper linkage. 4. Remove wiper motor mounting bolts. 5. Pull motor away from firewall if necessary to gain access. Disconnect motor shaft from linkage taking care not to bend linkage. 6. Remove wiper motor. 7. Remove flange nuts or screws holding pivot to top cowl panel and remove linkage. To install, reverse procedure. See Fig. 15 for typical installation. Page 4015 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 1403 2. Ensure that marks on camshaft sprocket and upper front cover and marks on crankshaft sprocket and lower front cover are properly aligned. 3. Temporarily install tensioner and return spring. 4. Rotate tensioner clockwise about 70° to 80° and temporarily tighten lock nut. 5. Set timing belt. a. Ensure that timing belt and sprockets are clean and free of oil or water. Do not bend timing belt tightly. b. Install timing belt with rotating direction mark facing engine rotating direction. c. Ensure that timing belt is not loose around jack shaft and camshaft sprockets. 6. Loosen tensioner lock nut so that tensioner pushes on timing belt. 7. Turn camshaft sprocket about 20° (2 cogs) clockwise. NOTE: Ensure that all spark plugs are removed. 8. Tighten nut while preventing tensioner from turning in "free" direction. Tensioner lock nut: 16 - 21 N.m (12 - 15 ft.lbs.) 9. Install crank sprocket plate and upper and lower dust covers. Page 5452 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 758 Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn cover and steering wheel. 3. Remove steering column shell covers. 4. Disconnect switch electrical connections. 5. For light switch or wiper switch replacement it is not necessary to remove combination switch base. 6. Remove retaining screw and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. Page 1915 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2220 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Page 2763 Air Induction Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Check it for electric continuity. Continuity should exist. 2. Check the solenoid valve for normal operation. Supply it with battery voltage, and check whether there is continuity between ports A, B and C Page 5180 Interior Moulding / Trim: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Squeak and Rattle Repair Supplies Classification: BT98-041 Reference: NTB98-110 Date: January 15, 1999 NISSAN VEHICLE SQUEAK AND RATTLE MATERIALS APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION In support of the recent Squeak and Rattle Seminars, this bulletin provides part numbers, descriptions, dimensions and recommended uses for materials which can be used to help eliminate noises in vehicle interior components. Many of these part numbers have been referenced in recently released squeak and rattle bulletins. These materials will also be included in a Squeak and Rattle Repair Kit that will be sent to every dealer in early 1999. The materials are currently available and can be ordered separately as necessary for squeak and rattle repairs. Please see the Parts Information Section for detailed parts information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference Nissan Claims Bulletin WB/98-021a and Section "UX - Squeak & Rattle Repairs" of the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" for complete details regarding policy and claims coding applicable to the repair of squeaks and rattles. Expense Details: Pro-rate the bulk "Squeak & Rattle Repairs" material(s) and claim only the amount that is actually used in the repair. Claim this amount using Expense Code: 022. Do not claim the repair material(s) part number(s) on the claims. Page 158 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 4996 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Page 5203 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 1552 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Update Reference: NTB95-111 Date: November 7, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin provides supplemental information to NTB95-085a dated September 22, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES: 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 24OSX (S13) 1989-91* 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91* 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991* 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) * See VIN Information in this bulletin for the ending serial numbers for 1991 models. ADDITIONAL AND AMENDED INFORMATION This bulletin contains information regarding the following: ^ Additional campaign background information ^ SERVICE-COMM information ^ Service Procedure: - Button replacement tips - Switch removal and installation ^ Vehicle specific information, VIN information for 1986.5 and 1991 models ^ 1987-1989 vehicle and warranty claims information ^ Parts Information: - Color mix by model. ADDITIONAL CAMPAIGN BACKGROUND INFORMATION Industry wide, the Takata Seat Belt Campaign affects approximately 10,000,000 vehicles produced by most of the Japanese auto manufacturers. Nissan's share is about 2,000,000 cars and trucks. All companies conducting the campaign are using a button replacement or buckle modification as the primary repair, with buckle replacement only as necessary. This strategy has been employed to expedite completion of the campaign because of the limited availability of Takata supplied replacement buckle assemblies. If this campaign were to require a 100% buckle assembly replacement, it would take two to three times as long to complete, which could lead to a great deal of customer dissatisfaction. Page 3007 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1059 Page 768 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3207 Idle Speed Control Valve: Description and Operation Idle speed control valve is a rotary solenoid valve. It receives a pulse signal from E.C.U. which determines the position of slider, thereby varying bypass air quantity. Idle speed control valve has additional functions below. 1. Idle-up after cold start (Air regulator) 2. Idle speed feedback control (A.A.C. valve) 3. Idle-up for air conditioner and power steering (F.I.C.D.) 4. Deceleration vacuum control (Dash pot, A.B. valve & Boost control valve) Page 4741 b. Evacuate and recharge system, then check for leaks. Description and Operation Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 37 Evaporative emission system. (Typical) Refer to Fig. 37 for a typical evaporative emission system. Complete system schematics are located in ``Vacuum Hose Routings.'' This system reduces hydrocarbon emissions from the fuel system by the use of activated charcoal in the carbon canister. With the engine off, fuel vapor from the fuel tank is led into the carbon for storage. The vapor is retained in the canister until it is moved by air drawn through the bottom of the canister to the intake manifold with the engine running. The purge control valve is closed when the engine is running at idle. A small portion of the stored vapor flows through the constant purge orifice into the intake manifold. As engine speed increases and throttle vacuum rises, the purge control valve opens and vapor is drawn into the manifold through both the main and constant purge orifices. Description and Operation Distributor Cap: Description and Operation Distributor Cap The distributor cap is used to make the connection between the rotor and the correct spark plug wire. High tension current from the rotor is distributed to the towers of the distributor cap at a pre-set sequence and then to the spark plug wires which carry the current on to the spark plugs. Page 1755 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Specifications Fig. 2 Temperature Sensors Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1932 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Technical Service Bulletin # EF88001 Date: 880118 Fuel - Improved Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle 1987 & 1988 Sentra Models and Pulsar Engine Fuel & Section Emission Control Classification EF&EC88-001; Bulletin No. TS88-001 Date January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE NOTE: This TSB has been updated by tsb EF & EC 88013 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints or improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD Wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. Following the sequence below, use the attached procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Locations Citizens Band Radio (CB): Locations A/C Relay Connector (2WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Relay Connector (4WD): 3M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment A/C Switch Connector (2WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P A/C Switch Connector (4WD): 134M, Under LH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (2WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Acceleration Cut Timer Connector (4WD): 148M, Under RH Side Of I/P Air Flow Meter Connector (4WD): 68M, On Throttle Body Air Flow Meter & Harness Connector: On Throttle Body AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 66M, Front Of Engine AIV Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 66M, Front Of Engine A/T Indicator Illumination Connector (Sedan): 4B, LH Fender Apron Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Pillar To Back Door Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 3D, Upper LH Quarter Back Door Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 11D, On Inner Rear Quarter Panel Back Door Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 5D, On Rear of Back Door Back-Up Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 5D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Hatchback): 9D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp RH Connector (Wagon): 10D, In Rear Of of Back Door Back-Up Lamp Switch Connector: 1E, Rear Of Engine Blower Motor Connector (2WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Blower Motor Connector (4WD): 139M, Under RH Side Of I/P Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 10B, Inner LH Quarter Body Ground Connector (Coupe): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Hatchback): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Sedan): 17B, At RH Side Of Tail Panel Body Ground Connector (Wagon): 17B, At RH Side Inner Quarter Panel Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector (4WD): 55M, LH Fender Apron Bulb Check Relay Connector (2WD): 14M, RH Fender Apron Check Connector (2WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Check Connector (4WD): 144M, Under LH Side Of I/P Cigar Lighter Connector: 10I, At Cigar Lighter Circuit Breaker Connector (4WD): 103M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clearance Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 45M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clearance Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 23M, At Clearance Lamp Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (2WD): 118M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Interlock Switch Connector (4WD): 118M Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (2WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Clutch Switch Connector (4WD): 116M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Flasher Unit Connector (4WD): 104M, Under LH Side Of I/P Combination Meter Connector (w/Tach): 6I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector (Less Tach): 7I, Behind Instrument Cluster Combination Meter Connector: 8I, Behind Instrument Cluster Compressor Connector (2WD): 28M, At Compressor Compressor Connector (4WD): 28M, At Compressor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (2WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Connector (4WD): 27M, At Fan Motor Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (2WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Condenser Fan Motor Relay Connector (4WD): 2M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Crank Angle Sensor & Harness Connector: LH Rear of Engine Crank Angle Sensor Connector (2WD): 63M, At Distributor Crank Angle Sensor Connector (4WD): 63M, At Distributor Diode Connector (2WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Diode Connector (4WD): 110M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (4WD): 111M, Under LH Side Of I/P Door Harness Connector (2WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Page 916 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Level Checking/Precautions Models: 1987-89 Sentra & Pulsar Section: Automatic Transmission Classification: AT89-008 Bulletin No.: TS89-091 Date: June 30, 1989 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL SERVICE INFORMATION As with all Nissan vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (and as specified in all Nissan Owner's and Service Manuals), it is especially important that the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) for the 3-speed RL3F01A automatic transmission (used on 1987-1989 Sentra and Pulsar XE models) be maintained at the proper level. CAUTION: Both overfilling and underfilling may cause damage to the transmission. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Vibration Correction Classification: BR94-002 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB94-012 Models: All models Date: February 3, 1993 BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY APPLIED MODELS: All Models GENERAL INFORMATION: Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. POSSIBLE CAUSE OF BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY A brake judder/steering wheel shimmy incident may develop in any vehicle if the following series of events occur: Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Page 4779 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing and Notes Classification: EL93-028 Section: Electrical System Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB93-161 Models: All Models Date: November 5, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Electronic control units (ECU's) control the operation of numerous electrical systems and components on Nissan vehicles. The ECU's do this by either controlling the supply voltage or ground path of an electrical component. The following is an explanation of how these systems work and what precautions should be taken while performing diagnostic procedures. Systems controlled by electronic control units have three (3) basic requirements, Inputs, Controller Logic and Outputs. Inputs Sensors and switches provide electrical signals to the control unit. These signals are provided to the ECU to inform it of various vehicle operating conditions. The electrical inputs can be either analog or digital signals. However, all of the signals are converted to digital signals before the ECU can process the information. Control Logic The ECU uses the electrical input signals to determine what the system should do. This decision may be based on a few or many inputs. After processing the information the ECU will provide a signal (output) to various electrical components. Outputs The signal that the ECU puts out to an electrical component (actuator) is called the output. These output signals are what operate and control the system. Digital Input Signals Page 2135 Page 4837 Fig. 335b A/C switch & power steering oil pressure switch circuit diagnosis. Page 3297 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4813 Page 4246 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 608 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 2363 Fig. 303c Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 1437 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2987 Page 3029 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) A/C - White Flakes From Registers Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes From Registers Classification: HA93-014 Reference: NTB93-132 Date: September 12, 1993 WHITE FLAKES FROM VENTS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Sentra (B13) and Altima (U13) APPLIED DATE(S): Sentra built before 7/29/93 Altima built before 7/29/93 SERVICE INFORMATION Some air conditioning units may exhibit white flakes blowing from the vents for a short time when the air conditioning is first turned on. The flakes are 1 mm or less in diameter and fall on interior surfaces like a light snow. This incident can be resolved by replacing the evaporator with an improved unit according to the procedure below. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the appropriate Service Manual instructions to replace the evaporator with the countermeasure unit listed on the following page (there is no new part number -- check for the proper date stamp indicated in the Parts Information section). When installing the new evaporator into the vehicle, make sure that the evaporator case drain tube is correctly aligned to the drain hose and that there are no obstructions. NOTE: To minimize the flakes remaining in the heater and air conditioning system, vacuum or blow out with compressed air any visible flakes in the heater assembly before reinstalling the new evaporator assembly. Warm soapy water may be used to clean the inside of the evaporator case, heater case, and all ductwork. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4408 Radius Arm: Service and Repair Parallel and Radius Link 2WD SENTRA When replacing parallel link and/or radius rod, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints, noting the following: 1. Before removing parallel link attaching bolts, scribe alignment marks on toe adjusting pin and frame. 2. When installing parallel link, install ones with green mark in front and ones with blue mark in rear. 3. When installing radius rod rubber bushings and/or clamps, ensure proper direction. Page 4012 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1827 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT Located under the R.F. seat. IGNITION WIRES Routed from the ignition coil to the distributor cap and from the distributor, along side the valve cover, to the spark plugs. NUMBER ONE (1) SPARK PLUG Located at the front of the cylinder bank. IGNITION COIL Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. POWER TRANSISTOR Located on the front of the L.H. strut tower. THROTTLE SENSOR Located on the throttle chamber at the butterfly. Page 2024 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 2672 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Page 4935 There are four different customized letters for Nissan owners. The sample letter below, for 19861988 owners, is typical of the letter content and includes the information for the lifetime limited warranty extension. Letter # 1 - 1986-1988 Nissan Owners - 3PA IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL NOTICE Dear Nissan Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the defect provisions of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Our records indicate that you are the owner of the Nissan vehicle indicated above. Nissan has determined that some front seat belt release buttons in certain front lap/shoulder belts have broken, or may break in the future. Your seat belt buckle release button is made of orange/red plastic and is marked "Press." If the button breaks, pieces may fall into the buckle assembly. If this occurs, the buckle may not operate properly, thereby creating a safety risk. To prevent this problem from occurring, Nissan will replace the release button in both front seat buckles free of charge, whether or not they are broken. The release buttons in the rear seat belt buckles in passenger vehicles, and in the center buckle in pickup trucks equipped with a bench seat are made of a different material, and they are not subject to this campaign. In addition, Nissan is extending the warranty on all seat belts in your vehicle for the life of the vehicle. See the enclosed warranty statement for details. This means that if any conditions covered by the seat belt warranty are found at any time now or in the future, your Nissan dealer will correct these conditions free of charge. It is very important that you schedule your Nissan for button replacement as soon as possible. If your seat belt buckle doesn't operate properly, you might not be able to use your seat belt until it is repaired. Seat belt use is required by law in almost all states. Also, if you do not use your seat belt, and you are in a collision, your chances of being killed or seriously injured are much higher than if you are wearing your seat belt. Nissan urges you to use your seat belt at all times, and to contact your dealer immediately for button replacement, especially if you notice that a button is broken, or if you experience any problems with seat belt operation. Even if the buttons are not broken, they should be replaced. WHAT YOU SHOULD DO Contact your Nissan dealer and make an appointment for replacement of your front seat belt release buttons. The dealer will replace both front seat belt release buttons free of charge. This replacement will take approximately one hour, but your dealer may require your vehicle for a longer period of time based on their work schedule. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment. Instructions have been sent to your Nissan dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90248-0191. The toll free telephone number is 1-800-289-0628. If you reside in Hawaii, please call (808) 836-0888. You may also contact the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590 or call the toll-free auto safety hotline at 1-800-424-9393. (Washington, D.C. area residents may call 202-366-0123.) Thank you for your cooperation. We are indeed sorry for any inconvenience you might experience. Page 3117 Dashpot: Testing and Inspection 1. The idle speed of the engine must be well tuned, and the engine warmed up to normal operation. 2. Turn the throttle valve by hand, and read the engine speed when the dash pot just touches the adjusting screw. Dash pot touch speed: 2,400 ± 400 rpm 3. If out of the specification, adjust it by turning the adjusting screw. Page 5355 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 4814 Page 4428 Fig. 2 Rear Suspension (Part 2 Of 2). 4WD Models Fig. 3 Rear Suspension. Page 2717 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2644 Idle Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 896 Hose/Line HVAC: Testing and Inspection 1. A restricted suction line is indicated by low suction pressure at the compressor, low discharge pressure and little or no cooling. 2. A restricted discharge line will usually cause the pressure relief valve to open. 3. A restricted liquid line will cause low suction and discharge pressures and little or no cooling. Page 1743 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 3003 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Page 1813 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 4934 24. Return the seat to its original position. If the seat was removed, check the seat track locking operation. Both seat rails should latch securely in the full forward, middle and rearward positions. 25. Inspect the vehicle's interior to ensure it is clean and free of damage. Also make sure the floor mats are positioned properly if they were removed. Vehicle Specific Information VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 200 SX (1986.5-88) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Seat bolt torque 15-20 ft-lbs (21-26 Nm, 2.1-2.7kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) 240SX (1989-91) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Seat mounting nut torque 19-24 ft-lbs (25-32 Nm, 2.6-3.3 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) TRUCK (1988-91) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) Note The center seat belt position buckle on bench seat equipped trucks is not affected by this campaign. PATHFINDER (1988-91) The connector for the seat belt buckle is located under the center console and can be pulled out from under the console by gently lifting the edge of the console where the wires go under the edge. Always replace the connector after repairing the seat belt buckle. Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) VAN (C22) (1987-90) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA (1987-89, except Coupe) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 26-34 ft-lbs (35.8-45.6 Nm, 3.7-4.7 kg-m) SENTRA Coupe (1989-90) Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA Sedan/Station Wagon (1990) Remove center console to disconnect the seat belt buckle switch. Also remove the two rear seat mounting bolts to put slack in the carpet to make the switch wire routing easier. Seat bolt torque 18-23 ft-lbs (25-31 Nm, 2.5-3.2 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) SENTRA 2-Door (1991) Seat bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Buckle mounting bolt torque 32-41 ft-lbs (43-55 Nm, 4.4-5.6 kg-m) Sample Owner's Letter SAMPLE OWNER'S LETTER Page 412 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3840 Improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw behind or below the dash. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: A. Connectors which are inaccessible for diagnosis probing. B. Connectors which may not fully be seated. C. Wiring harness which are not long enough and are being stressed during engine vibrations or rocking. D. Wires laying across brackets or moving components. E. Loose dirty or corroded ground wires. F. Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components underhood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to the GROUND INSPECTION described later.) Once you have assured the system is properly grounded check for loose connections by gently shaking the wiring or component as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams in the service manual, inspect the wiring for continuity. Under Seating Area's If a harness is not clamped properly or has too much slack, vehicle vibration could cause the wiring to become pinched by seat components such as slide guides. If the wiring runs under seating areas inspect wiring routing for possible damage or pinching. 2. Heat Sensitive If owner indicates the problem occurs during hot weather or after the car has sat for a short period of time, you will want to check for a heat sensitive Testing and Inspection Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Inhale air through the cap. A slight resistance accompanied by valve clicks indicates that valve is in good mechanical condition. Note also that, by further inhaling air, the resistance should be disappeared with valve clicks. 3. If valve is clogged, or if no resistance is felt, replace cap as an assembly. Page 3444 Power Transistor: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test Using an ohm meter, check for continuity between terminals as per the image. Replace power transistor if it fails the above tests. Page 2012 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 4429 3. Set strut assembly in vise then loosen piston rod locknut. Loosen no not remove. 4. Compress coil spring using a suitable coil spring compression tool. 5. Remove piston rod locknut. 6. Remove spring components from strut. 7. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: Fig. 6 Spring Installation Direction. 1987-90 Models Fig. 7 Spring Installation Direction. 1991-92 Models Fig. 8 Installing Coil Spring. 1987-90 Models a. Install coil spring in correct direction, Figs. 6 and 7. b. Position coil spring in lower spring seat as shown, Figs. 7 and 8. Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair" before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 75 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE 300ZX (Z32) VG30DETT Page 294 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2181 Idle Speed: Adjustments Midpoint of range given is the preferred setting speed. 1981-83 L28 Turbo, 1983 E15 Turbo: With engine at operating temperature, race several times and return to idle. Disconnect idle control valve and check speed against specified value. 1984-87 E16 2V Federal: With engine at operating temperature, disconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Race engine several times and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect vacuum control modulator harness. Restart engine, race several times, and check idle speed against specified value. 1987-90 E16 FI, GA16; 1989-90 KA24: With engine at operating temperature disconnect throttle sensor harness connector. Start engine and set idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle speed is within checking speed. Turn on AC and verify that idle increases to specified value. 1984-89 VG30 Turbo, 1987-89 CA16, CA18 DOHC: With engine at operating temperature, turn ignition off and disconnect automatic air control (AAC) valve harness. Start engine and set idle speed to specified value. Switch engine off and reconnect harness. Restart engine and check idle speed against specified value. Turn AC on and verify that speed-up is at specified value. All engines, turn AC on and verify that speed-up speed is specified value. 1987-88 CA18 Turbo, 1987-89 CA20 Stanza: Disconnect throttle valve and automatic air control valve harness. Start engine and adjust idle to specified setting speed. Turn engine off, reconnect harness and restart engine. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1989-90 VG30 Maxima: Turn diagnostic connector on ECU fully clockwise and adjust idle to specified value. Verify that idle is at specified checking speed. 1990 300ZX: Attach inductive clamp to loop wire on power transistor behind upper radiator hose. Set idle to specified value. Page 799 Idle Speed: Specifications Base Idle Speed Controlled Idle Speed Adjusted with Throttle Sensor disconnected. Manual Transmission 750 +/- 25 rpm 800 +/- 100 rpm Automatic Transmission 670 +/- 25 rpm 700 +/- 100 rpm In "D" Position. Page 4161 Fuse Block: Fuse and Fusible Link Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Service and Repair Multi-Function Thermal Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair The thermo control temperature sensor is a solid state thermistor connected to the evaporator core and connected to the control through the wiring harness. If necessary to replace sensor, refer to ``Evaporator and Expansion Valve, Replace.'' 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove screws securing glove box, then remove glove box. 3. Disconnect wiring harness connector to thermo switch, then remove screws securing switch to air intake housing and remove switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 3536 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Recommended Fluid Nissan ATF Or DEXRON ATF Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications System Capacity System Capacity Refrigerant Capacity 1.8-2.0 lb (US) Refrigerant Type R-12 Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Model RN4F31A 5.75 pt (US) Model RS4F31A 5.875 pt (US) Page 4791 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Heater: Customer Interest Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. Page 31 Ignition Relay: Locations Ignition Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Campaign - Check Engine Light Technical Service Bulletin # EF88015 Date: 880825 Campaign - Check Engine Light Classification: Section: Engine Fuel & EF&EC88-015; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-098 Models: 1988 Pulsar SE & Stanza (California) Date: August 25, 1988 SPECIAL SERVICE CAMPAIGN CHECK ENGINE LIGHT 1988 PULSAR SE & STANZA SEDAN Introduction, Dealer Responsibitily and Parts Information All 1988 California model vehicles are equipped with a Check Engine Light which will come ON if the engine control unit (E.C.U.) detects improper operation of a monitored system. Under certain driving conditions, the light may come ON and the E.C.U. may have a malfunction code for the E.G.R. system (Code 32) even though the system is operating properly. A special sub-harness has been produced to correct this incident, and a Special Service Campaign is being conducted to install this harness. All owners of the affected vehicles will be notified by letter to bring their vehicles to a Nissan dealership for installation of the harness. The harness will be sent to the owner along with the letter. APPLIED MODELS: 1988 Pulsar SE (N13) (California) with Manual Transmissions 1988 Stanza (T12) (California) with-Manual Transmissions NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY INVOLVED: Approximately 2,100 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY 1. The dealership is responsible for installing the applicable sub-harness on each vehicle which falls within the range of this campaign. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles on dealership used car lots. FIGURE 1 2. The dealer must install the underhood label (Figure 1) next to the existing Emission Control Information label after the sub-harness has been installed. A supply of labels has been included with this Bulletin and additional labels are available through the Regional Office. FIGURE 2 3. On Pulsars only, the dealership must also install a label on the Electronic Control Unit (E.C.U.) to alert service personnel that a trouble code may Page 5375 FIGURE 1 4. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. NOTE: Installation of this sub-harness may result in a self diagnosis code of 35 appearing during future system diagnosis. This code is now normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Stanza Modification Procedure FIGURE 5 1. Disconnect the E.G.R. temperature sensor connector (24F) (Figure 5). 2. Install the countermeasure sub-harness between the E.C.C.S. harness and the exhaust gas temperature sensor connector. FIGURE 1 3. Apply the campaign completion label (Figure 1) to the underside of the hood. Warranty Instructions and Claim and Owner Letter Information WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS A Service Campaign Claim may be entered via DATANET. The Service Advisor must make certain that the owner's name, address, vehicle identification number, and PNC are listed correctly on the repair order to ensure accurate, readable information for claim submission. Dealers who are not yet on DATANET should submit a standard S-1-S Warranty Claim. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 4041 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reach under instrument panel and disconnect multi-pin connector from rear of switch. 3. Depress two switch retaining clips and push switch out of panel. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Page 5277 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Page 291 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 4586 5. Check bearing preload as follows: a. Place press load onto wheel hub shaft (approximately 5 tons). b. Spin knuckle several times in both directions. c. Ensure wheels bearings operate smoothly. Installation Reverse removal procedure to install. Page 255 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Change & Oil Filter Replacement Classification: Section: EM88-013 Engine Mechanical Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-078 Models: All Date: May 19, 1988 OIL CHANGE & OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION It is essential that all vehicles have the engine oil and oil filter replaced at the recommended mileage/time intervals as stated in the maintenance section of the appropriate Owner's/Service Manuals. If the service interval is extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time, the oil will continue to oxidize (increase in viscosity) and result in the formation of sludge. Excessive sludge may restrict the flow of oil to internal engine components resulting in accelerated wear and/or severe engine damage. If the service interval has been extended beyond the manufacturer's recommended mileage/time interval, inspect the oil pan drain hole for any evidence of oil sludge build-up (i.e. oil will not drain out). If a significant amount is present, sludge removal is recommended so that the fresh oil can circulate adequately through the engine parts. In severe cases of oil sludge build-up, it may be necessary to disassemble the engine in order to properly clear the oil passages. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3316 Page 2434 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Page 267 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 120 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 3413 Ignition Cable: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2403 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Antitheft - Security System Trouble Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 96-011 Date: 960117 Antitheft - Security System Trouble Diagnosis Classification: EL96-003 Reference: NTB96-011 Date: January 17, 1996 SENTRA/2OOSX VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (VSS) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS GUIDE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Sentra (B14) All 2OOSX (B14) SERVICE INFORMATION This service bulletin contains information regarding the VSS in the 1995 and later Sentra and 2OOSX. It details troubleshooting and diagnosing incidents that might arise with the VSS. PARTS INFORMATION VSS Service Parts Listing Table of Contents System Description System Operational Check Diagnostic Procedure # 1 No Response from remote control Diagnostic Procedure # 2 Doors do not lock with remote control Diagnostic Procedure # 3 Doors do not unlock with remote control Diagnostic Procedure # 4 System will not passive arm Diagnostic Procedure # 5 Clearance lights do not flash Diagnostic Procedure # 6 No sound from siren Diagnostic Procedure # 7 Console switch LED will not flash Diagnostic Procedure # 8 Interior light does not operate (with unlock or alarm) Page 2657 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2789 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Testing and Inspection Fig. 336 Neutral/clutch/inhibitor switch circuit diagnosis. Page 1543 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2140 Page 1788 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Wiring Diagram Page 4380 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 2124 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations 4WD Transfer Control System Components. On Shift Handle Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 4298 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 2954 Page 4929 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. Page 4286 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 752 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 590 ^ Toe-Out is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the rear (Figure 1b). ADJUSTMENTS 1. Toe should be the last alignment specification adjusted. Refer to the Front Axle (FA) and Rear Axle (RA) sections of the appropriate Service Manual to determine the proper locations to adjust the front and rear Toe. 2. Toe should be equal, side-to-side. 3. Toe-In When the specification is labeled "Toe-In" and dimensions are negative numbers (ie: -6 to -2 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 2). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-In specification = Toe-In wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-In specification = Toe-out wheel setting. Toe-Out EFI Control Relay ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Locations EFI Control Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4930 IMPORTANT Both the driver's and passenger buckles must be repaired or replaced as a pair to ensure color match as determined by using the decision tree as illustrated in this bulletin. Note This campaign does not include the rear seat belts of any vehicles, or the center belt in the Truck equipped with a bench seat. Passive front shoulder belts are also not affected. The release buttons in these buckles are made of a different material. IMPORTANT Please review the videotape that was previously sent to you. It will give a demonstration of the repair procedure. INSPECTION OF THE RETRACTOR MECHANISM The retractor should be checked for proper operation and the webbing should be inspected for fraying or chafing. If the webbing retractor does not Page 4256 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 682 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 5385 Enter the DATANET claim, or type the S-1-S claim using the following information: Dear Nissan Owner: Our records show that you are the owner of a 1988 Nissan Stanza or Pulsar SE equipped with a manual transmission. Nissan is very concerned about maintaining the highest level of owner satisfaction with our vehicles. We have discovered that the "check engine" light (illustrated below) may come on while driving your vehicle when nothing is actually wrong with the engine. The "check engine" light is part of a system on your vehicle to identify problems in the emission control system. If the light comes on, your vehicle is still driveable, but you should schedule your vehicle for service at a Nissan dealer as soon as possible. Nissan has developed a modification for your vehicle which will ensure that the "check engine" light only comes on if there is a problem. Any Nissan dealership can make this modification to your vehicle. You may make an appointment now to have this modification done or you may wait and have it serviced if the "check engine" light comes on. This service is free of charge whether you have it done now or if the light comes on at a later time. For your convenience, we have enclosed the electrical connector which the dealer will need to service your vehicle. We suggest you keep it in your vehicle so that it will be available if needed. Also attached are new insert pages for your vehicle's Owner's Manual. Please attach the inserts to pages 1-5 and 1-6, replacing the information already there. If you have any questions concerning this letter, please contact the Consumer Affairs Office at the appropriate Nissan Regional facility listed in your vehicle's Warranty Information Booklet. Please bring this notice with you when you keep your service appointment as it contains pre-printed claim information which will assist the dealer. If the dealer fails, or is unable to make the necessary repairs free of charge, you should immediately contact the Consumer Affairs Office as stated above. Or, you may contact the National Consumer Affairs Office, Nissan Motor Corporation in U.S.A. at P.O. Box 191, Gardena, California 90247. The telephone number is 1(800) NISSAN1. This is a voluntary program. In some states you may have other rights pursuant to law. We are sorry for any inconvenience this may cause you. Thank you very much for purchasing a Nissan and we hope to keep you very satisfied with your car. Page 719 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 219 Fan Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and remove A/C-heater control as outlined in ``Control Assembly, Replace.'' 2. Remove screws securing switch to control and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install and adjust control. Page 1765 Tires - Rotation Requirement Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Rotation Requirement Models 1987-88 Sentra Wagon & 1986-88 Stanza Wagon Section Wheel & Tire Classification WT87-005 Bulletin No. TS87-188 Date December 21, 1987 TIRE ROTATION REQUIREMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra Wagon with four-wheel-drive 1986-88 Stanza Wagon with four-wheel-drive SERVICE INFORMATION On all Sentra and Stanza Wagon four-wheel-drive models, it is very important that regular tire rotation be performed according to the maintenance schedules in the appropriate service manuals. On these vehicles, difficulty in shifting out of the four-wheel-drive mode could occur if the front tires are allowed to wear down more than the rear tires. A difference in tire circumference, front to rear, causes a strain at the driveline between front and rear axles. Page 977 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 1508 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # EF88013 Date: 880616 Fuel - Update For Diagnostic Procedure For Improper Idle Classification: EF&EC88-013; Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-087 Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar Date: June 16, 19881 E16i IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT APPLIED MODELS: 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon (B12) 1988 Sentra (all models) (B12) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION Page 495 9. Depress the seat belt release button and release the spring using a small screwdriver. WHITE PLASTIC EJECTOR BUCKLES 9a. These buckles were installed on 1986.5 and some 1987 models. The basic button replacement procedure is the same except for the button removal procedure. When the button is removed there is no spring attached to the button, Instead of lifting up and pulling to remove the button, it is necessary to push down so the retaining tabs are free of the buckle. Note Some 1987 200SX (S12) models may be equipped with both a white ejector plate buckle and a black ejector plate buckle on the same vehicle. This needs to be identified prior to starting repairs so the correct parts can be ordered. 10. Remove the button and spring by applying a slight upward force while pulling the button out of the buckle assembly while holding down the spring guide to prevent it from moving from its original position. A new spring is provided with the new button kit (except on the white ejector mechanism buckles, which do not use this spring). 11. Inspect the buckle assembly for dirt, dust, or other foreign material. If the buckle is contaminated with items such as soft drink, juice or other sticky material, replace both buckle assemblies. Do not attempt to clean the buckle. 12. If the buckle passes this inspection, remove any dust from the buckle using dry compressed air. Page 1549 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Speed Control The idle speed is controlled by the E.C.C.S. control unit, corresponding to the engine operating conditions. The E.C.C.S. control unit senses the engine condition and determines the best idle speed at each water temperature and gear position. The control unit then sends an electronic signal corresponding to the difference between the best idle speed and the actual idle speed to the A.A.C. valve. INPUT SIGNAL AND AIR FLOW The opening of the I.S.C. valve is controlled by an ON-duty signal fed to the opening solenoid. (When the opening solenoid is "ON", the closing solenoid is "OFF", and vice versa.) The longer the ON-duty signal on the opening solenoid, the greater the I.S.C. valve opening and the greater the amount of airflow. Locations Neutral/Park (NP) Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3023 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Brakes - Ammco On Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Ammco On Car Brake Lathe Operating Guidelines Classification: BR92-004 Section: Brake Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-062 Models: All models Date: August 18, 1992 AMMCO ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE OPERATING GUIDELINES APPLIED MODEL: All models SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure the best possible surface finish and least amount of run-out and rotor thickness variation when using the Ammco on-car brake lathe, the following guidelines should be observed. SERVICE PROCEDURE Before mounting the brake lathe on the vehicle ensure the following: 1. The V-way between the carriage and carriage jib must be clean and adjusted properly (see Operation Manual for adjustment procedure). Wipe off sliding surfaces with a soft cloth after each use. 2. The cutters and cutting bits must be tight in their mounts and positioned properly. Change cutting bits when they become dull. 3. When securing the adjustable mounting brackets to the caliper mount/knuckle the mounting surfaces must be smooth and free of burrs. 4. Make sure the adjustable mounting brackets are securely mounted to caliper mount/knuckle. There should be no movement between the cutting tool and the caliper mount/knuckle. Rotor Driving Unit Before using the drive unit ensure the following: Page 4207 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 580 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 3036 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4684 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair When installing new condenser, it is not necessary to add refrigerant oil when there are no signs of a major oil leak, except on the Sentra. When installing new condenser on Sentra that shows no sign of oil leak, add .3 oz. of new refrigerant oil. On all models that show signs of major oil leak, except 200SX, 300ZX or Sentra, add 1.7 oz. of new refrigerant oil. On Sentra and 300ZX that show signs of major oil leak, add 2 oz. of new refrigerant oil. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and discharge system refrigerant. 2. Remove radiator grille. 3. Disconnect refrigerant lines at condenser, plugging all openings. 4. Remove condenser cooling fan. 5. Remove radiator attaching bolts and nuts. 6. Remove condenser attaching bolts, then the condenser while pushing radiator toward engine. 7. Reverse procedure to install, evacuate and recharge system, then check for leaks. Page 4927 PARTS INFORMATION Note Parts information for other affected models will be supplied at a later date. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Page 1145 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high pressure tube and detects the power steering load, sending the load signal to the E.C.U. The E.C.U. then sends the idle-up signal to the I.S.C. valve. Page 1722 SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 4 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) GA16DE 5 SPEED M/T SENTRA (B13) SR20DE STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Page 343 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit. Page 3000 Page 1330 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belts Inspection 1. Inspect for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with new one. The belts should not touch the bottom of the pulley groove. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys. Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit. Inspect drive belt deflections when engine is cold. If engine is hot, wait 30 minutes or more and check deflections. Page 4053 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect brake lines from master cylinder. Plug lines and master cylinder ports. 2. Remove master cylinder retaining nuts and the master cylinder. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Page 5347 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Technical Service Bulletin # 88-152 Date: 981121 Tires - Vibration, Diagnosis & Out of Round Measurement Classification: WT88-003 Reference: TS88-152 Date: November 21, 1988 TIRE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Page 4367 Due to limited clearance, this machine cannot be used on the rear rotors of some vehicles. To resolve this issue, two (2) methods of repair are identified in the flow chart. Use this chart, as appropriate, when performing brake pad or rotor service. GENERAL BRAKE REPAIR GUIDELINES To properly perform brake repairs, it is important to observe the following. 1. Do not tighten wheel lug nuts with an impact wrench. Uneven or high torque applied to the lug bolts may distort the brake rotor and hub, resulting in increased rotor run-out. 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 467 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. A/C - Refrigerant Oil Recommendations Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Oil Recommendations Classification: HA91-002 Section: Heater And Air Conditioner Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB91-014 Models: ALL MODELS Date: FEBRUARY 14, 1991 A/C SYSTEM REFRIGERANT OIL APPLIED MODEL: All Models equipped with A/C System SERVICE INFORMATION: When service repairs on a Nissan A/C system require that lubricant be added to the system, please be advised that the recommended refrigerant oil for all Nissan A/C systems is SUNISO 5GS. This oil applies to all rotary, lateral piston, and variable displacement Nissan A/C compressors. SUNISO 5GS is available throughout the continental U.S. The name and location of the nearest SUNISO 5GS distributor may be obtained by contacting the Virginia KMP Corporation at 1-800-527-7960. Page 4022 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 5017 Parts Information: Antenna Rod Page 683 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3579 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1617 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Anti-Freeze Ethylene Glycol Base Page 628 DEFINITION: Partial (Figure 6A) or complete (Figure 6B) separation between the rubber and the tire cord, or between the layers of the tire cord. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge on the tire shoulder, and a longitudinal crack on the bottom of the grooves, possibly accompanied by a break through the rubber surface. Both are usually accompanied by localized wear in the tread above the separation. Chunks of Missing Tread Damage Description: Chunks of missing tread NISSAN CODE: 7D DEFINITION: Partial peeling of new tread (Figure 7). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tearing off, partial peeling or chipping of the tire tread. (NOTE: Tread rubber chipping caused by off-road driving is not warrantable.) Tread Cracking Damage Description: Tread Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7A Page 2634 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation The exhaust gas sensor, which is placed into the exhaust manifold, monitors the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas. The sensor has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The outer surface of the tube is exposed to exhaust gas, and the inner surface to atmosphere. The zirconia of the tube compares the oxygen density of exhaust gas with that of atmosphere, and generates electricity. In order to improve generating power of the zirconia, its tube is coated with platinum. The voltage is approximately 1V in a richer condition of the mixture ratio than the ideal air fuel ratio, while approximately 0V in leaner conditions. The radical change from 1V to 0V occurs at around the ideal mixture ratio. In this way, the exhaust gas sensor detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas and sends the signal of approximately 1V or 0V to the E.C.U. Page 3155 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 1214 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "FRONT SUSPENSION / COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES / AXLE BEARING AND KNUCKLE" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 4583 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Note: Preload adjustment of wheel bearing is not necessary. Rear Wheel Bearing 1. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to: 137 - 188 ft lbs (186 - 255 Nm) 2. Check bearing for smooth operation. 3. Check axial end play. Should be: .002in (0.05mm) or less Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2094 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3375 Page 716 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1436 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 2577 ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - E.F.I./Fuel Pump Relays Reversed Images Models: 1988-89 Sentra Section: Amendments Classification: AM89-011 Bulletin No.: TS89-060 Date: April 13,1989 E.F.I./FUEL PUMP RELAYS APPLIED MODELS: 1988-89 Sentra (B12) Pages EL-68 in the 1988 Sentra Service Manual (June 1987 (03) printing) and EL-73 in the 1989 Sentra Service Manual (July 1988 (05) printing), show an illustration with the E.F.I. Relay and the Fuel Pump Relay reversed. Please correct these illustrations by hand as shown. Front Wheel Alignment Alignment: Specifications Front Caster Angle + 11/12 to +2 5/12 deg Caster Angle Desired 1 2/3 deg Camber Angle -1 1/12 to + 5/12 deg Camber Angle Desired 3/4 deg Toe -.03 to +.05 in King Pin Inclination 14 2/3 in Page 2337 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E 300ZX (Z31) VG30ET 300ZX (Z32) VG30DE Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Type Plug Air Gap Plug Torque Standard Type BPR5ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Hot Type BPR4ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Cold Type BPR6ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Page 1528 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Classification: BT97-014 Reference: NTB97-060 Date: August 13, 1997 BUMPER REFINISHING TECHNIQUES Applied Vehicles: All models with plastic bumper covers (fascia) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin describes proper plastic bumper cover refinishing with specific paint manufacturer procedures and materials. For information on repairing bumpers refer to the 1992 Technical Bulletin book, page BF-31 for NTB92-043/BF92-013. When refinishing replacement plastic bumper covers (i.e. service parts), it is important to follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure exactly. Failure to do so may result with paint not fully adhering to the bumper, and with time, the paint not adhering to the bumper may peel off. The bumper covers contain mold release agents which must be removed prior to painting. If the bumper cover is not properly cleaned and prepped, the paint may not adhere. Please follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure for proper bumper preparation. NOTE: You can heat the bumper at 140°F for 45 minutes to bring the mold release agent to the surface. Allow the bumper cover to cool completely before cleaning. This cleaning (degreasing) is necessary to remove the mold release agent on the surface completely. The chart indicates which cover; polyurethane (PUR) or polypropylene (PP) is used on each model. The procedures and appropriate materials for each paint vendor are attached for your reference. If you should have any difficulty: ^ Obtaining materials ^ Following the published procedure ^ Obtaining a proper finish ^ If you are in a VOC regulated area Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Page 4576 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 1780 Engine Control Module: Specifications Fig. 303a Input/Output signal inspection chart. Page 4904 appointment date. Service Procedure Outline SERVICE PROCEDURE OUTLINE Illustrated is the button replacement guide for all vehicles. ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution ECCS (Engine Management) Relay: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Green or Blue Relay Caution Classification: EC95-014 Reference: NTB95-070 Date: July 5, 1995 GREEN OR BLUE (FUEL PUMP & A/C) RELAY CAUTION SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector. SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing the harness at any green or blue colored relay (Fuel pump & A/C) connector, observe the following pre-cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the relay is different than the orientation of the relay terminals in the harness connectors (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. NOTE: Use a circuit tester first to verify the terminals that are supplied with battery voltage. If battery voltage is connected to terminal 2, the ECM will be damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 2 connected to the ECM. Page 2957 Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Towing Information: All Technical Service Bulletins Towing Information - Updated Precautions M/T Vehicles Classification: GI88-023 Reference: TS88-150 Date: November 17, 1988 TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES APPLIED VEHICLES All Models 1987-1989 SERVICE INFORMATION The Service and Owner's Manuals state that speeds below 30 m.p.h. and distances of less than 40 miles should be observed when towing Manual or Automatic Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground. These restrictions should be observed when towing Automatic Transmission vehicles. However, the Factory informs us that the following limitations apply when towing Manual Transmission vehicles with four wheels on the ground (for example behind a motor home.) Tow forward only. Do not tow a Nissan vehicle backward. TOWING NISSAN MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES Page 2627 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Locations Fig. 28 Component location Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Shift Fork: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Page 848 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plugs for: ^ Improper gap ^ Carbon deposits ^ Cracked center electrode insulator ^ Burned or worn electrodes (may be caused by): ^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling ^ Fouled plug (may be caused by): ^ Rich fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires 2. Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded. Standard Type BCPR5ES-11 (NGK) Hot Type BCPR4ES-11 (NGK) Cold Type BCPR6ES-11 (NGK) Spark Plug Gap 3. Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. Electrode Gap: 0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm) Diagnostic Note Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair Diagnostic Note Whenever control cables are disconnected or heater case is disassembled for service, control cables and operating rods should be adjusted as outlined in adjustments. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Addendum Classification: 95V-103.002 Reference: NTB96-020 Date: February 7, 1996 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN UPDATE - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES APPLIED VEHICLES: BELT TYPE 200SX (S12) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (Except Center Belt Position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt 1991 (door mounted) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides supplemental button kit information. Refer to NTB95-085a, dated September 22, 1995, for complete service and claims information. PARTS INFORMATION Takata Buckle Type by Model Page 2356 Truck (D21) Z24i(4WD) Pathfinder (WD21) Z24i(2WD) Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Truck (D21) KA24E Truck/Pathfinder (D21/WD21) VG30i Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair" before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 4303 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 4025 Brake Shoe: Specifications Thickness Specifications Thickness Specifications Minimum Lining Thickness 0.059 in Page 3050 All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Page 5341 Seats: Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Care of Leather Trim Models All Models Section Body & Frame Classification BF91-014 Bulletin No. NTB91-051 Date May 23, 1991 CARE OF LEATHER TRIM APPLIED MODELS: All Models Equipped With Leather Trim SERVICE INFORMATION: Nissan currently uses Cow Hide on all vehicles equipped with Leather Interior Trim (excluding certain 1988 Maximas which were equipped with Suede Seats). This bulletin refers only to those vehicles equipped with Cow Hide Leather Interior Trim. Suede seat covers are made of Pig Skin and should be cared for according to the instructions provided in the U11 Maxima Seat Care Kit (P/N 999M1-U8000). Leather is typically used on seat surfaces, trim pieces, steering wheels, and shift knobs in Nissan Vehicles. Maintaining a high quality appearance is best achieved by using the procedures indicated below. 1. Occasionally, loose dust should be removed from the interior trim and seat surfaces using a vacuum cleaner or a soft brush. The leather surfaces should be wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 2. Some leather trim, such as the leather wrapped steering wheel, may become grayish in color with use. The original condition may be restored by rubbing the affected area with a clean soft cloth dampened in a mild soap solution, and then wiped clean with a soft dry cloth. 3. Leather seat surfaces may be regularly coated with a leather conditioner such as saddle soap. Cautions: Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar product on leather trim. Never use car wax on leather trim. Never use fabric protectors on leather trim unless recommended by the manufacturer. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the leather trim. Component EGR Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component 1. Check the solenoid valve for electric continuity, after disconnecting the harness connector. Continuity should exist. 2. Check the solenoid valve for normal operation, after disconnecting the harness connector and all the vacuum hoses. Supply the solenoid valve with battery voltage, and check whether there is continuity between ports A, B and C Page 2556 Stanza (T11) CA20E Stanza (T12) CA20E Stanza (U12) KA24E Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (2WD) Stanza Wagon (M10) CA20E (4WD) Truck (D21) Z24i(2WD) Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Page 2874 Fig. 8 EGR control valve. Fig. 9 EGR control valve. Page 2793 Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions a. After installation, check that mounting brackets and mounting insulator are free from undue stress. If any of above parts are not installed properly, excessive noises or vibrations may be transmitted to vehicle body. b. When connecting flanges, use a new gasket to eliminate gas leakage at the joint. c. Check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for unusual noises, with engine running. d. When connecting rear exhaust tube and Main Muffler, use Genuine Nissan Sealant "Exhaust Sealant Kit 20720-N2225", or an equivalent to eliminate gas leakage at the joint. Page 5257 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 2718 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Idle Speed Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.) Operation Classification: Section: Engine Fuel EF&EC88-017; Emission Control Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS88-115 Models: 1988 Sentra & Pulsar (E16i) Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED MODEL: 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16i SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. PARTS INFORMATION Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. PART DESCRIPTION 1988 PART NUMBER 1987 PART NUMBER E16i Mixture Heater 16174-61A61 16174-69A10 (B12/N13) Page 3955 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Page 5224 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. (1) Remove fuse for fuel pump. (2) Start the engine. (3) After the engine stalls, crank the engine twice or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. (4) Turn the ignition switch "OFF" and install fuse for fuel pump. Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Bumper - Cover Refinishing Technique Classification: BT97-014 Reference: NTB97-060 Date: August 13, 1997 BUMPER REFINISHING TECHNIQUES Applied Vehicles: All models with plastic bumper covers (fascia) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin describes proper plastic bumper cover refinishing with specific paint manufacturer procedures and materials. For information on repairing bumpers refer to the 1992 Technical Bulletin book, page BF-31 for NTB92-043/BF92-013. When refinishing replacement plastic bumper covers (i.e. service parts), it is important to follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure exactly. Failure to do so may result with paint not fully adhering to the bumper, and with time, the paint not adhering to the bumper may peel off. The bumper covers contain mold release agents which must be removed prior to painting. If the bumper cover is not properly cleaned and prepped, the paint may not adhere. Please follow the paint vendor's recommended procedure for proper bumper preparation. NOTE: You can heat the bumper at 140°F for 45 minutes to bring the mold release agent to the surface. Allow the bumper cover to cool completely before cleaning. This cleaning (degreasing) is necessary to remove the mold release agent on the surface completely. The chart indicates which cover; polyurethane (PUR) or polypropylene (PP) is used on each model. The procedures and appropriate materials for each paint vendor are attached for your reference. If you should have any difficulty: ^ Obtaining materials ^ Following the published procedure ^ Obtaining a proper finish ^ If you are in a VOC regulated area Page 1991 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2089 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2260 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 545 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 2626 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 1726 240SX (S14) KA24DE 280Z (S30) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28E 280ZX (S130) L28ET 810 L24E 300ZX (Z31) VG30E Page 4312 2. Turn wheels from straight-ahead position until the inner wheel is at the position specified for ``Toe-Out On Turns'' shown in Fig. 18. If the outer wheel reference angle is incorrect, check for damaged or improperly adjusted tie rods. Perform check in both left and right directions. 3. On models less rack and pinion steering, proceed as follows: a. Rotate steering to full lock in each direction. b. Adjust inner wheel ``Turning Angle'' to value specified in Fig. 18, by adjusting position of steering stop. c. With inner wheel adjusted to specifications, outer wheel turning angle should be as specified in Fig. 18. If outer wheel turning angle is incorrect, repair or replace steering linkage as needed. 4. On models with rack and pinion steering, proceed as follows: a. Turn steering to full lock and measure inner and outer wheel turning angles. b. If ``Turning Angles'' at full lock are not within specifications, Fig. 18, check for damaged steering linkage or improperly adjusted tie rods. c. If steering linkage and tie rods are satisfactory, check for improper rack or rack piston stroke and repair steering gear as needed. Rear Wheels The proper alignment of the rear suspension and wheels is essential for proper handling and to providing a reference for front wheel alignment. Always ensure that rear wheel alignment is within specifications prior to checking and adjusting front wheel alignment. CAMBER On models with independent rear suspension, rear wheel camber must be within specifications for proper vehicle handling and to prevent uneven tire wear. Rear camber cannot be adjusted. If rear camber is not within specifications, check for damaged or worn suspension components and deformed sheet metal, and repair as needed. Fig. 1 Measuring Toe-in TOE-IN On models with independent rear suspension, rear toe is the measurement of the rear wheels in relation to the vehicle centerline, Fig. 1. The leading edge of each rear wheel should toe-in slightly toward the vehicle centerline to ensure proper vehicle tracking. Rear toe should be inspected using suitable alignment gauges, following manufacturer's instructions. When checking or adjusting rear toe, always ensure that the amount that the left and right wheels toe-in is as nearly equal as possible. Fig. 6 Rear toe-in adjustment. 1986-88 Stanza Wagon, 1987-88 Sentra w/4WD similar 1986-88 Stanza Wagon & 1987-88 Sentra 4WD Rear toe-in is adjusted by rotating the cam bolts which secure the transverse link to the axle carrier, Fig. 6. 1. Measure total toe-in and toe-in for each wheel following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Scribe matching mark between cam and control arm, then loosen nut securing cam bolt. 3. Rotate cam bolt as needed, Fig. 6, to bring toe-in within specifications. Ensure that total toe-in is within specifications and divided equally between left and right wheels. Page 772 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Page 4361 2. Prevent contamination, such as rust, dirt, or metal chips between the hub and rotor mating surface. An uneven mating surface between the hub and rotor results in increased rotor run-out. Always check and clean the mating surfaces prior to resurfacing. 3. Use a sharp tip on the brake lathe when resurfacing a brake rotor. A dull or damaged cutting tip on the brake lathe causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 4. Use the largest silencer band possible when resurfacing the rotor. The silencer band reduces chatter during resurfacing. Chatter causes a rough surface cut with large ridges, which wear very rapidly. This rapid wear results in rotor thickness variation. 5. Ensure that the brake lathe cutting head operates properly and is calibrated by the manufacturer or servicing agent. A damaged or uncalibrated brake lathe cutting head can result in increased rotor run-out and/or thickness variation CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. 6. Prior to installation, lubricate the brake caliper slide pins and/or clips. Corrosion from lack of lubrication results in sticking caliper slide pins and reduced pad movement. The sticking of the caliper slide pins and reduced brake pad movement, increases the rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear results in increased brake rotor thickness variation 7. Inspect the caliper pin boots or plugs and replace, if necessary. Corrosion may develop on the caliper slide pins. This corrosion reduces caliper movement which increases the brake rotor wear rate. This increased brake rotor wear rate results in brake rotor thickness variation 8. Measure the brake rotor run-out after performing brake service. There are many reasons why brake rotor run-out may be above specification. To ensure that the brake rotor run-out is within specification, it is important to measure brake rotor run-out after every brake service NOTE: The Warranty Flat Rate Time includes time to perform run-out measurement 9. The On-Car brake lathe cutting head must be mounted properly. Do not mount the cutting head on one (1) knuckle and attempt to resurface both sides of the rotor from this one location. The On-Car Brake Lathe matches the rotor to the hub to achieve the least possible run-out. When the brake rotor is moved from the position in which it was resurfaced, this matching is lost. 10. Do not use harsh or corrosive chemicals to clean the wheels. Strong alkalis or acid-based cleaners degrade the surface finish on the caliper components and may, additionally attack the rotor surface, resulting in increased thickness variation. Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 5222 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 332 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 1325 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 585 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Page 2944 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3079 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Page 969 A Dangerous Trend By the most reliable estimates, the total ozone level in the Earth's upper atmosphere decreased about 2.5% between 1978 and 1985. A 1% loss of ozone results in an estimated 2% increase in the amount of ultraviolet radiation (UV) that reaches the surface of the earth. This has dangerous implications for life as we know it. A 2% increase in UV will increase the number of human deaths from skin cancer by approximately 5%. UV also increases the number of eye cataracts, causes damage to the human immune system, damages crops and marine life. The Montreal Protocol An agreement, called the Montreal Protocol, signed in 1987 by representatives of 31 countries including the United States, limits world production of CFCs to 1986 levels and calls for further reductions of 50% by 1999. Another International Conference will be held in June, 1990, with the likelihood that the schedule for a complete phase-out of CFCs will occur even earlier. This means that the supply of R12 refrigerant will decrease dramatically over the next few years and the cost will increase. Recycling Makes Good Sense It's already established that making sure CFCs are not vented to the atmosphere is essential for the environment. With the supply of R12 decreasing and the cost increasing, recycling all of the refrigerant you remove from vehicles during repairs or before a vehicle is crushed will make more and more economic sense. Page 2470 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 2762 Air Induction Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation Fig. 116 Air Injecton Valve (AIV) Operation The air injection valve system delivers secondary air to the exhaust manifold, utilizing a vacuum caused by exhaust pulsation in the exhaust manifold. Specific operating conditions are outlined in Fig. 116 Accessory Relay Ignition Relay: Locations Accessory Relay Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4052 bore is located, then the cylinder is a "fast fill" type. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to splash on painted surfaces. It will damage paint. Do not re-use drained brake fluid. It may have absorbed moisture, which can cause corrosion inside the brake system. Use only fresh DOT 3 fluid. Carefully monitor the brake fluid level at the master cylinder during the bleeding operation. BLEEDING PROCEDURE THAT SHOULD BE USED WHEN TFE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A "FAST FILL" CYLINDER: ^ To Bleed Air Out of Master Cylinder: 1. Carefully place a catch-pan underneath the master cylinder. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, carefully loosen the brake line at the primary bore of the master cylinder until fluid leaks out of the connection and the brake pedal goes to the floor. 4. Tighten the brake line. 5. Release the brake pedal slowly. 6. Wait 5 seconds (for the secondary piston to return all the way). 7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until clear brake fluid (no bubbles) comes out of the brake line at the primary bore of the master cylinder. 8. Perform the same procedure at the brake line of the master cylinder secondary bore. ^ To Bleed Air Out Of Lines, Wheel Cylinders and Calipers: --Bleed air in the following sequence: left rear wheel cylinder--right front caliper--right rear wheel cylinder--left front caliper 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to the air bleeder valve. Place the other end of the vinyl tube in an empty container. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal several times. 3. With the brake pedal fully depressed, open the bleeder valve to allow fluid to flow into the vinyl tube. 4. Continue depressing the brake pedal until it reaches the floor, then close the air bleeder valve. 5. Release the brake pedal slowly. 6. Wait 5 seconds (for the secondary piston to return all the way). 7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until clear brake fluid (no bubbles) comes out of the bleeder valve. BLEEDING PROCEDURE THAT SHOULD BE USED WHEN THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A STANDARD MASTER CYLINDER--NOT FAST FILL: In this case, the procedure is the same, except it is not necessary to wait 5 seconds each time after the bleeder valve is closed and the pressure is released from the brake pedal. Page 4347 13. Apply suitable sealing compound to contact surfaces between boot and cylinder, then install boot and boot clamps. Ensure boot clamps do not interfere with any other parts. Also, use caution not to twist boot. 14. Apply suitable grease to pinion bearing, then coat threads of housing plug with suitable locking compound. Install housing plug and stake in three places. 15. Place rear cover cap in neutral position by aligning mark toward front of vehicle. 16. Adjust pinion rotating torque as follows: a. Place gear in neutral position, then torque adjusting screw to 43 inch lbs. b. Loosen adjusting screw, then retorque to .43-1.74 inch lbs. c. Apply suitable locking compound to base of adjusting screw and locknut, then torque adjusting screw locknut to 7-11 ft. lbs. Ensure adjusting screw does not turn. d. Move rack over its entire stroke several times, then return to neutral position. e. Measure pinion rotating torque within a range of ±100° from neutral position. Rotating torque should be 7-11 inch lbs. f. If pinion rotating torque is not as specified, readjust as required. Page 3006 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2792 Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Heater: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. Page 688 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2000 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 2592 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 5064 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Fan Switch: Customer Interest A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Models All Models Section Heater & Air Conditioner Classification HA87-023 Bulletin No. TS87-190 Date December 21, 1987 HEATER-A/C BLOWER FAN SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan models equipped with heater only or heater and manual air conditioning. SERVICE INFORMATION In some vehicles, the blower fan for the heater/AC system may become inoperative or it may not operate in all blower speeds. The following test procedures may be used to diagnose and repair malfunctions in blower fan operation. SERVICE PROCEDURE BLOWER FAN CONDITION PERFORM TESTS DOES NOT OPERATE 1 and 2 ONLY OPERATES AT HIGHEST SPEED (# 4 POSITION) DOES NOT OPERATE IN ONE OF THE LOWER SPEED POSITIONS (1, 2 or 3) 1 and 3 TEST PROCEDURE #1: Page 4021 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 577 Adjustments Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Adjustments Throttle Wire Adjustment 1. Loosen throttle wire double nuts "A" and "B" on carburetor side. 2. With throttle drum set at "P1" (fully-open), move fitting "Q" fully in direction "T" and tighten nut "B" in direction U". 3. Reverse nut "B" 1.0 to 1.5 revolutions in direction "T", then tighten nut "A" securely. Throttle drum should be held at "P1". 4. Ensure that throttle wire stroke "L" is within specified range between full throttle and idle. Throttle wire stroke "L": 27.4 - 31.4 mm (1.079 - 1.236 in.) Page 4281 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Wrist Pin Diameter 0.7479 in Page 2320 SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (4WD) STANZA (T11) CA20E STANZA (T12) CA20E STANZA (U12) KA24E Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Type Plug Air Gap Plug Torque Standard Type BPR5ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Hot Type BPR4ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Cold Type BPR6ES-11 0.039-0.043 in 14 - 22 ft.lb Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Locations Fig. 20 Engine And Emission Control Parts Location Page 3192 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Maximum Resistance Per Cable 30 K ohms Page 2698 Inspection Procedure Page 4120 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Charging/Replacement Procedure CLASSIFICATION: EL94-001 REFERENCE: NTB94-009 DATE: MARCH 4, 1994 BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S) All SERVICE INFORMATION As the demands on the vehicle battery increase with the complexity of electrical systems, there is a need for a usable, consistent and repeatable procedure for determining the need for charging or replacement of vehicle batteries. It is the Dealer's responsibility to determine the condition/chargeability of a battery, prior to replacement of the battery. SERVICE PROCEDURE See the following illustrations for BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. Battery Charging/Replacement Procedure Page 2533 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Description and Operation Detonation Sensor: Description and Operation Fig. 44 Detonation control system. This system, Fig. 44, incorporates a detonation sensor to monitor detonation in each combustion chamber and send a corresponding signal to the control unit. The detonation control unit, located under the driver's seat, varies ignition timing to minimize detonation. Page 2566 Engine Control Module: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 2349 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Door Locks: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Section: Classification: BF90-003 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-036 Models: All models Date: April 12, 1990 Front door Page 5052 Diagnostic Procedure # 7 SYMPTOM: Console switch LED will not flash Diagnostic Procedure # 8 SYMPTOM: Interior light does not operate (with unlock or alarm). Page 2748 Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Valve Switch Fig. 14 Throttle valve switch The throttle valve switch is attached to the throttle chamber, Fig. 14, and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This switch has two sets of contact points. One set monitors the idle position and the other set monitors full throttle position. The idle contacts close when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and open when at any other throttle position. The full throttle contacts close only when the throttle valve is positioned at full throttle or more than 34 to 40° opening of the throttle valve. The contacts are open when the throttle valve is at any other position. The idle switch compensates for enrichment during idle and after idle, and sends fuel cut signal. The full throttle switch compensates for enrichment in full throttle. Page 1803 Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transaxle Fluid Capacity 6.6 qt (US) Approximate, Make final check with dipstick. Page 4260 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 1305 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Intake and Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment Adjustment must be made while engine is warm but not running. 1. Set No. 1 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (1), (2), (3) and (6). 2. Set No. 4 cylinder in top dead center on its compression stroke, and adjust valve clearance (4), (5), (7) and (8). Valve clearance: Intake and exhaust 0.28 mm (0.011 in) Tighten Pivot lock nut 16 - 21 N.m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb) Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 2157 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1962 Inspection Procedure Page 1476 Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Cover Bolts 4 - 5 ft.lb Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Synchronizer Hub: All Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Page 3263 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air Flow Meter Self-Cleaning Control System Air Flow Meter Self-cleaning Control After the engine is stopped, the E.C.C.S. control unit heats up the hot wire to approximately 1,000°C (1,832°F) to burn out dust which adhered to the hot wire. Self-cleaning will actuate when all the following conditions are met. Engine speed has exceeded 2,000 rpm before key is turned OFF. - Vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12 MPH) before key is turned OFF. - Water temperature is between 60°C (140°F) and 95°C (203°F). - Engine has been stopped by turning the ignition key OFF. (Not caused by engine stall.) The hot wire will be heated for an instant, once several seconds have passed after ignition key is turned OFF. Page 4299 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Inspection & Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Inspection & Adjustment Front Wheels Correct front wheel alignment is necessary to provide proper handling and to prevent uneven tire wear. To ensure correct alignment, angles should be checked, and if necessary corrected, in the following sequence: caster and kingpin inclination, camber, toe-setting, and the turning angle and toe-out on turns. Front wheel alignment should only be checked after ensuring that the rear wheels are properly aligned in relation to the vehicle centerline, as most equipment uses the rear wheels as reference for correct front wheel alignment. Front wheel alignment should be checked with the vehicle unladen, at normal ride height, and following equipment manufacturer's instructions. CASTER & KINGPIN INCLINATION Kingpin inclination is a function of the steering knuckle design and cannot be adjusted. Caster, the alignment angle which provides the self-centering steering effect, is only adjustable on truck models which do not use strut-type front suspensions. If caster or kingpin angle are not within specifications on models with strut-type front suspension, check suspension components and sheet metal for damage, distortion and excessive wear, and repair as needed. For caster adjustment On Pathfinder, Pickup and Van, refer to camber adjustment, as the caster and camber are both adjusted by inserting shims between the upper control arm spindle and the crossmember. CAMBER Fig. 4 Camber Adjusting Pin. Camber is adjusted by rotating the eccentric strut mounting pin, Fig. 12. The pin is factory installed with the flat portion facing down. If camber is not within specifications, the pin must removed and reinstalled with the flat portion facing up. 1. Check camber following equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. If camber is not within specifications, remove adjusting pin as outlined in strut replacement procedures, then install pin with flat side facing up and leave nut loose to allow adjustment. 3. Turn adjusting pin as needed to bring camber within specifications. One graduation of the adjusting pin changes camber by approximately 1/4°. 4. When camber is within specifications, hold adjusting pin and torque nut to 72-87 ft. lbs., then ensure camber is still within specifications. Fig. 1 Measuring Toe-in TOE SETTING The toe setting is the measurement of the wheels in relation to the vehicle centerline, Fig. 1. The leading edge of each wheel should toe-in or toe-out slightly in relation to the vehicle centerline to ensure proper vehicle tracking. Toe should be inspected using suitable alignment gauges, following manufacturer's instructions. When checking or adjusting toe, always ensure that the setting of the left and right wheels is as nearly equal as possible. Page 4786 Diagrams Component Locations Mirrors: Component Locations A/C Condenser Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl A/C Relay: Engine Compartment, RH Side Of Cowl Acceleration Cut Timer: Behind Dash, On Heater Housing Accessory Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Air Flow Meter: On Throttle Body AIV Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body AIV Control Solenoid Valve: Top Of Engine, Right Front Back Door Harness (Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (4WD Wagon): Rear Back Door Pillar Back Door Harness (Hatchback): Rear Back Door Pillar Body Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps Body Harness (Hatchback): Instrument Panel To Tail Lamps B.P T. Valve: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Bulb Check Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Carbon Canister: LH Side Of Cowl EFI Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block EFI Control Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column EGR Control Valve: In Intake Manifold EGR Canister Control Solenoid Valve: RH Side Front Of Engine Electric Fuel Pump: In Gas Tank Engine Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): On Engine Engine Harness (4WD Wagon): On Engine Exhaust Gas Sensor: In Exhaust Manifold Front Door Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Front Door Front Door Harness (4 WD Wagon): Front Door Fuel Filter: LH Side Of Cowl Near Carbon Canister Fuel Pump Relay: Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Fuse Block: Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Horn Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Idle Speed Control Valve: On Throttle Body Ignition Coil & Power Transistor: RH Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Ignition Relay (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, Left Of Steering Column Inhibitor Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Injector: Top Of Throttle Body Instrument Panel Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel Main Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Main Harness (4WD Wagon): Instrument Panel To Front Lamps Mixture Heater: Top Of Engine Near Throttle Body Operation Switch (4WD): On Shift Handle Pressure Regulator: On Throttle Body PTC Relay: RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Radiator Fan Relay: Engine Compartment, Left Front Fender Apron Near Battery Receiver Drier: LH Side Of Radiator Support, Near Battery Resistor: Behind I/P, On Heater Housing Room Lamp Harness (Sedan, Coupe & 2WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Room Lamp Harness (4WD Wagon): A-Pillar To Roof Stop lamp Switch: On Brake Lever Thermo Switch: Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Thermal Protector: On Top Of Compressor Transfer Control Relay (4WD): LH Side Of Cowl Near Hood Hinge Transfer Control Unit (4WD): Under Instrument Panel, LH Of Steering Column Water Temperature Sensor: Front RH Side Of Engine Wiper Amplifier: RH Side Of Cowl Wiper Motor: RH Side Of Cowl Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Brakes - AMMCO On Car Lathe Operating Guidlines Technical Service Bulletin # 92-062A Date: 990617 Brakes - AMMCO On Car Lathe Operating Guidlines REFERENCE: NTB92-062A CLASSIFICATION: BR92-004A DATE: June 17,1999 TITLE: AMMCO ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE OPERATING GUIDELINES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models This amended version of NTB92-062 adds a CAUTION and a NOTE to the Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB92-062. SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure the best possible surface finish and least amount of run-out and rotor thickness variation when using the Ammco on-car brake lathe, the following guidelines should be observed. Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE Before mounting the brake lathe on the vehicle ensure the following: 1. The V-way between the carriage and carriage gib must be clean and adjusted properly (see Operation Manual for adjustment procedure). Wipe off sliding surfaces with a soft cloth after each use. 2. The cutters and cutting bits must be tight in their mounts and positioned properly. Change cutting bits when they become dull. 3. When securing the adjustable mounting brackets to the caliper mount/knuckle the mounting surfaces must be smooth and free of burrs. 4. Make sure the adjustable mounting brackets are securely mounted to caliper mount/knuckle. There should be no movement between the cutting tool and the caliper mount/knuckle. ROTOR DRIVING UNIT Before using the drive unit ensure the following: Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Control Module Identification Models: Various Section: Engine Fuel & Emission Control Classification: EF & EC94-015 Bulletin No.: NTB94-097 Date: November 4, 1994 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) IDENTIFICATION SERVICE INFORMATION: This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to assure in verifying that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and has the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All vehicles have a label (see illustration above) that has the vendor part number on the ECM Cover. ALTIMA (U13) KA24DE AXXESS (M11) KA24E (2WD) Page 728 Page 1916 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 1445 Page 4561 DEFINITION: Separation between the tread rubber and tire cord materials (Figure 9A), or between the tire cord ply layers (Figure 9B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for tread separation at the tire shoulder area and the corresponding location inside the tire. There should be no evidence of accidental injury by sharp, perforating objects (e.g., screws, nails). Open Splice Damage Description: Open Splice NISSAN CODE: 7C DEFINITION: An open area of the tire tread where the tread rubbers overlap (Figure 10). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check the edge of the splice opening; it will have a beveled appearance. The cracks do not penetrate through the tire cord, and the possibility of air leakage does not exist. Out of Round Damage Description: Out of Round NISSAN CODE: 7P DEFINITION: Excessive vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition of the tire with the rim. General Information Vehicle vibration caused by an out-of-round condition will generally appear within the first 100-200 miles of driving. If it appears later, the vibration is probably caused by some other condition. Please note that more than 90% of vehicle vibration Problems are caused by conditions other than Page 4077 JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps, standard for North American produced batteries IMPORTANT: ^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries. ^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes. ^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available). ^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the Original Equipment battery. ^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data package. (1) (1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III: ^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned on. ^ Click on the ASIST icon. ^ Click on INFO. Tool Box. ^ Select Midtronics GR-8. ^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays. ^ Click on Change MUP File. ^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW. ^ Select 192-725C and click OK. ^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen. If the applicable vehicle still is not listed: 1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for descriptions of each battery. 2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more information. Determine the Battery Type Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number Page 2989 Page 3246 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 2881 Exhaust Pressure Regulator Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation Vacuum Control Valve Fig. 17 Vacuum control valve. (Typical) During rapid acceleration, the vacuum control valve, Fig. 17, monitors vacuum in the reservoir and engine vacuum. The control valve serves to activate a second EGR control valve when there is a sudden drop in the vacuum signal. Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Level and Grade, Driveability Classification: EM95-01 Section: Engine Mechanical Reference: Technical Bulletin NTB95-017 Date: February 8, 1995 ENGINE OIL LEVEL AND GRADE APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION The cause of some driveability incidents is incorrect oil level or viscosity. Whenever you evaluate a vehicle for a driveability problem, check the oil level first. (It is a good practice to check oil level on every vehicle that you work on.) Overfilling may cause engine vibration or valve train clatter on vehicles with hydraulic lash adjusters due to oil aeration when the crankshaft hits the oil. Using the wrong viscosity oil can cause rough or low idle resulting from improper operation of the hydraulic lash adjusters. When you add or change the engine oil, follow the service manual recommendations regarding proper oil fill level. Do not overfill the crankcase. If you find a vehicle to be overfilled with oil, drain the excess oil and dispose of properly. Remember to wait ten (10) minutes after refilling before checking. This allows time for the oil to drain back to the pan. Always use the proper viscosity oil specified by the service manual for the temperature range in your geographic area. The viscosity specifications ensure proper engine operation and best engine efficiency. Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Technical Service Bulletin # 95085A Date: 950922 Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckles Classification: 95V-103 Reference: NTB95-085a Date: September 22, 1995 VOLUNTARY CAMPAIGN - FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES This bulletin replaces NTB95-085. Please discard all copies of NTB95-085, dated August 28, 1995. CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO.: 95V-103.002 APPLIED VEHICLES BELT TYPE 200SX (512) 1986.5-88 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt 240SX (S13) 1989-91 2 Point manual lap belt Truck (D21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt (except center belt position) Pathfinder (WD21) 1988-91 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Van (C22) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt Sentra (B12) 1987-90 3 Point active lap/shoulder belt & 2 Point manual lap belt Sentra (B13) 2 Door Sedan 1991 3 Point passive lap/shoulder belt (door mounted) AUTHORIZATION Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. authorizes Nissan Motor Corporation., U.S.A. (NMC) to conduct a campaign on certain 1986.5-1991 Nissan vehicles. INTRODUCTION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has been investigating certain seat belt buckles manufactured by Takata Corporation for vehicle model years 1986.5 through 1990 and a part of 1991. These buckles were installed in numerous models built by several manufacturers including certain 1986.5-91 Nissan and Infiniti models. Nissan is aware of a small number of reports of seat belt buckle release button breakage in vehicles equipped with these Takata buckles. A broken piece may prevent the buckle from latching or prevent it from unlatching. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED: Approximately 2,000,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check each vehicle within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. WARRANTY EXTENSION Owners of 1986.5 through 1988 vehicles affected by this campaign have been given a lifetime limited warranty on the entire seat belt assemblies in their car. This lifetime limited warranty is the same as applied to 1989 and later Nissan vehicles. OWNER NOTIFICATION Current owners of vehicles involved in this campaign will be notified by mail over a 10-11 month period beginning September 29,1995. A sample owner's letter is illustrated in this bulletin. Page 4942 Parts Information Locations Radiator Fan Thermal Switch: Locations A/C Components. Lower Left Corner Of Radiator Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 4649 Fig. 26 Exploded view of heater system. 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra 4. Refer to Fig. 26 to complete removal of heater core. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Page 4285 out-of-round tires. Out-of-roundness can only be measured as a radial force variation and most tire dealers do not have the equipment necessary to make this measurement. Because of this, the most effective way to inspect for this condition is to use a specific diagnostic procedure to rule out or confirm other causes for the vibration. The following pages of this Technical Bulletin contain a procedure that can be used to confirm/eliminate tire out-of-round as a cause of vehicle vibration. Listed are the lateral and radial runout specifications for the 1989 Nissan models to assist you when performing the procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Page 339 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2677 Fig. 4 Throttle Position Sensor ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Description and Operation Vacuum Control Flap Switchover Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 53 Vacuum switch. When intake manifold vacuum increases during deceleration, this switch is activated, interrupting the electrical signal which is sent to the vacuum switching valve. Audio - Aftermarket Phone/Audio Installation Precautions Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Aftermarket Phone/Audio Installation Precautions Classification: Section: GI92-001 General Information Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-003 Models: All Models Date: January 16, 1992 AFTERMARKET CELLULAR PHONE AND AUDIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION APPLIED MODELS: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Many customers request installation of aftermarket cellular phones and audio equipment at the time of new vehicle purchase. Nissan does not authorize or warrant non-Nissan approved parts or accessories installed in Nissan vehicles. If these installations are made, they should be checked routinely after sublet work has been performed to help eliminate customer complaints. The following guidelines should be followed: 1. Route wires at least 18" away from ECU and air bag controller. Use high quality shielded cables for all signal cables (98% shielded). 2. Do not tap into wires that are part of any safety or ECCS equipment, such as airbag, brake lights, turn indicators, warning lights, ABS, fuel injection, etc. Power should come from the battery or the accessory circuit. Ground leads should terminate at the battery. Always use inline fuses as close to the power source as possible. 3. Use wire ties to securely fasten new harness in vehicle. 4. Before any panels or finishers are replaced, ensure that all fasteners are in good condition and are properly located. 5. When it is necessary for additional harnesses or cables to pass under the edge of a finisher, such as a cellular phone antenna coaxial cables, notch the finisher at that point so that it will fit back into place correctly. 6. Glass-mounted cellular phone antennas are affected by defroster wires in the window. Mount the antenna as high on the glass as possible and at least 1/2" away from defroster wires. 7 Test drive all vehicles to listen for squeaks or rattles. NOTE: Please supply a copy of these guidelines to accessory installation shops that your dealership or customers use regularly. Page 734 Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Front Door Striker: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Revised Torques For Door Lock & Striker Bolts Section: Classification: BF90-003 Body & Frame Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-036 Models: All models Date: April 12, 1990 Front door Page 1586 Distributor Cap: Testing and Inspection Distributor Cap 1. Remove the screws securing the cap to the distributor. 2. Remove the ignition wires from the cap. 3. Inspect the cap for cracks or damage due to heat or arcing. 4. Inspect the terminals inside the cap for excessive corrosion and damage. 5. Inspect the ignition wire terminals for excessive corrosion. If the corrosion cannot be removed with reasonable measures, replace the cap. Replace the cap if it fails the above tests. Page 4499 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 606 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 3193 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 4560 DEFINITION: Fine longitudinal cracks appearing on the bottom of the tire grooves which do not penetrate into the cord material of the tire (Figure 8). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check all the vehicle tires. If there are only one or two "cracks" in the tire groove, or if the "crack" continues up the side of the groove wall, the cause of the "crack" was a cut inflicted by a road hazard, and is not warrantable. Ply Separation Damage Description: Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7B Page 422 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 747 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 3044 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 1890 Inspection Procedure Page 1537 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 1773 Pulsar (KN13) GA16i Sentra (B12)E16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Sentra (B12)GA16i (2WD) Sentra (B12)E16i (4WD) Page 5280 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Page 3856 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 338 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Testing and Inspection Air Filter Element: Testing and Inspection Viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation until it is replaced periodically. Brushing or blasting operation should never be conducted, because it causes clogging and results in enrichment of the mixture ratio. Page 2978 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Locations Lamp Out Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Components. RH Side Fender Apron, Front Of Shock Tower Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 2678 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 788 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3247 Inspection Procedure (Not self-diagnostic item) Page 625 Vibration Diagnosis Please note that exact out-of-round specifications are hard to define. Because of this, when submitting a warranty claim for a gross out-of-round condition, the claim should be supported with actual measurement figures. Service Information This Technical Bulletin contains descriptions of the types of tire damage that are covered by the tire manufacturer's warranties (Limited to Bridgestone, Toyo, Yokohama and Dunlop). For tires not available through Nissan, please direct the customer to the manufacturer's nearest dealer. When a customer returns a tire for inspection and adjustment, refer to the information in this bulletin to help identify causes of tire failures and consequential damage to tires. To determine warranty status, it is essential to ascertain if tire damage is caused by road hazards, mechanical problems, workmanship or materials. In determining the cause of tire failure, inspect both the exterior and interior of the tire. Sometimes the cause of tire failure is immediately apparent. In other cases however, only a thorough inspection of the tire will show the cause of failure, and whether the damage should result in replacement under manufacturers warranty. Thorough inspection requires good lighting, a clean dismounted tire and close examination of the tire surface. Finding a point of penetration can sometimes be very difficult and should be done on a tire spreader. NOTE: For a full description of tire damage not covered by manufacturers warranty, please refer to the Passenger Car & Light Truck Tire Inspection & Adjustment booklet, sent to you with Technical Bulletin WT88-002 (TS88-084). Sidewall Blister Damage Description: Sidewall Blister NISSAN CODE: 7N DEFINITION: A lifting of the rubber layer (i.e., portions of sidewall stock or white sidewall rubber) from the tire's sidewall structure, caused by lack of adhesion between the rubber and structure. This lifting will often "pocket" air (see Figure 1). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Engine - Coding System to Match Bearings to Crankshaft Crankshaft: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Coding System to Match Bearings to Crankshaft Classification: Section: EM90-002 Engine Mech. Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-011 Models: All 1987-90 Models Date: February 15, 1990 IDENTIFYING CRANKSHAFT BEARINGS FOR SERVICE APPLICATIONS APPLIED MODELS: All 1987-90 Models. SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning with engines manufactured in 1987, Nissan has utilized a coding system to precisely match bearings to the crankshaft. Certain ways of marking/coding the crankshaft have varied. The purpose of this bulletin is to explain those coding variations so that the correct replacement crankshaft bearings can be selected. Some Crankshafts utilize marks on the No. 1 Counterbalance. There may be one or two rows. If there are two rows, the top one identifies the grade for the main bearings; the bottom one identifies the grade for the connecting rod bearings. If there is only one row, it will indicate the grade for the main bearings and the engine rebuilder should use the "standard" bearings for the connecting rod application. NOTE: Some Crankshafts were additionally marked on the No. 5 Counterbalance. In this application, the marks on the No. 5 Counterbalance represent the grade for the connecting rod bearings and the marks on the No. 1 Counterbalance represent the grade for the main bearings. One other variation in Crankshaft marking is the use of horizontal scribe marks on certain Crankshafts and Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, etc.) for others. ^ Those Crankshafts graded with Arabic numerals need no interpretation because their grades directly correspond to the Parts Microfiche and Service Manual for the respective vehicle. ^ Those Crankshafts graded with vertical scribe marks can be interpreted by using the following table. Crank BRG. Counterbalance "vertical slash" Grade Grade # 0 no mark 1I 2 II 3 III Refer to the "S.D.S." chart at the back of the EM section of the appropriate Service Manual for bearing color code application. Page 4215 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 5028 Parts Information: Antenna Rod Page 2051 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 4402 Control Arm: Service and Repair Transverse Link and Ball Joint 1. Remove wheel bearing locknut. 2. Remove tie rod ball joint. 2. Remove strut lower bracket attaching nuts and bolts. 3. Separate driveshaft from knuckle by tapping driveshaft end with a suitable hammer. Use caution not to damage driveshaft boots. 4. Separate lower ball joint stud from knuckle using a suitable tool. 5. Remove stabilizer bar attaching bolt from transverse link and ball joint assembly. 6. Remove transverse link bracket attaching bolts, then the transverse link bracket. 7. Remove remaining transverse link assembly attaching bolt, then the transverse link and ball joint assembly. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Tires - Recommendations For Winter Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Recommendations For Winter Models: All models Section: Wheel & Tire Classification: WT90-004 Bulletin No.: NTB90-099 Date: November 8, 1990 NISSAN WINTER TIRES APPLIED MODELS: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Some vehicles are equipped with performance tires from the factory to enhance dry weather vehicle performance. In order to improve vehicle traction during winter driving, all-season or radial mud & snow (M&S;) tires may be installed. Upon customer request, dealers may recommend alternative tires for improved traction in snow. When doing so, these guidelines should be followed: 1. A tire with the M&S; rating is recommended for winter driving in snow. 2. The replacement tires must have the same size and load carrying capacity as the original equipment tires. 3. All four (4) tires must be replaced, without exception. The mixed use of different types of tires (i.e., radial mixed with bias ply, M&S; mixed with non-M&S;) should be avoided because of adverse effects on vehicle handling and ride characteristics. 4. The requesting customer should be informed of the speed rating of the current tires, so that tires of the same speed rating could be purchased as replacement tires. NOTE: ^ All-season or snow tires may have lower speed ratings than factory-equipped tires. ^ When 4 mud & snow (M&S;) tires are installed on the vehicle, the tires should be inflated to the pressures recommended on the vehicle tire placard. The maximum inflation pressure shown on the side of the tire should never be exceeded. A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Case: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leakage From Front Cover/Converter Housing Classification: Section: AT90-002 Automatic Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB90-010 Models: 1987-1990 Sentra, Pulsar NX Date: February 8, 1990 F01A AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAKS APPLIED MODELS: 1987-1990 Sentra XE 1987-1990 Pulsar NX XE SERVICE INFORMATION Some of the Applied Models equipped with the F01A Automatic Transaxles may exhibit transmission fluid leakage from the converter housing and/or the front cover gasket area(s). To improve the sealing performance at these locations, new bolts for the torque converter housing and the front cover are now used in production, and the tightening torque for these bolts has been changed to eliminate this condition. In addition, a new torque converter housing gasket is available as a service replacement part for these vehicles. PARTS/TORQUE INFORMATION If transmission oil leakage is observed at the indicated areas, or if transaxle service is required, upon disassembly of the front cover and/or torque converter housing, thoroughly clean and inspect (for porosities, surface damage, etc.) all mating surfaces. Install a new converter housing gasket and new bolts, being certain to apply sealant to the appropriate bolts (see Service Manual). Torque as indicated below. After assembly has been completed, test drive the vehicle, then inspect the incident area to ensure a proper seal between the mating halves. Page 2176 AB-/BC VALVE CONTROL When the idle switch is OFF, the I.S.C. valve opens in response to the amount of intake air and engine speed. When the accelerator pedal is released, additional air is led into the intake manifold, actuating as AB- or BC valve. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 3022 Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon Page 2002 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Adjustments Air Door Cable: Adjustments Fig. 14 Water valve adjustments. 1. Set temperature control cable at maximum COLD position. 2. With air mix door knob moved in toward passenger compartment, connect temperature control rod to link lever. 3. Connect control cable to link lever and clamp the cable. 4. Pull water valve control rod in direction of arrow to provide clearance of approximately .08 inch between ends of rod and link lever and connect rod to door lever, Fig. 14. Page 4029 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Fig. 18 Exploded view of drum brakes. 1985-88 Pulsar & Sentra 1. Raise and support vehicle and remove wheel and tire assemblies. 2. Release parking brake. 3. Remove dust cap, then remove and discard cotter pin. 4. Take out adjusting cap and wheel bearing nut. 5. Remove brake drum with outer bearing and washer. 6. Remove parking brake rear cable. 7. Remove anti-rattle spring and pin, Fig. 18. 8. Remove retainer, then the return springs and brake shoes. 9. Separate equalizer and rear cable. 10. Remove adjuster assembly. 11. Remove toggle lever spring and clip, then separate toggle lever and shoe. 12. Apply suitable lubricant to lubricating points, Fig. 18. 13. Reverse procedure to install. 14. Adjust brakes by apply parking brake several times. 15. Adjust parking brake. Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Technical Service Bulletin # 94-012A Date: 990617 Brakes - Judder/Steering Wheel Shimmy Classification: BR94-002a Reference: NTB94-012a Date: June 17, 1999 This amended version of NTB94-012 adds a caution and a note to the service procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB94-012. This bulletin supersedes TS89-105/BR89-004 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL BRAKE JUDDER/STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY SERVICE INFORMATION Brake judder/steering wheel shimmy is a condition which may occur in any vehicle when excessive rotor thickness variation is present on one (1) or more of the vehicle's brake rotors. Rotor Thickness Variation (RTV) is the variation in thickness around the rotor. The RTV can be determined by measuring the rotor thickness with a micrometer at several locations around the circumference of the rotor. The RTV is the difference in a thickness between the thickest and thinnest points on the rotor. Rotor Run-Out is the distance that the rotor surface travels in and out, in relation to the vertical plane of the hub, as the rotor turns with the hub. The distance is measured with a dial indicator. NOTE: Rotor Run-Out does not cause brake judder or steering wheel shimmy. However, excessive Rotor Run-Out does lead to rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. It is the excessive rotor thickness variation that causes judder and/or steering wheel shimmy. This is described in more detail below. Page 2219 Spark Plug: Locations Fig. 68 Component Location DISTRIBUTOR Located on the L.H. side of the cylinder head. DISTRIBUTOR CAP Located on top of the distributor. DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR Located on top of the distributor shaft, inside the cap. Page 1748 Altima (U13) KA24DE Axxess (M11) KA24E (2WD) Axxess (M11) KA24E (4WD) Maxima (910) L24E Maxima (U11) VG30E Maxima (J30) VG30E, VE30DE Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque ALL MODELS Refer to "Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair" before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 4264 Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Classification: EL09-011 Reference: NTB09-030 Date: April 6, 2009 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY CONNECTION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to stay connected when the engine is running. ^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below. IMPORTANT: Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will not be covered under warranty. CAUTION: ^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement. ^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON. ^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first. ^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first. ^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment. ^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.). ^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of the cables. Disclaimer Specifications Axle Bearing: Specifications ALL MODELS Refer to "STEERING / COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES / AXLE BEARING AND KNUCKLE" before making any adjustments to the wheel bearing axle nut. Page 3437 Detonation Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 45 Detonation control unit test 1. Run engine at idle until normal operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect detonation sensor electrical connector with engine idling. 3. Slowly increase engine speed and check ignition timing with a suitable timing light. 4. If timing retards 10° when engine speed increases more than 2000 RPM, replace detonation sensor. 5. If timing does not retard, measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 4, Fig. 45, and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage measures .4-.7 volts, proceed to step 6. If voltage does not measure .4-.7 volts, check distributor and wiring harness and repair as necessary. 6. Measure voltage between detonation control unit terminal No. 3 and ground with engine running above 2000 RPM. If voltage does not measure 3.7-3.8 volts, replace detonation control unit. Service and Repair Water Pump: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and drain cooling system. 2. Remove power steering drive belt and the power steering oil pump. 3. Remove alternator drive belt. 4. Loosen alternator attaching bolts and push alternator toward engine. 5. Remove water pump pulley, then the water pump and gasket. 6. Reverse procedure to install, using new gasket. Page 1776 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 2675 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 2141 Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Maximum Resistance Per Cable 30 K ohms Page 5186 Rear Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 19M, RH Fender Apron Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Coupe): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Hatchback): 8D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper Motor Connector (Wagon): 9D, In Rear Of Back Door Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Connector: 14I, Under I/P At Switch Resistor Connector (2WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Resistor Connector (4WD): 47M, LH Fender Apron Seat Belt Switch Connector (Coupe): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Hatchback): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Sedan): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Switch Connector (Wagon): 7B, Under I/P, LH Of Steering Column Seat Belt Timer Connector: 9I, Under I/P, RH Of Steering Column Starter Motor Connector: 2E, RH Rear Of Engine Starter Relay Connector (2WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Starter Relay Connector (4WD): 18M, RH Fender Apron Stop Lamp Connector (2WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop Lamp Connector (4WD): 123M, Under LH Side Of I/P Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Coupe): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Hatchback): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Sedan): 15B, At Tail Panel Stop & Tail Lamp Sensor Connector (Wagon): 15B, At Tail Panel Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (2WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermo Control Amplifier Connector (4WD): 137M, Under RH Side Of I/P Thermal Switch Connector (2WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Switch Connector (4WD): 40M, At Switch Thermal Transmitter Connector: 4E, RH Side Of Engine Throttle Sensor Connector (2WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Throttle Sensor Connector (4WD): 65M, At Throttle Body Transfer Control Actuator Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27E, RH Side Of Engine Transfer Control Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 27B, At Transfer Control Switch Transfer Control Unit Connector (4WD): 151B, Under LH Side Of I/P Warning Lamp Connector (Coupe): 15I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Warning Lamp-A Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 17I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Warning Lamp-B Connector (Sedan & Wagon): 5I, LH Side I/P Near Steering Column Washer Sensor Connector (2WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Washer Sensor Connector (4WD): 21M, RH Fender Apron Water Temperature Sensor Connector (2WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Water Temperature Sensor Connector (4WD): 69M, RH Side Of Engine Wiper Motor Connector (2WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Motor Connector (4WD Models): 1M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment Wiper Switch Connector (2WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P Wiper Switch Connector (4WD): 133M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Indicator Lamp Connector (4WD): 152M, Under LH Side Of I/P 4WD Switch Connector (Wagon 4WD): 26E, RH Side Of Engine Page 2502 AXXESS (M11) KA24E (4WD) MAXIMA (910) L24E MAXIMA (U11) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VG30E MAXIMA (J30) VE30DE MAXIMA (A32) VQ30DE Page 2350 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 88-001 Date: 880118 Idle Speed - Diagnostic Procedure Classification: EC88-001 Reference: TS88-001 Date: January 18, 1988 E16i IDLE SPEED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1987 Sentra Coupe and 4WD Wagon 1988 Sentra (all models) 1987 and 1988 Pulsar XE SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides an improved diagnostic procedure for use in correcting customer complaints of improper idle, including intermittent conditions, on the 1987 Sentra coupe and 4WD wagon, 1988 Sentra (all models), and 1987-1988 Pulsar with E16i engine. SERVICE PROCEDURE Following the sequence in the illustration, use the procedures to verify correct engine adjustment, E.C.C.S. system operation, and Electro Injection adjustment. It is important that the Engine Adjustment and the E.C.C.S. Operation Checks are completed before proceeding to the Electro Injection Unit Inspection and Adjustment. Page 143 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Cranking Signal: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 1772 NX1600 (KB13) GA16DE NX2000 (KB13) SR20DE Pulsar (KN12) E15ET Pulsar (KN13) E16i Pulsar (KN13) CA16DE Pulsar (KN13) CA18DE Page 4267 3. There should be no signs of scuff marks, abrasions, or chafing on the immediate area (i.e., on the bubble). Sidewall Cracking Damage Description: Sidewall Cracking NISSAN CODE: 7K DEFINITION: Several fine cracks on the tire sidewall, running in a radial or circumferential direction (Figure 4). MAJOR INSPECTION POINTS: 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for several fine cracks on the sidewall, running in a lateral direction. These sidewall cracks are generally less than 1/10 of an inch in width, and do not penetrate to the interior of the tire. Bead Separation Damage Description: Bead Separation NISSAN CODE: 7I DEFINITION: Separation of the various tire materials (i.e., rubber, cord and wires) at the bead area near the rim line (Figures 5A, 5B). MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): Check for a bulge and/or jagged cracks visible near the tire rim fitting line. Tread/Shoulder Separation Damage Description: Tread/Shoulder Separation NISSAN CODE: 7F Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Identification List Classification: EC93-013 Reference: NTB93-167 Date: November 16, 1993 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE IDENTIFICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1993 Altima (U13) 1990 Axxess (M11) 1981-84 Maxima (910) 1985-88 Maxima (U11) 1989-93 Maxima (J30) 1991-93 NX 1600 (KB13) 1991-93 NX 2000 (KB13) 1983.5 Pulsar Turbo (KN12) 1987-90 Pulsar (KN13) 1987-90 Sentra (B12) 1991-93 Sentra (B13) 1984-86 Stanza (T11) 1987-89 Stanza (T12) 1990-92 Stanza (U12) 1982-89 Stanza Wagon (M10) 1987-93 Truck (D21) 1987-93 Pathfinder (WD21) 1987,88,90 Van (C22) 1980-83 200SX (S110) 1984-88 200SX (S12) 1989-93 240SX (S13) 1975-78 280Z (S130) 1979-83 280SX (HLS30) 1981-83 280ZX Turbo (HLS30) 1984-89 300ZX (Z31) 1984-89 300ZX Turbo (Z31) 1990-93 300ZX (Z32) 1990-93 300ZX Turbo (Z32) 1977-80 810 SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains a chart that lists the ECM Vendor serial number and cross-references to a Nissan part number. This chart is intended to be used as a reference guide to determine that a vehicle has the correct ECM installed in it. The parts catalog along with the VIN number and Date of Manufacture should be used to determine the correct part number when ordering a new ECM. An ECM with a part number with 2371M-*****RE is a replacement ECM and should have the same programming as the original. If a vehicle has an ECM with a part number containing "M" and "RE", disregard the "M" and "RE" when using this chart. On any CONSULT compatible vehicle the ECM part number can be accessed through the CONSULT connector using CONSULT. All other vehicles have a decal that has the vendor part number on the ECM cover. Page 730 Page 134 Positive Temp Coefficient (PTC) Relay: Testing and Inspection Wiring Diagram Page 423 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 3148 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection a. Tighten the clamp so its end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from the hose end. b. Make sure that the screw of the clamp does not contact with any adjacent parts. c. Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. : Fuel hose clamps 1.0 - 1.5 N.m (0.10 - 0.15 kg-m, 0.7 - 1.1 ft-lb) 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet hose at the electro injection unit. 3. Install a pressure gauge. 4. Start the engine and check the fuel line for fuel leakage. 5. Read fuel pressure gauge. At idling speed: 2WD Model: Approximately 98 kPa (1.0kg/cm2, 14 psi) 4WD Model: Approximately 250.1 kPa (2.55 kg/cm2, 36.3 psi) 6. Release fuel pressure again. 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the fuel line. 8. Reconnect the fuel inlet hose. Page 615 ^ Toe-Out is present when the tire is closer to the center line at the rear (Figure 1b). ADJUSTMENTS 1. Toe should be the last alignment specification adjusted. Refer to the Front Axle (FA) and Rear Axle (RA) sections of the appropriate Service Manual to determine the proper locations to adjust the front and rear Toe. 2. Toe should be equal, side-to-side. 3. Toe-In When the specification is labeled "Toe-In" and dimensions are negative numbers (ie: -6 to -2 mm), the wheels should be adjusted to the "Toe-Out" position (Figure 2). NOTE: Positive (+) Toe-In specification = Toe-In wheel setting. Negative (-) Toe-In specification = Toe-out wheel setting. Toe-Out Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 373 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Description and Operation Idle Switch: Description and Operation The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and actuates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor has two functions. It contains an idle switch and throttle sensor. The idle switch closes when the throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. The throttle sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds the voltage signal to E.C.C.S. control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects the opening or closing speed of the throttle valve, and feeds the rate of voltage change to the E.C.C.S. control unit Page 53 PULSAR (KN13) GA16i QUEST (V40) VG30E SENTRA (B12) E16i (2WD) SENTRA (B12) E16i (4WD) SENTRA (B12) GA16i (2WD) Page 1061 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Localized separation, with or without an air pocket, between the sidewall rubber and tire casing. 3. There should be no evidence of chafing, shock, or abrasion on the tire sidewall. 4. There should be no tread penetrations or perforations in the tread area directly adjacent to the blister. Open Splice In Sidewall Damage Description: Open Splice in Sidewall NISSAN CODE: 7M DEFINITION: A localized detachment of the rubber stock between the block and/or white sidewall, caused by a lack/loss of adhesion where the rubber stock is joined (Figure 2). An open splice may be a partial opening, or a complete detachment and total perforation to the interior. MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. There should be no evidence of cuts or perforations in the failed area. 2. At the point of failure, interior rubber surfaces will be smooth and will appear joined at an angle. Sidewall Ply Separation Damage Description: Sidewall Ply Separation NISSAN CODE: 7L DEFINITION: Localized separation of the sidewall ply cord (Figure 3) MAJOR INSPECTION POINT(S): 1. Check for proper air pressure. 2. Check for an air bubble on the tire sidewall. Page 4437 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Note: Preload adjustment of wheel bearing is not necessary. Rear Wheel Bearing 1. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to: 137 - 188 ft lbs (186 - 255 Nm) 2. Check bearing for smooth operation. 3. Check axial end play. Should be: .002in (0.05mm) or less Page 2536 Van (C22) Z24I 200SX (S110) Z22E 200SX (S110) Z24E 200SX (S12) CA20E 200SX (S12) CA18ET 200SX (S12) VG30E Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Wiring Diagram Page 99 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Testing Precautions CLASSIFICATION: EC95-011 REFERENCE: NTB95-059 DATE: June 7, 1995 PRECAUTIONS FOR TESTING/DIAGNOSING THE ECCS SYSTEM TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All SERVICE INFORMATION Observing the following precautions when testing/diagnosing the Electronic Concentrated Control System (ECCS) may help prevent damaging the Electronic Control Module (ECM). SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Most relays in the ECCS system (Fuel pump, A/C, etc.) and actuators (Injectors, etc.) are powered by the battery. The ECM controls the relay or actuator by supplying the ground. DO NOT apply battery voltage directly to any of the ECM pins (or wires connected to them) which supply the ground to any relays or actuators (see circled areas in illustration). Doing so will permanently damage the ECM. 2. Do not connect or disconnect any ECCS connectors when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. 3. Do not remove the cover of the ECM. Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Aftermarket Chroming of Nissan Alloys Classification: WT92-003 Section: Wheel & Tire Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN NTB92-123 Models: All Date: December 22, 1992 AFTERMARKET CHROMING OF NISSAN ALLOY WHEELS SERVICE INFORMATION The Original Equipment Alloy Wheels on Nissan vehicles are specifically developed in order to achieve the Nissan design and performance standards. These Original Equipment wheels are also subject to rigorous testing procedure's to ensure they meet Nissan's standards. Nissan cannot ensure that Original Equipment Alloy Wheels which are subjected to aftermarket chroming meet these same standards, and therefore Nissan does not recommend the use of such wheels, nor does Nissan make any representations concerning their performance. Indeed, if these Original Equipment Alloy Wheels are subjected to aftermarket chroming, there are serious potential problems which may occur as a result of the chroming process: 1. The chroming process removes the original paint coating by "burning" or "chemical" methods, both of which cause the alloy surface to be changed. The application of chrome plating has to be controlled correctly, as the alloy can be harmed by a poorly controlled process. 2. Overall aftermarket chroming may degrade the durability, long term appearance, and may affect safety and performance of the wheels. Accordingly, Nissan recommends that Original Equipment Wheels NOT be chrome plated. Please consult the Nissan Warranty Policies and Procedures Manual pertaining to the Dealer's responsibility when altering or modifying vehicles. WARRANTY INFORMATION Note that damage to Nissan Alloy road wheels due to any non-factory-authorized process, such as chroming, is the responsibility of the customer, and is not covered by the Nissan Warranty, please consult the "Nissan Warranty Information Booklet" for specific details. Page 1810 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment Components. Under Instrument Panel, Above Fuse Block Applicable to: 1988 Sentra Page 3304 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 720 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 4582 Wheel Bearing: Specifications ALL MODELS Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints before making any adjustments to the rear wheel bearing axle nut. Page 1430 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check Page 2306 TRUCK (D21) KA24E TRUCK/PATHFINDER (D21/WD21) VG30E VAN (C22) Z24i 200SX (S110) Z20E 200SX (S110) Z22E Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch Throttle Position Switch: Description and Operation Throttle Sensor & Idle Switch 1987-88 Pulsar & Sentra w/E16i Engine, Pathfinder, Pickup & Van The throttle sensor is attached to the throttle body and activates in response to accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms throttle valve position into output voltage, and feeds voltage signal to ECCS control unit. In addition, the throttle sensor detects opening or closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds rate of voltage change to the ECCS control unit. The idle switch closes when throttle valve is positioned at idle and opens when it is at any other position. Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Synchronizer Hub: Customer Interest Manual Transaxle - Jumping Out of 5th Gear Classification: Section Manual MT89-002A Transmission/Transaxle Reference: TECHNICAL BULLETIN TS89-064A Models: 1987-88 Sentra & Pulsar NX Date: September 28, 1989 MANUAL TRANSAXLE JUMPING OUT OF 5th GEAR This Bulletin supersedes Bulletin MT89-002 (TS89-064) dated April 20, 1989, giving additional Parts Information. Please discard the original Bulletin. APPLIED MODELS: 1987-88 Sentra (B12) 1987-88 Pulsar NX (N13) SERVICE INFORMATION The 5-speed manual transaxle (Model RS5F31A) on some 1987 and 1988 Sentra and Pulsar NX vehicles with E16 and CA16DE engines may slip out of 5th gear while cruising. This incident is caused by wear on the 5th gear shift fork by the control bracket, causing insufficient gear engagement. This results in the transmission slipping out of gear. *Use the following Service Procedure to repair these transaxles. PARTS INFORMATION *This Bulletin recommends replacing the control bracket, adding the shifter cap and replacing parts (3) thru (6), regardless of wear. Figure 1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the transaxle following the procedures described in the appropriate Service Manual. 2. Replace the shift fork and install the countermeasure control bracket and shifter cap (Figure 1). Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): Customer Interest Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. Page 3369 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Fast Idle Control Device (F.I.C.D.): All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV) Operation Classification: EC88-017 Reference: TS88-115 Date: September 8, 1988 IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE (I.S.C.V.) OPERATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1988 Sentra (B12) 1988 Pulsar (N13) with E16I SERVICE INFORMATION Because of production modifications, the mixture heater used on 1988 Sentras and Pulsars (E16i) is not interchangeable with the mixture heater used on 1987 models. Any attempt to interchange these components will result in no idle-up compensation from the Idle Speed Control Valve (I.S.C.V.). When servicing a 1988 Sentra or Pulsar (E16i) that exhibits no fast-idle or no idle-up operation, ensure that the correct mixture heater is installed in the vehicle. The 1988 mixture heater can be identified by the I.S.C.V. air passage in the area indicated below. Parts Information Please note that the current Sentra Parts Microfiche does not list the part number for the 1988 mixture heater. This number will be added to the next microfiche issue. For your reference, the part numbers for both mixture heaters are shown below. Page 780 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Classification: EL99-005 Reference: NTB99-017 Date: April 1, 1999 NISSAN SPEAKER NOISE DUE TO CELLULAR PHONE INTERFERENCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Cellular phone charging may cause a popping or crackling noise in the audio speakers of Nissan vehicles. If this condition exists, it is most likely to occur when the customer's cellular phone is turned off, plugged into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit, and placed within one foot of the audio head unit. The condition may occur more frequently in vehicles with audio systems with amplified speakers. Refer to the appropriate owner's manual for cautions regarding the use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for other accessories. Use the procedure below to verify that the condition exists as described above and provide instruction for the customer to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. SERVICE PROCEDURE Perform the following test procedure to verify the condition exists as described: 1. Ask the customer for the cellular phone and charging adapter. 2. Confirm the cellular phone has been turned off for at least 30 minutes before proceeding. NOTE: Do not turn the cellular phone on at any time during the procedure. If the phone has to be turned from on to off, you will have to wait 30 minutes for the phone to reset to proceed with the test. 3. Plug the phone into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit. 4. Turn the ignition to the "ON" position (do not turn the cellular phone on). 5. Turn the audio unit on. 6. Place the cellular phone close to the front of the audio head unit. 7. Listen for a popping or crackling noise from the audio speakers. 8. If the noise is heard, move the cellular phone back from the audio unit. The noise should be reduced as the cellular phone is moved further away from the audio unit. 9. If the condition is confirmed through the above procedure, advise the customer to keep the cellular phone at least one foot away from the audio head unit to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. Page 1900 Idle Switch: Adjustments 1. Warm up engine sufficiently. 2. Disconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. 3. Check idle speed. M/T: 750 rpm A/T: 670 rpm (in "D" position) If not correct, adjust by turning throttle adjusting screw. 4. (A/T model) shift transaxle to "N" position and read idle speed NAT at that point. 5. Manually open throttle valve to about 2,000 rpm, lower engine speed slowly and read the engine speed at which the idle contact turns from OFF to ON. M/T: 1050 ± 150 rpm A/T: (NAT + 300) ±150 rpm (in "N" position) If not correct, adjust by loosening throttle valve switch securing screws and turning the throttle valve switch. 6. Reconnect throttle valve switch harness connector and throttle sensor harness connector. Locations Fig. 28 Component location Page 4815 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 5056 Diagnostic Procedure # 13 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Checks. VSS Control Unit Main Power Supply A/C Blower Fan System - Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 3583 2. Identify which hose is the Inlet and which hose is the Outlet to the oil cooler (refer to Charts A and B). 3. Disconnect the oil cooler Inlet and Outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes (see Figure 3). ^ For Frontier (D22) w/bypass valve, remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the bypass valve fittings (see Figure 6 shown) NOTE: If rubber material from a cooler hose remains on the steel tube or fitting, replace the rubber hose. 4. Allow any transmission fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. 5. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-A0006) into the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 4). Page 5184 Door Harness Connector (4WD): 141M, Under RH Side Of I/P Door Switch LH Connector (Coupe): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Hatchback): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Sedan): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch LH Connector (Wagon): 5B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Coupe): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Hatchback): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Sedan): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Door Switch RH Connector (Wagon): 6B, Lower Door Jamb Dual Pressure Switch Connector (2WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier Dual Pressure Switch Connector (4WD): 41M, At Receiver/Drier ECCS Control Unit Connector (2WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat ECCS Control Unit Connector (4WD): 145M, Under Passenger Seat EFI Relay Connector (2WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Relay Connector (4WD): 119M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (2WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EFI Safety Relay Connector (4WD): 153M, Under LH Side Of I/P EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (2WD): 67M, Front Of Engine EGR & Canister Solenoid Valve Connector (4WD): 67M, Front Of Engine Engine Ground Connector: 5E, RH Side Of Engine Engine Body Ground Connector: 6E, RH Fender Apron Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (2WD): 36M, At Sensor Exhaust Gas Sensor Connector (4WD): 36M, At Sensor Fan Switch Connector (2WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Fan Switch Connector (4WD): 135M, Under Center Of I/P Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (2WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp LH Connector (4WD): 44M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (2WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp RH Connector (4WD): 24M, At Turn Signal Lamp Front Washer Motor Connector (2WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Front Washer Motor Connector (4WD): 20M, RH Fender Apron Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Coupe): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Hatchback): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Sedan): 9B, At Tank Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Connector (Wagon): 9B, At Tank Fuse Block Connector (2WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fuse Block Connector (4WD): 121M, Under LH Side Of I/P Fusible Link Holder Connector (2WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Fusible Link Holder Connector (4WD): 50M, LH Fender Apron Hazard Switch Connector: 16I, Under I/P Above Heater Control Assembly Headlamp LH Connector (2WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp LH Connector (4WD): 42M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (2WD): 22M, At Headlamp Headlamp RH Connector (4WD): 22M, At Headlamp Heater Control Illumination Connector (2WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P Heater Control Illumination Connector (4WD): 136M, Under Center Of I/P High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Coupe): 7D, In Rear Of Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Hatchback): 7D, On Bottom Of Back Door High Mounted Stop Lamp Connector (Wagon): 3D, On Top Of Back Door Horn Connector (2WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Connector (4WD): 25M, At Horn Assembly Horn Relay Connector (2WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Relay Connector (4WD): 12M, On RH Fender Apron Horn Switch Connector (2WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Horn Switch Connector (4WD): 131M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Relay II Connector (4WD): 102M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (2WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Ignition Switch Connector (4WD): 128M, Under LH Side Of I/P Illumination Control Switch Connector: 4I, LH Side Of I/P Near Steering Column Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side Of Engine Inhibitor Switch Connector (Auto Trans.): 15E, RH Side of Engine Intermittent Wiper Amplifier Connector (4WD): 4M, RH Corner Of Engine Compartment License Lamp LH Connector (Coupe): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Hatchback): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Sedan): 21B, At License Lamp License Lamp LH Connector (Wagon): 6D, In Rear Of Back Door Page 1963 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics - Before removing air flow meter, remove throttle valve switch. - When removing the air flow meter, extract it vertically, taking care not to bend or damage the plug portion. - Never touch the sensor portion with your finger. - When installing, apply silicone grease to mating face between air flow meter and throttle body to allow heat to escape. 1. Apply battery voltage between terminals (E) (+) and (C) (-). 2. Measure the voltage between terminals (A) (+) and (D) (-). Page 1545 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: Page 413 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment (continued) Page 3098 Electro Injection Unit Inspection & Adjustment Page 3110 Engine Adjustment & E.C.C.S. Operation Check (continued) Page 2477 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation The exhaust gas sensor, which is placed into the exhaust manifold, monitors the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas. The sensor has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The outer surface of the tube is exposed to exhaust gas, and the inner surface to atmosphere. The zirconia of the tube compares the oxygen density of exhaust gas with that of atmosphere, and generates electricity. In order to improve generating power of the zirconia, its tube is coated with platinum. The voltage is approximately 1V in a richer condition of the mixture ratio than the ideal air fuel ratio, while approximately 0V in leaner conditions. The radical change from 1V to 0V occurs at around the ideal mixture ratio. In this way, the exhaust gas sensor detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas and sends the signal of approximately 1V or 0V to the E.C.U. Page 648 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid Type Nissan Brake Fluid or DOT 3 Page 2742 Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments 5 volts reference. GA16: 2WD measured between red wire and ground; 4WD, measured between white wire and ground. EI6 TBI: Measured between white wire and ground. CA16, CA18 DOHC: Measured between L/W wire and ground. Page 4014 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping.